Nokia 9357715 User Manual
UserâÂÂs Guide 9357 715 I ss ue 2 EN Linda1.book Page 1 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
Copyright é Nokia Corporation 2000-2002. All rights re served. Reproduction, transfer, dist ribution or storage of part or all of the cont ents in this document in any form wit hout the prior written permission of Nokia is prohibited. Nokia and Nokia Connecting People are registere d trademarks of Nokia Corporation. Bounce and Triple Pop are trademar ks of Nokia Corporation. Other product and company names mentioned here in may be trademarks or tradenames of their respect ive owners. This product includes software licensed from Symbian Ltd é Symbian Ltd 1998 - 2001. All right s reserved. Symbian OS and all Symbian OS -b ased trademarks and logos are trademarks of Symbian Limited . . Java⢠is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc Part of the software in this product is é Copyright STNC Ltd. 1994-1997. All rights reserved. é 1984-1997 DataViz Inc. All rights rese rved. This software contains portions of the fi le translation library of Conversions Plus, a product of DataViz Inc., 55 Corporate Drive, Trumbull, CT 06611 USA (203) 268-0030. International CorrectSpell⢠English spelling correction system, 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speec h Products N.V. All rights reserved. Reproduction or disas sembly of embodied algorithms or database prohibited. English spelling software developed by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Product s N.V. UK English Concise International Electronic Thesaurus Copyright é 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products N.V. All rights reserved. Reproducti on or disassembly of embodied programs and dat abas es prohibited. Incorporates MPPCî compression from Hi/fn⢠Part of the software in this product is é Copyright AN T Ltd. 1998. All rights reserved. Stac î, LZS î, é1996, Stac, Inc., é1994-1996 Microsoft Corporation. Includes one or more U.S. Patents: No. 4701745, 5016009, 5126739, 5146221, and 5414425. Other patents pending. Incorporates LZSî compression from Hi/fnâ¢. Hi/fn î, LZS î, é1988-98, Hi/fn. Includes one or more U.S. Patents: No. 4701745, 5016009, 5126739, 5146221, and 5414425. Other patents pending. Nokia operates a policy of co ntinuous development. Nokia reser ves the right to make changes and improvement s to any of the products described in this document wit hout prior notice. Under no circumstances shall Noki a be responsible for any loss of data or income or any special, incidental, consequent ial or indirect damages howsoever cause d. The contents of this document are pr ovided "as is". Except as required by app licable law, no warranties of any kind, either express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warrant ies of mer chantability and fitness f or a particular purpose, are made in relat ion to the accuracy, relia bility or conte nts of this docume nt. Nokia r eserves the right to revise thi s document or withdraw it at any t ime without prior notice. Linda1.book Page 2 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
The avai lability of particular product s may vary by regi on. Please check wit h the Nokia dealer near est to you. This product uses certificates for security functionality. More information on Nokia certificates can be acquired from Nokia web pages. DECLARATION OF CONF ORMITY We, NOKIA CORPORATION dec lare under our sole responsibility that the product RAE-5N is in conformity with the provisions of the following Council Directive:1999/5/EC. A copy of the Declarat ion of Conformity can be found f rom http://www.noki a.com/phones/declaration_of_conformi ty/ Linda1.book Page 3 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
Linda1.book Page 4 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
Table of Contents Introduction ............... ......................... ......................... .............. 1 Getting help... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ...... . 3 Facts about your communicator ...... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... .... 5 GSM data t ransmission . ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... . 8 General information .............. ......................... ......................... . 11 Communicator display... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... . 11 Communicator keyboa rd........ ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... . 16 Connectors ..... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... . 20 To charge the bat tery . ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... . 21 Memory card ........... ... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ...... ... . 2 4 Gen eral fe a tu re s. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... . .26 To install s oftware from the CD-ROM ........ ...... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... .... 34 To activa te the infrare d connection ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ...... ... . 35 T o t ran s f er d a ta f rom o t her device s.. ... ... ... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... . .36 Phone .............. ......................... ......................... ......................... . 39 Selection keys ...... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ...... ... . 40 Display indicator s ..... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... .... 41 Linda1.book Page 5 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
To make a call.......... ... ... ....... ... ... ...... ... ... ...... ... .... ...... ... ... ...... ... ... ... .... ... ...... ... ... ...... 42 To answ er a call ......... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ...... ... 45 To mana ge calls ......... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ... 45 Keypad lock ........... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ...... ... ... 46 To change profiles ..... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... ... 47 To view he lp .... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... 48 To us e the menu s.... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... ... 48 Messages ( Menu 1) ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... 50 Call register (Menu 2) ........ ... ...... ... ... ...... ... ... .... ... ... ... ... ... ...... ... ... .... ... ... ... ... ... ...... 53 Settings ( Menu 3)......... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ... 56 Call divert ( Menu 4) ............ ... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ... 62 Infrared (Me nu 5) ......... ... .... ...... ... ... ... ... ... ...... .... ... ...... ... ... ... ... ... ....... ... ... ...... ... ... ... 6 2 SIM ser vices (Men u 6).... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... 63 Desk ........ ......................... ......................... ......................... ......... 65 Main view ..... ... ... ... ... ...... ... .... ...... ... ... ... ... ... ...... .... ... ...... ... ... ... ... ... ....... ... ... ...... ... ... ... 65 Telephone ........... ......................... ......................... ...................... 69 To make a call manually .......... ... ...... ... ... ... ... .... ...... ... ... ...... ... ... ....... ... ... ... ... ... ...... 7 0 To call a num ber in the Tele phone dir ectory .... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ...... ... ... 70 To call a num ber in a rece nt calls list ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... 71 To answ er a call ......... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ...... ... 72 To call and cre ate a voice mailbox ............ ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... 72 Linda1.book Page 6 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
To recor d a call ............. ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... . 73 To make a new call durin g a call......... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ...... ....... ... .... 73 To make con ference calls ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... . 74 To tr ansfer calls ...... ... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... . 76 To answe r a waiting call ........ ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... . 76 To send DTMF tones during a call .... ... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... . 77 Telephone Se ttings ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... .... 77 Flight profile ......... ... ... ... ... ...... ... ... .... ... ... ...... ... ... ... ... ... ....... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ....... ... ... . 91 Contacts ......... ......................... ......................... ......................... . 93 Contacts direct ory ....... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... .... 93 To make a contact ca rd.......... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... .... 94 To open a contact card . ... ... ... ....... ... ... ...... ... ... ... ... ... ....... ... ... ...... ... ... ...... .... ... ...... . 96 To move or copy cont acts from a SIM card .... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ...... . 96 To search for a cont act card ........ ... ...... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... . 96 To change fields in a contact card......... ... ... ... ...... .... ... ...... ... ... ... ... ... ....... ... ... .... 97 To attach a ringing tone ........ ... .... ... ...... ... ... ... ... ... ....... ... ... ... ... ... ...... ... ... .... ... ... ... . 99 To insert a picture........ ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... .... 9 9 To creat e or modify templa tes ............. ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ...... . 100 To store D TMF ton es ............ ...... .... ...... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... . 101 To creat e contact grou ps ....... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... . 102 To creat e a SIM conta ct car d ......... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... .... 104 To send a contac t car d as a business ca rd ............. ... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... .... 105 Linda1.book Page 7 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
To receive a business card ...... ... ...... ... ... ... ... .... ...... ... ... ... ... ... ...... .... ... ... ... ... ...... ... 106 Settings ...... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... 1 0 7 To creat e a n ew contac ts dat abase........... .... ...... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ... 109 Calendar ...................................... ......................... ...................... 111 Calendar e ntries ...... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ... 111 Views ....... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... 118 Icons ........ ....... ... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ..... .1 2 5 Task list s ........ ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... ... 1 26 To sear ch for Calendar entries ........... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... 127 Settings ...... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... 1 2 8 Internet .. ......................... ......................... ......................... ......... 131 To set up your Internet access point ........... ...... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .... ...... ... ... ... ... ... 132 To connect to the World Wide Web.... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ... 141 To open a Web page .... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... 142 To browse t he WWW .......... ... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ... 144 WWW settings ........ ...... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... 147 Cache, Hist ory, and Plu g-ins view ....... ... ....... ...... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ...... ... ... 149 Bookmarks ....... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... 149 WAP ......... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... 151 Java....... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... 156 Linda1.book Page 8 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
Messaging ...... ......................... ......................... ......................... . 157 Messaging cent re......... ... ... ... ...... .... ... ... ... ... ...... ... ... ....... ... ... ... ... ... ...... ... ... ....... ... ... . 158 Fax ........ ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... .... .. . 166 Mail ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... .. . . 170 Short Message Service ........... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... .... 183 Office ......................... ......................... ......................... .............. 189 Word Processor.......... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... . 189 Sheet ...... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... . 194 Present ation viewer ....... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... . 202 File manager ............ ... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... . 204 Extras ......................... ......................... ......................... .............. 213 Clock ....... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... . 213 Calculator.......... .... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... . 215 Control pan el ... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... . 216 Recorder ... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... .... 229 Imaging ..... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... .... 23 1 Cell broadcast ......... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ...... ....... ... .... 234 Fax modem ........... ... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... .... 237 Troubleshooting ......... ......................... ......................... .............. 241 Linda1.book Page 9 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
CARE AND MAINTEN ANCE ....... ......................... ...................... 255 IMPORTANT SAFETY IN FORMATION .... ......................... ......... 257 Glossary .............. ......................... ......................... ...................... 265 Linda1.book Page 10 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
FOR YOUR SAFETY Read these simple guidelines. Breaking the rules may be dangerous or illegal. Further detailed information is gi ven in this manual. Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or da nger. ROAD SAFETY COME S FIRST Donâ t use th e communi cator while driving. INTERFERENCE All wireless phones may get interference, wh ich could affect performance. SWITCH OFF IN HOSPITALS Follow any regulations or rules. Switch the phone off near medical equ ipment. SWITCH OFF IN AI RCRAFT W ireless devices can cause interference in airc ra ft. SWITCH OFF WHEN REFUELL ING DonâÂÂt use the ph one at a refuelling point. DonâÂÂt us e near fuel or ch emicals. SWITCH OFF NEA R BLA STING DonâÂÂt use the phone where blasting is in progress. Observe restrictions, and foll ow any regulations or rules. USE SENSIBLY Use only in the normal position. DonâÂÂt touch the antenna unnec ess arily. QUALI F IED SER V IC E Only qualified perso nnel may install or repair phone equipment. Linda1.book Page 11 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
ACCESS ORIES AND BAT TERIES Use only approved accessories and batteries. Do not connect in compatible products. WATER- RESISTAN CE Yo ur com municator is not wa ter- resi sta nt. K eep it dry. BACKUP CO PIES Remember to make backup copies of all important data. CONN ECTIN G TO OTH ER DE VICE S Whe n conn ecti ng to any other d evic e, read its userâÂÂs gu ide for detailed safety instructions. Do not connect incompatible products. CAL LIN G Clo se the cover and en sure the phone is switched on and in service. Enter th e phone number , including the a rea code, then press . To end a ca ll, press . To answer a call, pr ess . EMERGENCY C ALLS Close the device cover . Ensure the ph one is switched on and in s ervice. Pre ss as ma ny times as n eeded (e.g. to exit a call, to exit a menu, etc.) to clear the display. Enter the emergency number, the n press . Give your location. Do not end th e call until told to do so. Linda1.book Page 12 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
1 Introduction 1. Introduction Congratulations on purchasing the Nokia 9210i Communicator. It is a complete communications tool: it is a wireless phone, messaging device, and a palmtop organiser in one package. Figure 1 Phone Earpiece Front Back Microphone Linda1.book Page 1 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
2 Introduction The Nokia 9210i Com municator consists of two parts: the phone and the communicator interface. The phone is on th e device cover an d th e commu nicator interface is inside the cover, both as shown in Figure s 1 and 2. Figure 2 Both these parts use the same information from the memory of the communicator - they are not separate devices. For e xample, the phone uses the names and phone numbers stored in the Contacts directory of the communicator interface, and the communicator interface uses the phone for voice and data communications, for example, when sen ding and receiving f axes and connecting to the Internet. Tip: The communicator interface has no power on/ off button - it switches itself on when you op en the cover and switches off when you close the cover. The communicator in terface contains many organiser and com munications applications. The large keyboard, command buttons, and display m ake using the applications easy. commu nicator interface Built-i n s peaker Large colour Active Matri x TFT LC D scr een Linda1.book Page 2 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
3 Introduction The phone is de signed for making and answering calls quickly. The com municator looks and operates like oth er Nokia wireless phones, ex cept the earpiece and microphone are at the rear of the device. The phone is switched on and off by pressing the button on th e cover. WARNING: Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohi bited or when it may cause inter ference or danger. Getting help Online H elp The communicator has a help function, which you can access from any application or view. To view hel p, press the key on the communicator inte rface keyboard. You are shown a page of information relevant to the task you are doing. Y ou can also search the help topics for specific subjects and keywor ds. Tip: The key is on the bottom row of the ke yboard. About th e guides in the sales package The Nokia communicator sales package con tains the following guides either in print or as PDF files. ⢠To help you begin to use your communicator, tu rn to the Getting Started Guide supplied in your sales package. It explains the start-up procedure and gives basic information on how to use th e various applications. Linda1.book Page 3 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
4 Introduction ⢠This user â s guide explains in more detail how the Nokia 9210i Communicator operates. â General information â identifies the va rious parts of th e communicator and their fun ctions, as well as the common f eatures of the communicator. The rest of this user â s guide deals with the communicator applications and the phone. There is a short glossary of Internet and w ireless terms and abbreviations at the back of the user â s g uide. ⢠The PC Suite Guide explains the f unctionality of PC Suite for the Nokia 9210i Communicator. With PC Suite you can move, copy, synchronise, back up, and restore data between your communicator an d a compatible PC. ⢠The Software on CD-ROM Guide explains in detail the functionality of the applications found on the CD-ROM that you can install on your communicator. ⢠The Add-on Applications Guide gives a brief introduction of other software available for the Nokia 9210 i Communicator. This guide i s only available in a printed version. ⢠T he Se tt i n g s Che cklis t hel ps you to conne c t your Noki a 921 0i Com mun i c a to r with di ffe ren t kin d s o f w i re less se rvi c e s. The PC Suite Guide and the Software on CD-ROM Guide are both on the CD-ROM under the section â Using th e Nokia 9210i Communicator â . In this user â s guide and the Getting Started Guide , the names of the commands on the display a re in bold and th e settings and options are in italics . Note: If you are s witching from the Nokia 9000 Communicator, the Nokia 9000 i Comm unic ator, t he No kia 91 10 Comm uni cator , or th e Nokia 9 110i Communicator to the Nokia 9210i Communicator, s ee â To transfer data f r om ot h er device s â on p age 3 6 a n d in t h e PC S uite G uide on t he CD- ROM. Linda1.book Page 4 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
5 Introduction Facts about your communicator Network Services The wireless phone described in this guide is approved for use on the GSM 900 / 1800 netw orks. Dualband/triband is a network dependant feature. Check with you r local service provider if you can subscribe to and use this feature. A number of features included in th is guide are called Network Services. These are special services that you arrange through you r wireless service provider. Before you can take advantage of any of these Network Services, you must subscribe to them through your s ervice provider and obtain instructions for their use f rom your service provider. Note: Some networks may not su pport all language-dependent characters a nd/ or services. Check the model number of any char ger before use with this device. T his device is intended for us e when supplied with power from ACP-9 , ACP-12 chargers. Warning: Use only batteries, c hargers and accessories approved by the phone manufacturer for use with this particular phone mo del. The use of any other ty p es may in validate any approval or warranty applying to the phone, and may be dangerous.For availability of approv ed accessories, please check with your dealer.When you disconnect the power cord of any accessory, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord. Linda1.book Page 5 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
6 Introduction Services that need to be subscribed to are typically the short m essage service, Internet, and fax. After y ou have subscribed to the service func tions, you can then activate these functions a s described in this user â s guide. The manual activation commands for various services are not presented in this user â s guide (for example, using the and characters for activating or de activating services). The Nokia 9210i Communicator, nevertheless, is capable of handling commands given in that form. For these commands, please consul t with your service provider s. Because the number of special serv ices depends on what services are available in your home network, it is, unfortunately, impossible to provide a comprehensive list of the services a nd settings you need in this us er â s guide. Theref ore, this user â s guide gives general information about additional services. Please contact your network operator for further information about the availability an d th e details of services in your h ome network. Tip: Write the information you obtain f rom your service provider down on the Settings Checklist for futur e refer enc e . If a service requ ires separate phone numbers or specific settings, they must be stored in the settings of the communicator. For exam ple: Sending and receiving short messages requires that this service is su pported by the network you are using and activated f or your SIM card, and that the ph one number of the message ce ntre is stored in the settin gs of the SMS application. Internet access requires that data service is supported by the network you are using and activated for your SIM card. I n addition, you must have obtaine d an Internet access point from an Internet service pr ovider. Stickers on the sales package The stickers contain important information f or service and customer support purposes. Keep these stickers in a safe and secure place. Linda1.book Page 6 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
7 Introduction Attach the sticker to the C lub Nokia Invitation Card , if supplied in th e sales package. Access codes The Nokia 9210i Com municator uses several access codes to protect against unauthorised use of you r communicator and SIM card. The access codes you need most o ft en are: ⢠the lock code to lock up your communicator, and ⢠the PIN code , which is provided w ith the SIM card. IMPO RTA NT : The default lock code is 1234 5 . For security re asons, it is imperative that you change the lock code. Keep the code secret and in a safe place, separate from th e communicator. For more information on changing access codes, see section â Securityâ on page 216. You can change access codes that are used by both the phone and the communicator interface via either of them, provided that the code can be chan ged. For further details on access codes, see â Securityâ on page 216. The Internet applications of the communicator u se passwords and user names to protect against unauthorised use of the Internet and its services. These passwords are changed in the settings of the Internet applications. Linda1.book Page 7 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
8 Introduction Contact in formatio n Tip: Yo u can s ynch ronis e the contact information on your communicator with a corresponding application on a compatible PC . See the PC Suite Guide on the CD- ROM for details. All contact infor mation that you store in th e Contacts application, such as names, addresses, and ph one numbers, goes into the Contacts directory. T he phone, the communicator interface, and each of the applications have their own views of the Contacts directory. T he information shown depends on the infor mation the selected application can use. For example, when you a re making a call via the phone, you can view the name and phone number(s) of th e contact. Possible f ax numbers, e-mail addresses, job titles, and so on, are n ot shown. GSM dat a tran smis sion The Nokia 9210i Communicator employs the data transmission capa bilities of the GSM network to send faxes, sh ort messages, and e-mail, and to e stablish connections with remote computers. Wireless data connections can be made from most locations where your phone operates. However, it is recommended that you move th e communicator to a location where the strongest possible wireless signal can be obtained. When the signal is strong, data transmission is efficient. In general, you should not expect the same performance from wireless data communications as from landline communications, due to the inherent characteristics of the wir eless environment. The following fa ctors may impair wireless connections: Nois e Radio interference f rom electronic appliances and equ ipment, as well as f rom other phones will a ffect the qu ality of wireless data tran smission. Linda1.book Page 8 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
9 Introduction Cell handover As the phone user moves from one n etwork cell to another, the sign al strength of the channel drops and the wireless telephone e xchange may handover the user to a different cell and f requency, where the signal is stronger. A cell handover may also occur when the user is stationary, due to varying wireless traffic loads. Such handover may cause slight de lays in the transmission. Elect rostati c dis cha rge A discharge of static electricity from a finger or a conductor may cause erroneous functions in electronic devices. T he discharge may result in distorted display and unstable software operation. Wireless connections may become unreliable, data may become corrupted, and the transm ission h alted. In th is ca se you need to end the existing call (if any), close the cover and switch off the ph one (if on) and remove the battery. Then replace the battery and establish a new wireless connection. Dead spots and dro pou ts Dead spots are areas where radio signals ca n not be received. Dropouts occ u r when the phone user passes through an area where the radio signal is blocked or reduced by geographical features or large structures. Signa l impai rment Distance and obstacles can cause signals to become ou t-of-phase. They can also cause reflected signals. Both situations result in a loss of signal str ength. Linda1.book Page 9 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
10 Introduction Low si gna l st re n gt h Due to either distance or obstacles, the radio signal strength from a cell site may not be strong or stable e nough to provide a r eliable data connection for communication. Therefore, to ensure the best possible com munication, remember the following points: ⢠The data connection works best when the communicator is in a stationary position. Attempting wireless data communication while in a moving vehicle is not recommended. Fax transmission is more easily impaired th an data or short message transmis sion. ⢠Do not place the communicator on a metal surface. ⢠Check th at the signal strength on the communicator display is sufficient. Moving the communicator within a room, especially towards a window, may result in a s tronger signal. If s ignals are not strong enough to support a voice call, data connection should not be attem pted until you can f ind a location with better signal reception. Note: When the antenna is up, the sign al is stronger. Linda1.book Page 10 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
11 General information 2. General information This chapter explains how the communicator operates and how to supply power to the communicator. For information on f irst start-up and setup of your communicator, see the Getting Started Guide. Communicator display Figure 3 The communicator interface is turn ed on by opening th e cover. The application that was active the last tim e the communicator was used is shown on the display. When you close the cover, th e communicator interface turns off its display and saves all da ta. Scroll bar Commands Command buttons Search field Indicator area Name and icon of application Menu bar Linda1.book Page 11 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
12 General information Tip: When a comman d is dimmed, it cannot be used. The commands always correspond to th e comman d bu ttons, as shown in Figu re 3. The applications are run in the m iddle of the di splay. The indicators show application and system-related inform ation. To move around a selected f rame and select items, u se the Arrows key at the lower right-hand corner of t he keyboard. Where there is a search field at the bottom of th e display, you can search for items by using the keyboard to e nter text in to the search field. Figure 4 If there is more than one frame in the view, the selected one is always high lighted. You can move fr om one frame to another by pressing th e Tabulator key. S ee Figure 4. This item is selected. Details of item. The left hand frame is highlighted. Press the Tab key to highlight the right f rame. . The commands that you can apply. Linda1.book Page 12 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
13 General information Dialogs and pages Figure 5 An example of a dialog which contains several pages is shown in Figure 5. Indicator s The application icon a nd application name in the in dicator area display the application you are in at the momen t, as shown below. The icons that appear on the Inbox/O utbox indicator rows change according to the application and current situation. The battery level and signal s trength indicators are the same as shown on the phone display when the phone is on. This is a page. This is a dialog. Use the A rrows key to move within a page. Another page. To go to it, press the Menu k ey. Linda1.book Page 13 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
14 General information Call status - You have a voice call, and the handsfree loudspeaker and microphone are on. - A voice call with the h andsfree off. The lou dspeaker and microphone are muted. - An open data connection, see the Inter net chapter on page 131. - The communicator is receiving or sending a fax. - The communicator is trying to establish an infrared connection. - An infrared connection has been established. - The infrared connection is obstructed. - The communicator is connected to a PC. - The communicator is connected to a PC via cable. - The communicator is being u sed as a fax modem. - The communicator is in a profile, in this case in the â Meetingâ profile. See â T elephone Settings â on page 77. Application icon Application name Inbox/Outbox Signal strength and bat tery level Tim e Linda1.book Page 14 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
15 General information - Time. You can adjust time in the Clock application. See page 2 13. Inbox/Out box - The inbox i ndicator informs you that you have received a f ax, short message, or mail. - Th e document Outbox contains u nsent m essages. See â Outboxâ on page 161. Battery level - The battery is low and you should recharge it. - The battery is charging. The bar scrolls until the battery is f ully charged. The outlet plug icon indicates that the communicator is connected to an external power source. - The battery is fully charged. All the four b ars are displayed. Signal str ength - The communicator is con nected to a wireless network. When all the f our bars are shown, the wireless signal reception is good. If the signal is weak, make sure the antenna is up. Y ou can a lso try to improve the reception by moving the communicator slightly or by usi ng it in the handsfree m ode. - The phone is on, but it is outside network coverage. - The phone is off. You cannot make or re ceive calls, and you cannot receive messages with any of the communications applications (SMS, data, fax, or mail). Linda1.book Page 15 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
16 General information Communicator keyboard Figure 6 In addition to the norma l character an d n umber keys, the keyboard h as a n umber of special keys, as shown i n Figure 6. Applicati on bu tton s The buttons at the top of the keyboard start the correspon ding applications or open application groups. The buttons are: De sk , Tele pho ne , Mes saging , Internet , Con tac ts , Cal e nda r , Offi ce and Extras . To us e the app lication s When the cover is opened, the application th at was active th e last t ime the communicator was used, is shown on the display. Linda1.book Page 16 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
17 General information To switch to another app lication or application group, press the corresponding application button. You can even do this during a ca ll. You need not exit an application before starting another. All inactive applications remain in the background until you activate them aga in. Note: When you open the WWW appli cation, all other applications are closed to re ser ve mem o ry fo r WWW . To send or receive calls or messages with any of the communications applications, remember that the phone m ust be switched on an d in a service area with adequate wireless signal strength. Note: Information need not be specifically saved. When you press Cl ose , swi tch to another application, or close th e device cover, the Nokia 9210i Communicator sa ves all data . To cr eate a ke ybo ard shor tcut t o a pre ferr ed l ink or appli catio n Some applications buttons like Office, Desk, and Extras do not open applications directly. However, you can specify an application in an application group as the preferred application or a link on Desk as the preferred link and access it directly from the keyboard. Y ou can open a pr eferred application by clickin g Ctrl the application button. Example: If you mak e the Word Processor applica tion preferre d inside the Office application group, you can press Ctrl Office within any application to open Word Processor. To make an application preferred, open an application group (such as Office), press the Menu key, and select Tools > Preferred ap plication . Select the application from the list. See the e xample in the column adjacent to this paragraph. To make a link preferred, open Desk, pr ess the Menu key and select Tools > Preferred link⦠Select th e link from the list . Linda1.book Page 17 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
18 General information Escape (Esc) To cancel an action, y ou can eith er press the Esc key or Cance l . Pr essing the E sc key also cancels and dismisses a dialog, and dismisses an information note. Tabulator or Tab You can use the Tab (Tabulator) key to move from one frame to another. When writing or editing documents, the T ab key moves th e cursor to the n ext tab stop. Shi ft The Shift key is u sed together wi th letter keys to in sert capital letters and u sed together with number keys to insert special ch aracters. The Shift key does not need to be held down when pressing a ke y: pressing first Shift and then a le tter or number key generates an uppercase or special ch aracter. In combination with Control key and a particular letter key the Shift key generates shortcut commands. See â Shortcutsâ on page 2 7. In writing and editing text, the Shift key an d the Arrows key can be used to select text, see â Shortcutsâ on page 27 . Control (Ctrl) Pressed together with other keys on the keyboard, the control key generates shortcut commands which can be used i n viewing and writin g text. See â Sh ortcutsâ on page 27. Linda1.book Page 18 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
19 General information Character (Chr) Tip: You can us e th e character key with other keys to zoom th e view and activate or deactivate infrared. Press the character key to open a character table where you can select special characters. Press th e chara cter key together with characters and commands that are shown in green colour on the keyboard to access them. Press the character key, keep it pressed dow n and tap a letter key to access accented and oth er special letters. Help ( ) For online help at any time, press the key on the communicator keyboard. For more information, see â Online Help â on page 3. Men u Tip: Using th e menu key, the Zoom option is sometimes available. It allows you to m agnify the view on display. Pressing the Menu ke y reveals options. The option s available depend on the application you are in. Use th e Arrows key to move to the desired option and press Select . The chosen option only affects the item th at is currently selected, open, or being sent. The Menu may also contain the gen eric option Settings . Arrows k ey Tip: In the WWW browser application, use the Arrows key to move a pointer around the display. See page 146. The Arrows key can be used to move the cu rsor or selected fr ame. Linda1.book Page 19 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
20 General information Ente r When the cursor is shown, pressing Enter moves th e cursor to the begin ning of the next text line or adds a new line. Enter can also be u sed to open folders , applications, and docu ments. When a command is underlined, you can press Enter instead of the command button. When information notes are shown, press Enter instead of OK . In options and settin gs, wh en a value c a n be toggled, you m ay press Enter instead of Change . Conn ectors The Nokia 9210i Comm unicator c an be connected to a variety of devices. See Figure 7. Figure 7 Infrared connection Charger connection RS232 adapter cable DLR-2L or headset HDC-8L connection Linda1.book Page 20 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
21 General information Use the infrared port for connecting to a c ompatible PC, printer, digital ca mera, or another communicator. To charge the ba ttery Note: See important safety information on battery u sage on page 22. Tip: To check the current battery level, see the battery indicator on the communicator or phone display. 1 Connect the charger cable to the bottom of the communicator, as shown in Figure 8. Figure 8 2 Connect the charger to the proper voltage AC wall outlet. While charging is in progress, the batter y level indicator scrolls on the ph one display. 3 When the battery is f ully charged, the bars stop scrolling and four bars are displayed. You may now remove th e charger plug f rom the communicator. Note: You can use all th e features of the communicator during charging. Linda1.book Page 21 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
22 General information When the battery leve l is low and only a few minute s of operation time remain, a warning tone will s ound, and the me ssage BATTERY IS L OW will be repeat ed at regular intervals on the phone display. When the charge le vel becomes too low for operation, the RECHARGE BATTER Y message will be displayed, accompanied by a warning tone. If you do not c onnect the communicator to a charger, the communicator switches itself off. Note: When you connect a communicator with a fully dis charged battery to a charger, it will take 3 0-60 seconds before th e CHARGING message appears on the display an d the battery indicator bar starts scr olling. After that, it may take 10-30 seconds before you can switch the phone on. Battery informatio n Tip: R e a d t h i s s e c t i o n f o r information on how to prolong the lif e of your battery. Use the battery only for its intended purpose. Never use any char ger or battery which is dam aged. Do not short-circuit the battery. Accidental short- circu iting can occur when a metallic object (coin, clip or pen) causes dir ect connection of the and - terminals of the battery (m etal strips on bottom of th e battery) for example wh en you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purs e. Short- circuiting the te rminals may damage th e battery or th e connecting object. Leaving the battery in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in summer or winter conditions, will reduce the capacity and lif etime of the battery. Always try to keep the battery between 15 ð C and 25 ð C (59 ð F and 77 ð F). A communicator with a hot or cold battery may temporarily not work, even when the bat tery is fully charged. Batteries' performance is particularly limited in temperatures well below freezing. Linda1.book Page 22 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
23 General information Do not dispose of batteries in a fire ! Dispose of batteries according to local regulations (e. g. recycling). Do not dispose as household was te. Note that a new battery â s full performance is achie ved only after two or three complete charge and discharge cycles! The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times but it will eventually wear out. When the operating tim e (talk-time an d stan dby time) is n oticeably shorter than normal, it is time to buy a new battery. Use only batteries approved by the com municator manufacturer and recharge your battery only with the charger s approved by the manufacturer . Unplug the charger when not in use. Do n ot leave the battery connected to a charger for longer than a week, since overcharging may shorten its lif etime. If lef t unused a fully charged battery will discharge itself over tim e. Temperature extremes can affect the ability o f your battery to charge. Battery operation time is a ffected by the following: whether both t he phone and the communicator interface are on, radio signal stren gth, various phone settings, and the length of the screen blank er period. It is always recommended to keep a charged battery in th e communicator. Keeping the battery charged maximises the lifetime of the backup battery supplying power to the real-time clock of the communicator. In case the backup battery is drained, it will be automatically char ged the next time a charged battery is reconnected to the communicator. Always close the device cover before removing the battery. C losing the cover will save all data. Linda1.book Page 23 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
24 General information Note: The battery does n ot fit into place if th e SIM card is not correctly installed. Do not force the battery into place! Che ck that you have inserted the SIM car d as described in th e Getting Started Guide. If the SIM card is incorrectly in stalled, remove it by pulling it out of the slot, and insert it again. Memory card Tip: To protect the memor y card wi th a password, see â To lock a memor y card â on page 210. You can us e a memory card to ma nage you r docum ents, c ontac ts datab ases , applications, backups, and so on. Use the items on the memory card in the same way as corresponding items on the communicator. You can, for example, install an d remove software to and from the memory card with the Install/Remove software application, and send messages to contacts in th e contacts dir ectory of the memory c ard. Note: Do not r emove the memory card in the middle of a n operation. Note : If you want to use a Nokia 92 10 Com munica tor â s me mor y card in you r Nokia 92 10i Com munica tor, you must fi rst form at the card. Not e that formatting deletes all information from the mem ory card. To format the memory card, open the File m anager application in Off ice and press t he Menu key. Select Memory card > Format memory card ⦠, and press Forma t. How ever , you can u se a N okia 9210 Commun ica tor â s memor y card in your Nokia 9210i C ommunicator temporarily for copying files between the memory ca rd and th e device. If you do so , resta rt your Communicator after inserting the original memory car d by removing the battery and replacing it again. General_information_I ss3.doc Page 24 Friday, Octob er 18, 2002 5:37 P M
25 General information To insert a memory card 1 Close the device cover and make sure that the phone is switched off. If it is on, press . 2 Open the hatch at the back of the communicator, usin g a minimum of two fingers - one finger on each side of th e hatch. 3 Slide the m emory card under th e memory card h older as shown in Figure 9. Make sure that the gold contacts of the card are facing dow n. Figure 9 4 When you have secured th e card in place, close the hatch. WARNING: Keep all mem ory cards out of the reach of small children. General_information_I ss3.doc Page 25 Friday, Octob er 18, 2002 5:37 P M
26 General information General fe atures To select several items at o nce Where multi-selection is available, you can select s everal items at once. The selected items are highlighted. The commands you u se affect all the selected items. Multi-selection works in most lists. To select items one by one, scroll to the item and press and hold down Ctrl. While pressing down Ctrl, scroll to each item you want to select and press the space bar . To select a larger set of consecutive items, paint the items by pressing and holding Shift using th e ⧠and ⨠arro ws on the Ar ro ws key. Multi-selection is cleared when you press the Arrows key. Special characters The character key Chr on th e communicator keyboard is u sed to create characters that are not included on the keyboard. T he character key can always be u sed when you are able to enter characters from the keyboard. Note: Some special characters may get distorted when sent out of your communicator. This happens, for example, with mail or sh ort messages, and is because of differences in ne twork protocols. To insert special characters from the character table 1 Press and release the Chr key. A dialog op ens. 2 Press the Menu key to select the page with the character you want to i nsert. 3 Select the special character or characters, then press Inser t . General_information_I ss3.doc Page 26 Friday, Octob er 18, 2002 5:37 P M
27 General information To insert special characters from the keyboard There are two ways to in sert special characters directly f rom the keyboard. To insert characters printed on the keys in green , press and hold the Chr key and simultaneously press a key with a special character printed in green. To generate special char acters by using certain unmarked keys, for example, â aâ and â eâ , do as follows: 1 Press and hold th e Chr key a nd simultaneously press a letter key. T he first special character matching the letter key is displayed. 2 Continue to ho ld down the Ch r key and press the letter key again. The second special character is shown in place of the first one, and so on , until the first character is shown again. Press Shift or the Caps lock key to change the case of the special character. Shortcuts Tip: Many sho rtc uts ar e also displayed next to menu commands in applications. There are severa l shortcuts you can use in the docu ment applications. The shortcuts var y depending on the application used. The following table lists some of the available shortcuts: Shortcut Function Ctrl a Ctrl c Ctrl x Ctrl v Ctrl z Selects all Copies selected text Cuts selected text Pastes selected text Undoes (the last action) General_information_I ss3.doc Page 27 Friday, Octob er 18, 2002 5:37 P M
28 General information Note: For information on the shortcuts available for the WWW application, see the Internet section of this guide . Ctrl b Ctrl i Ctrl u Applies bold Applies italics Applies underlining Ctrl t Ctrl d Full screen mode (if available) Deletes files, messages , shortcuts and other items. Ctrl p Print or Properties Ctrl n Ctrl o Ctrl e Cre ate s a ne w fil e Open Close Ctrl s Ctrl Shift s Save Save as Chr left/right arrow (on Arrows key) Moves the cursor to the beginning or end of th e line Chr up/down arrow (on Arrows key) Moves up or down a page Chr Ctrl up/down arrow (on A rrows key) Moves to start or end of document Shift Ctrl lef t/right arrow (on Arrows key) Selects the pr evious or next wor d Shift right/left/up/do wn arrow (on Arrows key) Selects one text character or line Shift Chr up/down arrow (on Arrows key) Selects text, page by page, inside a docu ment Shortcut Function General_information_I ss3.doc Page 28 Friday, Octob er 18, 2002 5:37 P M
29 General information To save files When you close a n ew file for th e first time , or want to save it, you will be asked to enter a name for the file and to identify a f older in which it should be saved. Figure 10 The following commands becom e available in th e dialog: OK - Confirms the name of the docu ment and sav es the document. Brows e - Opens a dialog in wh ich you can browse for a location wher e you save your file. Change f ormat - Opens a list of formats. You can now change the format of the document being saved. Cancel - No saving is done and the dialog is closed. Note: If you want to quit the applica tion, but you do not want to save the file, press the Menu key and select File > Discard changes , then close the file. General_information_I ss3.doc Page 29 Friday, Octob er 18, 2002 5:37 P M
30 General information To send docu ments In addition to sending messages in the Messagin g application, you can also send documents out of the communicator in the applications where th e Send function is available on the Me nu list. As a f ax - You can send the docume nt a s a f ax. As a m ail - Y ou can send the document as a mail message. As a sh ort me ssage - You c an se nd the d ocum ent as a s hort mess age. Via infra red - Yo u ca n se nd th e do cume nt via inf rare d. Note: When you open a document, the document is opened in the appropriate editor or vie wer. The commands vary according to th e editor/viewer . To search for text You can s earch for text strings in the applications wh ere this function is ava ilable on the Menu list. 1 Press the Menu key and select Edit > Find ⦠. A dialog opens. 2 Ty pe the text string in the search field and press Find . 3 Once a text string match is found, it is highlighted. To find out i f there ar e more of the sa me text strings in the docume nt, press Find next . 4 To refin e th e sea rch, pre ss Option s . A dialog opens where you ca n define options of Case sen sitive or Mat ch whole word . To repl ace text 1 Press the Menu key, and select Edit > Find ⦠. General_information_I ss3.doc Page 30 Friday, Octob er 18, 2002 5:37 P M
31 General information Press Re place . 2 Type the text string to be re placed in the Find: field and the text you wan t to replace it with in Replace with: field. 3 For more search and replace options press Options . In the Find options dialog you can select a case sensitive search or a search only matching whole words and not parts of a word. You ca n also choose to re place all occurrences of a text in the docume nt without further confirmation. Tip: Replace all is available only if you have selected Yes in the Re place all dialog. 4 Press Re place or R eplace all . To check spelling Note: You can spell check only English text and words. You can check words and text for spelling in the applications where Spell check ⦠is available on the Menu list. To be able to use this function, you first need to install the Spell checker from the CD- ROM found in the sa les package of y our communicator. For details, see â To install software from the CD-ROM â on page 34. Tip: You can se lect individual words to spell check. Otherwise the whole text is searched and spell checked. 1 Press the Menu ke y and select Tools > Spell chec k ⦠. If th e Spell checker comes across a word it does not r ecognise, a dialog opens. 2 You can type in the cor rection in the correction f ield. Or, move to the Suggestions field and press the T ab or Enter keys to open a list of suggestions. 3 Select a word from the list of suggestions, then press Replace to accept the correction or suggestion. 4 If during step 2 you want to add an unrecognised word to the diction ary, press Add . General_information_I ss3.doc Page 31 Friday, Octob er 18, 2002 5:37 P M
32 General information To print You can print various items, such as documents, pictures, faxes, mails, and short mess ages . Refer to the user â s guide of th e printer for detailed safety instructions on the printing device. To view or modify the page s etup, press the Menu key an d select Fil e > Pr inting > Page set up ⦠To preview the document before printing it, press the Menu key and select File > Printi ng > Prin t preview To print a document or a f ile, 1 Press the Menu key and select File > Printing > Pri nt ⦠. A note appears, showing the print rang e, connection type, and printer used. 2 Press Print . A di alog opens. To change the printing options, press Opti ons . 3 To pr eview what you are about to print, press Pr int pr evie w . A dialog opens. To define page setup, press Page setup . Figure 11 General_information_I ss3.doc Page 32 Friday, Octob er 18, 2002 5:37 P M
33 General information When printing via infr ared, make sure that the infrared port of th e communicator faces the infrared por t of the printe r. Keep the inf rared connection clea r. If the connection is obstructed for too long, f or example, if something is moved between the infrared sensors or the communicator is moved, printing is in terrupted. For details on infrared connection, see page 35 . Log Log contains information about the communication history of your communicator. The log shows all, or certain types of com munication events in chronological or der. With log files you can monitor your communications, use the information to create or complete contact cards, or reply directly to the sender in the log. Tip: The shortcut to open the log is Sh ift Ctrl L. Figure 12 Tip: To cha nge the categories Date and time an d Duration to Subje ct and Status , press < and > on the Arrows key. To access the log You can access the log from the Menu of several applications. Press the Menu key and select Tools > Log . To make use of an individual communication event 1 Choose a log event and press Use . T he command buttons change. General_information_I ss3.doc Page 33 Friday, Octob er 18, 2002 5:37 P M
34 General information Tip: A communication type can have on e of the following deliver y statuses: pending , de livered , failed , sent , no t sent , a nd scheduled . 2 You can now do the following: send a fax or short message to the contact, call the contact, or add the contact to your Contacts direc tory. Check the command buttons for available option s. To vi ew only certai n comm unicati on type s 1 Press Filte r by type to choose a com munication type you want to view . Press Filter by di rection to choose whether you want to vie w communications originated by you or by the remote par ty. 2 Se lect from the options. 3 Press OK . To erase the conten ts of the lo g Log events remain in the log database for only a set number of days after which they are automatically erase d to free memory on your communica tor. To redefi ne the number of d ays, press th e Menu ke y and select Tools > Log durat ion ⦠. 1 To erase some or all the contents of the log, press the Menu key and select F ile > Clear log ⦠. 2 Ty pe in the date. All log events w ith an earlier date w ill be removed from the log. 3 Press Clear . To install software f rom th e CD-ROM The applications and files on th e communicator â s CD-ROM ar e ready to be insta lled or moved to the com municator. Proceed with installation as fo llows: 1 Ensure that you have installed PC Suite on your com puter. You can find this program on the CD- ROM in the sales package. General_information_I ss3.doc Page 34 Friday, Octob er 18, 2002 5:37 P M
35 General information Tip: For more information about PC Suite, see the PC Suite Guide on the CD-RO M. 2 Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of your compute r. 3 Either: Connect your communicator to your computer using the adapter cable supplied in the sales package. Or: Prepare the communicator an d the computer for an in frared connection. For more information , see â To activate the infra red connection â on page 35. 4 If the CD-ROM user interface does n ot open automatically, double-click the file â Noki a9210i. exeâ in the CD-ROM f ile structure. 5 Select a program you want to install from the CD-ROM user interface and click â In stal lâ . Tip: See the Add on Applications Guide for information on other software available f or your communicator. Note: Remember to in stall applications in the same language as your communicator. Use a memory card to gain more space for the different applications and files on the CD-ROM. Note: For information on the installable applications, see the Sof tware on CD- ROM Guide on th e CD-ROM. To acti vate th e infr ared conn ection Tip: To activate the infrared, you can also press the Menu key and select Tools > Receive via i nfrared . 1 Make sure that the infrared por t of the com municator faces the in frared port of the other device. 2 To activate the infrared connection, press Chr (the key with the infrared symbol; this key is on the right-hand side of the keyboard, next to the Enter key). 3 To end the infrared connection, press Ch r again. General_information_I ss3.doc Page 35 Friday, Octob er 18, 2002 5:37 P M
36 General information To transfe r data from other devices IMPO RTA NT! Do NOT us e the method desc ribed in section â To ba ck up and restore data to and from a memory car d â on page 209 to restore data you have backe d up with Noki a 921 0 Co mmun icato r to Noki a 92 10i Communicator. Use PC Suite instead. Nokia 9110/9110i Commun icator (Data mover) Data mover transfer s data from the Nokia 9110 /9110i Commu nicator to the Nokia 9210 /9210 i Commu nica tor. Via infr ared you ca n t ransf er co ntac t card s, cale ndar events, notes, and Inter net access settings, for example. Y ou can eith er choose to transfer all data or define the cat egories of dat a that you want to tr ansfer. Note: You cannot tr ansfer your WWW or WAP bookmarks to the Nokia 9210i Communicator with Data m over. To open Data mover, p ress the Extras application button, scroll with th e Arrows key, and select Da ta mover. To transfer all data 1 I n the main view, press Transfer no w . 2 Activate the infrared connection on the Nokia 91 10/9110i Communicator. The transfer begins. All items a re transferred to the Nokia 9210i Com municator. To transfer selected data Tip: Alternatively, press the Menu key an d select Tools > Options ⦠. 1 I n the main view, press Op tion s . A dialog with four pages opens. General_information_I ss3.doc Page 36 Friday, Octob er 18, 2002 5:37 P M
37 General information 2 On each page, press Chan ge to select or deselect the data categories to transfer to the Nokia 9210i Communicator. To select or deselect a ll items on a pa ge, press Select al l or Unselect all . Wh en you are ready, pre ss Done . . 3 In the main view, press Tran sfe r no w . Activate the infrared connection on the Nokia 9110/9110i Com municator. The transfer begins. A ll items are tran sferred to the Nokia 9210i Commu nicator. 4 When the transfer is comple te, press OK to close the application. 5 If the transfer f ails, a dialog is displayed. Press OK to try again . Note: You ca n cancel th e transfer pr ocess at a ny stage when the Cancel command button is available. Compatible N okia p hones, person al orga nisers, and PC s Tip: To transf er data from other personal organisers, first synchronise data between the device a nd the PC application and then synchronise data between the PC application and the Nokia 9210i application. To transfer data from the Nokia 5100/6100/7100/8200/8800/9110/9110 i mobile phone, your laptop or desktop PC, or the PalmPilot personal organiser to your Nokia 9210i Communicator, see the PC Suite gu ide on the s ales package CD-ROM. Note: To transfer contacts f rom your old SIM card to your Nokia 9 210i Comm unica tor, see â To move or copy contacts from a SIM cardâ on page 96. General_information_I ss3.doc Page 37 Friday, Octob er 18, 2002 5:37 P M
38 General information General_information_I ss3.doc Page 38 Friday, Octob er 18, 2002 5:37 P M
39 Phone 3. Phone Figure 13 With the cover ph one you can make, r eceive, and manage calls, send and receive short messages, s earch for phone n umbers, change profiles an d define many settings. For mo re complicated task s like sending long DTMF sequences or modifying phone settings, use th e Telephone application . See the T elephone chapter, starting on page 69. Phone Earp ie ce Front Back Microphone Linda1.book Page 39 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
40 Phone Selection keys When operating th e phone, press keys one at a time. The phone keypad is n ot functional when the cover of the com municator is open. Switches the phone on and off. Switches between profiles. See â Profile settings â on page 78. Scroll through men us, submenus or settings. If there are no active calls, you can use the scroll keys to browse t hrough the phone book. When a call is active, you can adjust the volume level by pressing the scroll keys. Tip: To call your voice mailbox, press and hold . Dials a phone number and answers a call. Se nds the ongoing call to hold if pressed du ring a call. In the stan dby mode shows the list of the m ost recently dialled num bers. Ends any active call, cancels a dialled call, or clears the display. 0.. .9 The nu mber and alphabet ke ys. Tip: If you have subscribed to two phone li nes , y o u can s w it c h between th em by pressing and holding . Used for crea ting fu nctions. The function of these two se lection keys depends on the text shown on the bottom of the display. See Figure 14. Note: Hold the phone as you would any other mobile phone with the antenna pointed up and over your shoulder. Note: As with any other ra dio transmitting device, do n ot touch the antenna unnecessarily when the phone is switched on. Contact with the antenna affects call quality and may cause th e phone to ope rate at a higher power level than otherwise needed. Linda1.book Page 40 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
41 Phone Warning: Do not switch the phone on when w ireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interferen ce or danger. To use the selection keys Figure 14 Example: Pressing the selection key under the text Menu gains access to the menu fu ncti o n s. Selection keys are the ke ys located just be low the right and left corners of the cover display. Commands on the display vary according to the situation and previous selections. Tip: A press of th e key will return the di splay to stand-by mode. Often you must confirm th e selection by pressing OK . If ava i la ble, yo u can us e Back comm and to re turn to the previou s menu level w ithout making a ny ch anges. Display indicator s The display indicators inform you about the current operation of the ph one. The indicators described below are shown when the ph one is ready for us e, with no characters entered on the display. NETWORK NAME or LOGO - T he wireless network you are currently using. Linda1.book Page 41 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
42 Phone and bar - The current signal strength at your location. The more bars visible, the stronger the s igna l . and bar - Battery charge level. The more bars vis ible, the more charge there is in the battery. - The phone keypad is locked or the lock code is active. - The phone will not r ing to notify you of an incoming call. - You have received one or several new voice messages. - You have received one or several new short messages. - You have received on e or several n ew faxes. - Infrared transmission is active. - Call diverting is ac tive. To make a call To make and receive calls, ⢠the ph one must be switched on, ⢠the com municator must have a valid SIM card fitted, and ⢠you m ust be located in a service area of the wireless networ k. Tip: When a ca ll is active, you can use the and keys to lower or raise the volume level of the earpiece. 1 Key in the area code and the phone numbe r of the per son you wish to call. If you make a mistake, you can remove the digits one at a time by pressing Clear repeatedly. To clear the whole display, press and hold Clea r . 2 Pres s to di al the phone n umber. 3 To en d the call, pre ss . Note: The microphone and earpiece are on the rear of the device. Linda1.book Page 42 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
43 Phone Internat ional calls When making international calls, start by pressing twice qu ickly. The international call character â â appears on the display, which informs the network centre to select the in ternational dialling prefix. After this you ca n enter the country or region code, area code and phone number. Note: Calls described here as international may in some cas es be made between regions of the same nation. To search for phone numbers You can retrieve phone numbers from memory by the name with which the phone number was stored. For more information, see â To call a number in the Telep hone directory â on page 7 0. Tip: To choose which memor y to u se , pre ss Names , scroll to Options and press Select tw ice. Scroll to choose Devic e , SIM card , o r a contacts database you have created and press Select . 1 Press Names . 2 Scroll to Search and press Select . 3 Key in the name of the person whom you want to call, or the f irst letter(s) of the name. 4 Press Search . The name closest to th e keyed characters will appear. 5 If the name fou nd was not the one you searched for, scroll through the n ames with and until you reach the correct one. 6 Press De tai ls to view the details of the highlighted name, or press to call the person. If th e person has several numbers, scr oll the selection frame onto the one you w ant and press . Linda1.book Page 43 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
44 Phone To speed dial Speed dialling is a handy way to call frequently-used phone numbers. You can define up to eigh t speed dial numbers in th e communicator memory. For information on how to set speed dials, see page 81. There a re two wa ys to speed dial: Tip: Pressing a nd holding dials your voice mailbox n umber. ⢠Press and hold the nu mber of the speed dial location where you have stored the phone number. For this meth od to work, you mu st enable speed dialling, see â Call settings (3-1) â on page 56. Example: Press 2 if the speed dial location for the phone number is 2. ⢠Key in the n umber of the speed dial location where you have stored the phone number. Press . T he phone w ill display the phone number briefly, and then dial it. Note: Speed dialling is not possible during a call. To call service numbers Your service provider may have stored service numbers on your SIM card. For more information, see â To call a number in the Teleph one directory â on page 70. 1 Press Names . 2 Scroll to Se rvi ce N os. and press Se lect . 3 Scroll to the service number and press to call the num ber. To send DTMF to nes If you need to send long DTMF sequences, it is more convenient to send them via the communicator interfac e, se e â To send DTMF tones durin g a c all â on page 77. Linda1.book Page 44 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
45 Phone Tip: For an explanation of DTMF tones, see the Glossary on page 266 . 1 Make the call to the desired phone nu mber. 2 Key in the digits you want to send as DTMF tones. The digits a re sent one by one to the network. To answer a call Tip: To change you r ringi ng tone, see â T o attach a ringing to ne â on page 99. When you receive a call, the phone gives a ringing tone and the t ext Call fla shes on the display. If silent-profile is active, only the keypad and display light will flash. If the ca ller can be identified, the call er â s name or phone nu mber, and th e text Calling , will be displayed. Tip: You ca n an swer the call even whi le using th e search or menu functions. 1 To answer the ca ll, press . If you do n ot want to answer the call, press . The caller will h ear the alerting tone change to a busy tone. To mute the ringing tone of an incom ing call, press Mut e . Tip: If th e Div ert if busy is activated to divert the calls, for exam ple, to your voice mailbox, rejecting an incoming call will also divert the call. See â To divert voice calls â on page 83 . 2 To end the call, press . To manag e calls There are a number of functions you can u se during a call. Many of the in-call options are network services. To access the functions, press Options du ring a call. Some or all of th e following in-call options may become available: Answer - Allows you to answer an incoming ca ll. Reject - Allows you to re ject an incoming call. Linda1.book Page 45 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
46 Phone Tip: I f you star t making a new call du ring th e curre n t call, the current call is put on hold automatically. Hold / Activa te - H old allows you to put th e current call on hold. To activate the original call again, select Activate . New call - Puts the active call on hold and dials a new phone number. Send DTMF - Tra nsm its D TMF t one s. S ee â To send D TMF t ones d uring a call â on page 77. End act ive call - Ends the active call. End all c alls - Ends both the active and held call. Contacts - Opens the phone book. Menu - Open s t he M e n u . Mute / Unmute - Switches the microphone of the communicator off or on. If th e communicator is connected to a handsfree car kit, Mute also turns off the microphone of the car kit. Swap - Allows you to alternate between two calls, an active and a held call. Transfer - Enables you to connect two voice calls together and disconnect yourself from both calls. See â T o transfer calls â on page 76. Conference - If one call is active an d another call is on hold, th is option merges them into a con ference call. Private - During a conference call, Private allows you to converse privately with a selected participant. Keypad lock The keypad lock makes accidenta l key press es ineffective. Linda1.book Page 46 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
47 Phone When the keypad is locked, you can answer calls normally by pre ssing . During a voice call, the keypad is unlocked an d the communicator can be operated in t he usual way. After the call, the keypad is automatically locked again. The keypad will be unlocked a utomatically when the communicator is connected to a car kit. When the communicator is removed from the car kit, without being switched off, the keypad wil l be locked automatically again. To lock the keypad Press Menu and then the key within 3 s econds. Note: While the keypad is locked, the icon and the Unlock command are displayed. To unlock Press Unlo ck and then the key within 3 s econds. Note: When the phone is locked, calls may be possible to the emergency number programmed into your phone (e.g. 1 12 or other of ficial eme rge ncy n umb er ). To change pr ofiles Example: If you us e the Meeting profile in a meeting the phone rings only once so as not to disturb others. You can use the Profiles key to adjust phone tones for the various operating environments of the communicator. One pr ofile is always in use. For more detailed inform ation on the various profiles, how to adjust the settings and so on, see â Profile settings â on page 78. Linda1.book Page 47 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
48 Phone Tip: Yo u ca n also use t he scroll key and OK to select a profile. 1 Press the key on the keypad. 2 Press the key again until the selection frame is on the desired profile. 3 To select the profile, press and hold . To view help Most menu fun ction s are pr ovided with a help text, which gives a brief description of the displayed function. 1 Scroll to the menu function about wh ich you want h elp. 2 Wait for a few seconds. The f irst page of the help text will appear. The text scrolls automatically. If you want to scroll it manually, pre ss the scroll keys or More . 3 To ex it help, press Back . To use the m enus Tip: You can access the menu fu nctions e ven duri ng a call. The phone offers a set of menu functions that allow you to tailor the phone for your particular u se. The menus an d submenus can be accessed by scrolling the menu or using the appropriate shortcuts. To scroll the men us 1 Press Menu . 2 Press either or to scroll the list of menus until you reach the desired menu. 3 Press Sel ect to a ccess the menu . If the men u contains submenus , reach th e one you want with either or and press Select . Linda1.book Page 48 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
49 Phone 4 To return to the previous menu level, pr ess Bac k . To exit the menu without changing any settings and to return to the stand-by mode, pr ess . To use menu shortcuts All the men us, submenus and settings are num bered. This nu mber is shown in the upper right corner of the display. Example: To set the An ykey answer on, fir st pre ss Menu and then press the numbers 3, 1, 1 , and 1 in se q u e nc e. 1 Press Men u . 2 Key in the index number of the menu you wish to access. Menu st ruc tur e The following menu table lists the nam es of the main menus and their submenus. Some menus are subject to the availability of the service in your area. Third-level menu s ar e not sh own. Menu Function Submenus MENU 1 MESSAGES 1 Write mess age , 2 Inbox , 3 Drafts , 4 Sen t , 5 Cell br oadcast, 6 Ser vice com- mand editor , 7 Voice mes sages MENU 2 CAL L R EGISTER 1 Missed calls , 2 Received c alls , 3 Dialled numbers , 4 Clear recent ca ll lists , 5 Call dura tion , 6 Call cost s MENU 3 SET TIN GS 1 Cal l settings , 2 Phon e setting s , 3 Security sett ings , 4 Restore factory s etting s MENU 4 C AL L DIVE R T 1 Divert all voice calls , 2 Divert i f busy, 3 Divert if not answered, 4 Diver t if out of reach , 5 Diver t if not availa ble 6 Divert all fax ca lls , 7 Divert all d ata calls , 8 Cancel all di verts Linda1.book Page 49 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
50 Phone Messag es (M enu 1 ) The Short Message Service (SMS) is a network service which enables you to receive and send short messages. Contact your service provider for details. Write message (1-1) In this menu you can write and send a short m essage. Inbox (1-2) Tip: To change the tone of an incoming SMS message, se e â Profile settings â on page 7 8. When you receive a short message or picture message, a text indicating the number of messages that have been received and the indicator will appear on the display and a tone will sound, unless the communicator is set to a silent profile. A note is also shown when you receive faxes or m ail. To read recei ved faxes or mail, you must u se the respective applications of th e communicator interface. Tip: You ca n c all the phone n umber while view i n g t h e m es sag e by pressing twice. 1 Press Read twice to view the message, or press Exit to view it later. If you view a message later, press Menu > 1 > 2 , scroll to the desired message and press Read to view the message. 2 While view ing the message, press Op tion s to scroll thr ough th e list of options and press Selec t at the highlighted option to select it. The available options are: Delete - Eras es the selected message from the memory. Reply - Opens the editor for a re ply. Key in the reply a nd press Opti on s > Send . MENU 5 INFRARE D MENU 6 SIM SERVICES Only available, if supported by y our SIM card. Linda1.book Page 50 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
51 Phone Forward - Asks for the number where the m essage should be forwarded. Enter the num ber and press OK to forward the message. Edit - Opens the current message in th e editor where you can modify the message. Use number - C opies the phone n umber from the message and moves it onto the phone display. You can now call th e number with . Details - Shows the sen der â s name and number, the date and time the message was sent, and the numb er of the me ssa ge centr e. Drafts (1-3) In this menu you can view, modify, and send your draft short messages. Sent (1-4 ) In this menu you can view and modify the short m essages you have sent. Cell broadcast (1-5) This network service allows you to receive SMS messages on topics that you have predefined on the comm un icator interfac e. See â Cell broadcast â on page 234 . For available topics and relevan t topic numbers, contact your service provider. On - Sets the information message reception on. Off - Turn s the i nf orm ati o n m essag e re cept ion off. Linda1.book Page 51 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
52 Phone Service command editor (1-6) Tip: These requests are also known as USSD commands. In this submenu, you can send service requ ests, such as activation commands for network services, to you r service provider. For more information, contact your service provider. Voice messages (1-7) List en to voic e mes sages (1- 7-1) Tip: To call your voice mailbox quickly, pr ess and hold . When you enter this submenu, th e phone automatically calls your voice mailbox at the phone number stored in menu 1-7-2. If required, key in the access code f or your mailbox or an swering machine when the connection has been made. If the voice mailbox numbe r has not been saved before, the phone asks for you to save i t fi rs t . Note that the voice mailbox is a network service and you may need to subscribe to it first. Voice m ailbox num ber (1-7-2) In this submenu, you can store and edit your voice mailbox num ber. A voice mailbox can be a network service or your personal answering machine. For more information and for the voice mailbox n umber, contact your service provider. Linda1.book Page 52 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
53 Phone Call reg ister (M enu 2) Missed calls (2-1) Tip: Received calls and Mi ssed c all s funct ion s ar e network services wh ich work only in n etworks that allow you to view th e caller â s phone number. Lists calls that you ha ve missed. Note: The communicator only register s missed calls when the ph one is switched on and withi n network coverage. Received calls (2-2) Lists calls that you have received. Dialled numbers (2-3) Lists calls that you have dialled. Clear recent call lists (2-4) Select which calls you want to erase. The options are All / Missed / Dialled / Received . IMPO RTA NT : The phone numbers are erased without warning. You cannot undo the operation. Call duration (2-5) Shows the duration of your ou tgoing and incoming ca lls, and allows y ou to r eset the timers. Linda1.book Page 53 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
54 Phone Last call duration ( 2-5-1) Shows the duration of th e last outgoing or incoming call in hours, minutes or sec ond s , for exam pl e, 0: 02:15 . All call s â duratio n (2-5-2) Shows the total duration of all calls made and received with any SIM card that you have used with the com municator. Receiv ed calls â du ration (2- 5-3) Shows the total du ration of calls received with any SIM card that you have used with the communicator. Dialled c alls â duration ( 2-5-4) Shows the total duration of calls made with any SIM card that you have used with the communicator. Clear timers (2-5 -5) Asks for th e lock code a nd then resets all tim ers. You cannot undo the reset operation. Note: The actual time invoiced for calls and services by your service pr ovider may vary, depending upon ne twork features, rounding-off for billing, taxes and so f orth. Linda1.book Page 54 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
55 Phone Call costs (2-6) This network service allows you to check various call costs. The costs are shown in charging units or units of currency that you have set in Menu 2 -6-3-2. The call cost is shown for each SIM card separately. For these settings you need th e PIN2 code, the PIN code, or n o code at all, de pending on you r service provider. Con tact your service provider f or more information. Last call cost/ units (2 -6-1) & All cal ls â cost/un its (2-6-2) Last call cost/units (2-6-1) shows the cost or units of the last, or current call. All calls â cost/units (2 -6-2) sh ows the total cos t or units of all calls made with the current SI M car d. Whichever menu you choose, press Opti ons to access th e following three submen us: Clear co st counter s (2-6- 3-1) Resets all cost counters. You cannot undo the reset operation. Show cost / Sho w in un its ( 2-6-3 -2) You may select whether the call costs and call cost limits will be displayed in currency or char ging units. Contact your n etwork service provider for the prices of charging un its. The display shows the option that is currently not selected. To select the option shown on the display, press Select . If you selected Show cost , key in th e charging unit price. Use or to insert a decimal point. Next, enter the currency name. Linda1.book Page 55 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
56 Phone Call co st li mit ( 2-6 -3- 3) This function allows you to l imit the total costs of outgoing calls to a specifi ed number of charging units or units of curr ency that you have set in Menu 2-6-3-2. To turn the limit on , select On . Key in the cos t limit in c harging units or currency units. If you define the limit in currency units, you ca n press or to insert a decimal point. After the limit has been turned on, the number of remaining units is shown on t he display when in stand-by mo de. When all units have been used, no calls can be made. To turn the limit of f, select Off . Note: When no more charging units or currency units are left, calls may only be possible to the e mergency number programmed into your communicator (e.g. 112 or other official emergen cy number). Note: The actual time invoiced for calls and by your service provider may vary, depending upon network features, rounding-off for billin g, and so forth. Sett in gs (Me nu 3) Call settings (3-1) Anyke y ans wer ( 3-1- 1) When selected, you can answer an incoming call by pressing any key on the keypad, except , , or Mu te selection key. Linda1.book Page 56 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
57 Phone Automatic redial (3-1-2) When this function is selected and you call a number that is busy or does not answer, the ph one will attempt to call the number until the call is connected. The maximum number of redials is 10. Press to en d the call attempts. Speed di alling ( 3-1-3) When selected, you can dial phone numbers stored in th e speed dial locations by simply pressing and holding the assigned speed dial key. See â Speed dials â on page 81 for m ore info rmat ion. Call waiti ng service ( 3-1-4) Call waiting is a network serv ice. Contact your operator for subscription. For more information see â To answer a waiting call â on page 76. Choose Activate to enable call waiting, Cancel to disable call waiting, o r Ch eck stat us to show whether c all waiting is active a nd for which call ty pes. My nu mber sendin g (3-1 -5) This network service allows you to set your phone number either to be displayed or to be hidden f rom the person you are calling. S et by n etw or k resets the phone to the default setting, On or Off , that you have agreed upon with your ser vice provider. Summary after call ( 3-1-6) If you set this fun ction to On , the phone will briefly display the duration and cost (network service) after each call. Linda1.book Page 57 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
58 Phone Line for ou tgoing c alls (3-1 -7) If your netwo rk supports this service, you can have two phone lines in your com mu nic a to r. You ca n sel e c t wh ic h l i ne you wa nt t o use for makin g ca l ls. Fo r more information, see â Line selection page â on page 90. Phone settings (3-2) Clock ( 3-2-1) You can select whether the time is shown on the display. Cell i nfo displ ay (3-2-2) When this function is s elected, the phone will indicate when it is used in a network cell based on Micro-Cellular Netw ork technology. MCN technology increases the capacity of wireless networks in urban areas. The setting will remain in effect ev en if the SIM card is changed or the phone is switched of f. Welc ome n ote (3-2 -3) You can write a messa ge of up to 44 characters which appears on th e display when you switch on th e phone. Network selection (3-2-4) The network to which you are connected can be selected e ither automatically or manually. Linda1.book Page 58 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
59 Phone If you select Auto matic , the phone automatically selects on e of the wireless networks available in your a rea. Outside your home n etwork service area, the communicator will select one of the networks that ha s a roaming agreement with your home net work. If you se lect Ma nual , the phone will show a list of available n etworks and you can select the network you wish to use if thi s network has a roaming agreement with your home netw ork service operator. If no such agreement is in force, the text No access will be displayed and you must select another network. Confi rm SI M serv ice ac tions ( 3-2- 5) You can set the phone to show you the confirmation messages sent between your phone and the n etwork when you are using the SIM services by sele cting the option Yes within the menu 3-2-5 (Confirm SIM serv ice actions). Security settin gs (3-3) The purpose of the security system is to preven t unauthorised use or altering of important settings. In most cases, activating or changing the security options requires the appropriate access code. See â Securityâ on page 2 16. Note: When security f eatures that rest rict calls are in u se (call barr ing, closed user group and fix ed dialling, or system lock etc.), calls may be possible to certain em ergency numbers in some networks (e.g. 1 12 or other official eme rge ncy numb ers ). PIN code reques t (3-3-1 ) The options ar e On and Of f . See â Secu rityâ on page 216. Linda1.book Page 59 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
60 Phone Call ba rr ing ser vic e (3 -3- 2) This network service a llows you to restr ict incoming calls to, and outgoing calls from your phone. Y ou need a barring password to be able to use this function. Contact your n etwork service provider t o get a ba rring password. The options are: Outgoing calls / Internat ional calls / Internation al calls except t o home coun tr y / Incoming calls / Incoming calls when abroad / Cancel a ll barrings . Closed use r group ( 3-3-3) This network service allows you to set the communicator to accept calls to and from a selected group of people. For details on creating a user group and activating this service, contact your network ser vice provider. Preset - Resets the phone to u se a user group the SI M card owner has agreed u pon with the networ k service provider. On - Uses a par ticular user group. Calls can be made to or received from the members of the selected group only. Off - Calls can be made and received in the n ormal way. You can u se this option only if you are entitled to do so. Lock if SIM chang e d (3 -3- 4) You can protect your phone against unauthorised use with the lock code. T o do this, enter your lock code and selec t the option Yes . For details, see â Securityâ on page 216. Change of ac cess code s (3-3-5) In this submenu, you ca n change the lock code, the PIN code, th e PIN2 code and the barring password. See â Securityâ on page 216. Linda1.book Page 60 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
61 Phone The access codes may only inclu de the digits 0 to 9. Lock system(3-3-6) Tip: You can al so pre ss Menu and # to enter your lock code. In this submenu, you can lock the communicator. Press Se lect and enter your lock code. The communicator locks immediately. When your com municator is locked, you can make emergen cy calls to predefined numbers u sing the cover phone. You can also answer incoming calls and make emergency calls using the Telephone application. All other actions are blo cked. Even if you remove and replace the battery and switch on the ph one, the communicator will remain locked. T o unlock the communicator, press Unlock and enter the lock code. For more information on locking and other security option s, see â Securityâ on pa ge 216. IMPO RTA NT : The default lock code is 1234 5 . For security re asons, it is imperative that you change the lock code. Keep the code secret and in a safe place, separate from th e communicator. For information on changing the lock code, see s ection â Securityâ on page 216. Restore factory settings (3-4) You c an res et s ome of the menu set tings to th eir o rigi nal va lues. Y ou need t he lo ck code for this function. This function will n ot affect stored phon e numbers and names, access codes, earpiece volume setting, call timers, cost counters, selected application tones or SMS messages. Linda1.book Page 61 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
62 Phone Call di vert (Menu 4 ) Tip: The icon is shown in the stand-by mode when you have activated the Divert all voi ce calls . This network service a llows you to direct your incoming v oice calls to another phone number when you do n ot want to be disturbed, or when the phone is switched off or outside the network cover age area. For details, see â To divert voice calls â on pa ge 83. The options are: Divert all voice ca lls / D ivert if bu sy / Divert if not answered / Divert if out of reach / Divert if not availab le / Divert all fax calls / Divert all data calls / Cancel all divert s . Select Activa te to set the divert setting on if allowed by the network, Cancel to set the setting off. Select Check status to check whether th e divert is activated or not. If you select Divert if not answered or Diver t if not availa ble , you can also s elect Set delay to choose a delay t i me before the call is diverted. The options are 5 sec / 10 s ec / 15 sec / 20 se c / 25 sec /30 s ec . Infrared (M enu 5) If you want to r eceive data from another device via infrared, use this function. Make sure that the i nfrared port of the communicator faces the in frared port of the other device and press Acti va te . For more infor mation , see â To a ctivate the infrared connection â on page 35. Note: Do not point the IR (infrared) beam at anyone's eye or allow it to interfe re with other IR devices. This device is a Class 1 Laser product. Linda1.book Page 62 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
63 Phone SIM s ervices (Menu 6) In addition to th e functions available in the phone, your SIM card may provide additional services that you can access in the menu 6 . Menu 6 is shown only i f it is supported by your SIM card. The name a nd contents of the menu depend entirely on the services a vailable. For availability, rates and information on using the SI M services, contact your SIM card vendor, for ex ample your ne twork service provider, service provider or other third-party vendor. You can set the phone to show you the confirmation messages sent between your phone and the n etwork when you are using the SIM services by sele cting the option Yes within the menu 3-2-5 (Confirm SIM serv ice actions). Note: Accessing th ese services may involve sending a text messa ge (SMS) or making a phone call for which you may be ch arged. Linda1.book Page 63 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
64 Phone Linda1.book Page 64 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
65 Des k 4. Desk Tip: Your favourite links can be, for example, certain WWW pag es, WAP se rv ices , applications, documents, and photo albums. Desk is an application where you can create and m anage links to your favourite documents, applications, or th ird-party software. Main view When you first use Desk, the main view has at least the following links by default: an Internet shortcut to Internet setup, a document nam ed â Start here! â , and a WWW link to the official Nokia Web site. You cannot select more than one link at a time. Y ou can delete Desk links only in the Desk application. Tip: You can ch a ng e t he order in wh ich a link appears. Select the link, press the Menu key, and select File > Move . Using the Arrows key, move the link across the display and press Plac e here . Figure 15 Linda1.book Page 65 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
66 Des k To add a link Tip: To view and change the icon, label or parameters of a link, select the link, press the Menu key, and then select File > Properties ⦠. 1 Se lect the program, program group, or other item for which you want to add a shortcut to Desk. 2 Press the Menu key and then select File > Add to D esk . To write notes Tip: You can start writin g a note quickly in any application or even during a phone call by p ressing the Desk application button twice. 1 Press Write note . A s imple text editor opens. Figure 16 2 Write the note. 3 Press Clos e to save the document. Th e note will n ow appear in the main view of Desk. To ch ange th e backgrou nd im age You can also customise the background image of the Desk m ain view. 1 Press the Menu key and select Tools > Setting s ⦠. A dia log opens. 2 De fine the following: Backgrou nd image : The options a re Yes / No . Linda1.book Page 66 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
67 Des k Imag e fi le : Press Ch ang e to browse for an image. Press Preview to view the image. 3 Press Do ne . Note: The image f ile you choose as a background image should b e scaled to appear equal to or bigger than the screen size. For details, see â Imagingâ on page 231. Linda1.book Page 67 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
68 Des k Linda1.book Page 68 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
69 Telephone 5. Telephone Tip: You ca n al s o swi tch to other applications during a phone call. You can use t he Telephone application to m ake and receive phone calls, handsfree calls, or conference calls. Y ou can record and r edirect calls, use voice mailboxes, and manage settings and profiles. Open the Telephone application by pressing the Tel application button on the keyboard. To make phone calls, ⢠the phone m ust be switched on, ⢠the communicator must have a valid SIM card fitted, and ⢠you must be located in a service area of the wireless network. Some of the operations explained here ca n also be m ade using the cover of the communicator. Note: Opening or closing the cover does not affect active phone calls. If you have made a voice ca ll using the Telephone application and y ou close the cover, you can continue the call with the cover phone. Linda1.book Page 69 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
70 Telephone To m ake a ca ll manu all y Tip: To disable the hands free mode , press the Menu key, select Set tings > Call ⦠> Audio when cover opened and press Change to switch th e handsfree mode Off . 1 Ty pe the telephone n umber in the field at the bottom of the m ain view. 2 Press Call . Use the handsfree m ode to speak and li sten to the communicator from a short distance when the cover is opened, or close the cover and continue with the cover phone. To call a number in the Tele phone directory When you have no active voice calls, the Telephone application main vie w shows the Telephone di rectory. The defa ult directory is in th e communicator memory. From the top of the telephone list, you can select directories contained in the SIM card and - if fitted - directories contained in a memory card. Contact cards that do not contain any phone numbers appear dimmed. 1 Se lect a contact in the directory either by scrolling or by using the search field. Tip: To redial the last dialled number you can also press the shortcu t keys Chr Te l. 2 Press Call . If the contact has more than one phone num ber, a list opens, listing all the contact â s phone numbers. Choose a number from the list and press Call . Linda1.book Page 70 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
71 Telephone Tip: You can zoom in and out to either ma ke the text more readable or fit more entries on di splay. Press the Menu key and select View > Zoom in or Zoom out Figure 17 To call a number in a recent calls list Tip: A shortcut to open the Mis sed calls view is Ctrl Tel. 1 In the main view, pres s Recen t calls . Th e Dialled calls dialog opens. If you have new missed calls, the M issed c alls dialog opens. 2 To see calls from one of the other lists, select a command button on the right of the di splay. For example, to see a list of received calls, pr ess Receiv ed call s . Tip: You ca n c rea t e a new contact card by using a telephone num ber listed in Rece nt calls . In t he main view, press Rece nt calls . Select a call, press the Menu key, and Edit > Add to contacts . 3 Select a number from the list and press Ca ll . Now you can e ither lea ve the cover open to use the handsfree option or close the cover and continue the call normally. Linda1.book Page 71 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
72 Telephone To answer a call Tip: To adjust the volume of the speaker during an active call, use the A rrows key: pressing > increases the volume, pressing < decreases the volume. Figure 18 Tip: The caller â s name appears in the note if the telephone number is sent with the call, and if the caller â s number is listed in your Cont act s d irec tory . 1 When you receive a call and the communicator cover is open, a note about the incoming call appears. To answer th e call, press Answer or close the device cover and answer the call via the cover phone. 2 If you do not want to take the call, press Reje ct . To mute the ringing tone, press Mute t one . Note: You cannot have two active calls at the same time unless you are in a conference call. A current call is automatically put on hold when you answer a new incoming call. For information about conference calls, see â To make conference callsâ on page 74. To call and cre ate a voice mailbox Voice mailboxes wo rk just like an answering m achine. You can use them to store incoming messa ges of missed c alls. Many ne twork operators provide a voice mailbox service with the SIM card. If your SIM voice mailbox does n ot have a number, you can type i t yourself. Note that you are still r equired to contact your network operator for a phone number to use w ith this voice mailbox. Linda1.book Page 72 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
73 Telephone Tip: Another way to call your voice mai lbox is to press and hold t he key on the front cover of the phone. To call your voice mailbox, in the main view of the Telephone directory, press Voice mailbox . See Figure 17. If you have more than one voice mailbox, a dial og prompts you to choose a mailbox f rom a list. You can a lso create additional voice mailboxes as follows: 1 Contact your network ope rator for a number to use with an additional voice mailbox. 2 Press the Menu ke y and select Settings > Voice mailb oxes ⦠. 3 When the Voic e mailboxes dialog appears, press Add . Type a name an d number. To reco rd a call You can record the conversation during a call. Once a call is in progress, press the Menu key and select Call > Record to open th e Recorder application. For more information on the Recorder applica tion, see page 229. Note: Obey all local laws governing recording of calls. To make a new call during a call You can h ave an ac tive call and a ca ll on hold at th e same time. You can switch between the two calls. This s ituation applies whether you made or received either of the calls. The display can show a maximum of three calls, although you can have only two calls conn ected at the s ame time . See Figu re 19. To an swer the WAI TING call you must first end either the ON HOL D or the ACTIVE call. Linda1.book Page 73 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
74 Telephone 1 If you already have an active call and a call on hold, drop one of th e calls or merge them into a conference call . 2 Press New call and make the new call. T he previous call will be put on hold. 3 To switch between calls, u se the Arrows key. The active call is f ramed with a dark line. The command buttons change according to the sta tu s of the selected call. For example, a call on hold can be c hanged to an active call by highlighting it with the A rrows key a nd then pressin g Activa te . Figure 19 4 To en d a call, select the call you want to end with the Arrows key and press End cal l . To make conference calls The conference call is a ne twork service. Contact yo ur network operator to check if this service is available. In a conference call, you and up to five persons can hear each other simultaneously. The display shows a con ference call as a single call. 1 Make a call. This call - with the dark line Call sta tus icon Linda1.book Page 74 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
75 Telephone 2 Once the cal led person has answered, make a call to a second per son by pressing New call . The first call is put on hold. 3 Wait until the second person answers the ca ll. 4 To place both persons into a conference call, press Con ference cal l . The display shows a single conference call. Press Conferen ce commands to list the two participants of the confer ence call. 5 To include another per son, press New call . The conference call is put on h old. When the person answers the call, press Conference cal l . This new perso n is included in the conference call. 6 To inclu de fu rth er pe rson s, repea t step 5. Tip: You ca n c lo se the cover and continue the call via the cover phone after you have included all participants in the conference call. Figure 20 To remove a conference call participant 1 Press Co nference co mmands . 2 Select the caller f rom the list of participants and press Drop . See Figure 20. To talk privately with one of the conference call participants 1 Press Co nference co mmands . Linda1.book Page 75 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
76 Telephone 2 Select a participant from the list and press Priva te c al l . The call is now split into two: th e conference call is on hold and the one-to-one call is active. 3 Once you have finished the private conversat ion, you can return to the conference call by pressing Conference call . Tip: To view log f iles of all calls, press the Menu key and select Tools > Log . The General log shows a ll calls, both incoming and outgoing, voice and data. To tra nsf er calls Call transfer is a network service where you connect two ca lls together an d disconnect yourself from both calls. Contact your network operator to check if this service is ava ilable. When you have one call on hold, and another call active or an outgoing call alerting, press the M enu key and select Call > Tr an sf er to connect the calls together. Note: You may be charged for some of the cost of the transferred call; contact your network operator for details. Note: You can on ly transfer voice calls. Fax, data, or confe rence calls ca n not be trans ferred. To answer a waiting call To know that you have a call waiting, an d to be able to answer it, you must first subscribe to the call waiting n etwork service. Call waiting is selected in network services. For more information, see page 85 . 1 When you receive a new call while you already have an active call, you hear a sound and see a note infor ming you of a new incomin g call. 2 Press Answer . The active call is put on hol d. Linda1.book Page 76 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
77 Telephone To se nd DTMF tone s durin g a call A dual tone multi-frequency tone system i s used by all touch -tone telephones. DTMF assigns a specific frequency, or tone, to each key so that it can easily b e identified by a microprocessor. DTMF tones allow you to communicate with voice mailboxes, computerised te lephony systems, etc. To send DTMF tones during a call, you have two methods: Tip: Besid es th e nu mb ers 0 - 9 , you can also u se the characters p , w , * , and # when sending DTMF tones. For information on the se charac ters, se e â To st or e DTMF tones â on pa ge 101. ⢠Type the digi ts with the communicator keyboard. No m enu or command button selection is needed before starting to type the digits. Each keystroke generates a DTMF ton e which is tran smitted while the call is active. ⢠Alternatively, 1 Press Send DTMF . The DTMF sequences you have stored in the contact card of the pe rson you are talking with are shown. For information on h ow to store DTMF se quences, see page 101. 2 Select a DT MF sequen ce. You ca n edit the sequence. If ther e are no stored sequences, you can type a new DT MF sequence in to the input field. 3 Press Sen d tone . Note: You can send DTMF tones during a conference call by typing the digits with the communicator keyboard, but you cannot access stored DTMF sequences . Telephone Setti ngs In the T elephone main view, press the Menu key and select Settin gs to select on e of the following settings. Linda1.book Page 77 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
78 Telephone Profile s ettings The profiles are used for gr ou ping the settings of differ ent operating environments of the communicator. In th e settings you can modify th e profile features. One profile is always in use. To change the pr ofile in use, press the M enu key. Use the Arr ows key to select the Profiles icon at the right- hand end of the m enu bar and a new pr ofile from the menu li s t. Figure 21 To select and modify a profile, press the Menu key and select Settings > Prof iles ⦠. The profiles provided w ith your communicator are: General - The def ault profile of th e communicator. Silent - You can set th is profile on wh en you want all the aler t tones to remain silent (except Clock an d Calendar ala rms - see â Noteâ on page 79). Meeting - You can s pecify how the communicator operates when you a re in a meeting, such as setting the volu me of the tones low. Outdoor - You can specify how the communicator operates when you are outdoors. Profiles icon Linda1.book Page 78 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
79 Telephone Pager - You can set this profile on when you want the commun icator to act as a pager. The def ault settings are that there is n o ringing tone and that you get an alert tone for received shor t messages . Flight - Sets the Flight profile on. For more in formation, see â Flight pr ofileâ on page 91. Note: If you have turned on the Clock alarm or an alarm for timed entry in Calendar, it remains on in all profiles, in cluding Silent. To create a new profile 1 To create a new profile, press the Menu key, select Setti ngs > Pr ofiles ⦠, a nd press New . The current valu es of the General profile are copied to the new profile. 2 To modify the settings of any of the profiles, highlight a pr ofile name and press Edit . A dialog with four pages open s, as shown in Figure 22 . For each of the pages, define the following: Figure 22 Gener al page Name : Type the nam e of the profil e. Some profiles cannot be renamed. Linda1.book Page 79 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
80 Telephone Ri ngin g t ype : Choose the ringing type for the ringing tone. The options are Normal / Ascendin g / Ring once . Ri ngin g t one : De fine the sound for the incoming call. Press Change to choose from sound files provided with the com municator or to browse for other sou nd files, if available. T o record a tone, see page 229. Ringing tone, line 1 : and Ringing tone, line 2 : Define the sound for incoming calls on two alternate lines, if available. Press Change to choose from sou nd files that have been provided w ith the communicator or to browse for oth er sound files, if available. Personal to nes : Define wheth er the personal ringin g tone of callers are used. The options are On / Off . For information about attaching a ringing tone to a contact ca rd, see â To attach a ringing ton e â on page 99. Alerts page Clock a larm , Calendar alarm , Rece ived SMS , and Received fax : Choose a specific sound for each of these situations to alert you. Highlight an option, then press Chan ge to choose from sound files provided with the communicator or browse for other sound f iles. To adjust the volume of an alarm, pr ess Volume . Notific ations page Keyboa rd t one : Adjusts the keyboard sound. The options are Off / Qu iet / Loud . Phone ke ypad tone : Adjusts the keypad sound. The options are Off / Quie t / Lo ud. Notificat ion tones : Switches the notification tones between On / Off . Notification tones a re t ones m ade b y the comm unic ator aler ting y ou t o an er ror ( such as an incorrect key press) or to a situation (such as a low battery). Linda1.book Page 80 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
81 Telephone Other page Play rin ging tone for : Allows you to choose which incoming calls will make a ringing sound. The options are All call s / VI P gr ou p onl y/ None . If you choose VIP gr oup only , only the calls coming fr om someone defined as a VIP will ring; see page 109 in the C ontacts chapter. All other calls alert on the display with a message, but will not ring. Speed dials Tip: See also â To speed dial â on page 44. Speed dialling is a quick way to call frequently used n umbers. You can assign speed dials to eight phone numbers. An ex ample is shown in Figure 23 . 1 Press the Menu ke y and select Settings > Speed dials ⦠. 2 To assign a number to a speed dial lo cation or to change an existing number, press eith er Add number or Change number . You see a list of contacts from the contacts database in your communicator â s in tern al me mor y. 3 Highlight a contact card and press Select . When a contact card without phone number is h ighlighted, the Select command is dimmed. Location number 1 is reserved for calling your default voice mailbox; see page 85 for more information. You can not change its value. For more information on voice mailboxes, see page 72. Linda1.book Page 81 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
82 Telephone Figure 23 Network services setting s Note: Network ser vices may not be pr ovided by all oper ators. If services are provided, you ma y have to subscribe to them. Tip: To change voic e call diverting or barring se ttings, the phone must be switched on. Information about the status of these s ervices is stored in the network. Therefore, the current settings are n ot shown until you request th e information f rom the network as follows: 1 Press the Menu key and select Settings > Netwo rk services 2 For example, to check the setting of Div ert i f bu sy , select Call diverti ng ⦠, highlight it with the A rrows key, th en press Check status . While the communicator is making a request to th e network, a query note is shown on the display. 3 After a successful request, the n ew status now appears in t he settings list. Linda1.book Page 82 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
83 Telephone Figure 24 To dive rt voic e calls Voice call diverting allows you to direct your incoming voice calls to another phone number. This is also known as call for warding. 1 Press the Menu ke y and select Settings > Network ser vices > Call divert ing ⦠. A dialog opens. 2 Choose divert options: Divert all cal ls â A ll incoming calls a re diverted. Divert if bus y â Incomin g calls are diverted when you are engaged in anoth er call. Divert if out o f reach â Incoming calls are diverted when the phone is switched off or ou tside the network service area. Divert if not answered â Incoming calls are diverted if you d o not answer them within a certain time period. Time delay â Applies to the option Divert if not ans wered . Time delay allows you to choose the time period after which the call is diverted. You can set the delay to Default / 5 seconds / 10 s econds / 15 s econds / 20 seconds / 25 seconds / 30 seconds Divert if not ava ilab le â In a single action, this option turns on diverting of Diver t if busy / Diver t if out of reach / Divert i f not answered . 3 Press Chang e , and select one of th e following options: Linda1.book Page 83 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
84 Telephone To: â Type the number to which you want to divert the ca lls. Default voice mailbox â Calls are diverted to you r voice mailbox. If you have more than one mailbox, you must choose on e from a list sh own to you. See page 85 for mo r e info rm atio n . Off â Turn off the divert. To rest rict vo ice call s To restrict voice calls you use the voice call barring network service. To use call barring or change the barring settings you need a barring password, which you ca n obtain from the network ope rator. 1 Press the Menu key and select Settings > Netwo rk services > Call barring ⦠. The Vo ice ca ll b arr ing dialog opens. 2 Choose on e of the available options: Outgoing c alls â Calls cannot be made. Incoming calls â Calls ca nnot be received. International c alls â Calls cannot be made to oth er countries or regions. Incoming calls wh en abroad â Calls cannot be received when you are ou tside your home country. International exc ept to home co untry - If you have enabled internationa l roaming with your network oper ator, you cannot make international calls abroad, except to yo ur hom e c o unt r y . Note: Calls described here as international may in some cases be made between regions of the same nation. If you subscribe to the alternate line network service, voice call barring applies only to the Selected line . Linda1.book Page 84 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
85 Telephone Note: When security f eatures that rest rict calls are in u se (call barr ing, closed user group and fixed dialling), calls may be possible to certain emergency numbers in some networks (e.g. 112 or other official emergency numbe rs ). To cancel all ca ll diverts or ba rrings, press Cancel all . Other networ k serv ices 1 Press the Menu ke y and select Settings > Network ser vices > Other serv ices ⦠2 Other network service settin gs contains the following options: Network sel ection â Allows you to chan ge the way a net work is selected and also register to anothe r network. Y ou can set the network s election to either Auto matic or Manua l . In automatic network selection, the com municator selects the most appropriate network. I n manual network sele ction, the communicator searches for available net w orks and presents you with a list of networks found; you can then select which network to use. Call waiting - P re ss Change to choose On or Off . For a brief description of call waiting, see â To answer a waiting ca ll â on page 76. My number sending â Determines whether your number is hidden or pr esented to the per son you are calling. Press Ch ange to see the options Defau lt / On / Off . Voice mailbox settings For information on voice m ailboxes, see page 7 2. 1 Press the Menu ke y and select Settings > Voice mailb oxes . 2 To change the setting s of a voice mailbox, highlight it and press Edit . A dialog with two pages ope ns. See Figu re 25. Linda1.book Page 85 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
86 Telephone Figure 25 Proper ties pag e Define the following options: Name : Type a descriptive name for th e mailbox. Number : Type a number for the m ailbox obtained from the networ k service. Note: The type of voice mailbox determines whether you can edit both of these fields. For example, th e name and number of a SIM voice mai lbox cannot be edited. DTMF t ones page DTMF : Define DTMF tones for a voice mailbox not provided with your SIM card. Each tone is represented by a character. Press Add to type ch aracters and store them with a label, such as DTMF2. You c an also select No DTMF tones . If you are editing a voice mailbox provided with your SIM card, this page is dimmed. Call settings 1 Press the Menu key and select Settings > Cal l ⦠. 2 De fine the following option s: Linda1.book Page 86 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
87 Telephone Audio when co ver opened : Determines whether the ha ndsfree mode is s elected automatically when you open the cover. Press Change to toggle On /Off . Automat ic re dial : W hen this setting is set On and you call a number th at is busy or does not a nswer, the communicator attempts to call the n umber until th e call is connected. Press Change to toggle On / Off . Advanced set ting s 1 Press the Menu ke y and select Settings > Advanc ed ⦠. 2 Define the follow ing options: Call costs page Tip: To see the phone seria l numb er, pr ess the Menu key an d select T ools > Serial numb er (IMEI) . Your network operator may ask you for this inform ation. If your network supports the call charging displa y service, use this page to change call charge settings and to view cost counter s. Your communicator will prompt you for your PIN2 code. If th is page is dimmed, your SIM does not su pport this network service. Figure 26 Displa y credits : Dete rmines the information about ca ll costs shown in the call display during a call. The options are No / Used / Rema in ing . Cr edits are amounts of money, measured either in units or currency. Linda1.book Page 87 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
88 Telephone Currency : Type a maximum of three characters to indicate your choice of c u rrency. You can type numbers or letters. For example, you can type â FI Mâ for Finnish currency. This field is used with Unit price below and with Show i n cur renc y . Unit p rice : If you use currency to measure call cos ts, type a decimal number for th e price of each c harging unit. You must also com plete the Currency field above. Maximum cost limit : You have two options: No limit or a value that you can define in the field. You can define the limit in either units or in currency. If you are in a call when the cost limit is reached, the call ends. You cannot make any more calls. You see a note on the display before and after the call limit is r eached. Press Calculate co sts : The information in t his dialog is: Last call : - The cost of the l ast call made. All call s: - The cost of all calls ma de since th e cost counter w as reset. See Figure 27. Remaining cr edits - If you have defined a limit in Maxi mum cost lim it th is field displays the amount of money or units remaining. Press eith er Show in units or Show in currency to choose how you w ant call costs to be displayed in your commu nicator. â Unitsâ is a n etwork measur eme nt, such as 21 un i ts. â Currencyâ is shown in the characters you have typed i n the Curren cy field. Press Clear c osts to clear th e cost cou n ters. Y o u are r equired to enter y our PIN2 code. Linda1.book Page 88 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
89 Telephone Figure 27 Note: The actual invoice for calls and services from your service provider may vary, depending upo n network features, rounding-of f for billing, taxes and so for th. Fixed diallin g page Fixed dial ling is a network service which allows you to restrict your calling to a limited set of nu mbers stored in the SIM card. The service is offered by som e network operators . When the f ixed dialling service is active, the SI M phone boo k list shows only numbers in the fixed di alling list. You still have access to the communicator â s Telephone directory, but you cannot call those n umbers. If you r SIM card does not support this networ k service, this page is dimme d. Figure 28 Linda1.book Page 89 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
90 Telephone If you want to change the settings or view the fixed numbers, you are required to enter your PIN2 code . When th e service is set to On , press Edit numbers to add, modify, or delete numbers. You are required to en ter names and numbers into the fixed dialling list. Note: When Fixed Dialling is set on, calls may be possible to certain emergency numbers in some networks (e.g. 11 2 or other official emergency number). Line sel ect ion p age If you ne ed two l ines (p hone number s) for your commu nicat or, you m ust sub scr ibe to the alternate line network service and check that this feature is activated in your communicator. If this s ervice is unavailable or you do not use it, the Line selection page appear s dimmed. Each line can have diffe rent settings for some of th e Telephone f eatures. Figure 29 The options on this page are: Se lect ed li ne : Defines the li ne used for ou tgoing calls. The options are Primary / Alterna te . Fax calls always use the primary line. If Block line sele ction is active (see the next paragraph) you cannot change th e line in u se. Linda1.book Page 90 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
91 Telephone Block li ne selection : Allows you to block the changing of the selected line. The values are On / Off . Ch anging the value requires you to enter you r PIN2 code. Note: Block l ine selection option is not provided by all network oper ators. Flight profile The flight profile prevents you f rom accidentally turning on the phone in an aircraft. To select the flight profile: 1 In the Telephone main view, press the Menu key, scro ll across the menu bar to the Profiles icon , then highlight Flight . 2 Press Select . With the flight profile active, you may do tasks which do not require the use of wireless network. For e xample, you can read previou sly downloaded mail, write mail, notes, short messages, faxes, or update your calendar. O nce you have left the aircraft, turn off the flight profile by pressing Exit pr of ile . Then you can turn on the phone by pr essing , and your short messages, faxes, and mail will be sent automatically. When the flight pr ofile has been selected, em ergency calls can be made as follows (close the communicator cover): 1 Press . The phone display will read Flight profile is act ive. . 2 While the note is visible (for approximately five se conds) you can dial an emergency number preprogrammed into your communicator, for ex ample, 112. 3 Press . Linda1.book Page 91 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
92 Telephone IMPO RTA NT! U sing your phone while in t he air is prohibited. Switch off your phone before boarding an a ircraft. The use of wireless telephones in an aircraft may be dangerous to the oper ation of the aircraft, disrupt th e wireless telephon e network and may be illegal. If the air craft personnel allow use of th e communicator interface, you MUST activate the Flight profile. The Flight profile will allow use of the communicator interface only and will prevent use of the phone. Be aware that all communication applications require use of t he phone. Linda1.book Page 92 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
93 Conta cts 6. Contacts You can use t he Contacts application to create, edit, and manage all contact information, such as phone numbers and addresse s. Start the Contacts applica tion by pressin g the Contacts application bu tton on th e keyboard. The main contacts database is in the communicator â s memory. You can also store contacts in the SIM card and in databases on an attached memory card. You can syn chron ise your con tacts with Microsoft Outlook, Lotus Notes, an d Lotus Organizer programs when you con nect your communicator to a com patible PC. For information on synchronising your contacts with a PC, see the PC Suite Guide on the sales pac kage CD-ROM. Conta cts directory The mai n v iew o f Cont a c t s co nt a i ns tw o fra me s. Figure 30 Linda1.book Page 93 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
94 Conta cts Tip: You can toggle between the two frames with the Arrows or Tab keys. In the left-hand fr ame, there is a list of contacts in the cur rently open contacts database. At the top of the list there is your own car d and other available contacts databases. Below the l ist there i s a search box f or finding en tries. In the righ t-hand frame th ere is the cu rrently selected contact car d. Contacts databases can be located in the communicator â s inte rn al me mor y , on a memory card, or on a SIM card. A memory card m ay contain several cont act databases. Contact data is shown for one contacts da tabase at a time. For example, to see contacts stored on th e SIM car d, use the Arr ows key to scroll down the list to the SIM card and pre ss Open . An individual contact card contain s the information of one person. A group contact card contains more than one contact person. You can see the name o f a group contact card in bold font in the list. Contacts are listed by name. You can change the sort order of the list. See â General page â on page 10 7. You can c reate more than one conta cts databa se in a m emory ca rd. For more information se e page 109. Note: You cannot delete your own business card, the internal contacts database of t he communicator, the contacts databa se on a SIM card , a read-only memory car d contacts databas e, or contacts in a read-only contacts database. To make a contact card 1 In the Contacts directory main view, with the left-hand frame highlighted, press New card . A new card is cr eated using the de fault template. Linda1.book Page 94 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
95 Conta cts 2 To make a new contact card using a particular template, press the Menu key and select File > Ne w ca rd . You are pr ompted to choose a template from a list. 3 When the contact card opens, enter information into the various fields. You can fill in the information on you r own business card u sing the same method. See an example in Figure 31. Note: The title of the P. O. Box field is on ly displayed when edi ting the fields. To display the words â P.O. Box â before the P.O. Box number after editing type, for e xample, â P.O. Box 123 â in the field. 4 To save your contact card, press Done . Note: The spee d dial icon next to a con tact card telephone number me ans that you have def ined a speed dial f or that telephone number with the Telephone application. Figure 31 Linda1.book Page 95 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
96 Conta cts To open a contact card Tip: To copy or move a range of contacts, sele ct the contacts, press the Menu key and select File > More options > Copy to or Move to . . 1 In th e Contacts main view, with the lef t-hand frame highlighted, select a card. 2 Press Ope n to open the car d in a full display view. To move or c opy contacts from a SIM card 1 In th e Contacts main view, with the left-hand frame highlighted, sele ct the SIM card and press Op en . 2 Press the Menu key and select File > More option s > Copy to or Move t o. 3 Choose th e Contacts database as the target directory and pr ess Sel ec t . To search for a c ontact card Tip: If you cann ot find the contact in th is database, go to the top of th e Contacts directory list, and open either th e SIM card or the memor y card d a tab ase . You may have s tored your contact in one of these other locations. 1 In the search field under the Con tacts directory list, enter characters which match the beginning of the name of the contact. For example, to find Manfred, enter M or Ma or M an. The names of contacts w hich match the char acters you entered are displayed. For more information on the rules of searching, see â Notes on using th e search field â on page 9 7. 2 Using th e Arrows key, select a contact and press Open . Linda1.book Page 96 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
97 Conta cts Notes on using the search field A search checks t he most importan t fields in a contact card. T he matching of search criteria is limited to th e beginning of words. For example, to search using the characters â An n â finds â Annabel â but not â Joa nne â . Example: john.carr@florida.edu or http://florida.edu/ ~john.carr The search also checks the contents which follow the f ollowing characters: ' . ' (period) or ' / ' (forward slash) or ' @ ' ( â atâ symbol) or ' ~ â (tilde). To change fields in a contact c ard To add a field You can add fields to a contact card to suit your own circumsta nces. For more information on specific fields, see âÂÂInformation on fields â on page 9 8. 1 Open a contact card. 2 Press Ad d field . A list opens, showing fields you can add to the card. 3 Using the Arrows key, select a field and press Sele ct . To rename a field You can rename fields to suit you r contacts. For example, after adding three new Tel fields, you could rename them to Tel (B us ine ss) , Tel (Priva te) , and Tel (Car ) respective ly. Linda1.book Page 97 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
98 Conta cts Tip: If you want to delete a field on all car ds based on the same tem plate, it is simpler to dele te it from the template attached to the card. Se e â To cr eate or modify templates â on page 100. 1 Open a contact car d. 2 Se lect the field you want to ren ame. 3 Press Rename fiel d . A list of alternative names for the field opens. If you are not allowed to rename the field, the Ren ame fiel d com mand button is dimm ed. Informa tion o n fields Company , First n ame , Last n ame , Suffix , Title , Middle Name , Job t itl e , Birthday - Yo u ca n have only one of each of th ese fields. Telephone number fields - Stor ing a â â (plus) character before the country or region code allows y ou to use the s am e phone number a br oad. Enter mobile ph one numbers in this field to sen d short messages. Country or reg ion - Enter a country or region name. If you wan t the address of a contact to be displayed in the format of the country or region, use the same country or region names as listed i n the option Default count ry or region on page 107. Note: Some extra types of field, such as Job descript ion , may appear only if they exist in an im ported contact card. Linda1.book Page 98 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
99 Conta cts To attach a ringing tone Tip: To play a ringing tone, use the Fi le mana ger application to open a ringing tone f ile. See â To open a file â on page 206. The default ringing tones are not displayed in the File manage r. You can set a s pecific ringing ton e for each contac t card. When that c ontact calls you, the communicator plays the chosen ringing tone (if t he telephone number is sent with the ca ll). 1 Open the contact card. 2 Press the Menu key and select Card > Ringing tone . A dialog s howing the current ringing tone of this contact is displayed. 3 Press Chang e . A list of def ault sounds is displayed. 4 Select a sound and press Select . Pres s Browse to sear ch for oth er s ound fi le s stored in the com municator. Note: To use pe rsonal ringing tones, this feature must be active in th e profile that you are us in g. For more information , see â To create a new pr ofile â on page 79. To inser t a pictu re Tip: To def ine yo ur default folder, go to Control panel and open the Def ault folder application. 1 Open the contact card. 2 Press > on the Arrows key to select the picture f rame on the right-hand side of the card. Pr ess Ins ert pi cture . A dialog displaying the contents of the de fault folder opens. Press Browse to search for image files, if necessary. Tip: Alternatively, to insert a picture, press the Menu key and select Card > Ins ert p ictu re . 3 Select a file and press OK . The image is opened in an image viewer. Th e framed area will be inserted into the contact card. Move the area with the Arrows key and enlarge or reduce the frame s iz e with the and - buttons. Press Inse rt . For more information , see â Imagingâ on page 231. Linda1.book Page 99 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
100 Conta cts To crea te or mo di fy temp lates Tip: Templates do not apply to contac t cards in th e SIM card, because th e layout of a SIM contact card is f i xed . Templates define a set of fields which the com municator uses when creating or displaying a contact card. The default te mplate provides a typical range of fields. You can modify th e default template. You can also create custom templat es with fields suitable for a particular group of people, such as those living overseas. Figure 32 1 Press the Menu key and select Tools > Card t emplates . A list of templates opens. 2 Either press New to create a n ew template, or move to a n existing template in the list and press Op en . A contact card template opens. 3 Edit the template. You can change the name of the template and a dd or remove fields. After you have created a contact card, the card and its template are linked as follows: ⢠In a template, if you add or change fields or their labels, changes affect all contact cards created from th at template. If a field is deleted from th e template, the field is dele ted from all the cards, except where the f ield contains data. ⢠In a card, i f you remove fields th at belong to a te mplate, the em pty field will still be there the next time you open the card. Linda1.book Page 100 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
101 Conta cts To st ore DTMF ton es DTMF tones are the tones you hear when you press the number keys on the phone keypad. DTMF tones allow you to com municate with voice mailboxes, computerised telephony systems, etc. You can store a s equence of DTMF tones for a contact ca rd. When you make a call to the contact, you can retrieve the sequence. It will save you from r e-entering the characters. 1 Open or create a contact card. 2 Press Ad d field . A list opens . 3 Scroll down the list to DTMF and press Sel ect . The DTMF field is inserted in the contact card. 4 Enter a DTMF sequence in the DTMF field. If you need a phone n umber-DTMF combination number for a contact, store the phone number followed by th e DTMF sequen ce in the Tel fiel d. You can us e th e following non-numeric characters: Character Function *# The asterisk and ha sh symbols may be used if the DTMF service requires th em p Inserts a pause of approx. 2 seconds before, or be tween, DTMF characters w If you use this character, the remaining sequence is not sent until you press Send tone again during t he call. Linda1.book Page 101 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
102 Conta cts To crea te con tact grou ps You can crea te contact groups to save time by sen ding e-mails and sh ort messages to all members of the contact group in one action. 1 With the Con tacts directory main view displayed, press the Menu key and select File > New group ⦠. A blank group contact card opens. 2 Enter a name for y our group. 3 To add con tacts to the group, press Add membe r . A lis t of contact cards and groups opens. 4 Select a contact and pr ess Ad d . Note that you can add an other contac t group to a group. 5 To attach a pictu re for the group, pr ess > on the Arrows key to m ove to the picture frame. Alternatively, press the Men u key and select Grou p > Insert picture . A dialog displaying the contents of the default folder opens. Sele ct a file and press OK , or press Br owse to searc h for a pic tu re file. 6 To save th e group contact card, press Done . An example of a contact group with members is show n in Figure 33. Figure 33 Linda1.book Page 102 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
103 Conta cts The company name, if it also exists in the original contact card, appears to th e right of the name of the contact. Select Op en to view the details of any of the group member s. To change group memb ershi ps for a contact or a group Figure 34 1 To view or change the groups to which a contact or a group belon gs, open the contact card, press the Menu key, and select Card or Group > Belongs to grou ps . A list opens, showing membersh ips for the contact or group. 2 To add the card to a new group, press Add to group . A list of contact groups in the current database opens. 3 Select a group and press Add . Your contact ca r d or group contact c ar d is added to the group. 4 Press Do ne to save your changes. Linda1.book Page 103 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
104 Conta cts To create a SIM contact card You can view the SIM directory by selectin g SIM card in the Contacts directory. The contacts in your SIM card are displayed with SI M location numbers, as shown below: Figure 35 1 I n the SIM card ma in view, pre ss New contact . A dialog opens, as shown in Figure 36. If fixed d ialling is active, the SIM contents show only you r fixed dialling numbers. For more information on fixed dialli ng, see page 89. 2 The memory location shows th e first free location number. T o change the location, press Chan ge . 3 Type a name for the c o nt a ct . 4 Ty pe a num ber for the conta ct. Note: The length of the name and the phone number you can enter is defined by the SIM car d. For example, some SIM car ds allow a maximum of on ly fourtee n ch ara cters. Linda1.book Page 104 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
105 Conta cts Figure 36 SIM directory options You can sort the contents of the SIM directory in alphabetical order or by memory location. Press the Menu key and select View > Sort by > Name , or Sort b y > SIM locati on . To see a su m mary of the u sage of the SIM database, press the Men u key and select File > Pr operties . If fixed dialling is active, you can see only information about fixed dialling numbers. To send a contact card as a business card Tip: You ca n se nd onl y one business car d in each mes sage y ou send ; howe ver, you can send it to many recipients. When you send or receive a contact card between the communicator and other devices, the term â business cardsâ is used. A business car d is a contact card in a format suitable for transmission, usually vCard format. You can add received business cards to your Contacts directory, where they become contact cards. 1 In the Contacts director y main view, select the card you want to send. Linda1.book Page 105 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
106 Conta cts Tip: PC mail and the short messa ge service ar e explained in the â Messagingâ chapter, starting on page 157. I f a c onta ct ca rd i s sen t as a short m essage, the car d is s e nt in t h e S ending format defined on page 108. 2 Press the Menu key and select File > Send . In the Send su bmenu, mak e a furt her choice of media: As a mail / As a sh ort message/ Via infrared . Yo u m ay hav e othe r sending options if you h ave installed additional software. An editor dialog opens, dependin g on the sending medium you have ch osen, as shown in the exam ple b elow. Th e contac t card yo u want to send ha s now bec ome a â business card â . Figure 37 3 To ch oose who receives the sen t card messages, press Recipi ent . Tip: If you change t he setting to include images in the message , do not forget to change it back after you have se nt t h e mes sage t o reduce call charges. 4 If you are sending via th e short message service, the images are left out by default to reduce call charges. If you want to in clude the image in the message, you must change the setting. See â Send as a shor t mes sage page â on page 108. 5 If you are about to send via in frared, make sure you acti vate the receiving of infrared in the other device first. 6 Press Send . To rece iv e a b usi ne ss ca rd When you receive a business card from another device, you are alerted by a notification message. This message appears automatically on the display, in any application. Follow the screen prompts to view the business card. Linda1.book Page 106 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
107 Conta cts Note the following information about the contents of received card(s): A field is displayed if it is recognised; if not, it is ign ored. Audio data, in a supported format, is set as th e personal ringing tone of the contact (if you c hoose to add th e card to you r Contacts dir ectory) To add the received card to your Contacts director y, press Add to Contacts . The card is con verted to con tact car d format. T o reject the card, press Delet e . Settings Press the Menu key and select Tools > Settin gs , then select a page, as follows: General page Figure 38 Default t emplate : Allows you to define which template is used when creating a new contact card. When you press Change , you can choose a template from a list of templates used with the curr ent database. Linda1.book Page 107 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
108 Conta cts Name display : Allows you to define the display order of names in th e Contacts dir ec to ry ma in vi ew . The va l u es are First name Last na me / Last name, First name . The names wil l be displ ayed in the sam e order in the Telephone application and the cover phone. Default cou ntry or region : Concerns the country or region whose address for mat is used when viewing contact card addresses in various displays in the communicator. By default, the address format of the cou ntry or region you enter in the Country or r egion field of a contact ca rd is used. If you do not enter inf ormation in the Country o r r egion field, the communicator uses the a ddress format of th e D efault cou ntry or regi on . Each country or region has a pr edefined address format. Press Chang e to see a list of countries and regions. Send as a short message page Example: The Nokia 9000 i/ 9110 /91 10i c omm uni cato rs and most of the m ajor e- mail clients support the vCard fo rm at. Se ndin g f or mat : Allows you to define the format used when sending a business ca rd via the short message serv ice. Th e value s are Compact / vCar d . Compa ct is more widely supported but the number of f ields sent is mor e restricted. Use vCard for mat if you know the receiving device understands vCard format. Using vCard format, you ca n send all fields except Note and DTM F . Send contact c ard pictures : Allows you to control the attaching of pictures when sending business cards in vCar d format via the short message serv ice . The options are No / Yes . Linda1.book Page 108 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
109 Conta cts VIP group page VI P grou p : A llows you to nominate an existing contact card group to be treated as VIP gr oup . You can res trict the ringing of inc oming calls so that only ca lls from a memb er of a VI P gr oup w ill ring, the others wi ll not ring. See Pr ofile settings, â Other page â on page 81. To create a ne w cont acts database Contacts da tabases a re created on a m emory card. 1 Press the Menu ke y and select File > M ore option s > New database . 2 Type th e name of your database, th en press the E nter ke y. See Figur e 39. Your new database is added to th e Contacts directory as a folder. 3 To add a new card to the new database, select and open the database in the Contacts directory, then press New card . To copy or move con tacts to the new database, select existing contacts from the Contacts directory, press the Menu key, and select File > More option s > Copy to or > Mo ve to . Tip: To se e a s umm ary o f the usage of the database, press the Menu key and select File > Proper ties . Figure 39 Note: If you have a r ead-only memor y card, y ou cannot make ch anges to the contacts or databases on that card. Linda1.book Page 109 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
110 Conta cts Linda1.book Page 110 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
111 Cale nd ar 7. Calendar In the Calendar application, you can create and check your scheduled events, appointments, anniversaries, and birthdays. You can also list things to do and set alarms to all of th e calendar entries. You can synchronise your calendar and tasks with Microsoft and Lotus programs when you co nnect your communicator to a compatible PC. For information on synchronisation, see â To transfer data from other devices â on page 35 and the PC Suite Guide on the CD-ROM. Calend ar ent ri es There are four types of entry that y ou can s tore in the Calendar applica tion: Example: Use appointment entries for meetings and bus iness lu nches. ⢠Appointment entries are the basic en tries in your calendar. ⢠Event entries are related to the whole day, not to a specific time of day. Even t entries do not appear in the Weekly time schedule. ⢠Anniversary entries are repeated annually on the same date. Use Anniversary entries for annual r eminders of important dates, such as birthdays or celebrations. Linda1.book Page 111 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
112 Cale nd ar Tip: You can use th e standard clipboard command shortcuts Ctrl X and Ctrl V to cut entries and paste them to a differ ent place . ⢠Task entries are f or writing down lists and things to do. These tasks can be prioritised and organi sed into task lists. Tasks can also h ave deadlines. There a re seven dif feren t views to view entrie s. Pres s Ch a n g e v ie w to choose a view. For more information about different view s, see â Viewsâ on page 118. To create new calendar entries There a re two wa ys to create ca lendar entri es: Tip: To send a c al e nda r entry to reserve a time in other device calendars, move to the date th at contains the entry and select the entry with the Arrows key, press the Menu key and select Send > As a short m essage or Via infrar ed ⢠Start typing your entry. A s you enter charac ters, Calendar opens the default entry dialog of the curr ent view. ⢠Press the Menu key and select File > New entry . Se lect the entry you wa nt to create. The options are: Appointment ⦠, Event ⦠, Anniversa ry ⦠, or Task ⦠. This is the way to create a new calendar en try when you do not want to use the default entry type for the particular view. To define inform atio n in a cal e nda r entry Tip: To change the default values of an entry details dialog, press the Menu key and select Entry > Default set tings . Figure 40 Linda1.book Page 112 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
113 Cale nd ar Tip: To se e ho w attachments a re added to an entry, see page 118. Note: Day, event, an niversary, and task entry all have slightly different entry dialogs. The followin g descriptions of each dialog page list all the possibilities. Details page Descript ion : The description of the entry. Tip: An u ntimed entry is displayed with a icon. Timed : Specif ies whether a day entry is timed or untimed. â Timedâ mean s that th e entry has a s pecific start time, end time, and duration. â Untimed â mean s that the entry happens on a particular date, but at no specific tim e. If you select No , you may have to define the date for the day entry in the field below. If you select Yes , you must define the starting and ending time. Date : The date of the entry. Start : The time or date when th e entry starts, depending on the entry type. Example: The st art ye ar may be a person âÂÂs year of birth, and t h e n um ber of yea rs since the star t year may be a person â s ag e. Displa y year : Displays the s tart year of th e anniversary, th e number of y ears th at have passed since the start year, or no year information. The options are Startin g year / In nu mber of years / None. Durati on : The duration of the en try. If you chan ge the value in the Start and End fields, this field is u pdated. End : The time when the entry en ds. Priorit y : The prior ity of a task. The options are High / No rmal / Low . Task list : The task list to wh ich the task entry is connected. Due date : T he de a dli ne o f a t a sk. Start warni ng : The da ys before the due da te when a tas k starts being shown in today â s entry list. Linda1.book Page 113 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
114 Cale nd ar Alarm page Tip: You can set an ala rm for a task entry only if you have also set a Due date . Set alarm : Specifie s wh e ther an alar m is se t for the entry. Time before : The time when an alarm set for a timed day entry will go off. Alarm ti me : The time when an alarm set for an u ntimed entry will go off. Days befo re : The number of days before an en try when an alarm will go off. Repeat page Example: If your club has a meeting which takes place on th e f irst M onday of ev er y mont h, yo u c an set the entr y to recur accordingly by selecting Monthly by day . On this page you can determine wh ether and when you want an en try to be repea ted: Repeat type : The repeat type for the entry. The options are No repeat / D aily/ Work in g day s / W eekly / Monthly by d ay / Mont hly by d ate / Year ly by day / Y early by dat e . Note: Define Repeat type first since the choice of options in the rest of the fields depends on what you have selected. Repeat on days : The days on which the entry is repeated. Use the Arrows key to go to a day you want to select and press Select . You can se le ct mor e than one day at a time. See Figure41. Figure 41 Linda1.book Page 114 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
115 Cale nd ar Repeat on dates : The dates on which the entry is repeated. U se the Arrows key to go to a date you want to s elect and press Select . You can selec t more than one date at a time. See Figure 42. Figure 42 Example: T o d e f i n e a n e n t r y that is repeated Dail y with two days between every repeat, define â ever y 3 da y s â in Repeat inte rval . Repeat interval : The time per iod between r epeats. Repeat indefin itely : Frequency of the r epetition. The option s are Yes / No . Note: It i s still possible to rem ove or edit a single en try even if the entry is repeating. If you e dit an entry and change any options except the repeat options, a selection list appears. You then choose how you want the change to take place from the following options: All oc currences / Only this occu rrence / T his and f uture occur rences / This and p ast occ urrences . Statu s page On this page you can def ine a background colour and status for the entry, as we ll as s p ecif y wh eth e r y o u wan t to s y n chr oni s e t h e e nt r y: Tip: Colour is a handy way to categorise ent ries - you see more easily how your time is reserved. Colour marking : Allows you to define the colour and letter for the entry symbol, which appears after th e text of the en try in all views. When you check your calendar entries in the Weekly time or Year sch e dules, the colour is used for the bar indicating the entry. The letter is used to filter Calendar entries in the Y ear schedule. Linda1.book Page 115 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
116 Cale nd ar Example: If y ou a re not sure if an entry will take pla ce, you can m ark it as Tentative . Tentat ive : Whether an en try is confirmed or not. A tentative entry is indicated with icon next to the entry text. Crossed o ut : Whether an entry has been completed or not. Cr ossing out an entry does not remove it f rom the calendar. Synchro nisation : Whether your calendar entries are shown to others when you connect to the network and synchronise your calendar. The options are Publ ic , Private , an d No synch ronisation . See the PC Suite Guide on the CD- ROM for more information about synchron isation . To edit an entry 1 Se lect the entry in the view. 2 Press Enter. A details dia log for the entr y opens. Edit the details on the variou s pages. You can now, f or example, res et the alarm or redefin e how the entry is repeat ed in the ca lendar. See â To define information in a calendar e ntry â on page 112. To chang e an entry t ype Example: You might have entered an event, but you n o w w a n t t o c h a n g e i t t o a n appointment. 1 Se lect the entry in the view. 2 Press the Menu key and select Entry > Change entry type ⦠. 3 Choose a n ew entry type from the list. Linda1.book Page 116 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
117 Cale nd ar Tip: To ch an ge t he default entry type of a particular view, press the Menu key and select View > View settings ⦠. See Defau lt entry type in âÂÂView settings â on page 12 9. To delete entries You should tidy up your calendar from time to time by deleting entries, sin ce calendar entries accumulate over time and consume memory. Note: You can also back up your calendar data to a compatible PC. See the PC Suite Guide on the sales package CD-ROM f or details. To delete a single entry There are tw o ways to delete a single entry: Tip: The shortcut to delete a single entry is to select it an d press Ctrl D. ⢠Select the entry in the view, then press the backspace key. A note is displayed asking you to confirm the de letion. ⢠Select the entry in the view, press the Menu key, and then select File > Delete entry . To confir m the deletion, pr ess OK . To delete a range of entries using def ined crit eria Tip: Yo u can m ove en tries to another f ile and th e n to a PC to fre e up memo ry . 1 Press the Menu ke y and select Tools > Move/Delete ⦠. A dialog box is displayed with a suggested range of entries t o be deleted. 2 Press OK to delete all the entries defined in the dialog box at step 1, or press Optio ns to define further criteria (including whether you want to â move â or to â deleteâ . A dialog with two pages ope ns. Define the following and press Done to return to the previous dialog. Details page Action : The consequences of rem oving the en tries . Th e options are Delete / Move to a file . Entr ies : The types of entries w hich will be removed. The option s are All / Crossed out . Linda1.book Page 117 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
118 Cale nd ar Time period : The time scope of the removal. The options are Whole calendar / U ntil today / From today / Ot h e r . Start : The start date of the entries to be removed. End : The end date of the entrie s to be removed. Entry types page Choose from the f ollowing options: Appointments / Even ts / A nniversaries / Ta sks . To vi ew, create, and del ete attach ments 1 Open a calendar entry by pr essing Enter. The entry details dialog with four pages opens. 2 Press Attachments . A selection list of attachments linked to the calendar entry opens. 3 To view a selected attachment, press Open . To create a new attachment, press Ne w . To delete an attachment, press Delet e . 4 If you want to add a new attachment , select the type of attach ment and press Ins e r t n e w to create the n ew attac hment or Ins ert exi sti ng to browse for an exi sting att achme nt. Views Tip: You can press the Calendar application button repeatedly to cycle the view. The Calendar consist s of seven views. The purpose of each view is to h elp you organise your calendar so that you manage your time effectively on a daily, weekly, monthly, and yearly basis. Y ou can custom ise the display of each view. Linda1.book Page 118 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
119 Cale nd ar Commands in all view s Tip: In m o st of t he vi ew s you can go to today â s date by pressing the Space key on the keyboard. The following command buttons are av ailable in all of the views: Edit - O pens a selected ca lendar entry for editing. New entry - Enables you to create a new ca lendar entry if there are n o entries for that day. You can also create a new calendar entry by just starting to enter characters on the keyboard, see â To create new calendar entries â on page 112. Change view - O pens a selection list from which you can s witch to any of t he other calendar views. The options are Month / W eek / Day / T ask lists / Weekly time schedule / Yea r s ch edu le / Anniv ersari es. Go to date - Opens a search dial og from which you can, by typin g in the de sired date, switch to any date in the calendar. Enter the date and pr ess OK . Press Today to go to today â s date. Press Browse to browse through th e calendar. Month view Figure 43 Linda1.book Page 119 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
120 Cale nd ar Left frame Tip: To edit an event, the right frame must be active. If you are in the left fra me, go to the de sired date and press th e Enter key. The focus moves to the right frame . One row in the day table equals one week. Abbreviations for the days of the we ek are in the highest row. Today â s date is marked in gr een. Dates that have scheduled ev ents are marked in bo ld and blue. The currently selected date is highlighted. Right frame Tip: To see a list of icons that are displa yed in all views, see page 12 5. The events of the currently selected date are shown in the day details frame on the right. Week view Tip: To change the starting day of the week, press Extras, open the Control panel, and select Regional sett ings . Choose Date page and then First day of the week . Figure 44 Linda1.book Page 120 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
121 Cale nd ar Tip: To move the position of the title box from lef t to right, press the Menu key and select View > View settings ⦠. See T itle loc ation in â View settingsâ on page 129. The week view shows the events for the selected week in se ven day boxes. The coloured indicator ar e a next to a d ay box shows the date and name of the day. Today â s indicator area is framed green. Day view Figure 45 The day view shows the eve nts for the selected d ay. Tip: To change the time period covered in one time slot, press the Menu key and select View > View settings ⦠. See Time slot alloc ation in â View settingsâ on page 129. Events are grouped into one time slot according to their starting time. To view the day view of the previous day, press < on the Arrows key. T o view the next day, press >. Linda1.book Page 121 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
122 Cale nd ar Tip: In day and w eek vi ew s, you can qu ic kl y mo ve to a different date by pressing the Tab key, selecting the desired date with the Arrows key, and pressing E nter. Task lists Figure 46 Tip: To see how to-do task lists are created, see page 126. You can c reate one or s everal business or personal t ask lists which m ay contain tasks with or without deadlines. You can also set an alarm or a repeat for a task. The page number in the upper right corner of the Task list view indicates the position of the task list a mong the other task lists . For example, in Figure 46 , â 1/6â means that there are altogether six task lists and â Urgent ta sk s â is the first list. Tip: To see a list of all task lists, press the Tab key. To view the previous task list, press < on the Arrows key. To view the next task list, press >. Due dates are shown to the right of a task, in brackets. Linda1.book Page 122 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
123 Cale nd ar Weekly time schedule Tip: You c an sel e ct different bar colou rs for different types of entries. See â Status page â on page 115. Figure 47 The weekly time schedule show s the re served hours for the selecte d week. T his means that only timed entries are shown The currently selected time box is framed. Entries ar e m arke d with bars. Example: Use a green bar for hobbies and a red bar for business trips to get a quick overview of your activities during a week. See â View settings â on page 1 29. If a time box contains entries, the bar across the bottom of the weekly time schedule shows the details of th e entry. The numbers to the right of the entry description indicate the number of entries contained in that time box. For example, 1/2 in Figure 47 m eans that you are seeing the details of the first of two entries. If a time box contains more than one entry, you can view a list of the entries by pressing the T ab key. Linda1.book Page 123 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
124 Cale nd ar Year sched ule Figure 48 The year schedule shows th e timetable for the selected year. Only entri es with colours are shown in the year schedule. If there are several colours connected to the day, only one can b e shown. Abbreviations for the days of the we ek are in the highest r ow and the m onths of the year in t he far left column. Time boxes have the same functions as in the Weekly tim e schedule. Anniversaries Figure 49 Linda1.book Page 124 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
125 Cale nd ar Tip: To ch an ge t he number of months shown in the an niversary view, pr ess the Menu key and select View > View settings ⦠. See Months in view in â View settings â on page 1 29. The an niv er sar y view show s the an niv e rsa ries fo r four mo nt h s at a t i me . You ca n add here all the birthdays and other anniversaries that you w ant to be reminded of. Note: Only anniversary entries are shown in th e anniversary view. Icons You can see the f ollowing symbols in Cal endar: - Alarm - Annive rs ar y - Attachment - Even t - Repeating e ntry - Ten t at i v e ent ry - Task - Task, with high importance - Task, with low importance - Untimed entry Linda1.book Page 125 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
126 Cale nd ar Task li sts To create a new task list 1 Press the Menu key and select File > New task list ⦠. A dialog with two pages opens. 2 De fine the task list on the two pages of the dialog. See â Details pageâ and â Visibility pageâ below. 3 When you are ready, press Close . The new task list is added in Task lists. Details page Tip: If you choose to sort a task list man ually, all tasks on the list appear n umbered. You ca n e nt e r a new ta sk entry randomly by f ocusing on a location in the list. You can also change the order of the tasks by cutting and pasting (Ctrl X and Ctr l V). List name : The name of the task list. Posit ion : The position of the task list among the other task lists. Sortin g : How the tasks are sorted h ierarchically in the task list. The options are Manual / Priority th en date / D ate then priority . Visibilit y page Show task s : The view s in which the tasks on the list will be shown. The options are All views / Tas k list view . Task po sition : The position of the tasks in an event list if the tas ks are all shown in All views . To edit a task list 1 O pen the task l ist. 2 Press th e Menu key and select View > Task list s ettings ⦠. A dialog with two pages, Details and Visibility , opens, as explained above. Linda1.book Page 126 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
127 Cale nd ar To delete a task list 1 Open the task list. 2 Press the Menu ke y and select File > Del ete task li st . To search for Calendar entries You can search through the entries for part icular pieces of texts. 1 Press the Menu ke y and select Tools > Find entry ⦠. A search f ield opens. 2 Enter a key word for the entry you want to search f or, or press Options to restrict the search by defining a set of qualifications. A dialog with two pages ope ns. Define the f ollowing: Detail s p a ge Refine search : Defines the s earch. The option s are No / Entries wit h an alar m / Entr ies with rep etition / Cross ed out entries . Time per io d : The time s cope of the sear ch. The options are Whole calend ar / Until today / From today / User defined . From : The starting point of the search. Unt il : The ending point of th e search. Ent ry ty pes pag e Choose the type of entries you want to find. The options a re: Appointments / Event s / Annive rsaries / Tasks . Tip: You ca n st o p a search by pressing Stop . 3 To start s earch ing, press Find . A ch ronological list of th e fin d r esults is shown. See Figure 50. Linda1.book Page 127 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
128 Cale nd ar Figure 50 4 Select an entry and press: ⢠Edit to open the entry details dialog for editing, ⢠Go t o to go to the date or view where the entry is located or, ⢠New find to star t a new search. 5 Press Clos e to return to the currently active view. Sett ings Gene ra l se tt ing s 1 Press the Menu key and select Tools > General set tings ⦠. A dialog opens. 2 De fine the following: Default view : The default view w hen opening either another or a ne w calendar file. Display unt imed entries : The location of untimed appointmen t, event, and anniversary entries in the entry list of all the timed views. 3 Press Done to return to the currently active view. Linda1.book Page 128 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
129 Cale nd ar View settin gs You can defin e the a ppearance of the view a nd default en try types for each view by following these steps: 1 Go to the view you want to define. 2 Press the Menu ke y and select View > View s ettings ⦠. A dialog with two pa ges opens. 3 Define the view settings on the two pages of the dialog. See â Details pageâ and â Entry typesâ below. 4 Press Do ne to return to the currently active view . Note: The contents of the dialog vary in different views. The following is a list of all the possibilities. Details page Default ent ry type : The entry type which is inserted in the view by defau lt when you create a new entry. T he options are Appointment / Event / Anni versary / Tas k . Wrap text : Specif ies whether or not the information in the entry is wrapped when viewed in any of the views. Title l ocat ion : Specifies whether th e title of the we ek is on the lef t or righ t of the display in t he weekly view. Time slo t allocation : The tim e period covered in one tim e slot of the da ily views and weekly time schedules. The options a re 2 hours / 1 hour/ 30 m inutes/ 15 minutes . Day st arts : The time when a day starts in the Daily view. Day ends : The time when a day ends in the Daily view. Linda1.book Page 129 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
130 Cale nd ar Show colour markings : Specifies whether all entry symbols or only sy mbols with t he letter specified in Default colou r are shown in the year view. Default colour : The symbols and background colours of the different entry types in the particular view. Months in view : T he number of month boxes in the anniversary view. Entry types On the Entry types page you can ch oose th e en try types you wan t to appear in th e view you are defining: Appointments / Eve nts / Anniversaries / Tasks . Linda1.book Page 130 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
131 Internet 8. Internet This chapter describes how to get access to the Internet and how to use the Internet applications. When you take your communicator into use, it has the following browser applications: WWW - A World Wide Web (WWW) browser supporting frames, JavaScript, and SSL protocol. Tip: To access WAP services, you need both an Internet access point and a WAP access point. See page 152. WAP - A browser for accessing various types of information, entertainment, and other services in Wireless Application Protocol (WAP) format. WAP is suited to mobile devices with small screen displays and limited amounts of memory. WAP uses mainly text but does support pictures. To connect to the Internet, ⢠the wireless ne twork you use must support data calls, ⢠the data service m ust be activated for your SIM card, ⢠you must have obtained an Internet access point from an Inter net Service Provider (ISP), and ⢠you must have entered the proper Internet settings. Note: The Mail application, described in the Messagin g chapter, also uses an Inte rn et c on nec t io n . Se e â Mailâ on page 170. Your ISP can give you instructions on how to configure the I nternet settings. Follow the instructions carefully. Linda1.book Page 131 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
132 Internet Note: You must have your phone turned on, within network coverage and free of any other voice or data c all to con nect to the Internet. To set up yo ur Intern et acces s point Note: To be able to use the Internet services, you need to configure an Internet connection. Some Internet service providers may offer you the possibility to conf igure your Inter net se tting s by send i n g yo u a sma rt me ss age via SMS. This might redu ce the number of settings you need to enter yourself, or e liminate the need altogeth er. Please contact your Internet Service Provider (ISP) for details. Internet connections To set up and change the Internet settings, go to the Control panel in the Extras application group and open Internet access. For more i nformation, see page 216. Figure 51 The first two lin es contain a summary of the details of th e preferred connection. Define the following: Linda1.book Page 132 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
133 Internet Tip: Yo u may ha ve to set up several I nte rn et connections, dep ending on the sites you want to acc ess. For example, browsing the WWW may require one setup; browsing your company â s intran et may require another connection. Preferred co nnection : The default connection w hich will be used to connect to the Intern et. If idle, stay onlin e : The connection to the Internet will automatically close after the inactivity period defined h ere. The options are For 2 minut es / For 5 minute s/ For 10 minutes /For 60 minut es . IMPO RTA NT : Some Internet conn ections may appear inactive, but th ey may still be sending and receiving data in the background. These connections may delay the start of the inactivity period specified here, and theref ore postpone the closing of the connection. Ask befo re co nnec ting : T he options are Yes / No . If you choose Ye s , a connection dialog appears every time you connect to th e Internet, asking you to either confir m, change, or cancel the connection, or chan ge the Internet access point. If you choose No , the communicator will choose t he default Internet access point. To create a new connection or ed it an existing connection 1 In the Internet connections dialog, press New to create a new conne ction or Edit to edit an existin g connection. Linda1.book Page 133 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
134 Internet Figure 52 2 If you already have connections defined, you can use an exi sting connection as a basis for the new connection. After you have pressed New , press Use existing . Choose the connection you want from the list which appears, and pre ss OK . 3 A dialog on connection details opens. See Figure 53. Note: The exact values for the settin gs are provided by your ISP. Figure 53 4 De fine the following: Tip: All your con nections should have different names. Connection name : Give a descriptive name for the connection. Phone num ber : The mode m telephone number of th e IAP. Linda1.book Page 134 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
135 Internet Tip: Oft en t he mi n imu m requir eme nt for a n In te rnet connection is: Phone number , Use rna me , a nd Passwor d . Password prompt : If you must type in a new password every time you log on to a server, or if you do not wan t to sa ve your pass word, choose Yes . The options are Yes / No . Username : T ype in a user name if r equired by th e Internet Ser vice Provider (ISP ). The us er name may be n eeded to con nect to the Internet, and is usually provided by the ISP. The user name is often case-sensitive. Pass word : Type in a pa ssword if required by the ISP. The password may be needed to connect to the In ternet, and is usually provided by the ISP. The password is often case-sen sitive. Confirm password : C onfirm your password by retypin g it in this field. Press Advan c e d se t ti n gs to define the Advanced settings of the conne ction. A dialog with four pages opens. See Figure 54. Figure 54 Proxies pag e You may want to use a proxy to quicken a ccess to the Internet. Note also that some ISPs require th e use of Web pr oxies. Contact your ISP to determine proxy details. Linda1.book Page 135 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
136 Internet When you have made an Internet connection for your company â s intranet, and you are unable to r etrieve Web pages from the gen eral WWW, you may need to setup a proxy server to r etrieve Web pages outside your company â s int r an e t . Tip: If y ou s et U se proxy serve r to No , Port nu mber , Proxy serv er , and No proxy for are dimmed. Use proxy server : To use the pr oxy server, sele ct Yes . The options a re Yes / No . Use of a proxy ser ver is dependent on the protocol. Port number : The number of the proxy port. The port n umber is related to the protocol. Common values are 8000 and 8080, but vary with proxy server. Example : Example domain na mes ar e: c ompa ny. com and organisation.org. In a list, separate domain names with semicolons. Proxy ser ver : The IP address of the proxy server, or the domain name. No pr oxy for : Define here the domains for w hich the HTTP proxy is n ot needed. Data call page Figure 55 Tip: To divert and bar data calls, go to the Internet application main view, then press Tools > Control panel > Data call b arring . Connect ion type : The options are Normal / High sp eed . Note: To be able to use H igh speed , the network service provider has to support this feature, and if necessary, to activate it for your SIM card. Linda1.book Page 136 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
137 Internet Remote modem type : The options are An alog / V.110 ISDN / V.120 ISDN . This setting can depend on both your GSM network operator and ISP, because some GSM networks do not support cer tain types of ISDN connections. For details, contact your Internet service provider. If ISDN connections are available, they establish connections more quickly than analog methods. Tip: A very bas ic GSM data connection is: Connection type : Normal , Remote modem typ e : Ana log , and Max. connect ion speed : Auto matic . Max. connection speed : The op tions ar e Autom atic / 9600 /14400 /19200 /28800 /38400 / 43200 , de pending on what you h ave chosen in Connection t ype and Remote modem ty pe . This option allows you to limit the maximu m connection speed when H igh speed is used. Higher data rates may cost more, depending on the network s ervice provider. Note: The speeds above are the maximum spe ed at which your connection will operate. During the connection, the operating speed may be less, depending on n etwork conditions. Modem initi alisatio n : Controls your communicator using modem AT commands . If required, enter ch aracters specified by your GSM network service pr ovider or ISP. Callback page Use callb ack : This option allows a ser ver to call you back once you have made the initial call, so you have a connection without paying for the call. Contact your Internet service provider to su bscribe to this service. The options a re Yes / No . Note: Charges may a pply for certain t ypes of r eceived calls, such as roa ming and high speed data calls. Contact your GSM network operator for more information. Linda1.book Page 137 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
138 Internet Callbac k type : The options are Use server number / Us e server number (IET F) / Use number below . Ask your Internet serv ice provider for the correct setting to use. The setting depends on the ser vice provider â s configuration. Callbac k number : Type in your com municator â s data phone number which the dial back server uses. Usually, this number is the data call phone number of your communicator. Other page Figure 56 Allow plain text login : If you select Yes , the password at connection may be sent in clear. The options a re Yes / No . For optimum security, u se option No . Some Internet service provider s require that this setting is Yes . Use PPP com pression : If you select Yes , this option speeds up the dat a transfer, if it is supported by the remote PPP serv e r. The options are Yes / No . If you hav e problems with establishing a connection, try settin g this to No . Contac t your Internet service provider for guidance. Linda1.book Page 138 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
139 Internet Script op tions If you need to define scr ipt options for you r Internet connection, press Scr ipt opt ions on the Other page. A script can automate the con nection between the communicator and the server. See Figure 57. Tip: Your Inte rnet service provider may be able to provide you with a s cript. Note: Scripts are not u sually required when you establish a connection. T o find out wheth er you need a script, contact you r Internet service pr ovider. Figure 57 Tip: Advanced users will find scripting an advantage, where use of scripting is allowed. You can obtain instructions from Forum No ki a at UR L www.forum.n okia.com Press Edit script to edit the s cript. In the Edit script dia log you can press Import script to import a script. On importing, it replaces the curr ent contents of the script file. Define the f ollowing: Use login s cript : The options are Yes / No . Displa y terminal windo w : The options are Yes / No . If you choose Yes , once a connection is established you see the execution of the s cript. Use this window when r esolving connection problems r elated to scripting, with your Internet service provider. Linda1.book Page 139 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
140 Internet Address op tions Tip: There is a glossary con t ai ning In ter net term s and abbreviations a t the back of this user â s guide. Press Address opti ons on the Other page, to define the IP and DNS addresses. See Figure 58. Define the following: Figure 58 Auto retr ieve IP address : If you select Yes , the IP a ddress is obtained automatically from the server. The option s are Yes / No . T his setting is als o called â dynamic IP address â . IP address : The IP address of the communicator. I f the IP address is obtained automatically, then you are not required to en ter details here. Auto retr ieve DNS addres s : If you select Yes , the DNS (Domain Name Server) address is obtained automatica lly from the server. The options are Yes / No . Primary D NS address : The IP address of the primary DNS server . Secondar y DNS addres s : The IP address of the secondary DNS server. Note: If you need to enter the IP address , Primary DNS addr ess , or Secondary DNS address , contact your Internet service provider to obtain these addresses. Linda1.book Page 140 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
141 Internet Tip: When you ar e browsing the WWW, some Web pages may prompt you to save (download) a file to your local disk (your communicator). See the IMPORTANT n ote in this section warning about viruses. To connect to the World Wide Web To connect to t he World Wide Web, ⢠the GSM data s ervice must be activated for your SIM card, and ⢠you must configure an Inte rnet access point. See page 132. Note: Only install software from sources that offer adequate protection against vir uses and othe r ha rmfu l so ftwa re. For information on softwar e installation and security certificat es, see â Certificate manager â on page 222. Tip: To ch an ge t he internet access point press the Menu key in the Internet application group view and select Tool s > Internet access ⦠or go to the Contr ol panel in the Extr as application group an d open Internet access. For more information, see page 133. Figure 59 To open the WWW browser, 1 Press the Interne t application button on the com municator keyboard. 2 Select the W WW application and press Open . ⢠Unless you have already redefined the default homepage, a Nokia 9210i link page opens. This page is located in the m emory of your communicator and does not require an in ternet connection. ⢠If you have redef ined a homepage, a dialog with the Connection name and Phone number of the Internet access point you are using i s displayed. See Figure 60. You can also choose not to see the connection dia log when the Linda1.book Page 141 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
142 Internet connection is made; see â Internet connectionsâ on page 132. To chan ge the Internet access point, press Change conn ecti on . Pr ess OK to establish a connection. Figure 60 Note: In order to free up additional memory for large Web pa ges, all other applications a re closed automatically when the WWW browser is opened. 3 For in formation on opening Web pages and navigating in the We b, see â To open a Web page â on page 142. For information on adding a page to you r bookmark list, see â Bookmarksâ on page 149 4 To close an application, press Close . Tip: An alternative way to disconnect from the Internet is to close the cover and press the key. 5 To disconnect f rom the Intern et, in any of the Internet applications, press the Internet button on the keyboard, th en press Discon ne ct . Disconnection is immediate. Note: Depending on th e network configuration and load, establishing an Internet connection may take a minute or more. To open a Web page There are several ways to ope n a page in the World Wide Web. Linda1.book Page 142 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
143 Internet Example: An example of a URL address is www.nokia.co m 1 If you know the a ddress of the Web page that you want to visit, press Open URL , type the address into the address field, and press OK . Alternatively, select a li nk on your default home page and press Go to Figure 61 Tip: If you have a bookmark of th e page you want to visit, press the Menu key an d select T ools > Bookmarks . Select a bookmark in the Bookmarks list and press Go to . 2 A dialog with th e Connection name and Phon e number of the In ternet access point you are using is displayed. See Figure 60. You can also choose not to see the connection dial og when the connection is ma de; see â Inter net connections â on page 132. To ch ange the Internet access point, press Change connection . Press OK to establish a connection. Note: If the page and its components are encrypted by a security protocol, the security icon appears on the title bar. Note: Some servers have access restrictions that require a valid user nam e and password. In this case, you will be pr ompted for your u ser name and password before the Web page can be retrieved. Linda1.book Page 143 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
144 Internet Tip: To save pa ge elements in your communicator, press the Menu key, select Fil e > Save , and select the appropriate submenu command. To browse the WWW After the Web page has been retrieved, the following commands become available, depending on what is selected on th e page: Open URL - Press to open a dialog where you can define a we b page to open. Go to - When a link is s elected, press Go t o to view the target of the link. Bac k - Allows you to r etrieve the previous page that you have ju st browsed. Bookm ar ks - Open s the Bookmar ks view. Clos e - Closes th e WWW browser application. Linda1.book Page 144 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
145 Internet Tip: To go t o y our ho me page, press the Menu key and select Na vigation > Go to home page . To browse with the keyboard The best way to browse a page and the WWW is to use both the keyboard shortcuts and the pointer. You can use the Tab key and some othe r keys to select elements on a page or the pointer as a mouse to select elements directly. The following table lists useful keyboard s hortcuts of the W WW application. Y ou can f ind more shortcuts in the application next to me nu commands. Key Function Enter Tab Shift Tab A Q S W D E Ctrl Tab Clicks with the poin ter Selects the n ext box, button or othe r form element. Selects the previous form element on a page Selects the next link on a page Selects the previous link on a page Selects the next heading on a page Selects the previous heading on a page Selects the next element on a page Selects the previous element on a page Selects the next frame, if available. Chr up/ d own ar row (on Arr o ws key) Ctrl left/right arrow (on A rrows key) Ctrl up/ d o wn arro w (o n Ar row s ke y) Scrolls the pa ge screen by screen Scrolls to th e start or to the end of the page Scrolls the page line by line X Z Moves to the next page, if already visited Moves to the previous page, if already visited Shift Enter G Displays Save as comman d, if an image is selected or Show URL command, if a link is sele cted. Toggles the loading of im ages on or off. Linda1.book Page 145 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
146 Internet To browse with the pointer You can see the pointer on the screen when you open a web page. The functionality of the pointer is similar to a mouse, but you move it with the Arrows key and click it by pressing the Enter key. To select an area, keep Enter pressed down and move the pointer over the area with the Arrows key. To scroll a page, you have several options: ⢠Move the pointer onto the scr oll bar, pr ess Enter and keep it pressed down as long as necessary. Tip: Press Ctrl Tab to change the active frame. ⢠Move the pointer onto the scroll bar and press the space key to turn on continuous scrolling. The page scrolls and the scroll box m oves to the direction of the pointer whenever the pointer is in the scrolling area. Press the space key again to turn off continuous scroll ing. ⢠Move the pointer over the edge of the window to th e dire ction where you want to scroll the page to scroll the page automatically. Tip: Useful shortcu ts are: Ct rl R for Reload , an d Ctrl Z for Sto p loading . Loading option s Depending on the number and siz e of images and oth er elements some web pages may be slow to load. T o control loading you have the follo wing options: ⢠Re load the page or stop l oading altogether; press the Menu key and select Navigati on > Reload > Reloa d or Sto p . ⢠Turn off the auto-loading of images. The images are then replaced by placeholders. Press the Menu key and s elect Tools > Settings ⦠, go to the General page and in the Show images field select No . ⢠Toggle the loading of images on and off by pressing the G ke y. Linda1.book Page 146 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
147 Internet To change frame sizes Tip: To change th e active frame when a W eb page conta ins fr am es , pre ss Ctr l T ab. Where a Web page contains frames, you can change the frame sizes of the page, to get a better view of the con tents of the selected frame. 1 Move the pointer cu rsor over a fr ame border. 2 Press and hold down the Enter key. Arrows are displayed around the selected frame b or d e r 3 Use th e Arrows key to resize the f rame. 4 To cancel the previous move, press Esc. To open a frame as a new page To open the currently active frame as a new page an d discard the other frames, press the Menu key and select File > Open > Frame as new pag e To view pa ges offline To view local downloaded pages on your communicator with out accessing the WWW, press the Menu key and select File > Br ows e Of fl in e WWW settings To change the WWW settings, press the Menu key and select Tools > Settings ⦠. A dialog with two pages opens . See Figure 62. Linda1.book Page 147 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
148 Internet Figure 62 General p age Show images : The options are Yes / No . If yo u sel ect Yes the WWW browser loads all the pictures on a Web page w hen it displays the W eb page. Frames opti ons : T he options are Show all frames / Show fram es one by one / D o not use frames . Some Web pages are split in to several frames, which makes reading difficult, so choose an option wh ich suits you. Advanced p age Use cook ies : Some Web pages store data on your com municator in files called â cookiesâ . Use this setting to dete rmine whether to accept cookies, and if you accept them, whether you wish to be prompted each time a cookie is stored. The optio ns are Always / Never / Ask . Tip: To empty the cache immediately, press the Menu key and select To ols > Clear cache . Empty cache on exit : If you select Yes , the cache memory is emptied when you exit the WWW browser. T he options are Yes / No . Linda1.book Page 148 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
149 Internet Note The information or services you have accessed ar e stored in th e cach e of your phone. A cache is a buffer memory, which is used to store data temporarily. If you have tried to access or have accessed confidential information requiring passwords (f or example, your bank account), empty the cache of your phone after each use. Empty his tory list on exit : If y ou sel e ct Yes , the history lis t is em ptied when y ou exit the WWW browser. The options a re Yes / No . Cache, History, and Pl ug-ins view These views display a list of information on cache mem ory, browser history and installed plug-ins. To view information a bout the cache m emory used for temporary storage of th e pages you visit, press the Menu key and select Info rmatio n > Cache . To view information about the sites you have visited, press the Menu key and select Information > Hi story lis t . To view what add-on software for the WW W browser has been installed, press the Menu key and select Inform ation > Plug -i ns . Plu g-ins can display documents that the WWW browser itself cannot show, such as multimedia clips. You c an download plug-ins from the W WW. Bookmarks The Bookmarks view can be accessed by pressing Bookmarks in the main view of the WWW application. See Figure 61. Linda1.book Page 149 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
150 Internet The Bookmarks view lists lin ks to WWW pages in related folders. You c an organise, edit, and view these bookmarks. You can also search for them and then connect to the URL addresses dire ctly. See Figure 63 . Figure 63 Tip: To creat e a nd rename folders, press the Menu key and s elect Bookmarks > Insert new folder or Rename folder . To retrieve the cu rrently highlighted Web pa ge, press Go to . To open and close folders, press Op en fold er and Clos e fold er . To edit the na me or address of a bookmark, press Edit . To add a n ew bookmark, press New book m ar k . To retur n to the main view, press Close view . To add a new bookmark wh ile browsing t he WWW You can add a Web page, or a frame or link on a Web page, as a bookmark to your Bookmarks list. 1 On an open Web page, press the Menu key and select Tools > Add book mark . 2 Edit the n ame and address of the bookmark, if necessary. 3 Press OK . Linda1.book Page 150 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
151 Internet To export the Bookmark s list In the Bookmarks view, press the Menu key and select Bookmarks > Expor t as HTM L. to export the current B ookmarks list as a HTML document. Note: When you export bookm arks as HTML, t he folder structure is lost. WAP The WAP application can be u sed to access Internet services which are based on the Wireless Application Protocol (WAP). These services can contain news, weather reports, flight times, dictionaries, and so on. Note: The content of each service depends on the content provider of that service. To use such a service, follow the instruction s provided by the content provider. To obt ain access to WAP services ⢠you must be within t he coverage of a n etwork which su pports data ca lls, ⢠a data service must be activated for your SIM card, ⢠you must have obtained a WAP access point from a WAP service p rovider, and ⢠you must have en tered the proper WAP settings. Differences between th e WWW and WAP servic es applicatio ns The WAP application is similar to the WWW application, but there are two differences: Linda1.book Page 151 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
152 Internet ⢠To access WAP services you need to define WAP access points in your communicator. WAP access points are additional to the In ternet settings. You can receive WAP access points dir ectly via a short message from your WAP service provider, or define them manually. This chapter contains instruction s for manu al se tup. ⢠Certain bookmarks can be accessed th rough a specific ac cess point, for example, banking services may have to be accessed through the bank â s o w n access point. T he easiest way to use these kin ds of services is to define an altogether new bookm ark which uses the cor rect WAP and I nternet access point. To set up WAP co nn ect ions Note: Before you can u se the WAP services, you need to configure your WAP settings. Your WAP ser vice provider will pr ovide you with th e exact values for the WAP settings. Follow the instructions carefully. Y ou can use this information to define and edi t the settings manually. Furthermore, your service provider may be able to send some, or all, of the required settings to you via a special short mess age, an Over T he Air (OTA) message . Afte r you have re cei ved the set tings , you can st art usi ng the WAP application or edit the setti ngs as described below. To defin e and edit WAP co nnec tions 1 Press the Menu key and select Tools > WAP access . A dialog opens. 2 Press New to create a new connection , and Edit to edit an existing con n ection. A dialog opens. See Figure 64. Linda1.book Page 152 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
153 Internet Figure 64 3 Press Cl ose wh en you ar e re ady . Tip: The shortcut to define and edit WAP access points is Ctrl Shift X. Name : Name of the connection. All you r connections should have different name s. You can de f i ne ea c h na me fr ee ly. Secure co nnection : Whether the security protocol T LS is used for the connection. The options are Yes / No . Follow the instructions given to you by your WAP service provider. See also Glossary term â Transport Layer Security â on page 272. Note: Some secure connections u se authentication procedures. If authentication fails, you may need to download some certif ication keys. Contact your WAP s ervice provider for det ails. Internet access : Choose from a selection list the IAP you wish to use for thi s connection. If you h ave no IAPs, you create a new one by pressing New Interne t access . See page 133. Gateway IP add ress : The IP address that the required WAP gateway uses. To change WAP access poin ts 1 To change WAP access points, press the Menu key and select Tools > W AP access . A dialog opens. Linda1.book Page 153 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
154 Internet 2 Press Change to change the connection. A list opens. 3 Choose th e connection from th e list and press OK . Bookmarks The Bookmarks view is the m ain view of th e WAP application. You can organise, edit, and view th ese bookmarks in the same w ay as WWW bookmarks, see page 149. Tip: The shortcut to add a bookmark is Ctrl B. To add a bookmark, press the Menu key, then select Bookmarks > A dd boo kmark . A dialog opens. See Figu re 65. Figure 65 Note: A bookmark always us es the same connection defined in the WAP ac cess field. To set up a WAP access point, see page 152. To open a WAP page defined in a bookmark, select the bookmark, then press Go to . To edit bookmark settings, select the bookmark, the n press Ed it . To import or export bookmarks, press the Men u key, then select Bookmarks > Import bookmar ks or E xport bookm arks , respectively. Linda1.book Page 154 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
155 Internet To na vi gat e WAP s e r vic e s There a re thre e ways to open a WA P page, eith er: ⢠Choose a WAP bookmark from the list of bookm arks and press Go to . The page is retrieved; or Tip: The shortcut to go to the home page is Ctrl H . ⢠Go to the WAP application home page. Pr ess the Menu key, then select Go t o > Home pag e . For more information on de fining the WAP h ome page, see â WAP settings â on page 1 55; or Tip: The shortcut to open a URL is Ctrl O. ⢠Open a URL; pres s the Menu key, then select File > Open page . A dialog open s. Enter the ad dress of the URL, for example : mobile.club .nokia.com . Once the WAP page is open ed, use the ⧠an d ⨠arrows on th e Arrows key to scroll the view and to choose hyperlinks and hotspots. Note: Some servers have access restrictions that require a valid user nam e and password. In this case, you will be asked to type in the u ser name and password before a connection to th e service can be e stablished. WAP settings To define WAP ser vice settings, press the Menu key and select To ols > Settings . A dialog with two pages opens. Linda1.book Page 155 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
156 Internet Figure 66 Here you can change settings such as your WAP home page. NOTE: You can use a file on the communicator as your home page. Java The Java in the N okia 9210i Communicator is a Per sonal Java application environment designed especially for the communicator. Java en ables you to use Java applications down loaded from the Inter net. Java Software Development Kit (SDK) is available in Forum Nokia . Internet.doc Page 156 Tuesday, April 16, 2002 6:38 PM
157 Messaging 9. Messaging Messaging contains the following applications: Fax, Mail and SMS (Short Message Service). To start Messaging, press the M essaging application button on the communicator keyboard. The overall requirements f or using fax, mail and SMS, applications are as follows: ⢠The ph one must be tu rned on. ⢠The network you are using m ust support fax calls, data calls, and the Short Message Service. ⢠The fax, data and Short Message Service must be activated for your SI M card. Tip: To set Internet settings, see page 132. To set Mail settings, see page 170. ⢠You must have obtained an Internet Access Point (IAP) f rom an Internet service provider. ⢠You must have entered the proper Internet an d Mail settings ⢠The short message centre n umber must be stored in the settings of the SMS application. Contact your home se rvice provider for details. When you connect your communicator to a PC, you can synchronise your e-mails with Microsoft Windows programs. You can also reply to and read remotely Microsoft Windows and Lotus e-mail. For in formation on synchronisation, see â Mail synchronisation with your PC â on page 182 and th e PC Suite Guide. Linda1.book Page 157 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
158 Messaging Messaging cen tre Figure 67 Tip: You can move between the two frames with the Arrows or Tab k ey. The main view of Messaging h as two frames: on the le ft is a list of the folders in the Messaging centre, and on the right are the m essages con nected to the currently selected folder. Folders in the Messaging m ain view are: Inbox - Received faxes and short messages. Received mail appear s in the Rem ote mailbox folder. Outbox - Messages wh ich are wai ting to be sent f rom the communicator. Drafts - Saved message drafts. Sent - Mess a g es whi c h ha v e be en se nt fr om t he c o mm uni cat o r . Any remote mailboxes that you set up appear at the bottom of the folder list. To open folders and messages To open a folder, select the left frame in the main view of Messaging, go t o the folder and press Open fold er . Linda1.book Page 158 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
159 Messaging Tip: You can al so press Enter to open mess ages and folders. To open a message, in the m essage list of t he main view, go to the message and press Open . The message opens in th e appropriate viewer, for example, a mail messag e opens in the m ail viewe r. To manage folders You can create your own folders in Drafts , in your own folders and in the root of the folder list. Y ou cannot create new f olders in Inbox , Outbox or Sent . Tip: You can cr ea t e folders to I MAP4 remote mailboxes w hen online. 1 Select the left frame in the main v iew of the Messaging. 2 Press the Menu ke y and select File > Fo lder > Create new folder ⦠. 3 Type a name for the new folder. 4 Select wher e you want to create the folder. 5 Press Cr eate . The new folder appears on the folder list. To move faxes, mail and short m essages from one folder to another, select the file, press the Menu key and select Edi t > Mov e . To search faxes, mail and short m essages for names, dates, time, or any other pieces of text press the Menu key and select Tool s > Fin d ⦠. For fu rt her d etai ls , see â To sea rch for textâ on page 29. To sort messages and faxes You can also sort faxes, mail and short messages by various cr iteria, such as da te and size, which affects the w ay they appear in the dif ferent views of Messaging. Linda1.book Page 159 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
160 Messaging Tip: To choose the sorti ng order, press the Men u key and select Vie w > Sorting order . Choose betwee n Ascendin g and Desc en din g . 1 O pen the fol der where you want to sort the messages and faxes . 2 Press the Menu key and select Vie w > Sort by . 3 Choose f rom the followin g options: Mess age type / Sender/Recipient/ Subjec t/ Date/ Size / Prior ity . Inbox Figure 68 Tip: To reply to a message in the Inbox , press the Menu key and select Write > Reply . Unread messa ges appear in bold. The icons in f ront of messages indicate message type, priority a nd possible attachments. Here are some of the icons that you may see: new mail in remote m ailbox new f ax new short message (SMS) new voice mail messa ge new message from your network service provider new bu siness card new calendar invitation Linda1.book Page 160 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
161 Messaging new ringing tone new remote configuration data unread ma il unread mail received f rom PC by synchronisation priority high priority low message contain s an attachm ent Out box Tip: You can se nd faxes , mail and s hort messages immediately, at a predefined time or upon request, depending on a de livery setting. Se e Sending opti ons in the corresponding editors. Figure 69 Status es Faxes, mail and short me ssages waiting to be sent from the communicator can have the following statuses in Outbox: Sending - The fax or short message is curr ently being sent. Upon requ est - The m ail, fax, or sh ort message will be sent only if you specif ically press Send now in the Outbox view. Linda1.book Page 161 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
162 Messaging Waiting - The fax or short message is queuing to be sent and will be sent as soon as possible, for example, when the phone is switched on, sign al strength becomes adequate, or the previous phone call ends. In the case of mai l messages, Waiting shows that the me ssage will be sent the next time you conn ect to your remote mailbox. Calling ⦠- Outbox is calling t he recipient of the fax message. Preparing... - Outbox is rendering a T.4 format fax image; this means that colour is converted to black and white. Failed - One or more pages of a f ax or short message f ailed to be sent. Tip: If the s tatus of a fax, mail or short message is Suspended , Resend or Scheduled , you can open and delete it, or resume sending. Suspended -You have suspended the sending of the message or fax. You can resu me the sending of a message by pr essing Send now in the Outbox view. Resend - The fax or short message failed to be sent but th e communicator will retry to send it. Schedu led - The fax or short message is scheduled to be sent at a specif ic time. To cancel the sending of a fax, mail or s hort message, select it and press Can cel sen din g . When a message or f ax has been succ essfully sent, it is a utomatically moved to t he Sent folder. To wri te and send faxe s, mail and short messages There a re two wa ys you can start creating faxes, mail an d short mes sages in th e Messaging application: Linda1.book Page 162 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
163 Messaging Tip: If you are already writing a message or fax an d want to start on a new message, press the Menu key and select File > New short m essage or New fax . ⢠Press any of th e following commands in the main view of Messaging: Write fax , Write mail or Write short me ssage . ⢠Press the Menu key in the main view of Messaging a nd select Write > Ne w mes sa ge ⦠. Th en select the appropriate message type. You can als o send faxes, mail and short m e ssages in all the applications where you can find the option File > Send af ter pressing the M enu key. Tip: When y o u st a rt writing a new fax, mail or short message, a temporary copy of it is automatically stored in the Dr afts folder. It is removed from Dr afts and placed in Outbox once you press Sen d . If you want to save, bu t not send a fax, mail or short message you have just written in the corresponding editor, press Close . The message is saved in the Drafts folder. The saved message replaces the previously saved version of the same message. To revert back to the previously saved version of the mail or fax, press the Menu key and select File > Discard c hanges . N ote that th is is not possible with sh ort messages. To sel ect reci pien ts There are two ways to sele ct recipients to your f ax, mail and short messages: Note: A fax can have only one recipient. 1 Press Re cipient in t he corresponding mess age editor. A dialog lis ting your contacts opens, see figure 70. Figure 70 Linda1.book Page 163 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
164 Messaging Tip: You can se lect more than one contac t at a tim e, see â To select several item s at once â on page 25. 2 Search for a contact or contacts in the left frame and press Select . The right frame shows the contacts you have already selected; to remove a contact, select it and press Remov e . 3 Press Done . You can also just type i n the first letter s or the wh ole name of the recipient into the header of the f ax, mail or short message an d check if the letter s or name match an entry in your contacts database: 1 Ty pe in the name of the recipient into the header of the message. 2 Press the Menu key and select Tools > Check names . Tip: In t he case of m ail, you need to select the contacts to the appr opriate fields in the d ialog by pressing To , Cc or Bcc . 3 If the name you have entered matches to m ore than one name, or if th e person has more than one GSM phone number, f ax number or mail address, a selection list appears. Select the corre ct name, phone number, or address from the li st and press Select . Checked recipients are mo ved to separa te lines in the head er of the me ssage. Note that a fax can have only one recipient. 4 To add another recipient to a mail or short message, press Enter after a checked recipient or in sert the se micolon â ;â as a separato r. To delete a ch ecked recipient, move th e cursor to the en d of the entry and press backspace. To avoid low mem ory You should regularly del ete messages from Inbox and Sent folders and delete retrieved mail from the com municator memory to free up m emory space. Linda1.book Page 164 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
165 Messaging WARNING! If you do not use this method to delete mail messages from your communicator, the messages you de lete from your communicator may also be permanentl y deleted from you r remote ma ilbox the next time when you go online. Tip: Use a PC mail client to move mail m essages from your remote inbox to other folders f or archiving. If you keep the n umber of message s in t he remote inbox to a min imu m, your communicator has more available memory and the mail connection is f aster. To delete dowloaded mail messa ges from the communicator: 1 Press the Menu key in the main view of Messaging a nd select Tool s > Mess age st or age ⦠. A dialog with two pages opens. 2 On th e Communicator page you can choose to delete all mail messages or messages older than a given time period. To delete selected messages, press Delet e now . Messages are deleted from your communicator â s memor y, but t hey are not del eted from your remote mailbox. On th e Memory page, you can delete or move messa ges from th e current store. To change the stor e in us e, press Change . To m ove the mes sage st orage fr om communicator â s memory to a memory card or vice ver s a, press Move . To delete all the messages in the selected m essage stor age, press Delet e . Tip: See â Mail attachments â on page 180 to delete attachments from received mail messages. WARNING: De le tin g the mess age s torag e de le tes p ermanent ly all messages and mailbox folders and restores all messaging settin gs to facto ry defaul ts. Note: If you create a new me ssage stor e to a mem ory card and rem ove the car d a new storage must then be created in the internal memory when new messages are received. This leads to a situation where you cannot move messages from one memory storage to another, since only one messa ge store at a time can be in use. Linda1.book Page 165 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
166 Messaging Fax Tip: For m ore advanced word processing, u se Word Processor instead of the f ax editor. You can write and send fa xes in th e fax edi tor. You can write documents in the Word Process or or Sheet applications and then send them as faxes. It is also possible to sen d faxes with e mbedded images. For details on images, s ee â Imagingâ on page 231. To write and send a new fax 1 Press Write fax in the main view of Messaging. T he fax editor ope ns, see f igure 71. Tip: You can zoom in the fax editor. Press the Menu key and select View > Zoom > Zoom in or Zo om out Figure 71 Tip: To select a recipient, see details on page 1 63. 2 W rite the fax. To form at the text, pres s the Menu key and s elect Format . 3 Press Recip ient to select the recipient. A fax can have only one recipient. Tip: To define a specific date and time w hen th e fa x will be sent, select S ch edu led in t he Send fax option. 4 If you wish to adjust the sending options of the fax, press Send ing op ti ons . For details, see Fax settings on page 169. 5 Press Send . Note: Voice calls are not possible when a fax is being sen t or received. Linda1.book Page 166 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
167 Messaging Fax cover page Tip: To define th e default format of the he ader in your faxes, and if you want a cover template to be attached to the faxes, see â Fax settingsâ on page 169. You can a ttach a cover page to the f ax you are currently creating or editing. 1 Press Send i ng optio ns an d then select Fax cove r page . 2 Choose one of the following options: None : The header of the fax wi ll have only the To: and Fax num ber: f ields. Header : The h eader of the fax will have information about the s ender and recipient of th e fax, and the date of the fax. Template 1 : The header field of the fax w ill have infor mation about the sender and recipient of the f ax and a separate Remarks: field. Full templat e : The header field of the fax will have more information about the sender and recipient of the fax, the date of the fax and a separate Remarks: field. You can save and use customised cover templates in the Templates folder using File manager; for more in formation see page 204. W hatever cover template you use, the ava ilable recipient information is f illed in automa tically. To receive and r ead faxes Tip: To forw ard a rece ived fax, pres s the Me nu key a nd select File > Fo rward . Faxes are received automatically, provided that this s ervice is available a nd that the phone is turned on and within network coverage. When a new fax is recei ved , you hear a tone - unless the syst em is set to a silent profile - and an infor mation note is shown on the display. Tip: You can zoom and rotate in the fax viewer. Each press of Rotat e rotates the fa x 90 degrees clockwise. Press Open to view the f ax. To open a fax r eceived earlier, go to the Inbox, select the fax and press Open . Note: If a f ax is not received completely due to some failure, it is named Incomplete fax . Linda1.book Page 167 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
168 Messaging To select and save all or part of a r eceived fax You can select all or part of a fax and save it in another format for further editing. To select an area of a fax page 1 Press the Menu key in t he fax viewer and select Tools > Selection f rame . A selection frame appears in th e fax viewer. 2 Use the arrows key to move the selection frame to the upper -left corner of the area y o u wa nt to se lec t. 3 To change the size of the selection frame, press an d hold the Ctrl key and press the arrows key. To cancel the selection, press the Menu key and select Tools > Selection fra me again, or just press Esc key. To save fax in another format 1 Press the Menu key in the fax viewer and select File > Expor t ⦠. Select the range to be e xported. The options are W hole docum ent / Current page / S elected / User defined . Press OK . A dialog opens. 2 Spe cify the name and location of the new document. To change the format of the new document, press Change format . 3 Press OK to save th e exported fax f ile. Fax polling You can re trieve faxes from a remote fax box by using Fax polling, if available in the network. It allows you to make a fax call to a f ax machine and then receive information by f ax. Linda1.book Page 168 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
169 Messaging To retrieve faxes from a re mote fax box 1 Press the Menu key in the main view of Messaging a nd select Rec eive > Fa x > Dial fax poll . 2 Type in the fax number for the re mote fax box, or choose the number by pressing Reci pient . 3 Press Call to call the number. Fax settings Any changes you make to fax settings affect the way in which your faxes are sent and received. 1 Press the Menu key in the main view of Messaging a nd select Tool s > Account settings ⦠. 2 Select Fax and press Edit . A dialog with two pages opens. Define the following: Settings pa ge Fax cover pa ge : Defines whether or not a cover page will be used. The options are None / Header / Template 1 / Full templ ate - In addition to th e options above, the option list may contain other cover templates saved in the Templates folder. Send fax : Defines when the fax will be sent. The options a re Immedia tely / Upon request . Advanced pag e Resolutio n : The resolution of the sent and received faxes. The options ar e High / Standar d . Linda1.book Page 169 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
170 Messaging ECM : Defines whether or not the Error Correction Mode is used when faxes are sent. If set to On , any pa ges contain ing errors ar e au tomatically r etur ned to sender, until the de fects are corrected. The option s are On /Off . Resend : Defines which pages will be sent again if the f ax sending has failed. The options are All pages / Mi ssed pages. Mail The Nokia 9210i Com municator mail system is compliant with Internet standards SMTP, IMAP4 (rev 1 ) and POP3. To be able to r eceive and send m ail, you need to have set up a remote mailbox service. This service m ay be offer ed by an Inter net service provider, a network service provider, or your com pany. Tip: If y ou pr ess Write mail in the m ain vi ew of Mes sagi ng an d you hav e not set up your mail account, you will be prompted to do so. Before you can sen d, receive, r etrieve, reply to, and for ward mail on your communicator, you must do the following: ⢠You must configure an Internet access point (IAP) correctly. See â To set up your Internet access point â on page 132 ⢠Y o u mu st de fi ne yo ur Mai l se tt i ng s cor re c tl y. See â Mail settingsâ on page 170. Note: Follow the in structions given by your remote mailbox and In ternet service providers. Mail sett ings Any changes you make to mail settings affect the way your mail is sent and received. Linda1.book Page 170 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
171 Messaging To connect to your remote mailbox, you need to define a mail account on your communicator: 1 Press the Menu key in the main view of the Messaging centre and select Tools > Account settings ⦠. 2 Press Cr eate new . A selection list of possible account types opens. 3 Select Mail and press OK . A dialog with four pages op ens. See figure 72 Figure 72 4 Define the f ollowing: Gener al page Mail accou nt name : The name of the remote mailbox. You can type here any name to describe the ma ilbox. My name : Type in your name. Username : T y pe in your user name. Pass word : Type in your password. If you leave this field blank, you will be prompted for a password when you try to read mail in your remote mailbox. My mail a ddress : Type in the mail address given to you by your service provider.The address mu st contai n the â @â charac ter. Replies to your message s are sent to this address. Linda1.book Page 171 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
172 Messaging Internet access : The IAP con nection used for the mailbox. Ch oose an IAP from th e list. T o create an IAP, see â To set up you r Internet access point â on page 132. Default ac count : Choose a mail account from the list. When you set up an accou nt for the first time, it w ill be the def ault until more accounts are created . Servers page Tip: Outgoing mail servers are typically called SMTP server s or hosts and incoming mailservers ar e called POP3 or I MAP4 servers . Mail acco unt type : Defines the mail protocol your remote mailbox service provider recommends. The options a re PO P3 and IMAP4 . Outgoin g mail server : The I P address or host name of the comp uter that se nds your Intern et m ail. Incoming ma il server : The IP address or host name of the computer that receives your In ternet mail. Retrieve Tip: If you prefer reading your mail messa ges and replying to them while connected to your re mote mailbox, select Mail header s (s tay on line ) . If you pr ef er to retrieve the messages and disconnect, select Mes sa ges . Retrieve : Specifies what will be retrieved from the remote mailbox when the connection is established. The option s are Mail hea ders (sta y online) / Messa ges / Mess ages and attach ments . The Me ssages option is avail able only if the mailbox type is IMAP4. Max. size of mail : The maximum size of a message which is retrieved. The minimum is 1 KB and maxi m um 1000 KB. Sync. mails in Inbox : Specifies the number of message headers to be retrieved from Inbox of th e remote m ailbox. The option s are All / None or you can de fine the appropriate number of messages to be retrieved. Linda1.book Page 172 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
173 Messaging Sync. mails in folders : Specifies the number of message headers to be r etrieved from the folders of the re mote mailbox excluding Inbox. The options are All / None or you can de fine the appropriate number of messages to be retrieved. Advanced pag e Default mai l type : The type of mail that you can wr ite and send f rom your communicator. The options are Plain text (no MIME ) / Plain text/ Fo rmatte d tex t (HT ML ) . Send mail : How mail is sent from you r communicator. The options are Immediat ely / During next connection / Upon request . Include signat ure : Specifies whether your signature is attached to sent mail. The options are No / Use my contact ca rd / Custom . If you choose Custom , you can press Edit signature to modify the signature file. Request read r eport : The options are Yes / No . If you choose Yes , you will r eceive a notification when th e recipient has opened your mail. Yo u can only receive a notification if the recipient â s e-mail application supports this feat ure . Allow repor t requests : The options are Yes / No . If you choose No the sender of a message you receive will not get a notification, wh en you open the mess age. Copy to my mai l address : The options are Ye s / No . Secure log in (APOP) : Used with POP3 protocol to encrypt the sending of passwords to a remote mail server. The options are Yes / No . Secure co nnection (TLS) : Used with P OP3, IMAP4 and SMTP protocols to secure the connection to a remote mailbox . The options are Yes / No . Linda1.book Page 173 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
174 Messaging IMAP4 fold er path : Define the location of the IMAP mail folder here, if no t defined automatically. This option is available only if the mailbox type is IMAP4. To edit an acc o unt 1 Press the Menu key in t he main view of M essaging a nd select Tools > A ccount settings ⦠. A list of accounts opens. 2 Se lect the account you want to edit an d press Edit . 3 De fine the settings on the Genera l , Se rve r s , Retrieve and Advanc ed pages explained above. 4 Press the Esc key to discard any changes. Press Done to accept the ch anges you have made. Note: You cannot edit mailbox settings when online. To write and send new mail Tip: If yo u ca nnot se nd mail from you r communicator, check first that your mail address is correct in Mail settings. See page 171. 1 Press Write mail in the main vie w of Messaging. The m ail editor opens, see figure 73. Figure 73 Tip: To see h ow to select recipients, see page 1 63. 2 Write the mail message. Linda1.book Page 174 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
175 Messaging 3 Press Re cipien t to select the recipient or recipients of the m essage, or type in the name or mail address into the To: , Cc: an d Bcc: fields. You can move from one insertion f ield to another by pressing the Tab key. 4 If you wish to adjust the sending options of th e mail message, pre ss Sending opti ons . A dialog with two pages opens, see page 176. 5 Press Send . Tip: You can zoom in the mail editor. Note: You cannot enter accented characters, such as é or ä , into mail addresses. Recipie nts There are thre e hierarchy levels of r ecipients in a mail message: Tip: To hide or show Cc: and Bcc: fields in the mail editor, press the Menu key and select View > Show Cc fiel d or Show Bcc f ield . To: - Message is sen t directly to the recipie nt. Cc: - A copy of the message is sent to the recipient, and the r ecipient â s na me is visible to other recipients of the message. Bcc: - A copy of th e message is s ent to the r ecipient, but the recipient â s name is not visible to othe r recipients of the m essage. Note: The addresses you have en tered are checked against your contacts database once you press Send . Nam e s whi ch do no t ma tc h w ith t he contacts database, or addresses which do not have â @â , should be removed from th e address fields. If a name you have entered in one of the address fields matches a group n ame, the name is replaced with the mail address es of the group members. Style o f sent mail You can format only HTML messages. Press the Menu ke y and select Format > Form atting . This opens the following options for formatting: Bold , Italic , Under line and Bullets . Linda1.book Page 175 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
176 Messaging Tip: To format the fo n t for a s elected text area, press the Menu key and select Form at > Font ⦠. To set a preferred f ont for plain text an d HTML mail, press the Menu key and select Tools > Preferences ⦠. To align a mail message, pres s the Menu key and select For mat > Alignment . This opens the following options: Left , Centre and Rig ht . Sending opti ons Tip: In the ca se of PC mail message (see page 182), Prior ity and Mail acco un t in use are the only options you can change. The options in the Sending optio ns dialog contain values set in m ail settings, as explained on page 170. Press Sending option s to open the dialog. Any changes you make in this dialog affect only the cu rrent mail message you are about to send. Note: Changing the options in the Se nding options dialog affects th e format of the message when it is opened by the recipient. For example, the format may affect th e legibility of the ch aracters. Message page Priorit y : The priority of a message. The options ar e High / Normal / Low . Message t ype : The type of the message. T he options are Plain text (no MIME ) / P lain text / Formatted text ( HTML) . Request read r eport : Specifies whether to add to the outgoing m ail, a request for you to receive notification , if the recipien t has opened your mail. Delivery pag e Mail acco unt in us e : The remote mail ser vice which is used for sending this messa ge. Note: Changing the mail account does not change the default options in other fields of this page. Linda1.book Page 176 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
177 Messaging Send mail : When the message will be s ent. The options ar e Immediately / Upon request / Dur ing next connection . To retrieve mail Tip: Delete mail regularly from your commu n icator to free u p mem ory spac e. For more information, see â To avoid low memo ry â on page 164. Mail addressed to you is not automatically received by you r communicator, but by your remote ma ilbox. To read your m ail, you must f irst connect to the remote mailbox and then select th e messages you wish to retrieve into your communicator. Connection to a r emote mailbox is established via a data call. WARNING! Messages that you mark as deleted when offline will also be del eted f rom the remot e mail box ser ver, wh en onl ine. To de lete local mail messages without dele ting remote mailbox file s, see â To avoid low memory â on page 164. To connect to a remote mailbox 1 Select the r emote mailbox in the left fr ame of the main view of Messaging. Tip: If you do n ot specify a password when initially connecting to the remote mailbox, a dialog opens. Type in the password and press OK . 2 Press Retrieve mail . 3 When the connection to the remote m ailbox has been established, press the Menu key and s elect Retrieve > New or Selected or All m ail. 4 When all the mail you have requested is r etrieved, press Go off line . Note: Pressing Go offlin e does not necessarily disconnect the phone, if there are other applications open that use th e connection. Press the Menu key and select File > Disc onnect to hang up. Linda1.book Page 177 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
178 Messaging To subscribe and un subscribe to remote mailbox fol ders If your remote mailbox is of IMAP4 standard, you can edit and synchronise remote inbox folders in your communicator. To do this, you need to subscribe to the folders and make them visible in your communicator. Tip: To create new folders in your remote mailbox, go online, press the Menu key and select File > Folder . You can no w c h oo s e w h et h er t o Create new folder ⦠or Rename folder ⦠. 1 Go online. 2 Press th e Menu key and select Receive > Folder subscr iption s ⦠. A list of folders in the remote m ailbox opens. 3 Se lect the folder. 4 Press Subscribe . If you have alr eady subscribed to the folder, press Unsubscri be to cancel the sub scription. 5 Press Go offl ine an d Go onli ne to include th e new subscribed folder s in the list. To read mail You can read, reply to and fo rward mail in the mail vie wer. To read received messages, select the message in the Inbox and press Op en . The mail viewer shows the message in a read-only state, which means that you cannot edit it or the attach ments linked to it. If there is a W eb link in the m essage, you can open it by going to that link and pressing Use . Tip: You can create new contacts from the o the r recipients of a received ma il; press the Menu key and select Tools > Add to contacts . If there is a f ax, mail or short mes sage link in the message, you can wr ite a fa x, mail or short message by selecting the link and pressing the corre sponding command button. This opens th e appropriate editor where the recipient field is completed using the fa x, mail address or GSM number in the link. To delete the message, pr ess Delet e . Linda1.book Page 178 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
179 Messaging WARNING! Messag es mar ked as del ete d whe n off line w ill al so be de leted from th e re mot e mailbox se rver , wh en on line. To delete local mail messages w ithout deleting rem ote mailbox files, see â To avoid low memory â on page 164. To reply to mail 1 Select the m ail message in Inbox and press Open . The mail viewer op ens. Tip: To forward m ail, press the Menu key and select File > Fo rward . 2 Press Re ply . The mail editor opens. If you wish to reply to all the recipients, not just the sender of the mail message, press the Menu ke y and select File > Repl y to > All rec ipients . Tip: To se arc h and replace text in a m ail, press the Menu key and select Edit > Find ⦠. 3 Edit the message in the m ail editor and press Send . Note: When replying to a mail me ssage, HTML mess ages are included as attachments. Style of rep lied to, and for warded mai l You can edit the style of replied to, and forwarded mail. 1 Press the Menu ke y and select Tools > Preferences ⦠. A dia log opens. 2 Define the f ollowing: Include message in reply : If you choose Yes , the or iginal message is in cluded in the reply to the message. The options are Yes / No . HTM L no rmal fon t : Defines the default font size and family used in HTML m essages. Note that HT ML m essages ma y contain ta gs that chan ge what you set in this option. HTML f ont si ze : Define s th e si z e of the fo n t us ed i n H T ML mes s ag es. Plain text f ont : Defines the font used in plain text messages. Plain text font size : Defines the s ize of the font used in plain text me ssages. Linda1.book Page 179 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
180 Messaging Mail att achmen ts You can send most documents and m essages you write in the other applications of your communicator as mail attachments. WARNING! Mail attachments may contain viruses or they can otherwise be harmful to your communicator or PC. Do not open any attachment, if y ou are not sure of the trustworthiness of the sender. For m ore inf ormat ion, see â Certificate manager â on page 222 To add mai l attachme nts Tip: To edit m ail attachmen ts, pre ss the Menu key and s elect Attach ments > Ed it . You cannot edit attachments in received mail messages. 1 Press the Menu key in the mail editor and select At tachme nts > Inse rt fi le ⦠. 2 Se arch and select the file you wish to attach to the m ail. To vi ew and save mai l attachme nt s Attachments always appear at the bottom of an open mail message. You can view the attachments using the appropriate viewe rs, if available. Tip: To open an attachment f or viewing, select it with t he Arrows key and then press Enter. 1 Open the mail message containing attach ments and press A ttachments . A dialog opens. 2 Press Ope n to open the attachment for viewing. Press Save to save t he attachment. Press Delete lo cally to delete the attachment from your communicator; the attachment is not deleted from your remote mailbox. Linda1.book Page 180 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
181 Messaging Working on line an d offlin e Working online means working with you r communicator c onnected to a remote mailbox via Internet connection. When you work offline which means that you r communicator is not connected to a remote mailbox, you can delete only messages, not folders. When online, you can delete, rename or create new folders in y our remote mailbox. Note: Any changes you make in the remote m ailbox folders while offline take effect in you r remote mailbox th e next time you go online and synchronise. For example, if you delete a mail message from your communicator when offline, the mess age will be deleted from the remote mailbox th e next time you connect to th e mailbox. If you want to dele te a message from your communicator to save memory, see â To avoid low memory â on page 164. Managing your m ail offline enables you to save in con nection costs and work in conditions that do not allow data connection, such as on aircraft. For information about using your communicator on an aircraft, see â Flight profile â on page 91. Remember also relevant warnings, see â IMPORTANT SAFETY INFO RMATION â on page 257. PC Mail Whereas you can send an d receive Internet mail over a data ca ll, you cannot send PC mail from th e communicator. PC mail is mail you can read, wr ite and edit on your communicator, but which you can send and receive only through a PC, the next time you synchronise your com municator with the PC. Linda1.book Page 181 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
182 Messaging Mail syn chron isati on with y our PC Synchronisation is the process of making the contents of your mail m essages and mail folders iden tical on both your commun icator and your PC. T his is done by copying and combining information betwe en the two m achines. For more information, see PC Suite Guide on the sales package CD-ROM. Mail synchronisation copies the messages between your com municator and your PC E-mail program to allow you use either machine for reading and replying to mess ages . You can convert In ternet mail to PC mail so that it is synchronised with a PC , or convert PC mail to Internet mail so that it can be sen t directly from th e communicator. All synchronisation settings are defined on the PC. The only setting you can do on your communicator is to delete the account you are using. To create new P C ma il Note: You need to have s et a mai l acc ount on y our r emot e PC to be abl e to create new PC mail. 1 Press the Menu key in t he main view of M essaging a nd select Write > New message ⦠. A selection list appears. 2 Se lect PC mail and press OK . If you have more than one PC a ccount, a dia log opens indicating which PC account will be used when sending the PC mail. Select the PC account and press OK . 3 Write the PC mail in the mail editor . Linda1.book Page 182 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
183 Messaging To convert to PC or Internet mail Tip: You can vi ew and edit PC mail just like Internet mail on your communicator. Note: HT ML messages cannot be converted since PC mail does not support the sending of HTML messages. You must change the message type to plain text or n on-MIME type in the Sending options dialog, before you can convert the message to PC ma il. See page 17 6 for more information. PC and Inter net mail appear togeth er in the f olders. 1 Select the mail message or m essages you wish to convert. Tip: PC m ail is distinguished from In ternet mail by a di fferent icon. 2 Press the Menu ke y and select Tools > Convert to internet mail or Convert t o PC mai l , depending on the ty pe of mail you wish to convert. 3 If there are multiple PC mail or SM TP services defined, a selection list of available services define d in the messaging server will be shown. Select the service and press Conve rt . Note: You can convert several mails at the same time, but make sure that the mails are of the sam e type, either Inter net or PC mail. Short Mes sage Service Tip: You r service provider ma y se nd y o u sm ar t messages in t he form of short messa ges; thes e message s may inc lude, for example, configuration settings. For details, contact your service provider. The Short Message Service (SMS) enables you to sen d and receive short mess ages over the digital wire less network. Short messages can be sent o r received even duri ng voice, data, and fax calls. Messages can be read in any mobile phone that has the capability. If the receiving phone is switched off at the time of sending, the short message centre continues to attempt to send the m essage until the validity period allowed by the network expires. Linda1.book Page 183 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
184 Messaging Note: If you want to send text you h ave written or edited in another application as a short message, all embedded objects or any rich formatting will be lost. You ca nnot send a ttachments as sh ort mess ages, either. To write and send a new short messag e Note: You ca nnot change the font, s tyle or format of short messages. Tip: When sending a short message that contains special or accented character s to an older mobile phone, the older phone may not be able to view the m essage. In this case, send the mes s age without special or accented character s. 1 Press Writ e sho rt mess age in the main view of Messaging. T he SMS editor opens, see f igure 74. Figure 74 Tip: You can zoom in the SMS editor. Press the Menu key and select View > Zoom > Zoom in or Zo om out 2 Press Recip ient to select the recipient, or type the numb er directly into the header of the mes sage . 3 Press the Arrows key to move dow n to the message field and write the short messag e. To view the length of the curren t message, press the Menu key and select View > Mes sage length . Linda1.book Page 184 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
185 Messaging Tip: To define a specific date and time w hen the short message will be sent, select Schedu led in t h e Send short m essage option. 4 If you wish to adjust the sending options of the short message, press Sen di ng opti ons . A dialog with two pages, Sendin g options and Advanc ed opens. For details, see SMS se ttings on page 186. 5 Press Send . To receive and r ead short messages Tip: Your Inbox shows the date of received short messages and the time of the short me ssages re ceived on the cu rrent da y. To view when it was sent, open the message in the SMS viewer. Short messages are received automatically, provided that this ser vice is available and that the phone is on and within ne twork coverage. When a new short message arrives, a tone will sound - unless the device is set to a silent pr ofile - and an information no te is shown on the display. The SMS viewer sh ows the m essage in a rea d-only sta te, which means th at you cannot ed it i t. Tip: To create a con tact card of the sender of a short message, press the Menu key and select Tools > Add to Contacts ⦠. Received short me ssages can also contain some special text strings such a s URLs. If a URL is h ighlighted when you move the cursor over it, you can open the corresponding link by pre ssing Use . To reply to short messages Tip: When replying to a message, you can choose whether you want the text of the receive d message to be in the reply. Select No in Include original in reply in SMS settings to minimise the length of the reply. Open the me ssa ge, press Re ply and write another s hort message. If the received message has a reply path, the note Rep ly via sam e centre is shown in th e h ea der of th e m e ssag e. Short messages on the SIM card To move and copy me ssages from the SIM card to the Inbox, pr ess the Menu key and select Receive > Short m essage > SIM mes sages . To move, copy or delete messages, press the corresponding command bu tton. Linda1.book Page 185 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
186 Messaging SMS settin gs Any changes you make to SMS settings affect the way in which your short messages ar e sent and receive d . 1 Press the Menu key in t he main view of M essaging a nd select Tools > A ccount settings ⦠. 2 Se lect Shor t message an d press Edit . A dialog with two pages opens. Define the following: Gener al page Press Service centr es , which opens a dia log where you can define new message centres, as well as edit and dele te existing ones. All message centres are listed by name and numbe r. Service cent re in use : Defines the service centre that is used for delivering the short messa ges. Tip: To ope n th e sys t em log, press the Menu key and select Tools > Log . Delivery report : If you choose Yes , you ca n view th e status of the s ent mes sage ( Pending , fail ed, Delivered ) in the system log. If you choose No , only the stat us sent is shown in the s ystem log. Send shor t message : Y ou can select when you want the me ssage to be sent. T he options are Immediately / Up on request / Scheduled . W he n Sche dule d is selected, you m ust defin e a Dat e . Validi ty period : If the recipient of a me ssage cannot be reached w ithin the specified validity period, the m essage is removed from the short message service centre. If Ma ximum is chosen, the validity per iod is set to the m aximum value allowed by the message centre. Note that the network must support this feature. The options are 1 hour / 6 hours / 1 day/ 1 week/ Maximum. Linda1.book Page 186 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
187 Messaging Advanced pag e Reply via same centre : This network service allows the recipient of you r short message to reply usin g your message centre. If you choose Yes an d th e recipient replies to your message, the return message is sen t using the same service centre number. T his requires that the recipient has subscribed to the S hort Message Service, is able to a reply to a message, and uses a device which supports this feature. Note also that the network must support this featu re. Include orig inal in reply : Specifies whether text in the received short message is quoted when you make a reply. If you choose Yes , the cont ents of the message body a re copied to a n ew short message. Co ncat en at ion : If set to No , mess ages longer tha n 160 ch ara cters ar e sent as sev e r al sh o r t me ssa ges . If se t to Yes , messages that are longer than 160 characters are sent as severa l messag es, but if the re cipient has a Nokia communicator, the messages a re received as one long message. Linda1.book Page 187 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
188 Messaging Linda1.book Page 188 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
189 Office 10. Office Office contains the Word Pr ocessor, Sheet, and Pr esentation viewer applications, which are all compatible with Microsoft Windows. Office also con tains a File manager application for file and folder manageme nt tasks like moving, copying, and renaming files and folders. Figure 75 Word Processor You can use Word Processor to write new and edit existing text documents. You can insert and view images and other files in the documen ts. You can also send and receive documents a s fax, SMS, mail, PC m ail, or via infrared. You can open, edit and s ave docum ents created with Microsoft Word f or Windows versions 95, 97 and 2000. Note that not all features and f or matting of the original documents will be supported. Documents made with other versions of Microsoft Word can only be viewed. For information on other file format conversions, see the PC Suite Gu ide on the sales package CD-ROM. Linda1.book Page 189 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
190 Office To create a new document Tip: You can use th e clipboard command shortcu ts Ctrl x, Ctrl c, and Ctrl v to cut, copy, an d paste text. When you open the Word Processor application, a new docu ment is opened. Y ou can start writing immediately. You can modify th e style of a document on a font and a pa ragraph level. You can use different fonts, font sizes, an d styles. You can apply diffe rent predefined or user-defined styles by eith er modifying particular pieces of text separately or by using a template on which the style of the text is ba sed (see page 1 92). To change fo nts 1 Press Font in the document you are creating or e diting. A dialog opens , see Figure 76. Figure 76 2 Press Change to change the valu e of a list item. To see the effe ct of the change s you have made, pres s Pr eview . 3 Press Done to save the changes you have made. To change text style 1 Se lect the text whose style you want to change. 2 Press Style . A list of choices in alphabetical order opens. Linda1.book Page 190 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
191 Office 3 Select a style option from the lis t and press Set : These are the de fault values of th e style options in the list: To create a new or modify an existing style option 1 Press Style . 2 To create a new style option, press New . Or, to modify a s tyle option, select the style and press Ed it . A dialog opens. 3 Give the style option a ne w name by typing over the old name. Note that you cannot edit the names of the def ault styles. Press Format to view a list of style values you can change. 4 Press Chang e to change the values of the followin g: Fo nt , Alignment , Indents , Tab s , Line spacing , Borders , Bu llets , and Out line level . 5 Press Do ne to confirm the changes. Style option Font Point size Bold Italics Under lined Justifica- tion Normal URW Sa ns 12 pt Off Off Off Lef t Head er URW Sa ns 10 pt Off Off Off Lef t Footer URW Sa ns 10 pt Off Off Off Lef t Heading 1 URW S an s 16 pt On Off Off Left Heading 2 URW S an s 14 pt On Off Off Left Heading 3 URW S an s 12 pt On Off Off Left Title URW San s 1 8 pt On Of f Off Centre d Linda1.book Page 191 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
192 Office Templ ates Example : You may have a company template which shows the company n ame and defines a par ticular lay o ut. You can use templates and save documents as templates when creating and editing documents. To select a template, press the Menu key and select File > Templates > Select temp late ⦠. A list of available templates opens. Se lect a template and press OK . To save a docu ment as a template, press the Menu key an d select File > T emplates > Save as temp late ⦠. To delete a template, go to File manager. See page 204. To insert an object Tip: To resi z e an im ag e after insertion, press the Menu key and s elect Ed it > Obj ec t > Object details ⦠. 1 Press In sert obj ect in the document you are creating or editing. A dialog opens. See Figure 77 . Figure 77 2 Se lect from the list the type of object you want to insert. 3 Press Insert new to open the corresponding ed itor. Press Inse rt exis ting to open a list of files. Only files which you can insert are listed. Linda1.book Page 192 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
193 Office Note: Objects in a document are n ot links but embedded attachments, which may increase the file siz e of the document dramatically. To hid e or make visi ble text markers To hide or m ake visible marker s that are used in editing wi thin the document, proceed as follows. 1 Press the Menu ke y and first select Tools > Preferences ⦠. A dialog with two pages opens. 2 Set the followin g options on or off: Basic opt ions page : Show t ab s , Show spac es , an d Show paragraph mark s , Advanced options pa ge : Show forced line break s , Show non- breaking spaces , and Show hard hyphens . To view the outline of a document Tip: To open a specif ic page in the document, press the Menu key and select Tools > Go to ⦠. 1 Press the Menu ke y and select View > O utline ⦠. A tree s tructure o f the document opens. 2 To show more details, press Expand . To show le ss details, press Co llapse . To open a selected point in the document, press Go to . 3 Press Cl ose to return to the document view . To paginate After creating a new document, you can divide it in to pages. Press the M enu key and select Tools > Mo re > Pagin ate . This command will als o update the pa ge numbering. Linda1.book Page 193 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
194 Office Shee t In Sheet you can work and store your data in a file that is c alled a workbook. Each workbook contains at leas t one worksheet. A workbook can also contain chartsh eets; a chartsheet is a spreadsh eet file containing a chart that is based on data from a wo rkshee t. You can open, edit and save documents created wi th Microsoft Excel for Windows versions 95, 97 and 2000. Note that not all features and formatting of the original files will be supported. Files made with other versions of Microsoft Excel may only be viewed. For information on other file format conversions, see the PC Suite guide on the CD-ROM. Workbooks Tip: To add a workbook to the Desk application, press the Menu key and select File > Add to Desk . To create a new workbook, press the Menu key and select File > New workbook . To open an existing workbook, pr ess the Menu key and select File > Open . To save a workbook, press the Menu key in the worksheet view and select File > Save . To send a work book as mail or via infrared, press the Men u key in t he worksheet view and select F ile > Send . Worksheets To create a new wo rksheet in a workbook, p ress the Menu key and select Insert > New worksheet . Linda1.book Page 194 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
195 Office To enter da ta To enter data, select a cell with the Arrows ke y and start typing the data in th e selected cell. To confirm what you have entered into a cell, press Enter, OK , or go to another cell with the Arrows key. To dismiss the action, press Esc or Cancel . You can also enter a formula to perform operations on w orksheet data. Sheet application provides some predef ined, or built-in, formulas, wh ich are known as funct ion s. To insert a function, press Insert func tion . A dialog opens. See Figure 7 8. The function categories you can choose from are as follows: All , Fi nancial , Date and time , Mathematic al , St at is tic al , Lo oku p , Text , Lo gical , an d Information . Each category has a set of functions, which you can see from the list next to Function name . Select the function you want and press Clos e . Figure 78 Linda1.book Page 195 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
196 Office Example: You might want to sum up figures in cells C2 to C4 in cell C5; select ce ll C5, pr es s Point re fe re nc e and select the cell range from C 2 to C4. Pr ess E nter or OK to confirm the action. The SUM will now appear in C5. In a formul a, you can e nter cons tant values or cell referenc es. A cell refe renc e tells Sheet where to look for th e values or data you want to use in the formula. To enter a reference to a cell or cells in a formula: 1 Go to th e cell you want to edit, and press Ed it. 2 Move the cursor to the place wher e you want to in sert a reference, and pr ess Poin t refer ence . 3 Se lect the cells that contain the values you want to use. See â To select cellsâ on page 135. The focus remains in the cell you are e diting. Press Enter or OK to confirm the action. Figure 79 To select ce lls There are two ways to select a cell or a range of cells in a worksheet: Example: To select column A, enter A:A . To select row 1, enter 1:1. To select columns B and C as well as rows 2 and 3, enter B2:C3 ⢠Press the Menu key and select Edit > Select . Then enter the selection ran ge or choose a range from the list. ⢠Press and hold the Shift key, and increase the selection frame with the Arrows key. To select entire r ows or columns, pr ess and hold the Sh ift key, and select th e desired row or colu mn headings with the Arrows key. Linda1.book Page 196 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
197 Office To select the entire w orksheet, use the shortcut Ctrl A. The selection is cleared when you press the Arrows key or Tab key. To insert cell s 1 Select a number of cell(s) that you want to in sert into the worksheet. 2 Press the Menu ke y and select Inse rt > Ce lls . A dialog opens. 3 Define whether you want the inserted cell or cells to appear above ( Shif t c el ls down ) or left ( S hift cells righ t ) of the sele cted range. To insert an en tire row(s) or column(s), select either Entire ro w or Entire colum n . 4 Press OK to accept t he insertion and Cancel to dis miss it. To sort cells You can rearrange th e order of cells from top to bottom and left to right. 1 Select the r ange. 2 Press the Menu ke y and select Tools > Sort . 3 Select either Top to bott om or Left to right . A dialog opens. 4 Define the sorting criteria. 5 Press Cl ose to do the sorting. To search for data 1 Press the Menu ke y and select Edit > Find . A dialog opens. 2 In th e Find: field, enter the st ring you wa nt to s earch f or. Linda1.book Page 197 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
198 Office Tip: Pressing Options opens up th e following options: Search in values , Search in fo rmulae , Match case , Find ent ire cells only , Directio n , an d Searc h by . 3 Press Find to search for th e str ing. Press Options to search th e worksheet a ccording to certain criteria . Press Re place to replace the string with something else. To cl ear cells 1 Choose th e cell or cells you want to cle ar. 2 Press Clear . A lists of choices appears . 3 To clear both the contents and formats of the cell or cells, select All . To clear only the contents of the cell or cells, select Contents . To clear only the formats of the ce ll or cells, select Formats . To adjust co lumn width or row he ight 1 Se lect the column(s), or row(s). 2 Press the Menu key and select Form at > Column width ⦠or Row height ⦠. 3 To in crease column width, press > on the Arrows key as many times as necessary. To diminish column width, press <. To increase row height, press ⨠on the A rrows key as many times as is necess ary. To diminish row h eight, press ⧠. To adjust the width or height by exact figures, pr ess Def ine wi dth . Figure 80 Linda1.book Page 198 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
199 Office To align ce ll cont en ts 1 Select the cel l or cells. 2 Press the Menu ke y and select Format > Al ignm ent . A dialog opens. 3 Define the f ollowing options: Horizontal , Vertic al , and Wrap text to cell . To change the appearance of cell bor ders 1 Select the cel l or cells. 2 Press the Menu ke y and select Format > Cell ap pearance > Bo rders . A dialog opens. 3 Define the f ollowing options: Outl in e , Top , Bottom , Lef t , Right , and Line co lour . To chang e n umber form at 1 Select the cel l or cells. 2 Press the Menu ke y and select Format > Numbers . A dialog opens. 3 Choose the required format from the list. Depending on the format you choose, you may def ine the place of the decim al. To change fo nts 1 Select the cel l or cells. 2 Press the Menu ke y and select Format > Fon t . A dialog opens. 3 Press Chang e to change the value of a list item. 4 To see the effect of the changes you have made, p ress Prev iew . 5 Press Do ne to save the changes you have made. To change background colour 1 Select the cel l or cells. Linda1.book Page 199 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
200 Office 2 Press the Menu key and select Format > Cell appearance > Backgr ound colour . A dialog opens. 3 Choose th e colour. To insert pag e breaks 1 Press the Menu key and select Insert > Page break . A dialog ope ns. 2 De fine the following option s: Break at colum n and Break at row . Note: Since th e break is placed above and on the lef t side of the sele cted cell, you cannot insert a page break when the cell A1 is selected. To n a me ce lls Tip: To change viewer prefer ences, pres s the Menu key and select Tools > Settings . Set the following options on or off: Show gridlines , Show row header s , Show column h eaders , Automat ic recal culation , Show zero values , and Show pagination lin es . 1 Se lect the cell or cells. 2 Press the Menu key and select Insert > Name > Add . If the cell or cells already have a name, you can edit the name by selecting Edit . A dialog opens. 3 Enter the name. To name worksh eets 1 Press the Menu key and select Edit > Rename worksheet . A dialog opens. 2 Choose th e worksheet from the list and name it. To delete cells, columns, rows, page breaks, and worksheets 1 Se lect a cell within the area you want to delete. 2 Press the Menu key and select Edit > Delete . A dialog opens. 3 Choose f rom the list what you want to de lete. Linda1.book Page 200 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
201 Office To go to any sh eet or chart w ithin the sam e workbook Tip: To view sheets in the Chartshe et view, pres s Sheets/ C harts . 1 Press the Menu key and select View > Worksheets or Sheets/Char ts . A list opens. 2 Choose a sheet or chart and press OK to open the sheet and Cancel to dismiss it. Note: You cannot change the order of the sheets. Chartsheets To crea te chartsheets There ca n be seve n diff erent kinds of charts: Line , Column , Sta cked column , Bar , Stacked bar , X/Y scatter , and Pie . 1 Select a range of cells on a worksheet. These will provide the data for your new chartsheet. 2 Press the Menu ke y and select Inse rt > New cha r t . A dialog opens. 3 Define the f ollowing: Chart name , Chart type, 3-D, Background c olour , and Ax is colour . 4 Press Cl ose to create a new chartsheet and Esc to dismiss it. To edit c hartsheets Tip: You can al so press the Tab key and Enter to select objects. Press Esc to cancel the selection. 1 Press Select ob ject . A dialog opens. 2 Choose an object from the following list for editing and press OK : Chart , Chart title , X-axis , Y-a xi s , X-axis titl e , Y- axis title , Legend , Major X-axis gridl ines , Minor X - axis gri dlines , Ma jor Y-axis gr idlines , Minor Y- axis gridlines , a n d Serie s . Th e setting dialog for th e selected object opens. See Figure 81 for an exam ple of X-axis settings being edite d. 3 To edit the object, press Cha ng e or press Enter. A dialog opens. Linda1.book Page 201 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
202 Office To delete th e object, press Delet e . 4 Define t he new value s. Figure 81 5 Press Clos e to confirm the ch anges or Esc to dismiss them. Note: You can select only one object at a time. To repl ace cha rtsheet data Tip: To define th e gener al appearance of a ch art, press Chart setti ngs . Define the page style and n ame in th e two pages of the dialog which opens. You can r eplace the data on which you r chartsheet is based. 1 Press Sheets / Char ts and select the worksheet your chart is based on. 2 Se lect a new data area for the cha rt fr om the wor ksh eet, pre ss the Menu key, and select View > Sheets/Charts to return to th e charts heet. 3 Press the Menu key, select Tools > Replace data , and press OK to confirm the changes or Cancel to dismiss them. Pres entati on v iewer You can use Presen tation viewer to view pr esentations. You can also send a nd receive these presentations as mail or via infrared. Linda1.book Page 202 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
203 Office You can view documents created with Microsoft PowerPoint for Windows versions 95,97 and 2000. N ote that not all features and formatting of th e original documents will be supported. To view a presentation Press Open in the Presentation main view to select and view a document. To close the application, press Close . Tip: You can zoom in and out to get a be tter view of the presen tation. When a document is open ed, the top of the first slide is shown. To view the next slide, press Next or Enter. To view the previous slide, pr ess Previo us . To scroll the current slide, use th e Arrows key. The ou tline view To get an overview of the whole presentation, press Ou tlin e view . This opens up a view where the text content of the pres entation is in a list f ormat. See Figur e 82. Figure 82 To view only title texts, press Titles o nly . To r eturn to the standard slide show, press Slide view . Linda1.book Page 203 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
204 Office To search for and view a slide 1 Press the Menu key and select Tools > Go to slide ⦠. A list of th e slides in th e presentation open s. 2 Go to th e slide you want by using the Arrows key. 3 Press Go to open the slide. To view the pre senter â s notes To view the presenter â s notes along with the slides, press the Menu key an d select View > Notes view . File manager Tip: Use File manager together with a m emory card to remove fi l e s and folders f rom the communicator memory and thus fre e me mor y. S e e â To back up and restore data to and from a memory card â on page 209. You can use File manager to manage the contents and properties of various folders. The main view has two frames: a f older tree on the left and a f ile list on the right. Figure 83 You can toggle between the fram es with the Tab key. Linda1.book Page 204 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
205 Office The folder view The folder tree can contain folders from two roots, the communicator and a memo ry c ard. Tip: Avoid saving files to the root of th e communicator; use folders instead. Under the communicator root there is C:\Documents\ fol der that co nt ains f our default folder s: \Documents\Downloa ded\ , \Documen ts\Photo galler y\ , \Documents\Tem plates\ , and \Documents\Tones\ . To show or h ide subfolders in th e folder list fram e, press < an d > on the Arrows key. The - an d signs in front of the folder icons indicate whether the su bfolders are shown or hidden. Folders without either sign have no su bfolders, an d you can use the Arrows key t o switch between the folder view and files view. Note: Multi-selection is not possible in the folder list frame. The files view Tip: To ch an ge t he sorting order or th e value by which the files are sorted (name, date and time, type, and size), pres s the Menu key and select Vi ew > Sort by or Sorting order . The file list on the right shows all the files in the source or folder currently selected in the left f rame. The title of the file list frame shows the path of the cu rrently selected file. The f ile list frame also shows the application-related icon , name, and the last m odification date of the file. The files are sorted in alphabetical order by default. Note: Hidden files are shown only if you press the Menu key a nd select View > Show all file s . To view the contents of a folder 1 Choose a folder in the left folder tree frame and pr ess Open . Linda1.book Page 205 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
206 Office A view of all the subfolders and files of the parent folder opens. S ee Figure 84. Figure 84 2 To view any possible subfolder , select it and press Open . 3 To view parent folders, pr ess Esc. 4 Press Clo se fo lder to r eturn t o the main view. The title of the folder content view shows the path name and the number of files and subfolders in the folder, together w ith the total size of all the files in the folder. This view shows th e name, last modification date and time, and th e size of a particular file. The icon in front of the name indicates the type of file or subfol der. To open a fi le 1 Select a f ile and press Open . The file will th en be opened in the cor responding application. 2 To return to th e main view, press Close fo ld er . Note: You can open only one file at a time. Linda1.book Page 206 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
207 Office To move files and folders Tip: For multi-selection, see â To select s everal items at once â on page 25. 1 Select folders or files that you want to move an d press Move in the main view of File m anager. A list of folders opens, as shown in Figure 85. Figure 85 2 Search for a target folder with the Arrows key. To hide or show the su bfolders of a folder, press Collaps e and Expand respectively. You can also navigate in the folder list with the Arrows key and / - keys. To create a new target folder, press New folder . 3 Press OK to confirm the move and Cancel to dismiss it. To create new folders 1 In the main view of File manager select th e folder in which you want create a new f old er 2 Select File > New folder . 3 Name the n ew folder. 4 To confirm the changes, pr ess OK . To dismiss the changes, press Can cel . Linda1.book Page 207 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
208 Office To renam e files a nd folders 1 Se lect the file o r folder in th e main view of File manager. 2 Press the Menu key and select File > Rename . The cu rsor now appears a t the beginning of the selected file or folder name. 3 Re name the file or folder. 4 To confirm the changes, press OK . To dismiss the changes, press Cancel . To view the pro perties of files, folders, and drives Tip: In th e Properties dialog, you can also change a file into hidden or read- only state or a folder into read-only state . 1 Se lect the file, folder, or drive in the main view of File manager. 2 Press the Menu key and select File > Properties ⦠. A dialog opens, as shown in Figure 86. Figure 86 To search for files and folders 1 Choose the folder or memory storage where you want the search to ta ke place. 2 Press the Menu key and select Tools > Fi nd ⦠. A dialog opens. 3 E nter in th e fiel d t he s tring for which you want to s earch . 4 Press Opti ons to define the search in more detail. Se e Figure 87. Linda1.book Page 208 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
209 Office Tip: You ca n se ar c h according to time per iod, start and en d time, an d the file type. Figure 87 Press Chang e to change the value of a list item. When ready, pre ss Cl ose . 5 Press Find to start the search. To interrupt the search, press Stop . 6 When the search is over, press Op en to open th e folder or f ile found. To start a new sear ch, pre ss New fi nd . 7 To return to the m ain view, press Close . To back up an d restore data t o and from a mem ory card It is advisable to take backups of your communicator data regularly. IMPO RTA NT ! Do NOT use this method to restore data you have backed up with Nokia 9210 Commun icator to Nok ia 921 0i Comm uni cator. Use PC Su ite instead. Note: The Backup and R estore commands will copy all data. You cannot back up or restore an individual folder. The Backup and Restore comman ds are recursive; that is, they copy folders and all th e contents within the Linda1.book Page 209 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
210 Office folders. For information about selective backups, selective restoring, and using a PC to back u p and restore, see th e PC Suite guide on the sales package CD-ROM. To be able to back u p to an d restore from a memory card, the ca rd should be i nse rted in t he co m m u nicato r. For detail s, see â T o i ns ert a m e m o ry car d â on page 2 5. 1 Press th e Menu key and select Memo ry ca rd > Backu p to memory card ⦠or Restore from memo ry ca rd ⦠, depen ding on what you wan t to do. A dialog opens. 2 If you are making a backup, look for a backup folder on the memory card by pressing Change or type in the name of a new folder in the Backup fold er field. If you are restori ng data to your communicator, select the f older in the communicator into which you want to restore your data. Normally you should select the root folder. 3 Press Backup to back up all the communicator data to the memory card. Press Re store to restore all the backed-up memory card data to the communicator. 4 Restart the communicator by removing the battery and replacing it again. To lock a memory card You can pr otect a me mory card with a password to prevent unauthorised access. Note: Not all memory cards support password protection. 1 Press the Menu key and select Memory c ard > Security > Ch ange pas sword ⦠. A dialog opens. 2 Type you r password in the New password field and type it again in the Confirm password field. 3 Press OK . The ne w p ass wor d is set . Linda1.book Page 210 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
211 Office To remove password protection, pr ess the Menu key and select Memory c ard > Security > Remove password ⦠. Type your pass word and press Remove . Note: Use a password that is ea sy f or you to r emember but difficult for others to guess. If you forg et your password, the only way to use your mem ory card aga in i s to fo rmat th e card. Formatting de le tes all d ata f rom th e car d! To for mat a mem ory car d press the Menu key, select Memory c ard > Format mem ory card ⦠, and press Format . Linda1.book Page 211 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
212 Office Linda1.book Page 212 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
213 Extras 11. Extras Extras contains the following applications: Calculator, Clock, C ontrol panel, Recorder, Imaging, C ell broadcast, Video player , and Fax modem. Most of the new applications that you install will b e added to the Extras application group. For more information o n applications availa ble on the sales package CD-ROM, see Software on CD-ROM Guide in th e Using Nokia 9 210i Communicator section of the C D-ROM. Figure 88 Tip: To install applications, see section â Install/Removeâ on page 224. Clock The Clock shows the time and date in your home city and country or region, as well as in several other cities an d countries in the world. The Clock also includes an alarm clock. To set the current date and time for your communicator, press the Menu key and select Tools > D at e an d ti me ⦠. Linda1.book Page 213 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
214 Extras Tip: To ch oose the clock type, press the Menu key and select Vie w > Clock type > Digital or A nalogue . To set an a larm 1 Press Alarm c lock in the m ain view. An alarm clock view opens. 2 The currently active alarms are listed next to the clock. 3 To create a new alarm , press Ne w alarm or to edit an alar m, press Edit alarm . 4 De fine the Time of the alarm and the frequency in Occurrence an d Day fields. Define also the Descripti on displayed when the ala rm goes off. Tip: T o turn of f a sounding alarm, press Stop or any key on the keypad of the phone cover . Press Snooze to silence the alarm for five min utes. 5 Press Done to accept the set alarm. To change yo ur home ci ty If your home city and time settings on your communicator are not set correctly, you must first set your home city an d then set the time, since your home location def i ne s th e ti me z o n e u se d . 1 Go to th e Worl d cloc k main view. Tip: The worl d map shows the currently selec ted city in cross hairs. 2 Press Change ci ty . A cities view opens. Se e figure 89. Figure 89 3 Type the city in the search f ield or scroll th e list and press Select when ready . 4 Press OK to accept the change of time zone or Cancel to dismiss it. Linda1.book Page 214 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
215 Extras Note: For more detailed information about Clock, see the Nokia 9210i Comm unica tor hel p. Calculator There are two mo des in Calculator: desk calculator for simple arithmetic operations and scientific calculator for more complicated mathematical calculations. There are two ways to perform calculations, either by typin g the characters in th e input field or selecting symbols from th e function map. A calculation is ex ecuted by pressing Enter or =. The calculation and its result can be see n on the output sheet on the le ft. You cannot write in the output sheet, but selection is poss ible. Figure 90 To move betwe en the input field, output sheet, and function map, press the Tab key. The input field is never empty in the desktop calculator: it contains either the result of the previous calculation or a zero (0) if you have pressed backspace. Linda1.book Page 215 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
216 Extras Note: For more de tailed information about Calculator, see the Nokia 9210i Communicator help. Cont rol panel In the Control panel you can view or m odify the following: Sec ur ity , Data call barring , Da ta call bar ring , Pr of ile s , Data c all ba rr in g , Certific ate manager , Date and ti me , Install/Remov e softwa re , Int ernet access , About produ ct , Memo ry , Regional settings , and Default fo lder Modifying these features affects the oper ation of your communicator across all the applications. Figure 91 To open a program for editing, select it with th e Arrows key and press Se lect . Security Here you can define th e phone security level of your communicator. Linda1.book Page 216 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
217 Extras IMPO RTA NT : The default lock code is 1234 5 . For security re asons, it is imperative that you change the lock code. Keep the code secret and in a safe place, separate from th e communicator. The codes are shown as ast e risks. If you are changing a code, you w ill be prompted for the current code and then th e new code twice. PIN code request : If you set the PIN code request On , the communicator requests that you enter the code every time you turn on th e phone. If you enter the PIN code incorrectly three times in succe ssion, you will need a PUK code to unblock the SIM card. When the SIM card is blocked, you cannot s end or receive any docu ments or calls except calls to preprogrammed emergency numbers. Oth erwise, the communicator can be used n ormally. You need the PIN c ode to change this setting. Note: This setting cannot be changed, if the phone is switched off or if there is no valid SIM card in serted. Note: Some SIM cards do not allow you to turn the PIN code r equest off. Autoloc k period : Deter mines the security time- out period, after which th e communicator will lock. The options are None / 2 minu tes / 5 minutes / 10 minutes . The last op tion allows you to def ine the number o f minutes yourself. When the communicator is locked, you can make emergency calls to predefined numbers using the cover phone. Yo u can also answer incoming calls and make emerge ncy calls using the Telephone application. All other actions are blocked. The tim er is reset by any input, data transfer, printing, and so on . You n eed the lock code to change this setting. Linda1.book Page 217 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
218 Extras Lock if SIM c ard is chan ged : If set On , every time the ph one is switched on th is security option checks whether the SIM car d in the communicator has been changed. If the SIM card has been changed and th e new SIM card has not been used with your communicator previou sly, the communicator locks itself until the lock code is correctly entered. T he communicator recognises five different SIM cards as the owner â s cards. You need the lock code to chan ge this setting. Tip: Changing the PIN code requires that PIN code requ es t is selected, the phone is on, an d that there is a valid SIM card inserted. PIN code : This setting allows you to change the PIN code. T he new PIN code must be from 4 to 8 digits long. PIN2 code : This setting allows you to change the PIN2 code . The PIN2 code is required to acce ss som e fu nc tions, suc h as th e call cost settings , which must be supported by your SIM card. If you enter an incorr ect PIN2 code three times in succession, you will need a PUK2 code to unblock the PI N2 code. The n ew PIN2 code must be f rom 4 to 8 di gits long. Lock code : This setting allows you to change the lock code. The default lock code is 1234 5 . The new lock code must be fr om 5 to 10 digits long. If you en ter an incorrect lock code five tim es in succession, the phone will be locked for five min utes after which you ca n try again. I f you try again within les s th a n f i ve mi n ut e s , y o u ha v e t o wa i t f iv e m in u te s mo r e b e fo r e a c od e c an be accepted. Tip: Changing the barring password requires that the phone is on and the Call barring service is activated for your SIM card. Barring p asswor d : This setting a llows you to ch ange the barring pas sword. If you enter an incorrect password three times in succession, the password is blocked and you must ask the n etwork service provider f or a new password. Note: Avoid using codes that are similar to emergency n umbers to prevent accidental dialling of th e emergency nu mber. Linda1.book Page 218 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
219 Extras Note: When the communicator is locked, calls may be possible to the emergency number programmed in to your phone (e.g. 112 or other official eme rge ncy numb er). Data call barring Tip: Use data call barring to limit the use of th e phone, if you lend it to someone temporarily. Here you can prevent or allow the foll owing data call types: Note: You need a barring password to modify these settings. Outgoi ng calls : When activated, prohibits making data calls. Incoming calls : When activated, prohibits r eceiving data c alls. International calls : When activated, prohibits making international calls. Tip: To check the current status of a barring option, select the option an d press Check status . Incoming calls when abroad : When activated, prohibits receiving calls wh en abroad. International except to home country : When activated, prohibits making international calls to all countries except to the cou ntry that has been defined as the h ome country. Note: Calls described here as international may in some cases be made between regions of the same nation. Accessories Here you can de fin e som e of t he s ettin gs when you us e th e Nok ia 92 10i Comm uni c at o r with Advanc ed HF C ar Kit CA RK 10 9 or He ad s et HDC -8L . For further in formation on access ories for the Nokia 9 210i Communicator, see th e accessories section of the Getting started guide. Define the accessories options as follows: 1 Double-click the Accessories icon in the Control Panel. A dialog opens Linda1.book Page 219 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
220 Extras 2 Se lect the accessory options that you want to modify. The options are Headset / Car kit . Press Edit . 3 De fine the following: Car kit settings Automati c answer : Allows you to define whether the automatic answering is on or off when your communicator is attached to the car kit. Default pr ofile : Allows you to ch oose the profile that will be automatically s elected, when you attach your communicator to the car kit. Headset settings Cover d isplay ligh ts : A llows you to define whether the cover display ligh ts are always on or not when the headset is attached to your communicator. Automati c answer : Allows you to define whether the automatic answering is on or off when the headset is attached to your communicator. Default pr ofile : Allows you to ch oose the profile that will be automatically s elected, when the headset is attached to your communicator. Profiles Here you can edit pr ofiles. Profiles define the tones and sound level of your communicator in diffe rent operating environmen ts. For details on pr ofiles, see â Profile settings â on page 78. Display Here you define th e appearance of the display. Linda1.book Page 220 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
221 Extras Contrast and bri ghtness page Figure 92 Press and - to adjust the bar you are editin g. Contrast level : Pressin g increa ses a nd - decreases the contrast of the display. Brightnes s : The brightness level of the display. Th ere are five levels to choose from. Brightnes s period : A time period after which, if there has not been any key pr esses within that time, the br ightness will go down to its lowest level. The le vel will rise to the level defined in Brightness as soon as any key is pressed again. The options are 15 se c / 30 sec/ 45 sec/ 1 min / 2 min . Tip: Selectin g a low brightness level and a short time period for the last two options saves th e battery and increases the operation time of the communicator. Screen saver : A time period after which the display will blank out if th e device remains inactive. The options are 2 min / 4 min/ 6 min/ 8 min / 10 min. Colour page Colour pa lette : The display colour sc heme. The options are Blue / Red / Green / Grey . Backgroun d pattern : The background image of the command button area. The options are Plain / Wheels / Sand / Wat er / Lea ve s . Linda1.book Page 221 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
222 Extras Certificate manager With Certificate manager you can manage digital certificates which you use w hen connecting to WWW site s, WAP services, mail ser vers, and when in stalling softwar e. You ne ed thes e certif icates whe n you: ⢠want to connect to an online bank or some other site or remote server for actions that involve transferring confidential information, ⢠want to m inimise the risk of viruses or other malicous software and be sure of the authenticity of software when downloading and installing it. Note however, that even if th e use of certificates makes the risks involved in remote connections and software installation considerably smaller, they m ust be used correctly in or der to benefit fro m increased security. T he existence of a certificate does not offer any protection by itself; Certificate manager must contain correct, authentic, and trusted certificates for increased security to be available. To open the main view of Certificate manager, press the Extras application bu tton, sel ect Control panel , and select Certificate ma nager . The main view lists the cu rrently available certificates and their validity information. Note: Certificates have a restricted life time. If a certif icate is marked Expired even if it should be Valid , check that the date and time in your communicator a re correct. To define the usage of the certificate 1 Se lect the certificate and press View d etails . A dialog with certificate details opens. Linda1.book Page 222 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
223 Extras 2 Press Trust se tti ngs . A dialog opens. 3 If you want this certificate to be a ble to certify W WW sites and mail ser vers, select Web brows er and Mai l , pre s s Change , and select Yes 4 If you want this certificate to be able to certify the origin of a ne w software, select Software ins tallation , press Change , and select Yes . Note: Before changing these settings, you must make sure that you really trust the owner of the certificate and that the certificate really belongs to the listed owner. To check that a certificate is authentic Certificates are u sed to verify the origin of WWW pages and in stalled software. However, they can only be trusted if the origin of the certificate is known to be authentic. If you ar e adding a n e w certificate, or want to ch e ck the authenticity o f an existing certificate, proceed as follows: 1 Select the cert ificate and press View details . A view of certificate details opens. 2 The Subjec t: field identifies the owner of this c ertificate. Make sure that th is is the name of the party to who m you think that this certificate belon gs. 3 Scroll the dialog until you see the Fingerpr int: fiel d. 4 The Fingerprint: field uniquely identifies the certificate. Contact the h elp desk or customer service of the owner of the certificate (see step 2 above) and ask for the MD5 fingerpr int of the certificate . Compare the fingerpr int with the one shown in the dialog. If they m atch, the certificate is authentic. Note: Use this authentication proce dure each time you add a new ce rtificate. To add or dele te certif icates To add a new certificate, press Add. A dialog opens in which you can search and select the new cer tificate. Linda1.book Page 223 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
224 Extras To delete a certificate, s elect it and press Delet e . Date and time Here you define the current time and date for your communicator. Time : The curr ent time . Date : The cu rrent date. Daylig ht-savin g : De termines how the time of your communicator is affected by changes in daylight sav ing time. The options are On /Off / Define summer . If Define summer is selected , you have to en ter the dates Summer starts and Sum mer en ds . Install/Remo ve With Install/Remove you can i nstall new software or r emove installed applications from your communicator. When you open the Install/Remove application, the Installed software page lists all of the software packages that have bee n installed, with their n ame, version number, type, an d size . Press Certif icate Info to display th e certificate details of an installed software package that has a digital signature and a certificate. To install software The types of a pplications which you can install are those that are specifically intended for the Nokia 9210/9210i Communicator or suitable f or the Symbian operating system on Crystal style devices, and Java applications. Linda1.book Page 224 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
225 Extras Note: If you install software that is not intended specifically for th e Nokia 9210/9210i Communicator, its usage can differ sign ificantly from the usual Nokia 9210/9210i Communicator applications. You can download or transfer a software package containing the files of the application into the communic ator. Then you can install the application. Software can also be installed from a memory card. A software package is usually one large compressed file containing many comp onent files. Tip: You ca n al s o st a rt the installation by browsing for the installation package in commu nicat or memo ry o r memor y card w ith Fi l e manager, selecting it, and pressing the E nter key. IMPO RTA NT : When downloading or transferring s oftware packages into th e communicator, use only pa ckages whose file names end â .sisâ . An example of a suitable file name is â MediaPlayer.sis â . To start th e installation, press Install new on the Installed s oftware page. Browse for the software package you want to in stall, and press OK . The installation process begins. Note: Only install software from sources that offer adequate protection against viruses and other harmful software. To help you, th e software installation system on the Nokia 9210i Communicator u ses digital signat ures and certificates on software pack ages. See page 222. If you are installing software w ithout a digital signature or a certificate, the communicator warns you of the risks of installing s oftware, as shown in figure 93. Linda1.book Page 225 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
226 Extras Tip: If you have installed PC Suite f or Nokia 9210i Communicator on your PC and the communicator is connected to your PC, you can also install software by double-clicking a file ending with .sis stored on your PC. Figure 93 If you see this warning message, only continue installation if you are absolutely sure of the origin and contents of the software package. The installation procedure also checks the integrity of the package to be installed. Once these checks are complete, the application is installed on your communicator. During the installation process, you are shown information about the checks being carried ou t on the package. You are also given options whether to continue with or cancel the installation. To remove software 1 To remove an installed software pa ckage from your commu nicator, select the software pa ckage you wa nt to remove from th e Installed software page and press Re move . 2 A dialog appears asking for your confirmation. Press OK to remove the software. Note: Some software packa ges update existing s oftware and cannot be remo ved. IMPO RTA NT: If you remove software, you can only re-install it by having th e original software package file, or by restoring a full back-up th at contains the r emoved software package. If you remove a softwar e Linda1.book Page 226 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
227 Extras package, you may no longer be able to open documents cr eated with that software. If an another software package depends on the software package that y ou removed, the other software package m ay stop working. R efer to the documentation of the installed software package for details. Installation log To view the list of s of tware installations an d removals that have taken place, pr e ss the Menu key and go to the Install log page. This list shows what software has be en installed and removed, and when that happened. If you encoun ter problems with the device after in stalling a software package, you can use this list to f ind out which software package may be th e cause of the problem. The in formation on this list may also help to pinpoint problems that a re caused by software packages that are incompatible with each other. Installation setting s On the Prefer ences page, you can select options related to software installation. You can define the f ollowing: Delete inst allation f ile after us e - If set to Yes , the software package installation file (that ends in .sis ) will be delete d from the device after installation. If you download software packages using the WWW browser, this may be helpful in reducing the amount of required storage space. Note: If you want to store the software package file for possible re-installation later on, either set this to No or make sure that you h ave a copy of the software package file stor ed on your PC or on a CD-ROM. Linda1.book Page 227 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
228 Extras Default installat ion languag e - You can set the defa ult installation language to the language that your Nokia 9210i Communicator h as. If the s oftware package contains several different language versions of the software, the language version specified here will be installed. Sort in stalled s oftware by - To sort the list of installed software packages, select one of the options Name , Type , or Size . In ter ne t a cc ess Here you are able to edit, create n ew, and delete existing Internet access points. For details on h ow this is don e, see the Internet section of the Settings ch ecklist delivered in your sales pa ckage. For details on IAPs, see â To se t up y o ur Int er net access point â on page 132. About this produ ct Here you can scroll to see copyright information on the Nokia 9 210i Communicato r. Memory Here you can view the amount of free memory for storing data and installing new software. You can scroll and view t he memory consumption of the f ollowing details: Documents , Spreadsheets , Sound s , Faxes , Mails , Short messa ges , Calendar data , Contacts , Images , Installed applicati ons , and Other fi le types . Linda1.book Page 228 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
229 Extras If a memory card is in serted in the communicator, press Me mory card to view the amount of available memory on th e card. Press Devi ce to return to view the communicator memory. If the memory is getting low, you s hould remove some documents. Before removing, you can print, fax, or mail them, or tr ansfer them to a PC or a memory card. Regional settings On these four pages you can define the local time, date, number ing, and currency expression s. Note: For more detailed in formation about Regional settings, see the Nokia 9210i Communicator help. Default folder With the Default folder , y ou can define th e folder which acts as a defa ult saving folder whenever you wish to save a document in you r communicator memory. For details on how to ma nage your files and folder s, see â File manage r â on page 204. Recorder Tip: When y o u ha v e recorded so unds and speech, you can set them as ringing tones. See page 99. The Recorder allows you to recor d telephone conversations and voice m emos. You can also listen to your recordings and other sound files. The maximum length of a recording depends on the available m emory. Linda1.book Page 229 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
230 Extras You can open files that have been stored in the following file formats: .WAV, .AU, and compressed GSM encoded file format. Compression is done implicitly during the recording process. Recorder contains all the controls like Pla y , Stop , Paus e , and Record that are typically found in recording equipment. Press Resume to continue after r ecording or playback has been pau sed. Figure 94 You can change the volume level of the Recorder application by pressing the ⧠and ⨠keys on the Arrows key. You can a lso edit soun d files by using the com mands in the Edit menu. Note: Obey all local laws governing recording of calls. Do not use this feature illegally. Note: For more detailed in formation about Voice recorder, see the Nokia 9210i Communicator help. Linda1.book Page 230 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
231 Extras Imaging The Imaging application acts as a file manager for images. Application folders created for storing images are called albums. Images appear as thumbnail images in albums. A thumbnail image is a small image representing the origin al full size image. Imaging supports a wide range of image form ats, among them JPEG, T IFF, GIF, BMP, MBM, and WB M P. Tip: Press the Menu key and select View > Zoom > Zoom ratio ⦠to zoom by exact figures . You can open all commonly used image files directly for viewing. Press Zo om i n to enlarge the imag e, Zo om ou t to reduce the image on the displa y, and Rot ate to rotate the image. To view image properties, pr ess the Menu key and select File > Properties ⦠You can use the Imaging application for viewing images and handling image albums. You can delete, ren ame, copy, and move im ages from one a lbum to another and create your own favourite albu ms. Tip: If y ou hav e ima ges o r albums in the \Documents\Ph oto gallery\ directory on an i nserted memory card, th ey also will appear in this view. Figure 95 Note: Albums can contain only im ages, not other albums. Linda1.book Page 231 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
232 Extras You can also receive images via IR. For details, see â To receive images via infrared â on page 234. To create a new album 1 Press the Menu key and select File > New album ⦠. A dialog opens. 2 De fine the following: Name : Name of the albu m. 3 To save th e album in the communicator, pr ess Creat e lo cally . To save the album in a m emory card, press Create in mem. card . To view album contents Tip: To open an image located outside the image albums, select File > Open from ⦠. 1 Se lect the album in the Imaging main view and press Open . A thumbnail view of the album con tents opens. 2 You can scroll the contents of the album with the Arrows ke y. To open an image for viewing, press Op en . 3 To vie w the next f rame in the image, if available, press the Men u key and select View > Next frame . To retu rn to the previous image, select Previous fr ame . 4 Press Clos e to re turn to the thumbnail view. To move images to and from album s 1 Se lect the image or images in th e thumbnail view with the A rrows key. Linda1.book Page 232 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
233 Extras Tip: You ca n se lec t several images with the Space key. You can also use the Edit menu co mm ands and the corresponding shortcuts (Ct rl c, Ctr l x, Ctrl v) to move or copy images. 2 Press the Menu ke y and first select Edit > Copy or Cut . 3 Open the target album. 4 Press the Menu ke y and select Edit > Paste . 5 If the target album a lready has an image or images with th e same name, a confirmation note appears asking you if you wish to replac e the existing image. Choose from the following options: Replace - The existing image is rep laced with the im age you are pasting. Replace all - All existing im ages are re placed with the same name. Skip - Skips th e image and con tinues the operation. Cancel - Ca ncels the whole paste operation. Tip: To rename albums or images, s elect File > Rename ⦠., define a name , and press OK. Th e file extension cannot be changed. To create new im ages from o riginals You can choose parts of an opened image, save them as separate images, and reuse them. 1 Open an image. Press the Menu key and select Edit > Selec t im ag e r an ge . The selection frame is now visible on the image. 2 To move the selection frame, us e the Ar r ows key. To change the size of th e selection frame, press down th e Ctrl key and use the Arrows key. 3 To save the fra me as an image, press the Menu key and select File > Save as ⦠. Select Selected range . 4 Select the f older you wish to save in , give a name f or the new image file, and press OK . To resize images 1 Press the Menu ke y and select Tools > Resize ⦠. A dialog opens. Linda1.book Page 233 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
234 Extras 2 Scroll with the Arrows key to select the new size and press Select or press Best fit to f it the image h orizontally to the screen. To receive images via infrared Tip: Large im ages transferred from a digital camera may take too much intern al memor y t o b e view ed . T o sc ale th e siz e o f the transferred im ages do wn to 64 0x48 0 pix els, press the Menu key and select Tools > Use VGA , if t he option is not already selected. Note that all cameras may not support this function. 1 O pen the album wh ere you want to save the received file. 2 Press Images via infrared . A dialog opens. 3 Se lect one of the f ollowing: Receive in album : To receive the image and save it. Receive and mail : To receive the image and send it as an e-mail message. Receive and fax : To receive th e image and send it as a f ax. 4 Press OK . Cell broadcast Tip: Check with your network service pr ovider to see whethe r CBS is available. Cell Broadcast is an application wh ich you use with th e Cell Broadcast Service (CBS) to view the messages and to subscribe to topics of in terest. In areas where CBS is provided, you can receive short messages on various topics such as taxis, weather, service provider service s, and directory enquiries. Linda1.book Page 234 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
235 Extras Figure 96 To start or s top r eceiving CBS messages, in th e m ain view of Cell broadcas t, press Rece pt ion on or Recept ion off . Tip: You ca n se ar c h fo r differ ent t opic s. En ter a name of a topic in the search field. Press Read to read messages and pre ss Next or use th e commands in th e View menu to browse for more messages. To subscribe, scroll to a topic and press Subscribe . A check mark is displayed in the box on the left-hand end of the topic. To u nsubscribe, press Unsubs cr ibe . To add, edit, or remove topics when the reception is off, pr ess the Menu key an d select > Topic > Add topic / Edit topic/ Delete topic(s). Tip: You can quickly mark a topic as a hot t opic by first selecting the topic and then pressing C trl M. If you want to be notified with a dialog displaying a message on a particular topic when a new topic messa ge is received, press the Menu key a nd select Topic > Mark as hot to pic . The hot topic is m arked with an ex clamation mark â !â . To create o r rename top ic lists To create a new list, press the Menu key and select Li st > New blank list ⦠or New list with select ed topics ⦠Linda1.book Page 235 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
236 Extras Tip: You c an so rt t he topics by pressing the Menu key and selecting a sorting command in the Vie w menu. To change the name of the list that is open , press the Menu key and sele ct List > Rename list ⦠Note that the reception must be turned off. To open to pic lists To open a different list, p ress the Menu key and select List > Select to pic list . In different topic lists, you can still subscribe and unsubscribe topics and set them as hot topics. To detect new to pics To add new topics automatically, pres s the Menu key and s elect Tools > Settings ⦠. Define the following: Tip: Create a n ew em pty topic list and s elect the Yes and All options in the settings to receive a complete list of topics available in that area. Add new to pics to list - The options ar e Yes / No . I f yo u se le ct Yes , all new topics are added automatically to your current list of topics. If you select No , you will receive only the me ssages concerning subscribed or hot topics that you already have in your topic list. Languag e - Select th e language of the topics you want to r eceive. Select All to receive topic messages in all languages. Note: You will receive only the messages that are in the language you h ave chosen. To make sure you receive all messages, select All . Linda1.book Page 236 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
237 Extras Fax modem You can use t he communicator as a fax modem with a compatible PC. Your communicator can be connected to a PC via serial cable or by using an infrared connection. Before your PC can r ecognise the communicator as a fax m odem, you need to install a new modem configur ation for your PC. Please r efer to your oper ating system manual for more information. During the installation you may be asked to enter the path to the modem information file. The path on the sa les package CD- ROM is: \ Software for PC \ Pr inter and Modem dr ivers. Advanced users can also find a list of supported AT commands from this path. N ormally there is no need to use these comm ands . Note: Using the communicator as a fax modem requires that data calls are supported by the network operator and that this service is active in your SIM card. To install fax mod em driver usin g cable connection 1 Start Windows. 2 Insert the Nokia 9 210i CD-ROM in to the CD-ROM drive of the computer and locate the modem information file (mdmn9210i.INF). Alternatively, you can find the fi l e on the ww w .foru m.n o ki a. com Web si te . 3 Double-click the Modems icon in th e Windows Control Panel. A dialog open s. If no modem drivers have been installed on the com puter before, continue from step 6. 4 Click the Add button. Linda1.book Page 237 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
238 Extras 5 I n the field What t ype of modem do y ou want to install? se lect Other . Click Next 6 Se lect the option Don â t detect my mo dem; I will sele ct it from a li st 7 Cl ick Have disk... 8 Cl ick Browse and locate the CD-ROM drive with the Nokia 9210i CD-ROM. 9 On the CD-ROM, locate a folder Sof tware for PC/Mod em drivers 10 In the Modem drivers folder, select Mdmn9210i.inf file an d click Op en or OK . Tip: To use H igh Speed connection, your GSM operator must activate High Speed Data Services on your SIM card. 11 In the Install from disk dialog, Click OK . 12 In the Install New Modem dialog, select No kia 921 0 Communi cator (Cable) . If you are using High Speed connection (HSCSD), select a speed higher than 9600 bps and cable connection. Cl ick Next . 13 Select the COM port wh ere the serial cable is connected. Cli ck Next . 14 Cl ick Finish . 15 Remove the CD-ROM f rom the drive. 16 In your communicator, press the Extras application bu tton, select Fax mo dem , and press Open . 17 In the Fax modem application, press Se ttings 18 On the Connection page of the Fax modem settings, define the following: Connectio n type : Cable Transfer rate : 19200 or higher. Make sure that this setting is the same both in your communicator and you r PC. Data bits : 8 Stop bits : 1 Flow contr ol : Software Press Done . Note: Transf er rate is the speed with which the data is transferred between your communicator and PC. Th e best transfer rate for n ormal GSM calls is 1 9200 or higher. For high speed calls, you s hould select 115200. Select the same rate in you r PC application as well. Linda1.book Page 238 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
239 Extras 19 Your communicator is now ready to be used as a f ax modem. Press Acti vat e to activate the Fax modem. Fax modem settings To open Fax modem , press the Extras application button, select Fax modem , and press Open Note that an active PC connection using the fax modem is disconnected af ter 20 minutes if no data is sent or received. However, an active call is not automa tically disconnected. Note: You cannot change fax modem settings if the fax modem is activa ted. To change these settings, m ake sure that fax modem is not active. Open Fax modem and press Settings . A dialog with two pages opens. Define the f ollowing: Conn ect ion page Connection type : Pr ess Change to change this option. Th e options are Infrared an d Cable . If you select Inf ra re d , the rest of the options are automatically set. If you select Cable , define also the followi ng: Transfer rate : The speed with which the dat a is transferred between your communicator and PC. The be st transfer rate for normal GSM calls is 19200. For high speed ca lls, you should s elect 115200. Select the same rate in your PC a pplication as well. Data bit s : Defines how man y bits are used to form a byte. T he default option, 8 , can typically be used. Linda1.book Page 239 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
240 Extras Parity : A parity error-checking procedure. The default option, None , can typically be used. Stop bi ts : Def ines number of stop bits used. The default option, 1 , can typically be used. Flow cont rol : It is recommended to select Sof twa re . This setting needs to be the same in you PC as w ell. Oper a ti n g sy s te m pa ge Windows 200 0 : I f yo u are not us in g Windo ws 20 00, se lect No and press Done . Th e rest of t he options on th e page are dimmed. If you are using Windows 2000, selec t Yes . Define also the f ollowing information about the connection. The information needed is provided by the host that you are about to call. If you do not have this information try to use the default options. Connect ion type : The options are Normal / H igh speed . Normal is the defa ult. Rem ot e mod em t ype : The options are Anal og / ISDN V.110 / ISDN V .120 . Analog is the default. Max. connection s peed : T he default in an analog connection is Auto mat ic . Note: This configuration n eeds to be rede fined if you use a different kind of modem. If th e connection settings are incorrect, the call is n ot created. To activate or disable the fax modem In the Fax modem main view, pr ess Activ ate or Disab le . Linda1.book Page 240 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
241 Troubleshooting 12. Troubleshooting If you have problems with your communicator, Club Nokia Careline answers questions and offers instructions over the phone. For mor e information on the Club Nokia Careline see the Accessories section of the Getting Started G uide and Nokia Careline Web page. You can a lso visit Forum Nokia at www.forum.nokia.com for information and support material related to the communicator. 1. Phone o r communicato r interface d oes not st art; both dis plays remain blank Make sure that the ba ttery is properly installed and char ged. Make sure that the contacts on the battery an d the desktop stand are clean. The battery charge may be too low for operation. Check the display and listen for the low battery warning tones. Charge th e battery as described on page 21 . If the NOT CHARGING message is displayed, the charging is suspended. Temperature extremes will affect the ability of your battery to charge: allow it to cool down or warm up first. Wait for a while, disconnect the charger, connect i t again and retry. If charging still f ails, contact your local Nokia dealer. 2. Commu nic ator i nterf ace does no t start; cov er phone d ispla y is flashing The communicator memory is corrupted. Contact your local Nokia dealer . 3. The bat tery is att ached, b ut the pho ne does not wo rk Try to switch on th e phone by pressing the key for several seconds. Linda1.book Page 241 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
242 Troubleshooting Check that the flight mode is not active. For more information see â Flight profile â on page 91. Restart the c ommunicator by removing t he battery, waiting thirty s econds, and replacing it again. Try charging the communicator . If you see the battery level indicator on the phone but the phone does not work, con tact your loca l Nokia dealer. Check the signal strength indicator: you might be outside the network service area. Make sure that the telephone service is ac tivated for your SIM car d. Check if there is an error mes sage on the display after switching on. If so, con tact your local dealer. Check that the SIM card is correctly installed, see the Getting Started Guide. 4. Comm unicato r interf ace is no t ac tivat ed or app li cations st op re spond ing Close the cover and open it again. If this does not help, close the cov e r and remove the battery. Replace the battery and open the cover again. Wait while the communicator performs a self-test and starts. Try charging the com municator. If the device does not respond even after severa l restarts (disconnect the charger, take battery out, wait for 30 seconds, and replace the battery), remove all temporary files a s follows: 1 Disconnect the charger and remove the battery to restart th e commu nicat or. 2 Insert the battery and open the cover. 3 When you see the Nokia 9210i Communicator Welcome screen, immediately press and hold down the Ctrl Shift I ke ys. The I key should be pressed last. Linda1.book Page 242 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
243 Troubleshooting 4 Temporary files are deleted. This empties the ca che, removes cookies, resets plug-in registrations and r esets the settings you have made in some of the applications including all Internet and profile settings, Desk shortcuts and display settings. All other applications and files stay intact. If the procedures described above do not help, as a last r esort before contacting your local dealer you can try formatting the internal memory of the communicator. Note th at formatt ing the m emo ry re move s all items exc ept th e standar d applic ation s that hav e been factor y pre-inst all ed in ROM memo ry! If you have made a full backup of the contents of you r communicator with PC Suite, you can use PC Suite to format the memory before rest oring the backed-up files to your communicator. For more inform ation, see PC Suite Guide on the sales package CD-ROM. If you have made a backu p to a memory card, see â To back up a nd restore data to and from a m emory ca rd â on pa ge 209. When you format the internal memory, all the settings, documents and other data in the internal memory th at you have cr eated or modified will be permanently destroyed. To format the internal memory, pr oceed as follows: Tip: If you have to give away your Com municator, it is a good idea to format the device and restore th e factory-installed software from the CD-R OM. Thi s way the next user will be able to start with a fresh device. 1 Disconnect the charger and remove the battery to restart the communicator. 2 Insert the batter y and open the cover. 3 When you see the Nokia 9210i C ommunicator Welcome screen, immediately press and hold down the Ctrl Shift F keys. The F key should be pressed la st. 4 Formatting sta rts. It tak es at least two m inutes to com plete. 5 With Windows Explorer, locate the All_ Nokia_9210_ data.sis installation package in the Pr einsta lled in device folder of th e sales package CD-ROM and install it. Linda1.book Page 243 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
244 Troubleshooting 5. Ca nnot make or receiv e call s Check to see if you have â Flightâ profile turned on. When this profile is a ctive you cannot make or receive calls. Make sure that the p hone is not off. Close the cover and switch on the phone. If you get the message I NVALID SIM CARD, your SI M card cannot be used in the communicator. Contact you dealer or network service pr ovider. Check the status of your call barrings and diverts, see â N etwork serv ices settings â on page 82. The phone may be busy: data or fax is being sent or received, or the communicator is being used as a fax modem. Wait f or the data/fax transmission to en d, or drop the call by pressing the key on the phone keypad. 6. Call qualit y is poor Your location may not allow better call quality. This problem may occur especially in a moving car or tr ain. Move to a location where the radio signal reception is better. See â GSM data transmis sion â on page 8. Reception is usually bette r above ground level, outdoors and wh ile stationary. Sometimes even moving the communicator slightly will improve reception. You can also try using the communicator i n the handsfree mode, see page 7 0. Remember to turn the antenna to an upright position. 7. C a nno t div ert or ba r vo ice , f a x or data c all s You may have not subscr ibed to the service in question, or it is n ot supported by the ne twork , or the messa ge c entre numb er and the numbe r t o whi ch y ou wan t to divert your calls may be m issing or incorrect. Linda1.book Page 244 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
245 Troubleshooting Fax diverts and barrings a re defined in Tools > Account settin gs ⦠in the Messaging application. Data barring is s et in the Data call barring in Control pan el. Data calls canno t be d ive rte d . 8. Cannot select a contact If you cannot select a contact in the Telephone, Fax, SMS or Mail directory, the contact car d does not h ave a telephone number, fax number, wireless phone number or an e- mail address. Add the missing in formation to the contact card in the Contacts application. 9. Cannot send or re ceiv e faxes, sho rt messag es or ma il Make sure that you have subscribed to these network services. The phone m ay be off, or th e communicator is low on memory. The number for mat you use may be in valid, or the called number has n ot answered within 10 tries, or you are calling to a wrong phone number. The phone may be busy: data or fax is being sent or received, the communicator is being used as a fax modem. Wait for the data/fax transmission to end, or drop the call by pressing the key on the ph one keypad. Fax/data barrings or fax diverts m ay be active. You can define th e Fax barrings/ diverts in T ools > Account set tings ⦠in Messagi ng . Fax reception: Your SIM card may not have a fax number. Mail reception: You have n ot subscribed to a remote mailbox serv ice, or the mail service you a re using uses an other mail protocol than what you have selected. (Check with your I nternet Service P rovider whether you should be using POP3 or IMAP4.) If you are using secure connections, your remote mailbox service also has to support secure connections. Th ere may also be a transient problem with the Linda1.book Page 245 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
246 Troubleshooting remote mailbox service, or the Internet servers between the com municator and the remote mailbox. Try again after a couple of minutes, and then contact your Internet Service Provider. Mail sending: Yo u have not subscribed to a remote mailbox service, or the m ail server delivering your mail does n ot comply with the SM TP protocol. If you are using secure connections, your r emote mailbox service also has to support secure connections. There may a lso be a transient problem with the remote mailbox service, or th e Internet servers be tween the commu nicator and the remote mailbox. Try again after a cou ple of minutes, an d then contact your Inter net Service Provider. I f you are using the Upon request sending option, mail must be sent in th e Document ou tbox, se e â Ou tboxâ on page 161. If you r eceive service provider error messages when conn ecting to you r remote mailbox, contact your remote ma ilbox service provider. Your remote mai lbox may contain corrupted m ail messages or the mail server settings may be in correct. If you have problems sending mail with attachments, select Cancel sending and try again . If this does not help, tr y the key combination Shift-Tab-right arrow. Some mail attachments can take up a significant amount of mem ory and therefore freeing some mem ory by deleting somethin g from your communicator me mory might also help. Short message sending: You have not subscribed to the Short Mess age Service or the message centre n umber is missing or incorrect. Contact your service pr ovider. The reason for failure m ay also depend on the network: the n etwork does not support SMS, fax, o r data/mail; the networ k is out of order or busy; the signal strength is not a dequate for sending. Linda1.book Page 246 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
247 Troubleshooting 10. Phon e d ispl a y shows â Me ssage to o long â wh en I try to op en a rece ived short mes sage. The received message is over 1377 characters long. Use the Messaging applica tion to read it. 11. Cannot est abl is h an Int er net con necti on If you are trying to connect to the I nternet (in order to use WWW or to receive or send mail), but the operation does not succeed, you can use the following checklist to find out whe re the problem might be located: 1 Is the data call active wh en you are trying to connect? L ook at the data call indicator on the phone side. If the data call is d ropped after a few seconds after starting to connect, check the ph one number in the Internet Access settings. See page 132 for details. If the phone number is correct, the reason may be in poor network conditions, or a congested GSM network. Als o check th e Data ca ll settings in the In ternet Access settings (connection type, data call type, and maximum connection speed). See page 136 for details. Contact your network serv ice provider if you have problems with data call establishment, and your Internet Ser vice Provider to find out the correct remote modem type. If you are roaming outside your home network, you might want to try the ba sic GSM data call s ettings described in a tip on page 137. 2 If the data call is active, but you cannot receive or send m ail, try to use th e WWW browser to connect to your I nternet Service Pr ovider â s W WW pages. If that works, the problem is most likely in the ma il settings or the remote mailbox service. For more information, see Ma il sending troubleshooting on page 2 45 and Mail settings on page 170. Linda1.book Page 247 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
248 Troubleshooting 3 If the data call is active, but you can not download WWW pages with the WWW browser, make note of the most recent status indication displayed to you in the title bar of the W WW browser. ⢠If t he s tatus indication reads Waiting for reply from host or L ooking up hos t address , it is likely that the WWW address (URL) has been mistyped, or there is a problem with proxy server settings in the Internet Access Point or the proxy server itself , or there is a tr ansient problem with the WWW server or Internet connections be tween the W WW serve r and you r Intern et Service Provider. Check the pr oxy server settings explained on page 135. Disconnect the call, wait for a couple of m inutes, and retry the connection. If the connection still does not su cceed, contact your Internet Ser vice Provider. ⢠If the status indication reads Logging in to network or Connected , the problem is most likely in your Internet Access Point settings (See page 132 for details) or your Internet Serv ice Provider â s dial-up system, or you might need a script in order to con nect to your Interne t Service Provider . Disconnect the data call, wait for a couple of minutes, and retry the connection. If the connection still does not succeed, contact your Internet Ser vice Provider. 4 If your data call is unexpectedly dropped, this may be a case of poor network conditions, congestion in the ph one network, or a too low inactivity period setting. If you are unable to connect to th e Internet after repeated attempts, and have successfully used your Inte rnet connection previously, or get error messages when starting the WWW browser, rem ove and replace the battery and try again. 12. Infrared problems The communicator may be connected to a PC, laptop, pr inter, digital camera, wireless phone or anothe r communicator via the infrared connection. Linda1.book Page 248 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
249 Troubleshooting If you are u sing the PC Suite fo r Nokia 9210i Commun icator program on you r PC, or if you wan t to receive data from another communicator or a digita l camera, you must activate the Infrared connection on your communicator before the connection is made. See PC Suite Guide in the sales package CD- ROM and â To activate the infrared connection â on page 35 of thi s guide. The PC to which you want to establish th e connection must have an IrDA compatible infrared port; installed and activ ated IrDA drivers; a nd Microsoft Windows 95/98/98SE/Me. For more inform ation on IrDA driver s and their use in Windows, contact M icrosoft. If you have an IBM Thinkpad laptop with Win dows 98 SE installed, you may encounter problems w ith infrared connections. If problems occur, proceed as follows: 1 Click the Windows Start button and sele ct Settings > Control Panel . 2 In the Windows 98 Control Panel, ope n System . 3 In th e Sy stem properties dialog, sel ect the Device Manager tab. 4 Under Network A dapters , sel e ct IBM Thinkpad Fast Infrared Por t and c lick the Proper ties button. IBM Thinkpad Fast Infr ared Port Prop erties dialog opens. 5 Click the Driver tab and then click the Update Driver... button. Update Device Driver Wizard starts . 6 Click Next . 7 Select the Install one of the other dr ivers option and click the View List... button. 8 Infrared PnP Se rial Port has been f ound. Click OK . 9 Click Next . 10 Infrared PnP Serial Port is ready to be installed. C lick Next . 11 The new driver has been installed. Click Finish . 12 The computer must be restarted before the new driver can be taken to us e. Click Yes to restart the computer. Linda1.book Page 249 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
250 Troubleshooting 13. P rintin g pr oble ms If you are usin g the infrared connection, the infrared port of the printer must be compatible to the IrDA standard. See â To print â on page 31. If you fail to establish an infrared connection, transfer th e file to a PC and use the PC to print the docu ment. Alternatively, you can fax the document to th e nearest fax machin e. See â To write and send a new fax â on page 166. 14. PC conne ctivity prob lems Make sure that PC Su ite for Nokia 9210i C ommunicator is installed and running on your PC. See th e PC Suite Guide for m ore information. If you use a cable connection, ch eck that the cable is pr operly attached at both ends. If you use an i nfrared connection, ch eck that the IR ports are facing ea ch other and the route betwee n the ports is unobstructed. Check that you are using the correct serial port (COM) on your PC. For all other PC Suite problem s, see the PC Suite Guide and the PC Suite on line help â Troubleshootingâ section. 15. Fax modem problems When you use the communicat or as a fax modem , ma ke sure tha t the communicator and the PC use the same baud rate. If you use the infra r ed connection, the baud rate is set automatically. If you u se the cable connection, set the baud rate in the Fax modem settings. For the PC, the baud rate is set in the connectivity software of the PC. Linda1.book Page 250 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
251 Troubleshooting If you use the cable connection, ful ly compatible operation wi th all PC fax and terminal software cannot be guaranteed. Consult your dealer. If you have p roblems with your PC fax s oftware, use the infrar ed connection. If you have problem s establishing a data connection with the remote modem , try fixing the data transmission rate by using an AT command. Common A T commands based on the ETSI 07.07 standard and supported by the Nokia 9210i Communicator are listed in a file on the CD-ROM supplied with the communicator. You can find this file by clicking â AT comma nds â in â PC software section â on the CD-ROM. For information on how to use the AT commands and fax modem drivers, consult the documentation of the telecommunication or fax application that you use on your PC. 16. Acc ess co de pr oble ms The default lock code for Nokia 92 10i Communicator is 12345 . If you forget o r lose the lock code contact your commun icator dealer. If you forge t or lose a PIN o r PUK code, or if you have not recei ved such a code, contact your network service provider. For information about Internet passwords, contact your Internet service provider. 17. Low on memo ry Your communicator can r un out of memory just like a PC. There may be several reas ons f or that: ⢠You have too many applications running. Press the Menu key and check the lef t most menu for tasklist of open applications. Choose the application that doe s not have to be open and close it. Linda1.book Page 251 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
252 Troubleshooting ⢠You have received a lot of mail or you have saved large images or other items that use a lot of memory. T o free u p communicator memory, r emove unnecessary dat a, move large items to a memory ca rd or transfer them to your PC, if possible. See â T o avoid low memory â on page 164 and PC Suite Guide for details. ⢠You have tried to download a large WWW page. See item 1 9 on this troubleshooting list. You can check the memory usage in the Memory application of Control pane l. See â Memory â on page 2 28. 18. Cannot c onnect to the Inter n et when ro aming You are able to connect to the In ternet when in your h ome country or region. Y ou are now roaming and your Internet con nection does not wo rk. Try using the settings of a basic GSM data connection. Also check that the phone number of your Internet Access Point is in international format. See â Data call page â on page 136. 19. â Memory â error note seen when downloading very large WWW pages Some WWW pages are extremely large because they contain many large images or tables. These types of pages consume memory in the communicator very quickly. If, when dow nloading WWW pages, you see an error note abou t memory, the f irst action is to close any other applications that you ma y have opened after starting the WW W browser. To do that, pres s the M enu key a nd check the le ftmost menu for tasklist of open applications. Sel ect and close each item. If you still experience p roblems, turn off the setting wh ich allows loading images automatically. One last action is to exit the WWW browser application, start it again, and try to download the page o nce more without images. Linda1.book Page 252 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
253 Troubleshooting Note: Removing data files or installing applications does not have effect on the memory available to the WWW browser. Linda1.book Page 253 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
254 Troubleshooting Linda1.book Page 254 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
255 CARE AND MAINTENANCE 13. CARE AND MAINTENANCE Your Nokia 9210i Communicator i s a product of supe rior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The suggestions below will help you to fulfil any warranty obligations and to enjoy this product for m any years. ⢠Keep the co mmunicat or and all its parts and accessories out of the reach of small children. ⢠Keep the co mmunicator dry. Precipitation, h umidity and all types of liqu ids or moisture can contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. ⢠Do not use or store the communica tor in dusty, dirty areas. Its moving parts can be damaged. ⢠Do not store the commun icator in hot area s. High temperatures can shorten the life of electronic devices, dama ge batteries, and war p or melt certain plastics. ⢠Do not store the commu nicator in cold areas. When it warms up (to its normal temperature), moisture can f orm inside, which may damage electronic circuit boards. ⢠Do not attempt to open the communicator . Non-expert handling may damage it. Linda1.book Page 255 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
256 CARE AND MAINTENANCE ⢠Do not drop, knock or shake the communicator . Rough handling can break internal circu it boards . Dropping the prod uct may break the co lour display, whic h is frag il e. ⢠Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong detergents to clean the communicator . ⢠Do not paint the communicator . Paint can clog the moving parts and prevent proper opera tion. ⢠Use on ly the supplied or an approved r eplacement antenna. Unauthorised antennas, modifications or attachm ents could damage the communicator and may violate regulations gover ning radio devices. All of the above su ggestion s apply equally to y our communicator , battery, charger or any accessory. If any of th em is not work ing properly, take it to your nearest qualified service facility. T he personnel there will assist you and, if necessary, arra nge fo r se rvic e. Linda1.book Page 256 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
257 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION 14. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION Traffic Safety Do not use a communicator while driving a vehicle. Always secure the phone in its holder; do not place the phone on the passenger seat or where it can br eak loose in a collision or sudden stop. Rememb er road s afety alw ays com es f irst! Operating environment Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area and always switch off the phone of your communicator whenever it is forbidden to use it, or when it may cause interf er ence or da nger . Use the phon e only in its norm al operating positions. To mainta in compliance w ith radio frequency expo sure guid elines, always use Nokia approved accessories. Place the communicator in an appro ved carrying case or belt cl ip when carrying the communicator while the phone is on. Parts of the ph one are magnetic. Metallic materials may be attracted to the phone, and persons with a hearing aid sh ould not hold the ph one to the ear with the hearing aid. Always secure the phone in its h olde r, because metallic materials m ay be attracted by the earpiece . Do not place credit cards or other magnetic storage media near the ph one, because information stored on th em may be erase d. Linda1.book Page 257 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
258 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION Electronic devices Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from r adio frequency (RF) signals. However, certain e lectronic equipment m ay not be shielded against the RF signals from y o ur co mmunicat or . Pace make rs. Pacemaker manufacturers recommend that a min imum separation of 20 cm (6 inch es) be maintained between a hand-held wireless phone and a pacemaker to avoid potential inter ference with the pacem aker. These recommendations are consistent with the i ndependent research by and recommendations of W ireless Technology Research. Pers ons with pacemakers: ⢠Should always keep the phone more than 20 cm (6 inches) from their pacemaker when th e phone is switched on ; ⢠Should not carry the phone in a br east pocket; ⢠Should use the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimise the potential for interferen ce. ⢠If you have any reason to suspect that interference is taking place, switch off your commun icator immediately. Hear in g a ids . Some digital wireless phones may interfere with some h earing aids. In the event of s uch inter ference, you may wa nt to consu lt your serv ice provider. Other medical devices. Operation of any radio transmitting equipment, including communicators , may int erfere with the functionality of inadequ ately protected medical devices. Consult a ph ysician or the manufacturer of the medical device to determine if they a re adequately shielded from external RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch off the phone of your communicator in health care Linda1.book Page 258 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
259 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION facilities when any regulations pos ted in these ar eas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy. Vehicles. RF signals may affect improperly installed or in adequately shielded electronic systems in motor veh icles (e.g. electronic f uel injection systems, electronic anti-skid (an ti-lock) br akin g systems, electronic s peed control systems, air bag systems). Check with the manufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle. You should a lso consult th e manu facturer of any equipment th at has be en added to your vehicle. Posted faci litie s. Switch off the phone of your communica tor i n any facility where posted notices so require. Potentially explosive atmospheres Switch off the phone of your communicator when in any a rea with a potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Users are advised to switch off the phone when at a r efuelling point (service station). Users are reminded of the ne ed to observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots (fuel storage and distribution areas), chemical plants or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often but not always clearly marked. They include below deck on boats; chemical transfer or storage f acilities; vehicles using liquifi ed petroleum gas (such as propane or butane); areas where the air contains chemica ls or par ticles, su ch as grain, dust or m etal powders; and an y other area where you would nor mally be advised to turn of f your vehicle e ngine. Linda1.book Page 259 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
260 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION Vehicles Only qualified personnel s hould service the communicator , or install the communicato r in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dange rous and may invalidate any warranty which may apply to the unit. Check regularly that all wireless phone equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases or explosive materials in the same compartment as the communicato r , its parts or accessories. For vehicles equipped with an air ba g, remember that an air bag inflates with great force. Do not place objects, including both installed or portable wireless equipment in the area over th e air bag or in th e air bag deployment area. If in-vehicle w ireless equipment is improperly installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury cou ld resu lt . Using the phone of your communicator while in th e air is prohibited. Sw itch off the phone of your co mmunicator before boarding an aircraft. The use of wir eless telephones in an aircraft may be da ngerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the wireless telephone n etwork and may be illegal. FCC regulations prohibit using your phone whil e in the air. Switch off your phone before boarding an aircraft. T he use of wir eless telephones in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraf t, disrupt the wireless telephone network and may be i llegal. Failure to observe these instructions may lead to suspen sion or denial of telephone services to the of fender, or l egal action or both. Linda1.book Page 260 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
261 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION Emergency calls Impor tant: The Nok i a 9210i Communicato r, like any wireless phone, op erates using radio signals, wireless and landline networks as well as user-programmed functions. Because of this, connections in all conditions can no t b e guar ant ee d. Therefore you should never rely solely upon any wirele ss phone for essential communications (e.g. medical emergen cies). Emergency calls may n ot be possible on al l wireless phone ne tworks or when certain network services and/or phone featu res are in use. Check with local service providers. To make a n emer ge nc y call : . 1 I f the de vice cove r is open, close it. 2 If the phone is not on, switch it on. Check for adequate signal strength. Some networks may require that a vali d SIM card is properly in serted in the communicator . 3 Press as many times as nee ded (e.g. to ex it a call, to exit a menu, etc.) to clear the display and ready the phone for calls. 4 Key in the e mergency number for your pr esent location (e.g. 91 1, 112 or other official emerge ncy number). Emergency numbers vary by location. 5 Press th e key . If cer tain fe atu res are in use , you may f irst need to turn th ose fea tures off befo re you can make a n emergency call. Consult this guide and your local cellu lar service provider. When making an emergency call, remember to give all the necessary information as accurately as possible. Remember that your communicator may be the on ly means of communicat i on at the scene of an accident - do not cut off the call until given permission to do so. Linda1.book Page 261 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
262 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION Important power supply information WARNING: Th is appar a tus is in te nde d fo r use w hen suppl i ed with po wer from a Lithiu m-io n bat ter y and c h arger s ACP-1 2, AC P-9 E , ACP-9X and ACP-9A. Other usage will invalidate a ny approval given to thi s appar atus and may be dan gerou s . Use only batter ies, cha rg ers a nd acc es sor ies a ppr oved by the communicator manufacturer for use with this part icul ar communicator model. The use of any other types will invalidate any app roval or warranty a pplying to the comm unicat or, a nd may be dan gerou s. For avai labi lity of approved accessories, please check with y our dealer.When you disconnect the power cord of any accessory, grasp and pull the plug , not th e c ord. Certification information (SAR) THIS MODEL PHONE MEETS REQ UIREMENTS FOR EXPOSURE TO RA DIO WAVES Your mobile phone is a radio transm itter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the limits for exposure t o radio frequency (RF) recommended by international guidelin es (ICNIRP). These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines and establish permitted leve ls of RF energy f or the general population. Th e guidelines we re developed by independent scientific Linda1.book Page 262 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
263 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION organisations through periodic a nd thorough evaluation of sc ientific studies. The guidelines include a substantial saf ety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and h ealth. The exposure standard for mobile phones employs a u nit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit stated in the international guidelines is 2. 0 W/kg*. Tests for SAR are con ducted using standard op erating positions with the phone transmitting at its hig hest certified power level in all tested frequency ban ds. Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR of the phone while ope rating can be wel l below the maximum value. This is because the phone is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the networ k. In general, the closer you are to a base station, the lower the pow er output of the phone. The highest SAR value for the phone o f Nokia 9210i Communicator when tes ted for use at th e ear is 0.34 W/kg. While th ere may be differe nces be tween the SA R levels of various phones and at various positions, they all meet the r elevant international guidelines for RF exposure. * The SAR limit for mobile phones used by the public is 2. 0 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over ten gr ams of body tissue. The guidelines incorporate a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for th e public and to acc ount for any variations in m easurements. SAR values may vary de pending on national r eporting requirements and the network band. For SA R information in othe r regions please look under product in formation at www.nokia.com. Linda1.book Page 263 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
264 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION Linda1.book Page 264 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
265 Glossary AT C ommands Operations of a fax modem can be controlled by AT commands. These commands give the advanced user an opportunity to control all the features of the modem. A list of common AT commands based on the ETSI 07.07 standard and supported by the Nokia 9 210i Communicator is available on the CD-ROM included in the sales pa ckage of your com municator. Barri ng pa ssword The barring password is a 4 -digit code needed to chan ge fax an d voice ca ll barrings, see â To restrict voice calls â on page 84. The password is not located in your communicator or SIM card, but in the network. Y ou obtain the password from your network service pr ovider when you subscribe to the call barring service. Cook ies Cookies are little pieces of information, given by the server to you, to store information about your visits to a Web site. When you accept cookie s, the server is able to evaluate your use of the Web site; what you are in terested in, what you wan t to r ead, and so on . DNS Domain Name Service. An Internet service that translates domain names like www.n okia. com int o IP addre sses l ike 1 92.10 0.124 .195 . Domai n name s ar e easier to remembe r but this tr anslation is n eeded beca use the I nternet is based on IP addresses. Linda1.book Page 265 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
266 Domain name and Host name The te rm s â doma i n na me â and â host name â are som etimes, slightly inaccurately, used as synonyms. In a full domain name, e.g. www.forum.nokia.c om, the first par t of the name is th e name of the host, and the following par ts are names of domains to which the h ost belongs. Each host name corresponds to a cer tain IP address. Host names are used because th ey are e asier to rem ember tha n IP addresses. DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Fre que ncy) Tones The system used by touch-tone tel ephones. DTMF assigns a specific frequency, or tone, to eac h key so th at it ca n easily be identified by a microprocessor. DTMF tones allow you to com municate with voice mailboxes, computerised tele phony systems, etc. Gateway IP ad dr ess The address of a WAP gateway. (s ee: WAP gateway). Hotsp ot A World Wide Web (WWW) page may contain hotspots, such as selection lists, text entry fields, and reset/submit buttons, which enable you to input information into the WWW. HSCSD High-Speed Circuit-Switched Data is circuit-switched wireless data transmission for mobile users at data rates up to 43.2 Kbps which is four times faster th an the s tandard data rates of t he Global System for Mobile (GSM) communication standard in 1999. HSCSD is comparable to the speed of many computer modems that communicate with today's fixed telephone network s. Linda1.book Page 266 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
267 HTML (Hyp er text Mark-u p Languag e) A language used to define the appearance an d content of WWW documents. HTTP ( Hype rtext T ransf er Pr otoc ol) A document transfer protocol use d in the WWW. HTTPS HTTP over a secure connection. See Secure Socket Laye r (SSL) Hyperli nk A link on a WWW page that leads to another World Wide Web page or site, or another place on the same page. Hyperlinks are usua lly underlined or shown in a different colour from the surrounding text. Hyper links can also be pictures. IAP (Inte rnet Acc ess Point) The point where your communicator connects to the Internet by way of a data call. An Internet access poin t can be pr ovided, for example, by a commercial Internet ser vice provider (I SP) or by your own company. Images, inline, external Images within a retrieved W WW page are inline im ages. Larger images are often placed as external im ages and h ave to be viewed s eparately. IMAP4 (Int erne t Mai l Acc ess Pr otoc ol, ve rsio n 4) A protocol used for accessing your Remote mailbox. Linda1.book Page 267 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
268 IETF (Interne t Engineer ing Task Fo rce) IETF are responsible f or most of the Internet standardisation. Nokia 9210i Communicator is usin g many IETF spec ifications. In the callback settings, one of the settin gs is s pecified by IETF whereas the other methods are specified by Microsoft. ISDN connections ISDN connections are a way to establish a data call between the Communicator and your I nternet Access Point. ISDN connections ar e digital from end to end and as such offer quicker set-up times and faster data rates than Analog connections. In order to u se ISDN, both you r Internet ser vice provider and network pr ovider have to support them. Java An object-oriented, gen eral purpose progr amming language de veloped by Sun Microsystems and originally designed for handheld devices. Java is language similar to C , bu t simplified to eliminate language features that cause common progr amming errors. Compiled Java code can run on most com puters because Java interpreters and runtime environments exist for m ost oper ating sys tems Lock c ode The lock code is a five- digit code needed to lock and unlock the communicator. The defa ult lock code for Nokia 9 210i Communicator is 1234 5 . The lock code is also required when you change certain settings. Keep it secret and in a safe place, separate f rom the communicator. Linda1.book Page 268 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
269 MCN (Mic r o- C el lu lar N etwo rk) te chn olog y Microcells are used for increasing the capac ity of wireless networks in urban areas. MIME (Multipu rpose Inter net Mail Extens ions) A standard Internet format which permits, f or instance, multiple mail objects in a single message. The mail objects can be, f or example, formatted multifont text messages and non-textual elements, su ch as images and audio frag ments. PIN (Person al I denti ty Number) The PIN code protects your phone from unauthorised use. The PIN code is supplied with the SI M card. If the PIN code r equest is selected, the code is required each tim e the phone is switch ed on. The PIN code must be 4 to 8 digits long. PIN2 Co de The PIN2 code is supplied with some SIM cards . The PIN2 code is required to access certain functions supported by the SIM card. T he length of the PIN2 code is 4 t o 8 digits. Plug- in A plug-in is a dd-on sof tware that can be downloaded from the W WW. The communicator uses plug-ins t o display a document that the WWW application itself cannot show POP3 ( Pos t Off ice P roto col, ve rsio n 3) A common mail protocol that can be u sed for accessing the Remote mailbox . Linda1.book Page 269 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
270 Point -to-p oint p roto col (PP P) A common ne tworking software protocol which enables any computer with a modem and a phone line to connect dire ctly to the Internet. Prot ocol A formal set of rules that govern how data is transferred between two devices. Proxy In some networks, the connection between the WWW and the site you want to connect to is blocked by a firewall. The f irewall protects the network f rom unauthorised external access. A proxy is an intermediary program that enables access through the firewall. A proxy can also serve as a network cache to speed up th e retrieving process. PUK (P IN Unbl ocki ng Key) co de The PUK is an 8-digit code supplied with the SIM card. The code is required when you want to change a disabled PI N code. If you enter an inco rrect PUK code ten times in succession , the SIM card is rejected and you cannot make or receive any calls, except emergency calls. When the SIM is rejected, you will need a new SIM card. You cannot change the PUK code. If you lose the code, contact your network ser vice provider. PUK2 Code The PUK2 code is supplied with some SIM car ds. T he code is required when you want to change a disabled PIN2 c ode. If you enter an incorrect PUK2 code ten times in succession, you will not be able to access the functions Linda1.book Page 270 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
271 which require the PI N2 code. To u se these functions again, you w ill need to obtain a new SIM card f rom your network service provider .You cannot change the PUK2 code. Roaming agreemen t An agreement between two or more networ k service providers to en able the users of one ser vice provider to use the services of oth er service providers. Secure Socket Layer (SSL) A security protocol that prevents eavesdropping, tampering, or message forgery over the Internet. Documents using SSL are identified with the prefix HTTPS. SIM (Subsc ribe r Ide n ti ty Mod ule) ca rd The SIM card contains all the in formation the cellular network needs to identify the netw ork user . The SIM card al so contains security- rel ated information. Simpl e Ma i l Tra ns po rt Pr ot oco l (SMT P) An Internet protocol governin g the transfer of electr onic mail. TCP p ort Identifies the data por t of the destin ation computer. TCP/ IP (T r ans m i ssio n Con tro l Proto col /Int e rne t Pro toco l) A protocol that governs data communication in the Internet and in the TCP/ IP networks . Linda1.book Page 271 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
272 Tem pla te In word processing a template or a style sh eet is a file or form that defines the layout of a docume nt. A template may dete rmine parameters like th e page size , margin s, and fonts. You can use the same s tyle sheet f or man y documents. For e xample, you can de fine one style sheet for pe rsonal letters, another for official letters, and a third for reports. Tra n sp or t Lay er Sec ur ity A security protocol similar to SSL off ering end-to-end encrypted and authenticated connections. The server to which th e connection is established is authenticated by the use of certificates. Data transfers are secured with encryption algorithms. The Nokia 9210i Communicator supports TLS version 1. See also Secure Socket Layer (SSL) URL (Unifo rm Reso urce Lo cator ) Link information required by the WWW to con nect to a given WWW host computer. The URL usually s tarts with http: //. For exampl e, the Nokia Wireless Data Forum home page can be found at h ttp:// www.forum.nokia. com. URLs are ofte n referred to with phrases like â Home page location, â âÂÂSite location, â â can be found at... â Voice Mailbox A voice mailbox is a n etwork service or a personal answering machine where people can leave you v oice messages. WAP Wireless Application Protocol. The transport protocol f or WAP services, used by the WAP browser. Linda1.book Page 272 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
273 WAP access po int An extension to an Internet access point (see: IAP), which pr ovides additional information that the WAP browser needs in order to be ab le to connect to a W AP service. Linda1.book Page 273 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
274 Linda1.book Page 274 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
Copyright é Nokia Corporation 2000-2002. All rights re served. Reproduction, transfer, dist ribution or storage of part or all of the cont ents in this document in any form wit hout the prior written permission of Nokia is prohibited. Nokia and Nokia Connecting People are registere d trademarks of Nokia Corporation. Bounce and Triple Pop are trademar ks of Nokia Corporation. Other product and company names mentioned here in may be trademarks or tradenames of their respect ive owners. This product includes software licensed from Symbian Ltd é Symbian Ltd 1998 - 2001. All right s reserved. Symbian OS and all Symbian OS -b ased trademarks and logos are trademarks of Symbian Limited . . Java⢠is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc Part of the software in this product is é Copyright STNC Ltd. 1994-1997. All rights reserved. é 1984-1997 DataViz Inc. All rights rese rved. This software contains portions of the fi le translation library of Conversions Plus, a product of DataViz Inc., 55 Corporate Drive, Trumbull, CT 06611 USA (203) 268-0030. International CorrectSpell⢠English spelling correction system, 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speec h Products N.V. All rights reserved. Reproduction or disas sembly of embodied algorithms or database prohibited. English spelling software developed by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Product s N.V. UK English Concise International Electronic Thesaurus Copyright é 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products N.V. All rights reserved. Reproducti on or disassembly of embodied programs and dat abas es prohibited. Incorporates MPPCî compression from Hi/fn⢠Part of the software in this product is é Copyright AN T Ltd. 1998. All rights reserved. Stac î, LZS î, é1996, Stac, Inc., é1994-1996 Microsoft Corporation. Includes one or more U.S. Patents: No. 4701745, 5016009, 5126739, 5146221, and 5414425. Other patents pending. Incorporates LZSî compression from Hi/fnâ¢. Hi/fn î, LZS î, é1988-98, Hi/fn. Includes one or more U.S. Patents: No. 4701745, 5016009, 5126739, 5146221, and 5414425. Other patents pending. Nokia operates a policy of co ntinuous development. Nokia reser ves the right to make changes and improvement s to any of the products described in this document wit hout prior notice. Under no circumstances shall Noki a be responsible for any loss of data or income or any special, incidental, consequent ial or indirect damages howsoever cause d. The contents of this document are pr ovided "as is". Except as required by app licable law, no warranties of any kind, either express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warrant ies of mer chantability and fitness f or a particular purpose, are made in relat ion to the accuracy, relia bility or conte nts of this docume nt. Nokia r eserves the right to revise thi s document or withdraw it at any t ime without prior notice. Linda1.book Page 2 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
The avai lability of particular product s may vary by regi on. Please check wit h the Nokia dealer near est to you. This product uses certificates for security functionality. More information on Nokia certificates can be acquired from Nokia web pages. DECLARATION OF CONF ORMITY We, NOKIA CORPORATION dec lare under our sole responsibility that the product RAE-5N is in conformity with the provisions of the following Council Directive:1999/5/EC. A copy of the Declarat ion of Conformity can be found f rom http://www.noki a.com/phones/declaration_of_conformi ty/ Linda1.book Page 3 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
Linda1.book Page 4 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
Table of Contents Introduction ............... ......................... ......................... .............. 1 Getting help... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ...... . 3 Facts about your communicator ...... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... .... 5 GSM data t ransmission . ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... . 8 General information .............. ......................... ......................... . 11 Communicator display... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... . 11 Communicator keyboa rd........ ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... . 16 Connectors ..... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... . 20 To charge the bat tery . ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... . 21 Memory card ........... ... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ...... ... . 2 4 Gen eral fe a tu re s. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... . .26 To install s oftware from the CD-ROM ........ ...... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... .... 34 To activa te the infrare d connection ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ...... ... . 35 T o t ran s f er d a ta f rom o t her device s.. ... ... ... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... . .36 Phone .............. ......................... ......................... ......................... . 39 Selection keys ...... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ...... ... . 40 Display indicator s ..... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... .... 41 Linda1.book Page 5 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
To make a call.......... ... ... ....... ... ... ...... ... ... ...... ... .... ...... ... ... ...... ... ... ... .... ... ...... ... ... ...... 42 To answ er a call ......... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ...... ... 45 To mana ge calls ......... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ... 45 Keypad lock ........... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ...... ... ... 46 To change profiles ..... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... ... 47 To view he lp .... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... 48 To us e the menu s.... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... ... 48 Messages ( Menu 1) ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... 50 Call register (Menu 2) ........ ... ...... ... ... ...... ... ... .... ... ... ... ... ... ...... ... ... .... ... ... ... ... ... ...... 53 Settings ( Menu 3)......... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ... 56 Call divert ( Menu 4) ............ ... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ... 62 Infrared (Me nu 5) ......... ... .... ...... ... ... ... ... ... ...... .... ... ...... ... ... ... ... ... ....... ... ... ...... ... ... ... 6 2 SIM ser vices (Men u 6).... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... 63 Desk ........ ......................... ......................... ......................... ......... 65 Main view ..... ... ... ... ... ...... ... .... ...... ... ... ... ... ... ...... .... ... ...... ... ... ... ... ... ....... ... ... ...... ... ... ... 65 Telephone ........... ......................... ......................... ...................... 69 To make a call manually .......... ... ...... ... ... ... ... .... ...... ... ... ...... ... ... ....... ... ... ... ... ... ...... 7 0 To call a num ber in the Tele phone dir ectory .... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ...... ... ... 70 To call a num ber in a rece nt calls list ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... 71 To answ er a call ......... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ...... ... 72 To call and cre ate a voice mailbox ............ ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... 72 Linda1.book Page 6 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
To recor d a call ............. ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... . 73 To make a new call durin g a call......... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ...... ....... ... .... 73 To make con ference calls ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... . 74 To tr ansfer calls ...... ... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... . 76 To answe r a waiting call ........ ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... . 76 To send DTMF tones during a call .... ... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... . 77 Telephone Se ttings ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... .... 77 Flight profile ......... ... ... ... ... ...... ... ... .... ... ... ...... ... ... ... ... ... ....... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ....... ... ... . 91 Contacts ......... ......................... ......................... ......................... . 93 Contacts direct ory ....... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... .... 93 To make a contact ca rd.......... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... .... 94 To open a contact card . ... ... ... ....... ... ... ...... ... ... ... ... ... ....... ... ... ...... ... ... ...... .... ... ...... . 96 To move or copy cont acts from a SIM card .... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ...... . 96 To search for a cont act card ........ ... ...... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... . 96 To change fields in a contact card......... ... ... ... ...... .... ... ...... ... ... ... ... ... ....... ... ... .... 97 To attach a ringing tone ........ ... .... ... ...... ... ... ... ... ... ....... ... ... ... ... ... ...... ... ... .... ... ... ... . 99 To insert a picture........ ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... .... 9 9 To creat e or modify templa tes ............. ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ...... . 100 To store D TMF ton es ............ ...... .... ...... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... . 101 To creat e contact grou ps ....... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... . 102 To creat e a SIM conta ct car d ......... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... .... 104 To send a contac t car d as a business ca rd ............. ... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... .... 105 Linda1.book Page 7 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
To receive a business card ...... ... ...... ... ... ... ... .... ...... ... ... ... ... ... ...... .... ... ... ... ... ...... ... 106 Settings ...... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... 1 0 7 To creat e a n ew contac ts dat abase........... .... ...... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ... 109 Calendar ...................................... ......................... ...................... 111 Calendar e ntries ...... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ... 111 Views ....... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... 118 Icons ........ ....... ... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ..... .1 2 5 Task list s ........ ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... ... 1 26 To sear ch for Calendar entries ........... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... 127 Settings ...... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... 1 2 8 Internet .. ......................... ......................... ......................... ......... 131 To set up your Internet access point ........... ...... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .... ...... ... ... ... ... ... 132 To connect to the World Wide Web.... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ... 141 To open a Web page .... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... 142 To browse t he WWW .......... ... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ... 144 WWW settings ........ ...... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... 147 Cache, Hist ory, and Plu g-ins view ....... ... ....... ...... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ...... ... ... 149 Bookmarks ....... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... 149 WAP ......... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... 151 Java....... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... 156 Linda1.book Page 8 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
Messaging ...... ......................... ......................... ......................... . 157 Messaging cent re......... ... ... ... ...... .... ... ... ... ... ...... ... ... ....... ... ... ... ... ... ...... ... ... ....... ... ... . 158 Fax ........ ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... .... .. . 166 Mail ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... .. . . 170 Short Message Service ........... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... .... 183 Office ......................... ......................... ......................... .............. 189 Word Processor.......... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... . 189 Sheet ...... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... . 194 Present ation viewer ....... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... . 202 File manager ............ ... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... . 204 Extras ......................... ......................... ......................... .............. 213 Clock ....... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... . 213 Calculator.......... .... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... . 215 Control pan el ... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... . 216 Recorder ... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... .... 229 Imaging ..... ...... ....... ... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... .... 23 1 Cell broadcast ......... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ...... ....... ... .... 234 Fax modem ........... ... ...... ...... ...... ... ....... ...... ...... ... ...... ....... ...... ... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... .... 237 Troubleshooting ......... ......................... ......................... .............. 241 Linda1.book Page 9 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
CARE AND MAINTEN ANCE ....... ......................... ...................... 255 IMPORTANT SAFETY IN FORMATION .... ......................... ......... 257 Glossary .............. ......................... ......................... ...................... 265 Linda1.book Page 10 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
FOR YOUR SAFETY Read these simple guidelines. Breaking the rules may be dangerous or illegal. Further detailed information is gi ven in this manual. Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or da nger. ROAD SAFETY COME S FIRST Donâ t use th e communi cator while driving. INTERFERENCE All wireless phones may get interference, wh ich could affect performance. SWITCH OFF IN HOSPITALS Follow any regulations or rules. Switch the phone off near medical equ ipment. SWITCH OFF IN AI RCRAFT W ireless devices can cause interference in airc ra ft. SWITCH OFF WHEN REFUELL ING DonâÂÂt use the ph one at a refuelling point. DonâÂÂt us e near fuel or ch emicals. SWITCH OFF NEA R BLA STING DonâÂÂt use the phone where blasting is in progress. Observe restrictions, and foll ow any regulations or rules. USE SENSIBLY Use only in the normal position. DonâÂÂt touch the antenna unnec ess arily. QUALI F IED SER V IC E Only qualified perso nnel may install or repair phone equipment. Linda1.book Page 11 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
ACCESS ORIES AND BAT TERIES Use only approved accessories and batteries. Do not connect in compatible products. WATER- RESISTAN CE Yo ur com municator is not wa ter- resi sta nt. K eep it dry. BACKUP CO PIES Remember to make backup copies of all important data. CONN ECTIN G TO OTH ER DE VICE S Whe n conn ecti ng to any other d evic e, read its userâÂÂs gu ide for detailed safety instructions. Do not connect incompatible products. CAL LIN G Clo se the cover and en sure the phone is switched on and in service. Enter th e phone number , including the a rea code, then press . To end a ca ll, press . To answer a call, pr ess . EMERGENCY C ALLS Close the device cover . Ensure the ph one is switched on and in s ervice. Pre ss as ma ny times as n eeded (e.g. to exit a call, to exit a menu, etc.) to clear the display. Enter the emergency number, the n press . Give your location. Do not end th e call until told to do so. Linda1.book Page 12 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
1 Introduction 1. Introduction Congratulations on purchasing the Nokia 9210i Communicator. It is a complete communications tool: it is a wireless phone, messaging device, and a palmtop organiser in one package. Figure 1 Phone Earpiece Front Back Microphone Linda1.book Page 1 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
2 Introduction The Nokia 9210i Com municator consists of two parts: the phone and the communicator interface. The phone is on th e device cover an d th e commu nicator interface is inside the cover, both as shown in Figure s 1 and 2. Figure 2 Both these parts use the same information from the memory of the communicator - they are not separate devices. For e xample, the phone uses the names and phone numbers stored in the Contacts directory of the communicator interface, and the communicator interface uses the phone for voice and data communications, for example, when sen ding and receiving f axes and connecting to the Internet. Tip: The communicator interface has no power on/ off button - it switches itself on when you op en the cover and switches off when you close the cover. The communicator in terface contains many organiser and com munications applications. The large keyboard, command buttons, and display m ake using the applications easy. commu nicator interface Built-i n s peaker Large colour Active Matri x TFT LC D scr een Linda1.book Page 2 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
3 Introduction The phone is de signed for making and answering calls quickly. The com municator looks and operates like oth er Nokia wireless phones, ex cept the earpiece and microphone are at the rear of the device. The phone is switched on and off by pressing the button on th e cover. WARNING: Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohi bited or when it may cause inter ference or danger. Getting help Online H elp The communicator has a help function, which you can access from any application or view. To view hel p, press the key on the communicator inte rface keyboard. You are shown a page of information relevant to the task you are doing. Y ou can also search the help topics for specific subjects and keywor ds. Tip: The key is on the bottom row of the ke yboard. About th e guides in the sales package The Nokia communicator sales package con tains the following guides either in print or as PDF files. ⢠To help you begin to use your communicator, tu rn to the Getting Started Guide supplied in your sales package. It explains the start-up procedure and gives basic information on how to use th e various applications. Linda1.book Page 3 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
4 Introduction ⢠This user â s guide explains in more detail how the Nokia 9210i Communicator operates. â General information â identifies the va rious parts of th e communicator and their fun ctions, as well as the common f eatures of the communicator. The rest of this user â s guide deals with the communicator applications and the phone. There is a short glossary of Internet and w ireless terms and abbreviations at the back of the user â s g uide. ⢠The PC Suite Guide explains the f unctionality of PC Suite for the Nokia 9210i Communicator. With PC Suite you can move, copy, synchronise, back up, and restore data between your communicator an d a compatible PC. ⢠The Software on CD-ROM Guide explains in detail the functionality of the applications found on the CD-ROM that you can install on your communicator. ⢠The Add-on Applications Guide gives a brief introduction of other software available for the Nokia 9210 i Communicator. This guide i s only available in a printed version. ⢠T he Se tt i n g s Che cklis t hel ps you to conne c t your Noki a 921 0i Com mun i c a to r with di ffe ren t kin d s o f w i re less se rvi c e s. The PC Suite Guide and the Software on CD-ROM Guide are both on the CD-ROM under the section â Using th e Nokia 9210i Communicator â . In this user â s guide and the Getting Started Guide , the names of the commands on the display a re in bold and th e settings and options are in italics . Note: If you are s witching from the Nokia 9000 Communicator, the Nokia 9000 i Comm unic ator, t he No kia 91 10 Comm uni cator , or th e Nokia 9 110i Communicator to the Nokia 9210i Communicator, s ee â To transfer data f r om ot h er device s â on p age 3 6 a n d in t h e PC S uite G uide on t he CD- ROM. Linda1.book Page 4 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
5 Introduction Facts about your communicator Network Services The wireless phone described in this guide is approved for use on the GSM 900 / 1800 netw orks. Dualband/triband is a network dependant feature. Check with you r local service provider if you can subscribe to and use this feature. A number of features included in th is guide are called Network Services. These are special services that you arrange through you r wireless service provider. Before you can take advantage of any of these Network Services, you must subscribe to them through your s ervice provider and obtain instructions for their use f rom your service provider. Note: Some networks may not su pport all language-dependent characters a nd/ or services. Check the model number of any char ger before use with this device. T his device is intended for us e when supplied with power from ACP-9 , ACP-12 chargers. Warning: Use only batteries, c hargers and accessories approved by the phone manufacturer for use with this particular phone mo del. The use of any other ty p es may in validate any approval or warranty applying to the phone, and may be dangerous.For availability of approv ed accessories, please check with your dealer.When you disconnect the power cord of any accessory, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord. Linda1.book Page 5 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
6 Introduction Services that need to be subscribed to are typically the short m essage service, Internet, and fax. After y ou have subscribed to the service func tions, you can then activate these functions a s described in this user â s guide. The manual activation commands for various services are not presented in this user â s guide (for example, using the and characters for activating or de activating services). The Nokia 9210i Communicator, nevertheless, is capable of handling commands given in that form. For these commands, please consul t with your service provider s. Because the number of special serv ices depends on what services are available in your home network, it is, unfortunately, impossible to provide a comprehensive list of the services a nd settings you need in this us er â s guide. Theref ore, this user â s guide gives general information about additional services. Please contact your network operator for further information about the availability an d th e details of services in your h ome network. Tip: Write the information you obtain f rom your service provider down on the Settings Checklist for futur e refer enc e . If a service requ ires separate phone numbers or specific settings, they must be stored in the settings of the communicator. For exam ple: Sending and receiving short messages requires that this service is su pported by the network you are using and activated f or your SIM card, and that the ph one number of the message ce ntre is stored in the settin gs of the SMS application. Internet access requires that data service is supported by the network you are using and activated for your SIM card. I n addition, you must have obtaine d an Internet access point from an Internet service pr ovider. Stickers on the sales package The stickers contain important information f or service and customer support purposes. Keep these stickers in a safe and secure place. Linda1.book Page 6 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
7 Introduction Attach the sticker to the C lub Nokia Invitation Card , if supplied in th e sales package. Access codes The Nokia 9210i Com municator uses several access codes to protect against unauthorised use of you r communicator and SIM card. The access codes you need most o ft en are: ⢠the lock code to lock up your communicator, and ⢠the PIN code , which is provided w ith the SIM card. IMPO RTA NT : The default lock code is 1234 5 . For security re asons, it is imperative that you change the lock code. Keep the code secret and in a safe place, separate from th e communicator. For more information on changing access codes, see section â Securityâ on page 216. You can change access codes that are used by both the phone and the communicator interface via either of them, provided that the code can be chan ged. For further details on access codes, see â Securityâ on page 216. The Internet applications of the communicator u se passwords and user names to protect against unauthorised use of the Internet and its services. These passwords are changed in the settings of the Internet applications. Linda1.book Page 7 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
8 Introduction Contact in formatio n Tip: Yo u can s ynch ronis e the contact information on your communicator with a corresponding application on a compatible PC . See the PC Suite Guide on the CD- ROM for details. All contact infor mation that you store in th e Contacts application, such as names, addresses, and ph one numbers, goes into the Contacts directory. T he phone, the communicator interface, and each of the applications have their own views of the Contacts directory. T he information shown depends on the infor mation the selected application can use. For example, when you a re making a call via the phone, you can view the name and phone number(s) of th e contact. Possible f ax numbers, e-mail addresses, job titles, and so on, are n ot shown. GSM dat a tran smis sion The Nokia 9210i Communicator employs the data transmission capa bilities of the GSM network to send faxes, sh ort messages, and e-mail, and to e stablish connections with remote computers. Wireless data connections can be made from most locations where your phone operates. However, it is recommended that you move th e communicator to a location where the strongest possible wireless signal can be obtained. When the signal is strong, data transmission is efficient. In general, you should not expect the same performance from wireless data communications as from landline communications, due to the inherent characteristics of the wir eless environment. The following fa ctors may impair wireless connections: Nois e Radio interference f rom electronic appliances and equ ipment, as well as f rom other phones will a ffect the qu ality of wireless data tran smission. Linda1.book Page 8 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
9 Introduction Cell handover As the phone user moves from one n etwork cell to another, the sign al strength of the channel drops and the wireless telephone e xchange may handover the user to a different cell and f requency, where the signal is stronger. A cell handover may also occur when the user is stationary, due to varying wireless traffic loads. Such handover may cause slight de lays in the transmission. Elect rostati c dis cha rge A discharge of static electricity from a finger or a conductor may cause erroneous functions in electronic devices. T he discharge may result in distorted display and unstable software operation. Wireless connections may become unreliable, data may become corrupted, and the transm ission h alted. In th is ca se you need to end the existing call (if any), close the cover and switch off the ph one (if on) and remove the battery. Then replace the battery and establish a new wireless connection. Dead spots and dro pou ts Dead spots are areas where radio signals ca n not be received. Dropouts occ u r when the phone user passes through an area where the radio signal is blocked or reduced by geographical features or large structures. Signa l impai rment Distance and obstacles can cause signals to become ou t-of-phase. They can also cause reflected signals. Both situations result in a loss of signal str ength. Linda1.book Page 9 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
10 Introduction Low si gna l st re n gt h Due to either distance or obstacles, the radio signal strength from a cell site may not be strong or stable e nough to provide a r eliable data connection for communication. Therefore, to ensure the best possible com munication, remember the following points: ⢠The data connection works best when the communicator is in a stationary position. Attempting wireless data communication while in a moving vehicle is not recommended. Fax transmission is more easily impaired th an data or short message transmis sion. ⢠Do not place the communicator on a metal surface. ⢠Check th at the signal strength on the communicator display is sufficient. Moving the communicator within a room, especially towards a window, may result in a s tronger signal. If s ignals are not strong enough to support a voice call, data connection should not be attem pted until you can f ind a location with better signal reception. Note: When the antenna is up, the sign al is stronger. Linda1.book Page 10 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
11 General information 2. General information This chapter explains how the communicator operates and how to supply power to the communicator. For information on f irst start-up and setup of your communicator, see the Getting Started Guide. Communicator display Figure 3 The communicator interface is turn ed on by opening th e cover. The application that was active the last tim e the communicator was used is shown on the display. When you close the cover, th e communicator interface turns off its display and saves all da ta. Scroll bar Commands Command buttons Search field Indicator area Name and icon of application Menu bar Linda1.book Page 11 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
12 General information Tip: When a comman d is dimmed, it cannot be used. The commands always correspond to th e comman d bu ttons, as shown in Figu re 3. The applications are run in the m iddle of the di splay. The indicators show application and system-related inform ation. To move around a selected f rame and select items, u se the Arrows key at the lower right-hand corner of t he keyboard. Where there is a search field at the bottom of th e display, you can search for items by using the keyboard to e nter text in to the search field. Figure 4 If there is more than one frame in the view, the selected one is always high lighted. You can move fr om one frame to another by pressing th e Tabulator key. S ee Figure 4. This item is selected. Details of item. The left hand frame is highlighted. Press the Tab key to highlight the right f rame. . The commands that you can apply. Linda1.book Page 12 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
13 General information Dialogs and pages Figure 5 An example of a dialog which contains several pages is shown in Figure 5. Indicator s The application icon a nd application name in the in dicator area display the application you are in at the momen t, as shown below. The icons that appear on the Inbox/O utbox indicator rows change according to the application and current situation. The battery level and signal s trength indicators are the same as shown on the phone display when the phone is on. This is a page. This is a dialog. Use the A rrows key to move within a page. Another page. To go to it, press the Menu k ey. Linda1.book Page 13 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
14 General information Call status - You have a voice call, and the handsfree loudspeaker and microphone are on. - A voice call with the h andsfree off. The lou dspeaker and microphone are muted. - An open data connection, see the Inter net chapter on page 131. - The communicator is receiving or sending a fax. - The communicator is trying to establish an infrared connection. - An infrared connection has been established. - The infrared connection is obstructed. - The communicator is connected to a PC. - The communicator is connected to a PC via cable. - The communicator is being u sed as a fax modem. - The communicator is in a profile, in this case in the â Meetingâ profile. See â T elephone Settings â on page 77. Application icon Application name Inbox/Outbox Signal strength and bat tery level Tim e Linda1.book Page 14 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
15 General information - Time. You can adjust time in the Clock application. See page 2 13. Inbox/Out box - The inbox i ndicator informs you that you have received a f ax, short message, or mail. - Th e document Outbox contains u nsent m essages. See â Outboxâ on page 161. Battery level - The battery is low and you should recharge it. - The battery is charging. The bar scrolls until the battery is f ully charged. The outlet plug icon indicates that the communicator is connected to an external power source. - The battery is fully charged. All the four b ars are displayed. Signal str ength - The communicator is con nected to a wireless network. When all the f our bars are shown, the wireless signal reception is good. If the signal is weak, make sure the antenna is up. Y ou can a lso try to improve the reception by moving the communicator slightly or by usi ng it in the handsfree m ode. - The phone is on, but it is outside network coverage. - The phone is off. You cannot make or re ceive calls, and you cannot receive messages with any of the communications applications (SMS, data, fax, or mail). Linda1.book Page 15 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
16 General information Communicator keyboard Figure 6 In addition to the norma l character an d n umber keys, the keyboard h as a n umber of special keys, as shown i n Figure 6. Applicati on bu tton s The buttons at the top of the keyboard start the correspon ding applications or open application groups. The buttons are: De sk , Tele pho ne , Mes saging , Internet , Con tac ts , Cal e nda r , Offi ce and Extras . To us e the app lication s When the cover is opened, the application th at was active th e last t ime the communicator was used, is shown on the display. Linda1.book Page 16 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
17 General information To switch to another app lication or application group, press the corresponding application button. You can even do this during a ca ll. You need not exit an application before starting another. All inactive applications remain in the background until you activate them aga in. Note: When you open the WWW appli cation, all other applications are closed to re ser ve mem o ry fo r WWW . To send or receive calls or messages with any of the communications applications, remember that the phone m ust be switched on an d in a service area with adequate wireless signal strength. Note: Information need not be specifically saved. When you press Cl ose , swi tch to another application, or close th e device cover, the Nokia 9210i Communicator sa ves all data . To cr eate a ke ybo ard shor tcut t o a pre ferr ed l ink or appli catio n Some applications buttons like Office, Desk, and Extras do not open applications directly. However, you can specify an application in an application group as the preferred application or a link on Desk as the preferred link and access it directly from the keyboard. Y ou can open a pr eferred application by clickin g Ctrl the application button. Example: If you mak e the Word Processor applica tion preferre d inside the Office application group, you can press Ctrl Office within any application to open Word Processor. To make an application preferred, open an application group (such as Office), press the Menu key, and select Tools > Preferred ap plication . Select the application from the list. See the e xample in the column adjacent to this paragraph. To make a link preferred, open Desk, pr ess the Menu key and select Tools > Preferred link⦠Select th e link from the list . Linda1.book Page 17 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
18 General information Escape (Esc) To cancel an action, y ou can eith er press the Esc key or Cance l . Pr essing the E sc key also cancels and dismisses a dialog, and dismisses an information note. Tabulator or Tab You can use the Tab (Tabulator) key to move from one frame to another. When writing or editing documents, the T ab key moves th e cursor to the n ext tab stop. Shi ft The Shift key is u sed together wi th letter keys to in sert capital letters and u sed together with number keys to insert special ch aracters. The Shift key does not need to be held down when pressing a ke y: pressing first Shift and then a le tter or number key generates an uppercase or special ch aracter. In combination with Control key and a particular letter key the Shift key generates shortcut commands. See â Shortcutsâ on page 2 7. In writing and editing text, the Shift key an d the Arrows key can be used to select text, see â Shortcutsâ on page 27 . Control (Ctrl) Pressed together with other keys on the keyboard, the control key generates shortcut commands which can be used i n viewing and writin g text. See â Sh ortcutsâ on page 27. Linda1.book Page 18 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
19 General information Character (Chr) Tip: You can us e th e character key with other keys to zoom th e view and activate or deactivate infrared. Press the character key to open a character table where you can select special characters. Press th e chara cter key together with characters and commands that are shown in green colour on the keyboard to access them. Press the character key, keep it pressed dow n and tap a letter key to access accented and oth er special letters. Help ( ) For online help at any time, press the key on the communicator keyboard. For more information, see â Online Help â on page 3. Men u Tip: Using th e menu key, the Zoom option is sometimes available. It allows you to m agnify the view on display. Pressing the Menu ke y reveals options. The option s available depend on the application you are in. Use th e Arrows key to move to the desired option and press Select . The chosen option only affects the item th at is currently selected, open, or being sent. The Menu may also contain the gen eric option Settings . Arrows k ey Tip: In the WWW browser application, use the Arrows key to move a pointer around the display. See page 146. The Arrows key can be used to move the cu rsor or selected fr ame. Linda1.book Page 19 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
20 General information Ente r When the cursor is shown, pressing Enter moves th e cursor to the begin ning of the next text line or adds a new line. Enter can also be u sed to open folders , applications, and docu ments. When a command is underlined, you can press Enter instead of the command button. When information notes are shown, press Enter instead of OK . In options and settin gs, wh en a value c a n be toggled, you m ay press Enter instead of Change . Conn ectors The Nokia 9210i Comm unicator c an be connected to a variety of devices. See Figure 7. Figure 7 Infrared connection Charger connection RS232 adapter cable DLR-2L or headset HDC-8L connection Linda1.book Page 20 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
21 General information Use the infrared port for connecting to a c ompatible PC, printer, digital ca mera, or another communicator. To charge the ba ttery Note: See important safety information on battery u sage on page 22. Tip: To check the current battery level, see the battery indicator on the communicator or phone display. 1 Connect the charger cable to the bottom of the communicator, as shown in Figure 8. Figure 8 2 Connect the charger to the proper voltage AC wall outlet. While charging is in progress, the batter y level indicator scrolls on the ph one display. 3 When the battery is f ully charged, the bars stop scrolling and four bars are displayed. You may now remove th e charger plug f rom the communicator. Note: You can use all th e features of the communicator during charging. Linda1.book Page 21 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
22 General information When the battery leve l is low and only a few minute s of operation time remain, a warning tone will s ound, and the me ssage BATTERY IS L OW will be repeat ed at regular intervals on the phone display. When the charge le vel becomes too low for operation, the RECHARGE BATTER Y message will be displayed, accompanied by a warning tone. If you do not c onnect the communicator to a charger, the communicator switches itself off. Note: When you connect a communicator with a fully dis charged battery to a charger, it will take 3 0-60 seconds before th e CHARGING message appears on the display an d the battery indicator bar starts scr olling. After that, it may take 10-30 seconds before you can switch the phone on. Battery informatio n Tip: R e a d t h i s s e c t i o n f o r information on how to prolong the lif e of your battery. Use the battery only for its intended purpose. Never use any char ger or battery which is dam aged. Do not short-circuit the battery. Accidental short- circu iting can occur when a metallic object (coin, clip or pen) causes dir ect connection of the and - terminals of the battery (m etal strips on bottom of th e battery) for example wh en you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purs e. Short- circuiting the te rminals may damage th e battery or th e connecting object. Leaving the battery in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in summer or winter conditions, will reduce the capacity and lif etime of the battery. Always try to keep the battery between 15 ð C and 25 ð C (59 ð F and 77 ð F). A communicator with a hot or cold battery may temporarily not work, even when the bat tery is fully charged. Batteries' performance is particularly limited in temperatures well below freezing. Linda1.book Page 22 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
23 General information Do not dispose of batteries in a fire ! Dispose of batteries according to local regulations (e. g. recycling). Do not dispose as household was te. Note that a new battery â s full performance is achie ved only after two or three complete charge and discharge cycles! The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times but it will eventually wear out. When the operating tim e (talk-time an d stan dby time) is n oticeably shorter than normal, it is time to buy a new battery. Use only batteries approved by the com municator manufacturer and recharge your battery only with the charger s approved by the manufacturer . Unplug the charger when not in use. Do n ot leave the battery connected to a charger for longer than a week, since overcharging may shorten its lif etime. If lef t unused a fully charged battery will discharge itself over tim e. Temperature extremes can affect the ability o f your battery to charge. Battery operation time is a ffected by the following: whether both t he phone and the communicator interface are on, radio signal stren gth, various phone settings, and the length of the screen blank er period. It is always recommended to keep a charged battery in th e communicator. Keeping the battery charged maximises the lifetime of the backup battery supplying power to the real-time clock of the communicator. In case the backup battery is drained, it will be automatically char ged the next time a charged battery is reconnected to the communicator. Always close the device cover before removing the battery. C losing the cover will save all data. Linda1.book Page 23 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
24 General information Note: The battery does n ot fit into place if th e SIM card is not correctly installed. Do not force the battery into place! Che ck that you have inserted the SIM car d as described in th e Getting Started Guide. If the SIM card is incorrectly in stalled, remove it by pulling it out of the slot, and insert it again. Memory card Tip: To protect the memor y card wi th a password, see â To lock a memor y card â on page 210. You can us e a memory card to ma nage you r docum ents, c ontac ts datab ases , applications, backups, and so on. Use the items on the memory card in the same way as corresponding items on the communicator. You can, for example, install an d remove software to and from the memory card with the Install/Remove software application, and send messages to contacts in th e contacts dir ectory of the memory c ard. Note: Do not r emove the memory card in the middle of a n operation. Note : If you want to use a Nokia 92 10 Com munica tor â s me mor y card in you r Nokia 92 10i Com munica tor, you must fi rst form at the card. Not e that formatting deletes all information from the mem ory card. To format the memory card, open the File m anager application in Off ice and press t he Menu key. Select Memory card > Format memory card ⦠, and press Forma t. How ever , you can u se a N okia 9210 Commun ica tor â s memor y card in your Nokia 9210i C ommunicator temporarily for copying files between the memory ca rd and th e device. If you do so , resta rt your Communicator after inserting the original memory car d by removing the battery and replacing it again. General_information_I ss3.doc Page 24 Friday, Octob er 18, 2002 5:37 P M
25 General information To insert a memory card 1 Close the device cover and make sure that the phone is switched off. If it is on, press . 2 Open the hatch at the back of the communicator, usin g a minimum of two fingers - one finger on each side of th e hatch. 3 Slide the m emory card under th e memory card h older as shown in Figure 9. Make sure that the gold contacts of the card are facing dow n. Figure 9 4 When you have secured th e card in place, close the hatch. WARNING: Keep all mem ory cards out of the reach of small children. General_information_I ss3.doc Page 25 Friday, Octob er 18, 2002 5:37 P M
26 General information General fe atures To select several items at o nce Where multi-selection is available, you can select s everal items at once. The selected items are highlighted. The commands you u se affect all the selected items. Multi-selection works in most lists. To select items one by one, scroll to the item and press and hold down Ctrl. While pressing down Ctrl, scroll to each item you want to select and press the space bar . To select a larger set of consecutive items, paint the items by pressing and holding Shift using th e ⧠and ⨠arro ws on the Ar ro ws key. Multi-selection is cleared when you press the Arrows key. Special characters The character key Chr on th e communicator keyboard is u sed to create characters that are not included on the keyboard. T he character key can always be u sed when you are able to enter characters from the keyboard. Note: Some special characters may get distorted when sent out of your communicator. This happens, for example, with mail or sh ort messages, and is because of differences in ne twork protocols. To insert special characters from the character table 1 Press and release the Chr key. A dialog op ens. 2 Press the Menu key to select the page with the character you want to i nsert. 3 Select the special character or characters, then press Inser t . General_information_I ss3.doc Page 26 Friday, Octob er 18, 2002 5:37 P M
27 General information To insert special characters from the keyboard There are two ways to in sert special characters directly f rom the keyboard. To insert characters printed on the keys in green , press and hold the Chr key and simultaneously press a key with a special character printed in green. To generate special char acters by using certain unmarked keys, for example, â aâ and â eâ , do as follows: 1 Press and hold th e Chr key a nd simultaneously press a letter key. T he first special character matching the letter key is displayed. 2 Continue to ho ld down the Ch r key and press the letter key again. The second special character is shown in place of the first one, and so on , until the first character is shown again. Press Shift or the Caps lock key to change the case of the special character. Shortcuts Tip: Many sho rtc uts ar e also displayed next to menu commands in applications. There are severa l shortcuts you can use in the docu ment applications. The shortcuts var y depending on the application used. The following table lists some of the available shortcuts: Shortcut Function Ctrl a Ctrl c Ctrl x Ctrl v Ctrl z Selects all Copies selected text Cuts selected text Pastes selected text Undoes (the last action) General_information_I ss3.doc Page 27 Friday, Octob er 18, 2002 5:37 P M
28 General information Note: For information on the shortcuts available for the WWW application, see the Internet section of this guide . Ctrl b Ctrl i Ctrl u Applies bold Applies italics Applies underlining Ctrl t Ctrl d Full screen mode (if available) Deletes files, messages , shortcuts and other items. Ctrl p Print or Properties Ctrl n Ctrl o Ctrl e Cre ate s a ne w fil e Open Close Ctrl s Ctrl Shift s Save Save as Chr left/right arrow (on Arrows key) Moves the cursor to the beginning or end of th e line Chr up/down arrow (on Arrows key) Moves up or down a page Chr Ctrl up/down arrow (on A rrows key) Moves to start or end of document Shift Ctrl lef t/right arrow (on Arrows key) Selects the pr evious or next wor d Shift right/left/up/do wn arrow (on Arrows key) Selects one text character or line Shift Chr up/down arrow (on Arrows key) Selects text, page by page, inside a docu ment Shortcut Function General_information_I ss3.doc Page 28 Friday, Octob er 18, 2002 5:37 P M
29 General information To save files When you close a n ew file for th e first time , or want to save it, you will be asked to enter a name for the file and to identify a f older in which it should be saved. Figure 10 The following commands becom e available in th e dialog: OK - Confirms the name of the docu ment and sav es the document. Brows e - Opens a dialog in wh ich you can browse for a location wher e you save your file. Change f ormat - Opens a list of formats. You can now change the format of the document being saved. Cancel - No saving is done and the dialog is closed. Note: If you want to quit the applica tion, but you do not want to save the file, press the Menu key and select File > Discard changes , then close the file. General_information_I ss3.doc Page 29 Friday, Octob er 18, 2002 5:37 P M
30 General information To send docu ments In addition to sending messages in the Messagin g application, you can also send documents out of the communicator in the applications where th e Send function is available on the Me nu list. As a f ax - You can send the docume nt a s a f ax. As a m ail - Y ou can send the document as a mail message. As a sh ort me ssage - You c an se nd the d ocum ent as a s hort mess age. Via infra red - Yo u ca n se nd th e do cume nt via inf rare d. Note: When you open a document, the document is opened in the appropriate editor or vie wer. The commands vary according to th e editor/viewer . To search for text You can s earch for text strings in the applications wh ere this function is ava ilable on the Menu list. 1 Press the Menu key and select Edit > Find ⦠. A dialog opens. 2 Ty pe the text string in the search field and press Find . 3 Once a text string match is found, it is highlighted. To find out i f there ar e more of the sa me text strings in the docume nt, press Find next . 4 To refin e th e sea rch, pre ss Option s . A dialog opens where you ca n define options of Case sen sitive or Mat ch whole word . To repl ace text 1 Press the Menu key, and select Edit > Find ⦠. General_information_I ss3.doc Page 30 Friday, Octob er 18, 2002 5:37 P M
31 General information Press Re place . 2 Type the text string to be re placed in the Find: field and the text you wan t to replace it with in Replace with: field. 3 For more search and replace options press Options . In the Find options dialog you can select a case sensitive search or a search only matching whole words and not parts of a word. You ca n also choose to re place all occurrences of a text in the docume nt without further confirmation. Tip: Replace all is available only if you have selected Yes in the Re place all dialog. 4 Press Re place or R eplace all . To check spelling Note: You can spell check only English text and words. You can check words and text for spelling in the applications where Spell check ⦠is available on the Menu list. To be able to use this function, you first need to install the Spell checker from the CD- ROM found in the sa les package of y our communicator. For details, see â To install software from the CD-ROM â on page 34. Tip: You can se lect individual words to spell check. Otherwise the whole text is searched and spell checked. 1 Press the Menu ke y and select Tools > Spell chec k ⦠. If th e Spell checker comes across a word it does not r ecognise, a dialog opens. 2 You can type in the cor rection in the correction f ield. Or, move to the Suggestions field and press the T ab or Enter keys to open a list of suggestions. 3 Select a word from the list of suggestions, then press Replace to accept the correction or suggestion. 4 If during step 2 you want to add an unrecognised word to the diction ary, press Add . General_information_I ss3.doc Page 31 Friday, Octob er 18, 2002 5:37 P M
32 General information To print You can print various items, such as documents, pictures, faxes, mails, and short mess ages . Refer to the user â s guide of th e printer for detailed safety instructions on the printing device. To view or modify the page s etup, press the Menu key an d select Fil e > Pr inting > Page set up ⦠To preview the document before printing it, press the Menu key and select File > Printi ng > Prin t preview To print a document or a f ile, 1 Press the Menu key and select File > Printing > Pri nt ⦠. A note appears, showing the print rang e, connection type, and printer used. 2 Press Print . A di alog opens. To change the printing options, press Opti ons . 3 To pr eview what you are about to print, press Pr int pr evie w . A dialog opens. To define page setup, press Page setup . Figure 11 General_information_I ss3.doc Page 32 Friday, Octob er 18, 2002 5:37 P M
33 General information When printing via infr ared, make sure that the infrared port of th e communicator faces the infrared por t of the printe r. Keep the inf rared connection clea r. If the connection is obstructed for too long, f or example, if something is moved between the infrared sensors or the communicator is moved, printing is in terrupted. For details on infrared connection, see page 35 . Log Log contains information about the communication history of your communicator. The log shows all, or certain types of com munication events in chronological or der. With log files you can monitor your communications, use the information to create or complete contact cards, or reply directly to the sender in the log. Tip: The shortcut to open the log is Sh ift Ctrl L. Figure 12 Tip: To cha nge the categories Date and time an d Duration to Subje ct and Status , press < and > on the Arrows key. To access the log You can access the log from the Menu of several applications. Press the Menu key and select Tools > Log . To make use of an individual communication event 1 Choose a log event and press Use . T he command buttons change. General_information_I ss3.doc Page 33 Friday, Octob er 18, 2002 5:37 P M
34 General information Tip: A communication type can have on e of the following deliver y statuses: pending , de livered , failed , sent , no t sent , a nd scheduled . 2 You can now do the following: send a fax or short message to the contact, call the contact, or add the contact to your Contacts direc tory. Check the command buttons for available option s. To vi ew only certai n comm unicati on type s 1 Press Filte r by type to choose a com munication type you want to view . Press Filter by di rection to choose whether you want to vie w communications originated by you or by the remote par ty. 2 Se lect from the options. 3 Press OK . To erase the conten ts of the lo g Log events remain in the log database for only a set number of days after which they are automatically erase d to free memory on your communica tor. To redefi ne the number of d ays, press th e Menu ke y and select Tools > Log durat ion ⦠. 1 To erase some or all the contents of the log, press the Menu key and select F ile > Clear log ⦠. 2 Ty pe in the date. All log events w ith an earlier date w ill be removed from the log. 3 Press Clear . To install software f rom th e CD-ROM The applications and files on th e communicator â s CD-ROM ar e ready to be insta lled or moved to the com municator. Proceed with installation as fo llows: 1 Ensure that you have installed PC Suite on your com puter. You can find this program on the CD- ROM in the sales package. General_information_I ss3.doc Page 34 Friday, Octob er 18, 2002 5:37 P M
35 General information Tip: For more information about PC Suite, see the PC Suite Guide on the CD-RO M. 2 Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of your compute r. 3 Either: Connect your communicator to your computer using the adapter cable supplied in the sales package. Or: Prepare the communicator an d the computer for an in frared connection. For more information , see â To activate the infra red connection â on page 35. 4 If the CD-ROM user interface does n ot open automatically, double-click the file â Noki a9210i. exeâ in the CD-ROM f ile structure. 5 Select a program you want to install from the CD-ROM user interface and click â In stal lâ . Tip: See the Add on Applications Guide for information on other software available f or your communicator. Note: Remember to in stall applications in the same language as your communicator. Use a memory card to gain more space for the different applications and files on the CD-ROM. Note: For information on the installable applications, see the Sof tware on CD- ROM Guide on th e CD-ROM. To acti vate th e infr ared conn ection Tip: To activate the infrared, you can also press the Menu key and select Tools > Receive via i nfrared . 1 Make sure that the infrared por t of the com municator faces the in frared port of the other device. 2 To activate the infrared connection, press Chr (the key with the infrared symbol; this key is on the right-hand side of the keyboard, next to the Enter key). 3 To end the infrared connection, press Ch r again. General_information_I ss3.doc Page 35 Friday, Octob er 18, 2002 5:37 P M
36 General information To transfe r data from other devices IMPO RTA NT! Do NOT us e the method desc ribed in section â To ba ck up and restore data to and from a memory car d â on page 209 to restore data you have backe d up with Noki a 921 0 Co mmun icato r to Noki a 92 10i Communicator. Use PC Suite instead. Nokia 9110/9110i Commun icator (Data mover) Data mover transfer s data from the Nokia 9110 /9110i Commu nicator to the Nokia 9210 /9210 i Commu nica tor. Via infr ared you ca n t ransf er co ntac t card s, cale ndar events, notes, and Inter net access settings, for example. Y ou can eith er choose to transfer all data or define the cat egories of dat a that you want to tr ansfer. Note: You cannot tr ansfer your WWW or WAP bookmarks to the Nokia 9210i Communicator with Data m over. To open Data mover, p ress the Extras application button, scroll with th e Arrows key, and select Da ta mover. To transfer all data 1 I n the main view, press Transfer no w . 2 Activate the infrared connection on the Nokia 91 10/9110i Communicator. The transfer begins. All items a re transferred to the Nokia 9210i Com municator. To transfer selected data Tip: Alternatively, press the Menu key an d select Tools > Options ⦠. 1 I n the main view, press Op tion s . A dialog with four pages opens. General_information_I ss3.doc Page 36 Friday, Octob er 18, 2002 5:37 P M
37 General information 2 On each page, press Chan ge to select or deselect the data categories to transfer to the Nokia 9210i Communicator. To select or deselect a ll items on a pa ge, press Select al l or Unselect all . Wh en you are ready, pre ss Done . . 3 In the main view, press Tran sfe r no w . Activate the infrared connection on the Nokia 9110/9110i Com municator. The transfer begins. A ll items are tran sferred to the Nokia 9210i Commu nicator. 4 When the transfer is comple te, press OK to close the application. 5 If the transfer f ails, a dialog is displayed. Press OK to try again . Note: You ca n cancel th e transfer pr ocess at a ny stage when the Cancel command button is available. Compatible N okia p hones, person al orga nisers, and PC s Tip: To transf er data from other personal organisers, first synchronise data between the device a nd the PC application and then synchronise data between the PC application and the Nokia 9210i application. To transfer data from the Nokia 5100/6100/7100/8200/8800/9110/9110 i mobile phone, your laptop or desktop PC, or the PalmPilot personal organiser to your Nokia 9210i Communicator, see the PC Suite gu ide on the s ales package CD-ROM. Note: To transfer contacts f rom your old SIM card to your Nokia 9 210i Comm unica tor, see â To move or copy contacts from a SIM cardâ on page 96. General_information_I ss3.doc Page 37 Friday, Octob er 18, 2002 5:37 P M
38 General information General_information_I ss3.doc Page 38 Friday, Octob er 18, 2002 5:37 P M
39 Phone 3. Phone Figure 13 With the cover ph one you can make, r eceive, and manage calls, send and receive short messages, s earch for phone n umbers, change profiles an d define many settings. For mo re complicated task s like sending long DTMF sequences or modifying phone settings, use th e Telephone application . See the T elephone chapter, starting on page 69. Phone Earp ie ce Front Back Microphone Linda1.book Page 39 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
40 Phone Selection keys When operating th e phone, press keys one at a time. The phone keypad is n ot functional when the cover of the com municator is open. Switches the phone on and off. Switches between profiles. See â Profile settings â on page 78. Scroll through men us, submenus or settings. If there are no active calls, you can use the scroll keys to browse t hrough the phone book. When a call is active, you can adjust the volume level by pressing the scroll keys. Tip: To call your voice mailbox, press and hold . Dials a phone number and answers a call. Se nds the ongoing call to hold if pressed du ring a call. In the stan dby mode shows the list of the m ost recently dialled num bers. Ends any active call, cancels a dialled call, or clears the display. 0.. .9 The nu mber and alphabet ke ys. Tip: If you have subscribed to two phone li nes , y o u can s w it c h between th em by pressing and holding . Used for crea ting fu nctions. The function of these two se lection keys depends on the text shown on the bottom of the display. See Figure 14. Note: Hold the phone as you would any other mobile phone with the antenna pointed up and over your shoulder. Note: As with any other ra dio transmitting device, do n ot touch the antenna unnecessarily when the phone is switched on. Contact with the antenna affects call quality and may cause th e phone to ope rate at a higher power level than otherwise needed. Linda1.book Page 40 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
41 Phone Warning: Do not switch the phone on when w ireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interferen ce or danger. To use the selection keys Figure 14 Example: Pressing the selection key under the text Menu gains access to the menu fu ncti o n s. Selection keys are the ke ys located just be low the right and left corners of the cover display. Commands on the display vary according to the situation and previous selections. Tip: A press of th e key will return the di splay to stand-by mode. Often you must confirm th e selection by pressing OK . If ava i la ble, yo u can us e Back comm and to re turn to the previou s menu level w ithout making a ny ch anges. Display indicator s The display indicators inform you about the current operation of the ph one. The indicators described below are shown when the ph one is ready for us e, with no characters entered on the display. NETWORK NAME or LOGO - T he wireless network you are currently using. Linda1.book Page 41 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
42 Phone and bar - The current signal strength at your location. The more bars visible, the stronger the s igna l . and bar - Battery charge level. The more bars vis ible, the more charge there is in the battery. - The phone keypad is locked or the lock code is active. - The phone will not r ing to notify you of an incoming call. - You have received one or several new voice messages. - You have received one or several new short messages. - You have received on e or several n ew faxes. - Infrared transmission is active. - Call diverting is ac tive. To make a call To make and receive calls, ⢠the ph one must be switched on, ⢠the com municator must have a valid SIM card fitted, and ⢠you m ust be located in a service area of the wireless networ k. Tip: When a ca ll is active, you can use the and keys to lower or raise the volume level of the earpiece. 1 Key in the area code and the phone numbe r of the per son you wish to call. If you make a mistake, you can remove the digits one at a time by pressing Clear repeatedly. To clear the whole display, press and hold Clea r . 2 Pres s to di al the phone n umber. 3 To en d the call, pre ss . Note: The microphone and earpiece are on the rear of the device. Linda1.book Page 42 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
43 Phone Internat ional calls When making international calls, start by pressing twice qu ickly. The international call character â â appears on the display, which informs the network centre to select the in ternational dialling prefix. After this you ca n enter the country or region code, area code and phone number. Note: Calls described here as international may in some cas es be made between regions of the same nation. To search for phone numbers You can retrieve phone numbers from memory by the name with which the phone number was stored. For more information, see â To call a number in the Telep hone directory â on page 7 0. Tip: To choose which memor y to u se , pre ss Names , scroll to Options and press Select tw ice. Scroll to choose Devic e , SIM card , o r a contacts database you have created and press Select . 1 Press Names . 2 Scroll to Search and press Select . 3 Key in the name of the person whom you want to call, or the f irst letter(s) of the name. 4 Press Search . The name closest to th e keyed characters will appear. 5 If the name fou nd was not the one you searched for, scroll through the n ames with and until you reach the correct one. 6 Press De tai ls to view the details of the highlighted name, or press to call the person. If th e person has several numbers, scr oll the selection frame onto the one you w ant and press . Linda1.book Page 43 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
44 Phone To speed dial Speed dialling is a handy way to call frequently-used phone numbers. You can define up to eigh t speed dial numbers in th e communicator memory. For information on how to set speed dials, see page 81. There a re two wa ys to speed dial: Tip: Pressing a nd holding dials your voice mailbox n umber. ⢠Press and hold the nu mber of the speed dial location where you have stored the phone number. For this meth od to work, you mu st enable speed dialling, see â Call settings (3-1) â on page 56. Example: Press 2 if the speed dial location for the phone number is 2. ⢠Key in the n umber of the speed dial location where you have stored the phone number. Press . T he phone w ill display the phone number briefly, and then dial it. Note: Speed dialling is not possible during a call. To call service numbers Your service provider may have stored service numbers on your SIM card. For more information, see â To call a number in the Teleph one directory â on page 70. 1 Press Names . 2 Scroll to Se rvi ce N os. and press Se lect . 3 Scroll to the service number and press to call the num ber. To send DTMF to nes If you need to send long DTMF sequences, it is more convenient to send them via the communicator interfac e, se e â To send DTMF tones durin g a c all â on page 77. Linda1.book Page 44 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
45 Phone Tip: For an explanation of DTMF tones, see the Glossary on page 266 . 1 Make the call to the desired phone nu mber. 2 Key in the digits you want to send as DTMF tones. The digits a re sent one by one to the network. To answer a call Tip: To change you r ringi ng tone, see â T o attach a ringing to ne â on page 99. When you receive a call, the phone gives a ringing tone and the t ext Call fla shes on the display. If silent-profile is active, only the keypad and display light will flash. If the ca ller can be identified, the call er â s name or phone nu mber, and th e text Calling , will be displayed. Tip: You ca n an swer the call even whi le using th e search or menu functions. 1 To answer the ca ll, press . If you do n ot want to answer the call, press . The caller will h ear the alerting tone change to a busy tone. To mute the ringing tone of an incom ing call, press Mut e . Tip: If th e Div ert if busy is activated to divert the calls, for exam ple, to your voice mailbox, rejecting an incoming call will also divert the call. See â To divert voice calls â on page 83 . 2 To end the call, press . To manag e calls There are a number of functions you can u se during a call. Many of the in-call options are network services. To access the functions, press Options du ring a call. Some or all of th e following in-call options may become available: Answer - Allows you to answer an incoming ca ll. Reject - Allows you to re ject an incoming call. Linda1.book Page 45 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
46 Phone Tip: I f you star t making a new call du ring th e curre n t call, the current call is put on hold automatically. Hold / Activa te - H old allows you to put th e current call on hold. To activate the original call again, select Activate . New call - Puts the active call on hold and dials a new phone number. Send DTMF - Tra nsm its D TMF t one s. S ee â To send D TMF t ones d uring a call â on page 77. End act ive call - Ends the active call. End all c alls - Ends both the active and held call. Contacts - Opens the phone book. Menu - Open s t he M e n u . Mute / Unmute - Switches the microphone of the communicator off or on. If th e communicator is connected to a handsfree car kit, Mute also turns off the microphone of the car kit. Swap - Allows you to alternate between two calls, an active and a held call. Transfer - Enables you to connect two voice calls together and disconnect yourself from both calls. See â T o transfer calls â on page 76. Conference - If one call is active an d another call is on hold, th is option merges them into a con ference call. Private - During a conference call, Private allows you to converse privately with a selected participant. Keypad lock The keypad lock makes accidenta l key press es ineffective. Linda1.book Page 46 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
47 Phone When the keypad is locked, you can answer calls normally by pre ssing . During a voice call, the keypad is unlocked an d the communicator can be operated in t he usual way. After the call, the keypad is automatically locked again. The keypad will be unlocked a utomatically when the communicator is connected to a car kit. When the communicator is removed from the car kit, without being switched off, the keypad wil l be locked automatically again. To lock the keypad Press Menu and then the key within 3 s econds. Note: While the keypad is locked, the icon and the Unlock command are displayed. To unlock Press Unlo ck and then the key within 3 s econds. Note: When the phone is locked, calls may be possible to the emergency number programmed into your phone (e.g. 1 12 or other of ficial eme rge ncy n umb er ). To change pr ofiles Example: If you us e the Meeting profile in a meeting the phone rings only once so as not to disturb others. You can use the Profiles key to adjust phone tones for the various operating environments of the communicator. One pr ofile is always in use. For more detailed inform ation on the various profiles, how to adjust the settings and so on, see â Profile settings â on page 78. Linda1.book Page 47 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
48 Phone Tip: Yo u ca n also use t he scroll key and OK to select a profile. 1 Press the key on the keypad. 2 Press the key again until the selection frame is on the desired profile. 3 To select the profile, press and hold . To view help Most menu fun ction s are pr ovided with a help text, which gives a brief description of the displayed function. 1 Scroll to the menu function about wh ich you want h elp. 2 Wait for a few seconds. The f irst page of the help text will appear. The text scrolls automatically. If you want to scroll it manually, pre ss the scroll keys or More . 3 To ex it help, press Back . To use the m enus Tip: You can access the menu fu nctions e ven duri ng a call. The phone offers a set of menu functions that allow you to tailor the phone for your particular u se. The menus an d submenus can be accessed by scrolling the menu or using the appropriate shortcuts. To scroll the men us 1 Press Menu . 2 Press either or to scroll the list of menus until you reach the desired menu. 3 Press Sel ect to a ccess the menu . If the men u contains submenus , reach th e one you want with either or and press Select . Linda1.book Page 48 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
49 Phone 4 To return to the previous menu level, pr ess Bac k . To exit the menu without changing any settings and to return to the stand-by mode, pr ess . To use menu shortcuts All the men us, submenus and settings are num bered. This nu mber is shown in the upper right corner of the display. Example: To set the An ykey answer on, fir st pre ss Menu and then press the numbers 3, 1, 1 , and 1 in se q u e nc e. 1 Press Men u . 2 Key in the index number of the menu you wish to access. Menu st ruc tur e The following menu table lists the nam es of the main menus and their submenus. Some menus are subject to the availability of the service in your area. Third-level menu s ar e not sh own. Menu Function Submenus MENU 1 MESSAGES 1 Write mess age , 2 Inbox , 3 Drafts , 4 Sen t , 5 Cell br oadcast, 6 Ser vice com- mand editor , 7 Voice mes sages MENU 2 CAL L R EGISTER 1 Missed calls , 2 Received c alls , 3 Dialled numbers , 4 Clear recent ca ll lists , 5 Call dura tion , 6 Call cost s MENU 3 SET TIN GS 1 Cal l settings , 2 Phon e setting s , 3 Security sett ings , 4 Restore factory s etting s MENU 4 C AL L DIVE R T 1 Divert all voice calls , 2 Divert i f busy, 3 Divert if not answered, 4 Diver t if out of reach , 5 Diver t if not availa ble 6 Divert all fax ca lls , 7 Divert all d ata calls , 8 Cancel all di verts Linda1.book Page 49 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
50 Phone Messag es (M enu 1 ) The Short Message Service (SMS) is a network service which enables you to receive and send short messages. Contact your service provider for details. Write message (1-1) In this menu you can write and send a short m essage. Inbox (1-2) Tip: To change the tone of an incoming SMS message, se e â Profile settings â on page 7 8. When you receive a short message or picture message, a text indicating the number of messages that have been received and the indicator will appear on the display and a tone will sound, unless the communicator is set to a silent profile. A note is also shown when you receive faxes or m ail. To read recei ved faxes or mail, you must u se the respective applications of th e communicator interface. Tip: You ca n c all the phone n umber while view i n g t h e m es sag e by pressing twice. 1 Press Read twice to view the message, or press Exit to view it later. If you view a message later, press Menu > 1 > 2 , scroll to the desired message and press Read to view the message. 2 While view ing the message, press Op tion s to scroll thr ough th e list of options and press Selec t at the highlighted option to select it. The available options are: Delete - Eras es the selected message from the memory. Reply - Opens the editor for a re ply. Key in the reply a nd press Opti on s > Send . MENU 5 INFRARE D MENU 6 SIM SERVICES Only available, if supported by y our SIM card. Linda1.book Page 50 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
51 Phone Forward - Asks for the number where the m essage should be forwarded. Enter the num ber and press OK to forward the message. Edit - Opens the current message in th e editor where you can modify the message. Use number - C opies the phone n umber from the message and moves it onto the phone display. You can now call th e number with . Details - Shows the sen der â s name and number, the date and time the message was sent, and the numb er of the me ssa ge centr e. Drafts (1-3) In this menu you can view, modify, and send your draft short messages. Sent (1-4 ) In this menu you can view and modify the short m essages you have sent. Cell broadcast (1-5) This network service allows you to receive SMS messages on topics that you have predefined on the comm un icator interfac e. See â Cell broadcast â on page 234 . For available topics and relevan t topic numbers, contact your service provider. On - Sets the information message reception on. Off - Turn s the i nf orm ati o n m essag e re cept ion off. Linda1.book Page 51 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
52 Phone Service command editor (1-6) Tip: These requests are also known as USSD commands. In this submenu, you can send service requ ests, such as activation commands for network services, to you r service provider. For more information, contact your service provider. Voice messages (1-7) List en to voic e mes sages (1- 7-1) Tip: To call your voice mailbox quickly, pr ess and hold . When you enter this submenu, th e phone automatically calls your voice mailbox at the phone number stored in menu 1-7-2. If required, key in the access code f or your mailbox or an swering machine when the connection has been made. If the voice mailbox numbe r has not been saved before, the phone asks for you to save i t fi rs t . Note that the voice mailbox is a network service and you may need to subscribe to it first. Voice m ailbox num ber (1-7-2) In this submenu, you can store and edit your voice mailbox num ber. A voice mailbox can be a network service or your personal answering machine. For more information and for the voice mailbox n umber, contact your service provider. Linda1.book Page 52 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
53 Phone Call reg ister (M enu 2) Missed calls (2-1) Tip: Received calls and Mi ssed c all s funct ion s ar e network services wh ich work only in n etworks that allow you to view th e caller â s phone number. Lists calls that you ha ve missed. Note: The communicator only register s missed calls when the ph one is switched on and withi n network coverage. Received calls (2-2) Lists calls that you have received. Dialled numbers (2-3) Lists calls that you have dialled. Clear recent call lists (2-4) Select which calls you want to erase. The options are All / Missed / Dialled / Received . IMPO RTA NT : The phone numbers are erased without warning. You cannot undo the operation. Call duration (2-5) Shows the duration of your ou tgoing and incoming ca lls, and allows y ou to r eset the timers. Linda1.book Page 53 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
54 Phone Last call duration ( 2-5-1) Shows the duration of th e last outgoing or incoming call in hours, minutes or sec ond s , for exam pl e, 0: 02:15 . All call s â duratio n (2-5-2) Shows the total duration of all calls made and received with any SIM card that you have used with the com municator. Receiv ed calls â du ration (2- 5-3) Shows the total du ration of calls received with any SIM card that you have used with the communicator. Dialled c alls â duration ( 2-5-4) Shows the total duration of calls made with any SIM card that you have used with the communicator. Clear timers (2-5 -5) Asks for th e lock code a nd then resets all tim ers. You cannot undo the reset operation. Note: The actual time invoiced for calls and services by your service pr ovider may vary, depending upon ne twork features, rounding-off for billing, taxes and so f orth. Linda1.book Page 54 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
55 Phone Call costs (2-6) This network service allows you to check various call costs. The costs are shown in charging units or units of currency that you have set in Menu 2 -6-3-2. The call cost is shown for each SIM card separately. For these settings you need th e PIN2 code, the PIN code, or n o code at all, de pending on you r service provider. Con tact your service provider f or more information. Last call cost/ units (2 -6-1) & All cal ls â cost/un its (2-6-2) Last call cost/units (2-6-1) shows the cost or units of the last, or current call. All calls â cost/units (2 -6-2) sh ows the total cos t or units of all calls made with the current SI M car d. Whichever menu you choose, press Opti ons to access th e following three submen us: Clear co st counter s (2-6- 3-1) Resets all cost counters. You cannot undo the reset operation. Show cost / Sho w in un its ( 2-6-3 -2) You may select whether the call costs and call cost limits will be displayed in currency or char ging units. Contact your n etwork service provider for the prices of charging un its. The display shows the option that is currently not selected. To select the option shown on the display, press Select . If you selected Show cost , key in th e charging unit price. Use or to insert a decimal point. Next, enter the currency name. Linda1.book Page 55 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
56 Phone Call co st li mit ( 2-6 -3- 3) This function allows you to l imit the total costs of outgoing calls to a specifi ed number of charging units or units of curr ency that you have set in Menu 2-6-3-2. To turn the limit on , select On . Key in the cos t limit in c harging units or currency units. If you define the limit in currency units, you ca n press or to insert a decimal point. After the limit has been turned on, the number of remaining units is shown on t he display when in stand-by mo de. When all units have been used, no calls can be made. To turn the limit of f, select Off . Note: When no more charging units or currency units are left, calls may only be possible to the e mergency number programmed into your communicator (e.g. 112 or other official emergen cy number). Note: The actual time invoiced for calls and by your service provider may vary, depending upon network features, rounding-off for billin g, and so forth. Sett in gs (Me nu 3) Call settings (3-1) Anyke y ans wer ( 3-1- 1) When selected, you can answer an incoming call by pressing any key on the keypad, except , , or Mu te selection key. Linda1.book Page 56 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
57 Phone Automatic redial (3-1-2) When this function is selected and you call a number that is busy or does not answer, the ph one will attempt to call the number until the call is connected. The maximum number of redials is 10. Press to en d the call attempts. Speed di alling ( 3-1-3) When selected, you can dial phone numbers stored in th e speed dial locations by simply pressing and holding the assigned speed dial key. See â Speed dials â on page 81 for m ore info rmat ion. Call waiti ng service ( 3-1-4) Call waiting is a network serv ice. Contact your operator for subscription. For more information see â To answer a waiting call â on page 76. Choose Activate to enable call waiting, Cancel to disable call waiting, o r Ch eck stat us to show whether c all waiting is active a nd for which call ty pes. My nu mber sendin g (3-1 -5) This network service allows you to set your phone number either to be displayed or to be hidden f rom the person you are calling. S et by n etw or k resets the phone to the default setting, On or Off , that you have agreed upon with your ser vice provider. Summary after call ( 3-1-6) If you set this fun ction to On , the phone will briefly display the duration and cost (network service) after each call. Linda1.book Page 57 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
58 Phone Line for ou tgoing c alls (3-1 -7) If your netwo rk supports this service, you can have two phone lines in your com mu nic a to r. You ca n sel e c t wh ic h l i ne you wa nt t o use for makin g ca l ls. Fo r more information, see â Line selection page â on page 90. Phone settings (3-2) Clock ( 3-2-1) You can select whether the time is shown on the display. Cell i nfo displ ay (3-2-2) When this function is s elected, the phone will indicate when it is used in a network cell based on Micro-Cellular Netw ork technology. MCN technology increases the capacity of wireless networks in urban areas. The setting will remain in effect ev en if the SIM card is changed or the phone is switched of f. Welc ome n ote (3-2 -3) You can write a messa ge of up to 44 characters which appears on th e display when you switch on th e phone. Network selection (3-2-4) The network to which you are connected can be selected e ither automatically or manually. Linda1.book Page 58 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
59 Phone If you select Auto matic , the phone automatically selects on e of the wireless networks available in your a rea. Outside your home n etwork service area, the communicator will select one of the networks that ha s a roaming agreement with your home net work. If you se lect Ma nual , the phone will show a list of available n etworks and you can select the network you wish to use if thi s network has a roaming agreement with your home netw ork service operator. If no such agreement is in force, the text No access will be displayed and you must select another network. Confi rm SI M serv ice ac tions ( 3-2- 5) You can set the phone to show you the confirmation messages sent between your phone and the n etwork when you are using the SIM services by sele cting the option Yes within the menu 3-2-5 (Confirm SIM serv ice actions). Security settin gs (3-3) The purpose of the security system is to preven t unauthorised use or altering of important settings. In most cases, activating or changing the security options requires the appropriate access code. See â Securityâ on page 2 16. Note: When security f eatures that rest rict calls are in u se (call barr ing, closed user group and fix ed dialling, or system lock etc.), calls may be possible to certain em ergency numbers in some networks (e.g. 1 12 or other official eme rge ncy numb ers ). PIN code reques t (3-3-1 ) The options ar e On and Of f . See â Secu rityâ on page 216. Linda1.book Page 59 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
60 Phone Call ba rr ing ser vic e (3 -3- 2) This network service a llows you to restr ict incoming calls to, and outgoing calls from your phone. Y ou need a barring password to be able to use this function. Contact your n etwork service provider t o get a ba rring password. The options are: Outgoing calls / Internat ional calls / Internation al calls except t o home coun tr y / Incoming calls / Incoming calls when abroad / Cancel a ll barrings . Closed use r group ( 3-3-3) This network service allows you to set the communicator to accept calls to and from a selected group of people. For details on creating a user group and activating this service, contact your network ser vice provider. Preset - Resets the phone to u se a user group the SI M card owner has agreed u pon with the networ k service provider. On - Uses a par ticular user group. Calls can be made to or received from the members of the selected group only. Off - Calls can be made and received in the n ormal way. You can u se this option only if you are entitled to do so. Lock if SIM chang e d (3 -3- 4) You can protect your phone against unauthorised use with the lock code. T o do this, enter your lock code and selec t the option Yes . For details, see â Securityâ on page 216. Change of ac cess code s (3-3-5) In this submenu, you ca n change the lock code, the PIN code, th e PIN2 code and the barring password. See â Securityâ on page 216. Linda1.book Page 60 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
61 Phone The access codes may only inclu de the digits 0 to 9. Lock system(3-3-6) Tip: You can al so pre ss Menu and # to enter your lock code. In this submenu, you can lock the communicator. Press Se lect and enter your lock code. The communicator locks immediately. When your com municator is locked, you can make emergen cy calls to predefined numbers u sing the cover phone. You can also answer incoming calls and make emergency calls using the Telephone application. All other actions are blo cked. Even if you remove and replace the battery and switch on the ph one, the communicator will remain locked. T o unlock the communicator, press Unlock and enter the lock code. For more information on locking and other security option s, see â Securityâ on pa ge 216. IMPO RTA NT : The default lock code is 1234 5 . For security re asons, it is imperative that you change the lock code. Keep the code secret and in a safe place, separate from th e communicator. For information on changing the lock code, see s ection â Securityâ on page 216. Restore factory settings (3-4) You c an res et s ome of the menu set tings to th eir o rigi nal va lues. Y ou need t he lo ck code for this function. This function will n ot affect stored phon e numbers and names, access codes, earpiece volume setting, call timers, cost counters, selected application tones or SMS messages. Linda1.book Page 61 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
62 Phone Call di vert (Menu 4 ) Tip: The icon is shown in the stand-by mode when you have activated the Divert all voi ce calls . This network service a llows you to direct your incoming v oice calls to another phone number when you do n ot want to be disturbed, or when the phone is switched off or outside the network cover age area. For details, see â To divert voice calls â on pa ge 83. The options are: Divert all voice ca lls / D ivert if bu sy / Divert if not answered / Divert if out of reach / Divert if not availab le / Divert all fax calls / Divert all data calls / Cancel all divert s . Select Activa te to set the divert setting on if allowed by the network, Cancel to set the setting off. Select Check status to check whether th e divert is activated or not. If you select Divert if not answered or Diver t if not availa ble , you can also s elect Set delay to choose a delay t i me before the call is diverted. The options are 5 sec / 10 s ec / 15 sec / 20 se c / 25 sec /30 s ec . Infrared (M enu 5) If you want to r eceive data from another device via infrared, use this function. Make sure that the i nfrared port of the communicator faces the in frared port of the other device and press Acti va te . For more infor mation , see â To a ctivate the infrared connection â on page 35. Note: Do not point the IR (infrared) beam at anyone's eye or allow it to interfe re with other IR devices. This device is a Class 1 Laser product. Linda1.book Page 62 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
63 Phone SIM s ervices (Menu 6) In addition to th e functions available in the phone, your SIM card may provide additional services that you can access in the menu 6 . Menu 6 is shown only i f it is supported by your SIM card. The name a nd contents of the menu depend entirely on the services a vailable. For availability, rates and information on using the SI M services, contact your SIM card vendor, for ex ample your ne twork service provider, service provider or other third-party vendor. You can set the phone to show you the confirmation messages sent between your phone and the n etwork when you are using the SIM services by sele cting the option Yes within the menu 3-2-5 (Confirm SIM serv ice actions). Note: Accessing th ese services may involve sending a text messa ge (SMS) or making a phone call for which you may be ch arged. Linda1.book Page 63 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
64 Phone Linda1.book Page 64 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
65 Des k 4. Desk Tip: Your favourite links can be, for example, certain WWW pag es, WAP se rv ices , applications, documents, and photo albums. Desk is an application where you can create and m anage links to your favourite documents, applications, or th ird-party software. Main view When you first use Desk, the main view has at least the following links by default: an Internet shortcut to Internet setup, a document nam ed â Start here! â , and a WWW link to the official Nokia Web site. You cannot select more than one link at a time. Y ou can delete Desk links only in the Desk application. Tip: You can ch a ng e t he order in wh ich a link appears. Select the link, press the Menu key, and select File > Move . Using the Arrows key, move the link across the display and press Plac e here . Figure 15 Linda1.book Page 65 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
66 Des k To add a link Tip: To view and change the icon, label or parameters of a link, select the link, press the Menu key, and then select File > Properties ⦠. 1 Se lect the program, program group, or other item for which you want to add a shortcut to Desk. 2 Press the Menu key and then select File > Add to D esk . To write notes Tip: You can start writin g a note quickly in any application or even during a phone call by p ressing the Desk application button twice. 1 Press Write note . A s imple text editor opens. Figure 16 2 Write the note. 3 Press Clos e to save the document. Th e note will n ow appear in the main view of Desk. To ch ange th e backgrou nd im age You can also customise the background image of the Desk m ain view. 1 Press the Menu key and select Tools > Setting s ⦠. A dia log opens. 2 De fine the following: Backgrou nd image : The options a re Yes / No . Linda1.book Page 66 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
67 Des k Imag e fi le : Press Ch ang e to browse for an image. Press Preview to view the image. 3 Press Do ne . Note: The image f ile you choose as a background image should b e scaled to appear equal to or bigger than the screen size. For details, see â Imagingâ on page 231. Linda1.book Page 67 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
68 Des k Linda1.book Page 68 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
69 Telephone 5. Telephone Tip: You ca n al s o swi tch to other applications during a phone call. You can use t he Telephone application to m ake and receive phone calls, handsfree calls, or conference calls. Y ou can record and r edirect calls, use voice mailboxes, and manage settings and profiles. Open the Telephone application by pressing the Tel application button on the keyboard. To make phone calls, ⢠the phone m ust be switched on, ⢠the communicator must have a valid SIM card fitted, and ⢠you must be located in a service area of the wireless network. Some of the operations explained here ca n also be m ade using the cover of the communicator. Note: Opening or closing the cover does not affect active phone calls. If you have made a voice ca ll using the Telephone application and y ou close the cover, you can continue the call with the cover phone. Linda1.book Page 69 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
70 Telephone To m ake a ca ll manu all y Tip: To disable the hands free mode , press the Menu key, select Set tings > Call ⦠> Audio when cover opened and press Change to switch th e handsfree mode Off . 1 Ty pe the telephone n umber in the field at the bottom of the m ain view. 2 Press Call . Use the handsfree m ode to speak and li sten to the communicator from a short distance when the cover is opened, or close the cover and continue with the cover phone. To call a number in the Tele phone directory When you have no active voice calls, the Telephone application main vie w shows the Telephone di rectory. The defa ult directory is in th e communicator memory. From the top of the telephone list, you can select directories contained in the SIM card and - if fitted - directories contained in a memory card. Contact cards that do not contain any phone numbers appear dimmed. 1 Se lect a contact in the directory either by scrolling or by using the search field. Tip: To redial the last dialled number you can also press the shortcu t keys Chr Te l. 2 Press Call . If the contact has more than one phone num ber, a list opens, listing all the contact â s phone numbers. Choose a number from the list and press Call . Linda1.book Page 70 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
71 Telephone Tip: You can zoom in and out to either ma ke the text more readable or fit more entries on di splay. Press the Menu key and select View > Zoom in or Zoom out Figure 17 To call a number in a recent calls list Tip: A shortcut to open the Mis sed calls view is Ctrl Tel. 1 In the main view, pres s Recen t calls . Th e Dialled calls dialog opens. If you have new missed calls, the M issed c alls dialog opens. 2 To see calls from one of the other lists, select a command button on the right of the di splay. For example, to see a list of received calls, pr ess Receiv ed call s . Tip: You ca n c rea t e a new contact card by using a telephone num ber listed in Rece nt calls . In t he main view, press Rece nt calls . Select a call, press the Menu key, and Edit > Add to contacts . 3 Select a number from the list and press Ca ll . Now you can e ither lea ve the cover open to use the handsfree option or close the cover and continue the call normally. Linda1.book Page 71 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
72 Telephone To answer a call Tip: To adjust the volume of the speaker during an active call, use the A rrows key: pressing > increases the volume, pressing < decreases the volume. Figure 18 Tip: The caller â s name appears in the note if the telephone number is sent with the call, and if the caller â s number is listed in your Cont act s d irec tory . 1 When you receive a call and the communicator cover is open, a note about the incoming call appears. To answer th e call, press Answer or close the device cover and answer the call via the cover phone. 2 If you do not want to take the call, press Reje ct . To mute the ringing tone, press Mute t one . Note: You cannot have two active calls at the same time unless you are in a conference call. A current call is automatically put on hold when you answer a new incoming call. For information about conference calls, see â To make conference callsâ on page 74. To call and cre ate a voice mailbox Voice mailboxes wo rk just like an answering m achine. You can use them to store incoming messa ges of missed c alls. Many ne twork operators provide a voice mailbox service with the SIM card. If your SIM voice mailbox does n ot have a number, you can type i t yourself. Note that you are still r equired to contact your network operator for a phone number to use w ith this voice mailbox. Linda1.book Page 72 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
73 Telephone Tip: Another way to call your voice mai lbox is to press and hold t he key on the front cover of the phone. To call your voice mailbox, in the main view of the Telephone directory, press Voice mailbox . See Figure 17. If you have more than one voice mailbox, a dial og prompts you to choose a mailbox f rom a list. You can a lso create additional voice mailboxes as follows: 1 Contact your network ope rator for a number to use with an additional voice mailbox. 2 Press the Menu ke y and select Settings > Voice mailb oxes ⦠. 3 When the Voic e mailboxes dialog appears, press Add . Type a name an d number. To reco rd a call You can record the conversation during a call. Once a call is in progress, press the Menu key and select Call > Record to open th e Recorder application. For more information on the Recorder applica tion, see page 229. Note: Obey all local laws governing recording of calls. To make a new call during a call You can h ave an ac tive call and a ca ll on hold at th e same time. You can switch between the two calls. This s ituation applies whether you made or received either of the calls. The display can show a maximum of three calls, although you can have only two calls conn ected at the s ame time . See Figu re 19. To an swer the WAI TING call you must first end either the ON HOL D or the ACTIVE call. Linda1.book Page 73 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
74 Telephone 1 If you already have an active call and a call on hold, drop one of th e calls or merge them into a conference call . 2 Press New call and make the new call. T he previous call will be put on hold. 3 To switch between calls, u se the Arrows key. The active call is f ramed with a dark line. The command buttons change according to the sta tu s of the selected call. For example, a call on hold can be c hanged to an active call by highlighting it with the A rrows key a nd then pressin g Activa te . Figure 19 4 To en d a call, select the call you want to end with the Arrows key and press End cal l . To make conference calls The conference call is a ne twork service. Contact yo ur network operator to check if this service is available. In a conference call, you and up to five persons can hear each other simultaneously. The display shows a con ference call as a single call. 1 Make a call. This call - with the dark line Call sta tus icon Linda1.book Page 74 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
75 Telephone 2 Once the cal led person has answered, make a call to a second per son by pressing New call . The first call is put on hold. 3 Wait until the second person answers the ca ll. 4 To place both persons into a conference call, press Con ference cal l . The display shows a single conference call. Press Conferen ce commands to list the two participants of the confer ence call. 5 To include another per son, press New call . The conference call is put on h old. When the person answers the call, press Conference cal l . This new perso n is included in the conference call. 6 To inclu de fu rth er pe rson s, repea t step 5. Tip: You ca n c lo se the cover and continue the call via the cover phone after you have included all participants in the conference call. Figure 20 To remove a conference call participant 1 Press Co nference co mmands . 2 Select the caller f rom the list of participants and press Drop . See Figure 20. To talk privately with one of the conference call participants 1 Press Co nference co mmands . Linda1.book Page 75 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
76 Telephone 2 Select a participant from the list and press Priva te c al l . The call is now split into two: th e conference call is on hold and the one-to-one call is active. 3 Once you have finished the private conversat ion, you can return to the conference call by pressing Conference call . Tip: To view log f iles of all calls, press the Menu key and select Tools > Log . The General log shows a ll calls, both incoming and outgoing, voice and data. To tra nsf er calls Call transfer is a network service where you connect two ca lls together an d disconnect yourself from both calls. Contact your network operator to check if this service is ava ilable. When you have one call on hold, and another call active or an outgoing call alerting, press the M enu key and select Call > Tr an sf er to connect the calls together. Note: You may be charged for some of the cost of the transferred call; contact your network operator for details. Note: You can on ly transfer voice calls. Fax, data, or confe rence calls ca n not be trans ferred. To answer a waiting call To know that you have a call waiting, an d to be able to answer it, you must first subscribe to the call waiting n etwork service. Call waiting is selected in network services. For more information, see page 85 . 1 When you receive a new call while you already have an active call, you hear a sound and see a note infor ming you of a new incomin g call. 2 Press Answer . The active call is put on hol d. Linda1.book Page 76 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
77 Telephone To se nd DTMF tone s durin g a call A dual tone multi-frequency tone system i s used by all touch -tone telephones. DTMF assigns a specific frequency, or tone, to each key so that it can easily b e identified by a microprocessor. DTMF tones allow you to communicate with voice mailboxes, computerised te lephony systems, etc. To send DTMF tones during a call, you have two methods: Tip: Besid es th e nu mb ers 0 - 9 , you can also u se the characters p , w , * , and # when sending DTMF tones. For information on the se charac ters, se e â To st or e DTMF tones â on pa ge 101. ⢠Type the digi ts with the communicator keyboard. No m enu or command button selection is needed before starting to type the digits. Each keystroke generates a DTMF ton e which is tran smitted while the call is active. ⢠Alternatively, 1 Press Send DTMF . The DTMF sequences you have stored in the contact card of the pe rson you are talking with are shown. For information on h ow to store DTMF se quences, see page 101. 2 Select a DT MF sequen ce. You ca n edit the sequence. If ther e are no stored sequences, you can type a new DT MF sequence in to the input field. 3 Press Sen d tone . Note: You can send DTMF tones during a conference call by typing the digits with the communicator keyboard, but you cannot access stored DTMF sequences . Telephone Setti ngs In the T elephone main view, press the Menu key and select Settin gs to select on e of the following settings. Linda1.book Page 77 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
78 Telephone Profile s ettings The profiles are used for gr ou ping the settings of differ ent operating environments of the communicator. In th e settings you can modify th e profile features. One profile is always in use. To change the pr ofile in use, press the M enu key. Use the Arr ows key to select the Profiles icon at the right- hand end of the m enu bar and a new pr ofile from the menu li s t. Figure 21 To select and modify a profile, press the Menu key and select Settings > Prof iles ⦠. The profiles provided w ith your communicator are: General - The def ault profile of th e communicator. Silent - You can set th is profile on wh en you want all the aler t tones to remain silent (except Clock an d Calendar ala rms - see â Noteâ on page 79). Meeting - You can s pecify how the communicator operates when you a re in a meeting, such as setting the volu me of the tones low. Outdoor - You can specify how the communicator operates when you are outdoors. Profiles icon Linda1.book Page 78 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
79 Telephone Pager - You can set this profile on when you want the commun icator to act as a pager. The def ault settings are that there is n o ringing tone and that you get an alert tone for received shor t messages . Flight - Sets the Flight profile on. For more in formation, see â Flight pr ofileâ on page 91. Note: If you have turned on the Clock alarm or an alarm for timed entry in Calendar, it remains on in all profiles, in cluding Silent. To create a new profile 1 To create a new profile, press the Menu key, select Setti ngs > Pr ofiles ⦠, a nd press New . The current valu es of the General profile are copied to the new profile. 2 To modify the settings of any of the profiles, highlight a pr ofile name and press Edit . A dialog with four pages open s, as shown in Figure 22 . For each of the pages, define the following: Figure 22 Gener al page Name : Type the nam e of the profil e. Some profiles cannot be renamed. Linda1.book Page 79 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
80 Telephone Ri ngin g t ype : Choose the ringing type for the ringing tone. The options are Normal / Ascendin g / Ring once . Ri ngin g t one : De fine the sound for the incoming call. Press Change to choose from sound files provided with the com municator or to browse for other sou nd files, if available. T o record a tone, see page 229. Ringing tone, line 1 : and Ringing tone, line 2 : Define the sound for incoming calls on two alternate lines, if available. Press Change to choose from sou nd files that have been provided w ith the communicator or to browse for oth er sound files, if available. Personal to nes : Define wheth er the personal ringin g tone of callers are used. The options are On / Off . For information about attaching a ringing tone to a contact ca rd, see â To attach a ringing ton e â on page 99. Alerts page Clock a larm , Calendar alarm , Rece ived SMS , and Received fax : Choose a specific sound for each of these situations to alert you. Highlight an option, then press Chan ge to choose from sound files provided with the communicator or browse for other sound f iles. To adjust the volume of an alarm, pr ess Volume . Notific ations page Keyboa rd t one : Adjusts the keyboard sound. The options are Off / Qu iet / Loud . Phone ke ypad tone : Adjusts the keypad sound. The options are Off / Quie t / Lo ud. Notificat ion tones : Switches the notification tones between On / Off . Notification tones a re t ones m ade b y the comm unic ator aler ting y ou t o an er ror ( such as an incorrect key press) or to a situation (such as a low battery). Linda1.book Page 80 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
81 Telephone Other page Play rin ging tone for : Allows you to choose which incoming calls will make a ringing sound. The options are All call s / VI P gr ou p onl y/ None . If you choose VIP gr oup only , only the calls coming fr om someone defined as a VIP will ring; see page 109 in the C ontacts chapter. All other calls alert on the display with a message, but will not ring. Speed dials Tip: See also â To speed dial â on page 44. Speed dialling is a quick way to call frequently used n umbers. You can assign speed dials to eight phone numbers. An ex ample is shown in Figure 23 . 1 Press the Menu ke y and select Settings > Speed dials ⦠. 2 To assign a number to a speed dial lo cation or to change an existing number, press eith er Add number or Change number . You see a list of contacts from the contacts database in your communicator â s in tern al me mor y. 3 Highlight a contact card and press Select . When a contact card without phone number is h ighlighted, the Select command is dimmed. Location number 1 is reserved for calling your default voice mailbox; see page 85 for more information. You can not change its value. For more information on voice mailboxes, see page 72. Linda1.book Page 81 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
82 Telephone Figure 23 Network services setting s Note: Network ser vices may not be pr ovided by all oper ators. If services are provided, you ma y have to subscribe to them. Tip: To change voic e call diverting or barring se ttings, the phone must be switched on. Information about the status of these s ervices is stored in the network. Therefore, the current settings are n ot shown until you request th e information f rom the network as follows: 1 Press the Menu key and select Settings > Netwo rk services 2 For example, to check the setting of Div ert i f bu sy , select Call diverti ng ⦠, highlight it with the A rrows key, th en press Check status . While the communicator is making a request to th e network, a query note is shown on the display. 3 After a successful request, the n ew status now appears in t he settings list. Linda1.book Page 82 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
83 Telephone Figure 24 To dive rt voic e calls Voice call diverting allows you to direct your incoming voice calls to another phone number. This is also known as call for warding. 1 Press the Menu ke y and select Settings > Network ser vices > Call divert ing ⦠. A dialog opens. 2 Choose divert options: Divert all cal ls â A ll incoming calls a re diverted. Divert if bus y â Incomin g calls are diverted when you are engaged in anoth er call. Divert if out o f reach â Incoming calls are diverted when the phone is switched off or ou tside the network service area. Divert if not answered â Incoming calls are diverted if you d o not answer them within a certain time period. Time delay â Applies to the option Divert if not ans wered . Time delay allows you to choose the time period after which the call is diverted. You can set the delay to Default / 5 seconds / 10 s econds / 15 s econds / 20 seconds / 25 seconds / 30 seconds Divert if not ava ilab le â In a single action, this option turns on diverting of Diver t if busy / Diver t if out of reach / Divert i f not answered . 3 Press Chang e , and select one of th e following options: Linda1.book Page 83 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
84 Telephone To: â Type the number to which you want to divert the ca lls. Default voice mailbox â Calls are diverted to you r voice mailbox. If you have more than one mailbox, you must choose on e from a list sh own to you. See page 85 for mo r e info rm atio n . Off â Turn off the divert. To rest rict vo ice call s To restrict voice calls you use the voice call barring network service. To use call barring or change the barring settings you need a barring password, which you ca n obtain from the network ope rator. 1 Press the Menu key and select Settings > Netwo rk services > Call barring ⦠. The Vo ice ca ll b arr ing dialog opens. 2 Choose on e of the available options: Outgoing c alls â Calls cannot be made. Incoming calls â Calls ca nnot be received. International c alls â Calls cannot be made to oth er countries or regions. Incoming calls wh en abroad â Calls cannot be received when you are ou tside your home country. International exc ept to home co untry - If you have enabled internationa l roaming with your network oper ator, you cannot make international calls abroad, except to yo ur hom e c o unt r y . Note: Calls described here as international may in some cases be made between regions of the same nation. If you subscribe to the alternate line network service, voice call barring applies only to the Selected line . Linda1.book Page 84 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
85 Telephone Note: When security f eatures that rest rict calls are in u se (call barr ing, closed user group and fixed dialling), calls may be possible to certain emergency numbers in some networks (e.g. 112 or other official emergency numbe rs ). To cancel all ca ll diverts or ba rrings, press Cancel all . Other networ k serv ices 1 Press the Menu ke y and select Settings > Network ser vices > Other serv ices ⦠2 Other network service settin gs contains the following options: Network sel ection â Allows you to chan ge the way a net work is selected and also register to anothe r network. Y ou can set the network s election to either Auto matic or Manua l . In automatic network selection, the com municator selects the most appropriate network. I n manual network sele ction, the communicator searches for available net w orks and presents you with a list of networks found; you can then select which network to use. Call waiting - P re ss Change to choose On or Off . For a brief description of call waiting, see â To answer a waiting ca ll â on page 76. My number sending â Determines whether your number is hidden or pr esented to the per son you are calling. Press Ch ange to see the options Defau lt / On / Off . Voice mailbox settings For information on voice m ailboxes, see page 7 2. 1 Press the Menu ke y and select Settings > Voice mailb oxes . 2 To change the setting s of a voice mailbox, highlight it and press Edit . A dialog with two pages ope ns. See Figu re 25. Linda1.book Page 85 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
86 Telephone Figure 25 Proper ties pag e Define the following options: Name : Type a descriptive name for th e mailbox. Number : Type a number for the m ailbox obtained from the networ k service. Note: The type of voice mailbox determines whether you can edit both of these fields. For example, th e name and number of a SIM voice mai lbox cannot be edited. DTMF t ones page DTMF : Define DTMF tones for a voice mailbox not provided with your SIM card. Each tone is represented by a character. Press Add to type ch aracters and store them with a label, such as DTMF2. You c an also select No DTMF tones . If you are editing a voice mailbox provided with your SIM card, this page is dimmed. Call settings 1 Press the Menu key and select Settings > Cal l ⦠. 2 De fine the following option s: Linda1.book Page 86 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
87 Telephone Audio when co ver opened : Determines whether the ha ndsfree mode is s elected automatically when you open the cover. Press Change to toggle On /Off . Automat ic re dial : W hen this setting is set On and you call a number th at is busy or does not a nswer, the communicator attempts to call the n umber until th e call is connected. Press Change to toggle On / Off . Advanced set ting s 1 Press the Menu ke y and select Settings > Advanc ed ⦠. 2 Define the follow ing options: Call costs page Tip: To see the phone seria l numb er, pr ess the Menu key an d select T ools > Serial numb er (IMEI) . Your network operator may ask you for this inform ation. If your network supports the call charging displa y service, use this page to change call charge settings and to view cost counter s. Your communicator will prompt you for your PIN2 code. If th is page is dimmed, your SIM does not su pport this network service. Figure 26 Displa y credits : Dete rmines the information about ca ll costs shown in the call display during a call. The options are No / Used / Rema in ing . Cr edits are amounts of money, measured either in units or currency. Linda1.book Page 87 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
88 Telephone Currency : Type a maximum of three characters to indicate your choice of c u rrency. You can type numbers or letters. For example, you can type â FI Mâ for Finnish currency. This field is used with Unit price below and with Show i n cur renc y . Unit p rice : If you use currency to measure call cos ts, type a decimal number for th e price of each c harging unit. You must also com plete the Currency field above. Maximum cost limit : You have two options: No limit or a value that you can define in the field. You can define the limit in either units or in currency. If you are in a call when the cost limit is reached, the call ends. You cannot make any more calls. You see a note on the display before and after the call limit is r eached. Press Calculate co sts : The information in t his dialog is: Last call : - The cost of the l ast call made. All call s: - The cost of all calls ma de since th e cost counter w as reset. See Figure 27. Remaining cr edits - If you have defined a limit in Maxi mum cost lim it th is field displays the amount of money or units remaining. Press eith er Show in units or Show in currency to choose how you w ant call costs to be displayed in your commu nicator. â Unitsâ is a n etwork measur eme nt, such as 21 un i ts. â Currencyâ is shown in the characters you have typed i n the Curren cy field. Press Clear c osts to clear th e cost cou n ters. Y o u are r equired to enter y our PIN2 code. Linda1.book Page 88 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
89 Telephone Figure 27 Note: The actual invoice for calls and services from your service provider may vary, depending upo n network features, rounding-of f for billing, taxes and so for th. Fixed diallin g page Fixed dial ling is a network service which allows you to restrict your calling to a limited set of nu mbers stored in the SIM card. The service is offered by som e network operators . When the f ixed dialling service is active, the SI M phone boo k list shows only numbers in the fixed di alling list. You still have access to the communicator â s Telephone directory, but you cannot call those n umbers. If you r SIM card does not support this networ k service, this page is dimme d. Figure 28 Linda1.book Page 89 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
90 Telephone If you want to change the settings or view the fixed numbers, you are required to enter your PIN2 code . When th e service is set to On , press Edit numbers to add, modify, or delete numbers. You are required to en ter names and numbers into the fixed dialling list. Note: When Fixed Dialling is set on, calls may be possible to certain emergency numbers in some networks (e.g. 11 2 or other official emergency number). Line sel ect ion p age If you ne ed two l ines (p hone number s) for your commu nicat or, you m ust sub scr ibe to the alternate line network service and check that this feature is activated in your communicator. If this s ervice is unavailable or you do not use it, the Line selection page appear s dimmed. Each line can have diffe rent settings for some of th e Telephone f eatures. Figure 29 The options on this page are: Se lect ed li ne : Defines the li ne used for ou tgoing calls. The options are Primary / Alterna te . Fax calls always use the primary line. If Block line sele ction is active (see the next paragraph) you cannot change th e line in u se. Linda1.book Page 90 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
91 Telephone Block li ne selection : Allows you to block the changing of the selected line. The values are On / Off . Ch anging the value requires you to enter you r PIN2 code. Note: Block l ine selection option is not provided by all network oper ators. Flight profile The flight profile prevents you f rom accidentally turning on the phone in an aircraft. To select the flight profile: 1 In the Telephone main view, press the Menu key, scro ll across the menu bar to the Profiles icon , then highlight Flight . 2 Press Select . With the flight profile active, you may do tasks which do not require the use of wireless network. For e xample, you can read previou sly downloaded mail, write mail, notes, short messages, faxes, or update your calendar. O nce you have left the aircraft, turn off the flight profile by pressing Exit pr of ile . Then you can turn on the phone by pr essing , and your short messages, faxes, and mail will be sent automatically. When the flight pr ofile has been selected, em ergency calls can be made as follows (close the communicator cover): 1 Press . The phone display will read Flight profile is act ive. . 2 While the note is visible (for approximately five se conds) you can dial an emergency number preprogrammed into your communicator, for ex ample, 112. 3 Press . Linda1.book Page 91 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
92 Telephone IMPO RTA NT! U sing your phone while in t he air is prohibited. Switch off your phone before boarding an a ircraft. The use of wireless telephones in an aircraft may be dangerous to the oper ation of the aircraft, disrupt th e wireless telephon e network and may be illegal. If the air craft personnel allow use of th e communicator interface, you MUST activate the Flight profile. The Flight profile will allow use of the communicator interface only and will prevent use of the phone. Be aware that all communication applications require use of t he phone. Linda1.book Page 92 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
93 Conta cts 6. Contacts You can use t he Contacts application to create, edit, and manage all contact information, such as phone numbers and addresse s. Start the Contacts applica tion by pressin g the Contacts application bu tton on th e keyboard. The main contacts database is in the communicator â s memory. You can also store contacts in the SIM card and in databases on an attached memory card. You can syn chron ise your con tacts with Microsoft Outlook, Lotus Notes, an d Lotus Organizer programs when you con nect your communicator to a com patible PC. For information on synchronising your contacts with a PC, see the PC Suite Guide on the sales pac kage CD-ROM. Conta cts directory The mai n v iew o f Cont a c t s co nt a i ns tw o fra me s. Figure 30 Linda1.book Page 93 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
94 Conta cts Tip: You can toggle between the two frames with the Arrows or Tab keys. In the left-hand fr ame, there is a list of contacts in the cur rently open contacts database. At the top of the list there is your own car d and other available contacts databases. Below the l ist there i s a search box f or finding en tries. In the righ t-hand frame th ere is the cu rrently selected contact car d. Contacts databases can be located in the communicator â s inte rn al me mor y , on a memory card, or on a SIM card. A memory card m ay contain several cont act databases. Contact data is shown for one contacts da tabase at a time. For example, to see contacts stored on th e SIM car d, use the Arr ows key to scroll down the list to the SIM card and pre ss Open . An individual contact card contain s the information of one person. A group contact card contains more than one contact person. You can see the name o f a group contact card in bold font in the list. Contacts are listed by name. You can change the sort order of the list. See â General page â on page 10 7. You can c reate more than one conta cts databa se in a m emory ca rd. For more information se e page 109. Note: You cannot delete your own business card, the internal contacts database of t he communicator, the contacts databa se on a SIM card , a read-only memory car d contacts databas e, or contacts in a read-only contacts database. To make a contact card 1 In the Contacts directory main view, with the left-hand frame highlighted, press New card . A new card is cr eated using the de fault template. Linda1.book Page 94 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
95 Conta cts 2 To make a new contact card using a particular template, press the Menu key and select File > Ne w ca rd . You are pr ompted to choose a template from a list. 3 When the contact card opens, enter information into the various fields. You can fill in the information on you r own business card u sing the same method. See an example in Figure 31. Note: The title of the P. O. Box field is on ly displayed when edi ting the fields. To display the words â P.O. Box â before the P.O. Box number after editing type, for e xample, â P.O. Box 123 â in the field. 4 To save your contact card, press Done . Note: The spee d dial icon next to a con tact card telephone number me ans that you have def ined a speed dial f or that telephone number with the Telephone application. Figure 31 Linda1.book Page 95 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
96 Conta cts To open a contact card Tip: To copy or move a range of contacts, sele ct the contacts, press the Menu key and select File > More options > Copy to or Move to . . 1 In th e Contacts main view, with the lef t-hand frame highlighted, select a card. 2 Press Ope n to open the car d in a full display view. To move or c opy contacts from a SIM card 1 In th e Contacts main view, with the left-hand frame highlighted, sele ct the SIM card and press Op en . 2 Press the Menu key and select File > More option s > Copy to or Move t o. 3 Choose th e Contacts database as the target directory and pr ess Sel ec t . To search for a c ontact card Tip: If you cann ot find the contact in th is database, go to the top of th e Contacts directory list, and open either th e SIM card or the memor y card d a tab ase . You may have s tored your contact in one of these other locations. 1 In the search field under the Con tacts directory list, enter characters which match the beginning of the name of the contact. For example, to find Manfred, enter M or Ma or M an. The names of contacts w hich match the char acters you entered are displayed. For more information on the rules of searching, see â Notes on using th e search field â on page 9 7. 2 Using th e Arrows key, select a contact and press Open . Linda1.book Page 96 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
97 Conta cts Notes on using the search field A search checks t he most importan t fields in a contact card. T he matching of search criteria is limited to th e beginning of words. For example, to search using the characters â An n â finds â Annabel â but not â Joa nne â . Example: john.carr@florida.edu or http://florida.edu/ ~john.carr The search also checks the contents which follow the f ollowing characters: ' . ' (period) or ' / ' (forward slash) or ' @ ' ( â atâ symbol) or ' ~ â (tilde). To change fields in a contact c ard To add a field You can add fields to a contact card to suit your own circumsta nces. For more information on specific fields, see âÂÂInformation on fields â on page 9 8. 1 Open a contact card. 2 Press Ad d field . A list opens, showing fields you can add to the card. 3 Using the Arrows key, select a field and press Sele ct . To rename a field You can rename fields to suit you r contacts. For example, after adding three new Tel fields, you could rename them to Tel (B us ine ss) , Tel (Priva te) , and Tel (Car ) respective ly. Linda1.book Page 97 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
98 Conta cts Tip: If you want to delete a field on all car ds based on the same tem plate, it is simpler to dele te it from the template attached to the card. Se e â To cr eate or modify templates â on page 100. 1 Open a contact car d. 2 Se lect the field you want to ren ame. 3 Press Rename fiel d . A list of alternative names for the field opens. If you are not allowed to rename the field, the Ren ame fiel d com mand button is dimm ed. Informa tion o n fields Company , First n ame , Last n ame , Suffix , Title , Middle Name , Job t itl e , Birthday - Yo u ca n have only one of each of th ese fields. Telephone number fields - Stor ing a â â (plus) character before the country or region code allows y ou to use the s am e phone number a br oad. Enter mobile ph one numbers in this field to sen d short messages. Country or reg ion - Enter a country or region name. If you wan t the address of a contact to be displayed in the format of the country or region, use the same country or region names as listed i n the option Default count ry or region on page 107. Note: Some extra types of field, such as Job descript ion , may appear only if they exist in an im ported contact card. Linda1.book Page 98 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
99 Conta cts To attach a ringing tone Tip: To play a ringing tone, use the Fi le mana ger application to open a ringing tone f ile. See â To open a file â on page 206. The default ringing tones are not displayed in the File manage r. You can set a s pecific ringing ton e for each contac t card. When that c ontact calls you, the communicator plays the chosen ringing tone (if t he telephone number is sent with the ca ll). 1 Open the contact card. 2 Press the Menu key and select Card > Ringing tone . A dialog s howing the current ringing tone of this contact is displayed. 3 Press Chang e . A list of def ault sounds is displayed. 4 Select a sound and press Select . Pres s Browse to sear ch for oth er s ound fi le s stored in the com municator. Note: To use pe rsonal ringing tones, this feature must be active in th e profile that you are us in g. For more information , see â To create a new pr ofile â on page 79. To inser t a pictu re Tip: To def ine yo ur default folder, go to Control panel and open the Def ault folder application. 1 Open the contact card. 2 Press > on the Arrows key to select the picture f rame on the right-hand side of the card. Pr ess Ins ert pi cture . A dialog displaying the contents of the de fault folder opens. Press Browse to search for image files, if necessary. Tip: Alternatively, to insert a picture, press the Menu key and select Card > Ins ert p ictu re . 3 Select a file and press OK . The image is opened in an image viewer. Th e framed area will be inserted into the contact card. Move the area with the Arrows key and enlarge or reduce the frame s iz e with the and - buttons. Press Inse rt . For more information , see â Imagingâ on page 231. Linda1.book Page 99 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
100 Conta cts To crea te or mo di fy temp lates Tip: Templates do not apply to contac t cards in th e SIM card, because th e layout of a SIM contact card is f i xed . Templates define a set of fields which the com municator uses when creating or displaying a contact card. The default te mplate provides a typical range of fields. You can modify th e default template. You can also create custom templat es with fields suitable for a particular group of people, such as those living overseas. Figure 32 1 Press the Menu key and select Tools > Card t emplates . A list of templates opens. 2 Either press New to create a n ew template, or move to a n existing template in the list and press Op en . A contact card template opens. 3 Edit the template. You can change the name of the template and a dd or remove fields. After you have created a contact card, the card and its template are linked as follows: ⢠In a template, if you add or change fields or their labels, changes affect all contact cards created from th at template. If a field is deleted from th e template, the field is dele ted from all the cards, except where the f ield contains data. ⢠In a card, i f you remove fields th at belong to a te mplate, the em pty field will still be there the next time you open the card. Linda1.book Page 100 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
101 Conta cts To st ore DTMF ton es DTMF tones are the tones you hear when you press the number keys on the phone keypad. DTMF tones allow you to com municate with voice mailboxes, computerised telephony systems, etc. You can store a s equence of DTMF tones for a contact ca rd. When you make a call to the contact, you can retrieve the sequence. It will save you from r e-entering the characters. 1 Open or create a contact card. 2 Press Ad d field . A list opens . 3 Scroll down the list to DTMF and press Sel ect . The DTMF field is inserted in the contact card. 4 Enter a DTMF sequence in the DTMF field. If you need a phone n umber-DTMF combination number for a contact, store the phone number followed by th e DTMF sequen ce in the Tel fiel d. You can us e th e following non-numeric characters: Character Function *# The asterisk and ha sh symbols may be used if the DTMF service requires th em p Inserts a pause of approx. 2 seconds before, or be tween, DTMF characters w If you use this character, the remaining sequence is not sent until you press Send tone again during t he call. Linda1.book Page 101 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
102 Conta cts To crea te con tact grou ps You can crea te contact groups to save time by sen ding e-mails and sh ort messages to all members of the contact group in one action. 1 With the Con tacts directory main view displayed, press the Menu key and select File > New group ⦠. A blank group contact card opens. 2 Enter a name for y our group. 3 To add con tacts to the group, press Add membe r . A lis t of contact cards and groups opens. 4 Select a contact and pr ess Ad d . Note that you can add an other contac t group to a group. 5 To attach a pictu re for the group, pr ess > on the Arrows key to m ove to the picture frame. Alternatively, press the Men u key and select Grou p > Insert picture . A dialog displaying the contents of the default folder opens. Sele ct a file and press OK , or press Br owse to searc h for a pic tu re file. 6 To save th e group contact card, press Done . An example of a contact group with members is show n in Figure 33. Figure 33 Linda1.book Page 102 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
103 Conta cts The company name, if it also exists in the original contact card, appears to th e right of the name of the contact. Select Op en to view the details of any of the group member s. To change group memb ershi ps for a contact or a group Figure 34 1 To view or change the groups to which a contact or a group belon gs, open the contact card, press the Menu key, and select Card or Group > Belongs to grou ps . A list opens, showing membersh ips for the contact or group. 2 To add the card to a new group, press Add to group . A list of contact groups in the current database opens. 3 Select a group and press Add . Your contact ca r d or group contact c ar d is added to the group. 4 Press Do ne to save your changes. Linda1.book Page 103 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
104 Conta cts To create a SIM contact card You can view the SIM directory by selectin g SIM card in the Contacts directory. The contacts in your SIM card are displayed with SI M location numbers, as shown below: Figure 35 1 I n the SIM card ma in view, pre ss New contact . A dialog opens, as shown in Figure 36. If fixed d ialling is active, the SIM contents show only you r fixed dialling numbers. For more information on fixed dialli ng, see page 89. 2 The memory location shows th e first free location number. T o change the location, press Chan ge . 3 Type a name for the c o nt a ct . 4 Ty pe a num ber for the conta ct. Note: The length of the name and the phone number you can enter is defined by the SIM car d. For example, some SIM car ds allow a maximum of on ly fourtee n ch ara cters. Linda1.book Page 104 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
105 Conta cts Figure 36 SIM directory options You can sort the contents of the SIM directory in alphabetical order or by memory location. Press the Menu key and select View > Sort by > Name , or Sort b y > SIM locati on . To see a su m mary of the u sage of the SIM database, press the Men u key and select File > Pr operties . If fixed dialling is active, you can see only information about fixed dialling numbers. To send a contact card as a business card Tip: You ca n se nd onl y one business car d in each mes sage y ou send ; howe ver, you can send it to many recipients. When you send or receive a contact card between the communicator and other devices, the term â business cardsâ is used. A business car d is a contact card in a format suitable for transmission, usually vCard format. You can add received business cards to your Contacts directory, where they become contact cards. 1 In the Contacts director y main view, select the card you want to send. Linda1.book Page 105 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
106 Conta cts Tip: PC mail and the short messa ge service ar e explained in the â Messagingâ chapter, starting on page 157. I f a c onta ct ca rd i s sen t as a short m essage, the car d is s e nt in t h e S ending format defined on page 108. 2 Press the Menu key and select File > Send . In the Send su bmenu, mak e a furt her choice of media: As a mail / As a sh ort message/ Via infrared . Yo u m ay hav e othe r sending options if you h ave installed additional software. An editor dialog opens, dependin g on the sending medium you have ch osen, as shown in the exam ple b elow. Th e contac t card yo u want to send ha s now bec ome a â business card â . Figure 37 3 To ch oose who receives the sen t card messages, press Recipi ent . Tip: If you change t he setting to include images in the message , do not forget to change it back after you have se nt t h e mes sage t o reduce call charges. 4 If you are sending via th e short message service, the images are left out by default to reduce call charges. If you want to in clude the image in the message, you must change the setting. See â Send as a shor t mes sage page â on page 108. 5 If you are about to send via in frared, make sure you acti vate the receiving of infrared in the other device first. 6 Press Send . To rece iv e a b usi ne ss ca rd When you receive a business card from another device, you are alerted by a notification message. This message appears automatically on the display, in any application. Follow the screen prompts to view the business card. Linda1.book Page 106 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
107 Conta cts Note the following information about the contents of received card(s): A field is displayed if it is recognised; if not, it is ign ored. Audio data, in a supported format, is set as th e personal ringing tone of the contact (if you c hoose to add th e card to you r Contacts dir ectory) To add the received card to your Contacts director y, press Add to Contacts . The card is con verted to con tact car d format. T o reject the card, press Delet e . Settings Press the Menu key and select Tools > Settin gs , then select a page, as follows: General page Figure 38 Default t emplate : Allows you to define which template is used when creating a new contact card. When you press Change , you can choose a template from a list of templates used with the curr ent database. Linda1.book Page 107 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
108 Conta cts Name display : Allows you to define the display order of names in th e Contacts dir ec to ry ma in vi ew . The va l u es are First name Last na me / Last name, First name . The names wil l be displ ayed in the sam e order in the Telephone application and the cover phone. Default cou ntry or region : Concerns the country or region whose address for mat is used when viewing contact card addresses in various displays in the communicator. By default, the address format of the cou ntry or region you enter in the Country or r egion field of a contact ca rd is used. If you do not enter inf ormation in the Country o r r egion field, the communicator uses the a ddress format of th e D efault cou ntry or regi on . Each country or region has a pr edefined address format. Press Chang e to see a list of countries and regions. Send as a short message page Example: The Nokia 9000 i/ 9110 /91 10i c omm uni cato rs and most of the m ajor e- mail clients support the vCard fo rm at. Se ndin g f or mat : Allows you to define the format used when sending a business ca rd via the short message serv ice. Th e value s are Compact / vCar d . Compa ct is more widely supported but the number of f ields sent is mor e restricted. Use vCard for mat if you know the receiving device understands vCard format. Using vCard format, you ca n send all fields except Note and DTM F . Send contact c ard pictures : Allows you to control the attaching of pictures when sending business cards in vCar d format via the short message serv ice . The options are No / Yes . Linda1.book Page 108 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
109 Conta cts VIP group page VI P grou p : A llows you to nominate an existing contact card group to be treated as VIP gr oup . You can res trict the ringing of inc oming calls so that only ca lls from a memb er of a VI P gr oup w ill ring, the others wi ll not ring. See Pr ofile settings, â Other page â on page 81. To create a ne w cont acts database Contacts da tabases a re created on a m emory card. 1 Press the Menu ke y and select File > M ore option s > New database . 2 Type th e name of your database, th en press the E nter ke y. See Figur e 39. Your new database is added to th e Contacts directory as a folder. 3 To add a new card to the new database, select and open the database in the Contacts directory, then press New card . To copy or move con tacts to the new database, select existing contacts from the Contacts directory, press the Menu key, and select File > More option s > Copy to or > Mo ve to . Tip: To se e a s umm ary o f the usage of the database, press the Menu key and select File > Proper ties . Figure 39 Note: If you have a r ead-only memor y card, y ou cannot make ch anges to the contacts or databases on that card. Linda1.book Page 109 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
110 Conta cts Linda1.book Page 110 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
111 Cale nd ar 7. Calendar In the Calendar application, you can create and check your scheduled events, appointments, anniversaries, and birthdays. You can also list things to do and set alarms to all of th e calendar entries. You can synchronise your calendar and tasks with Microsoft and Lotus programs when you co nnect your communicator to a compatible PC. For information on synchronisation, see â To transfer data from other devices â on page 35 and the PC Suite Guide on the CD-ROM. Calend ar ent ri es There are four types of entry that y ou can s tore in the Calendar applica tion: Example: Use appointment entries for meetings and bus iness lu nches. ⢠Appointment entries are the basic en tries in your calendar. ⢠Event entries are related to the whole day, not to a specific time of day. Even t entries do not appear in the Weekly time schedule. ⢠Anniversary entries are repeated annually on the same date. Use Anniversary entries for annual r eminders of important dates, such as birthdays or celebrations. Linda1.book Page 111 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
112 Cale nd ar Tip: You can use th e standard clipboard command shortcuts Ctrl X and Ctrl V to cut entries and paste them to a differ ent place . ⢠Task entries are f or writing down lists and things to do. These tasks can be prioritised and organi sed into task lists. Tasks can also h ave deadlines. There a re seven dif feren t views to view entrie s. Pres s Ch a n g e v ie w to choose a view. For more information about different view s, see â Viewsâ on page 118. To create new calendar entries There a re two wa ys to create ca lendar entri es: Tip: To send a c al e nda r entry to reserve a time in other device calendars, move to the date th at contains the entry and select the entry with the Arrows key, press the Menu key and select Send > As a short m essage or Via infrar ed ⢠Start typing your entry. A s you enter charac ters, Calendar opens the default entry dialog of the curr ent view. ⢠Press the Menu key and select File > New entry . Se lect the entry you wa nt to create. The options are: Appointment ⦠, Event ⦠, Anniversa ry ⦠, or Task ⦠. This is the way to create a new calendar en try when you do not want to use the default entry type for the particular view. To define inform atio n in a cal e nda r entry Tip: To change the default values of an entry details dialog, press the Menu key and select Entry > Default set tings . Figure 40 Linda1.book Page 112 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
113 Cale nd ar Tip: To se e ho w attachments a re added to an entry, see page 118. Note: Day, event, an niversary, and task entry all have slightly different entry dialogs. The followin g descriptions of each dialog page list all the possibilities. Details page Descript ion : The description of the entry. Tip: An u ntimed entry is displayed with a icon. Timed : Specif ies whether a day entry is timed or untimed. â Timedâ mean s that th e entry has a s pecific start time, end time, and duration. â Untimed â mean s that the entry happens on a particular date, but at no specific tim e. If you select No , you may have to define the date for the day entry in the field below. If you select Yes , you must define the starting and ending time. Date : The date of the entry. Start : The time or date when th e entry starts, depending on the entry type. Example: The st art ye ar may be a person âÂÂs year of birth, and t h e n um ber of yea rs since the star t year may be a person â s ag e. Displa y year : Displays the s tart year of th e anniversary, th e number of y ears th at have passed since the start year, or no year information. The options are Startin g year / In nu mber of years / None. Durati on : The duration of the en try. If you chan ge the value in the Start and End fields, this field is u pdated. End : The time when the entry en ds. Priorit y : The prior ity of a task. The options are High / No rmal / Low . Task list : The task list to wh ich the task entry is connected. Due date : T he de a dli ne o f a t a sk. Start warni ng : The da ys before the due da te when a tas k starts being shown in today â s entry list. Linda1.book Page 113 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
114 Cale nd ar Alarm page Tip: You can set an ala rm for a task entry only if you have also set a Due date . Set alarm : Specifie s wh e ther an alar m is se t for the entry. Time before : The time when an alarm set for a timed day entry will go off. Alarm ti me : The time when an alarm set for an u ntimed entry will go off. Days befo re : The number of days before an en try when an alarm will go off. Repeat page Example: If your club has a meeting which takes place on th e f irst M onday of ev er y mont h, yo u c an set the entr y to recur accordingly by selecting Monthly by day . On this page you can determine wh ether and when you want an en try to be repea ted: Repeat type : The repeat type for the entry. The options are No repeat / D aily/ Work in g day s / W eekly / Monthly by d ay / Mont hly by d ate / Year ly by day / Y early by dat e . Note: Define Repeat type first since the choice of options in the rest of the fields depends on what you have selected. Repeat on days : The days on which the entry is repeated. Use the Arrows key to go to a day you want to select and press Select . You can se le ct mor e than one day at a time. See Figure41. Figure 41 Linda1.book Page 114 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
115 Cale nd ar Repeat on dates : The dates on which the entry is repeated. U se the Arrows key to go to a date you want to s elect and press Select . You can selec t more than one date at a time. See Figure 42. Figure 42 Example: T o d e f i n e a n e n t r y that is repeated Dail y with two days between every repeat, define â ever y 3 da y s â in Repeat inte rval . Repeat interval : The time per iod between r epeats. Repeat indefin itely : Frequency of the r epetition. The option s are Yes / No . Note: It i s still possible to rem ove or edit a single en try even if the entry is repeating. If you e dit an entry and change any options except the repeat options, a selection list appears. You then choose how you want the change to take place from the following options: All oc currences / Only this occu rrence / T his and f uture occur rences / This and p ast occ urrences . Statu s page On this page you can def ine a background colour and status for the entry, as we ll as s p ecif y wh eth e r y o u wan t to s y n chr oni s e t h e e nt r y: Tip: Colour is a handy way to categorise ent ries - you see more easily how your time is reserved. Colour marking : Allows you to define the colour and letter for the entry symbol, which appears after th e text of the en try in all views. When you check your calendar entries in the Weekly time or Year sch e dules, the colour is used for the bar indicating the entry. The letter is used to filter Calendar entries in the Y ear schedule. Linda1.book Page 115 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
116 Cale nd ar Example: If y ou a re not sure if an entry will take pla ce, you can m ark it as Tentative . Tentat ive : Whether an en try is confirmed or not. A tentative entry is indicated with icon next to the entry text. Crossed o ut : Whether an entry has been completed or not. Cr ossing out an entry does not remove it f rom the calendar. Synchro nisation : Whether your calendar entries are shown to others when you connect to the network and synchronise your calendar. The options are Publ ic , Private , an d No synch ronisation . See the PC Suite Guide on the CD- ROM for more information about synchron isation . To edit an entry 1 Se lect the entry in the view. 2 Press Enter. A details dia log for the entr y opens. Edit the details on the variou s pages. You can now, f or example, res et the alarm or redefin e how the entry is repeat ed in the ca lendar. See â To define information in a calendar e ntry â on page 112. To chang e an entry t ype Example: You might have entered an event, but you n o w w a n t t o c h a n g e i t t o a n appointment. 1 Se lect the entry in the view. 2 Press the Menu key and select Entry > Change entry type ⦠. 3 Choose a n ew entry type from the list. Linda1.book Page 116 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
117 Cale nd ar Tip: To ch an ge t he default entry type of a particular view, press the Menu key and select View > View settings ⦠. See Defau lt entry type in âÂÂView settings â on page 12 9. To delete entries You should tidy up your calendar from time to time by deleting entries, sin ce calendar entries accumulate over time and consume memory. Note: You can also back up your calendar data to a compatible PC. See the PC Suite Guide on the sales package CD-ROM f or details. To delete a single entry There are tw o ways to delete a single entry: Tip: The shortcut to delete a single entry is to select it an d press Ctrl D. ⢠Select the entry in the view, then press the backspace key. A note is displayed asking you to confirm the de letion. ⢠Select the entry in the view, press the Menu key, and then select File > Delete entry . To confir m the deletion, pr ess OK . To delete a range of entries using def ined crit eria Tip: Yo u can m ove en tries to another f ile and th e n to a PC to fre e up memo ry . 1 Press the Menu ke y and select Tools > Move/Delete ⦠. A dialog box is displayed with a suggested range of entries t o be deleted. 2 Press OK to delete all the entries defined in the dialog box at step 1, or press Optio ns to define further criteria (including whether you want to â move â or to â deleteâ . A dialog with two pages ope ns. Define the following and press Done to return to the previous dialog. Details page Action : The consequences of rem oving the en tries . Th e options are Delete / Move to a file . Entr ies : The types of entries w hich will be removed. The option s are All / Crossed out . Linda1.book Page 117 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
118 Cale nd ar Time period : The time scope of the removal. The options are Whole calendar / U ntil today / From today / Ot h e r . Start : The start date of the entries to be removed. End : The end date of the entrie s to be removed. Entry types page Choose from the f ollowing options: Appointments / Even ts / A nniversaries / Ta sks . To vi ew, create, and del ete attach ments 1 Open a calendar entry by pr essing Enter. The entry details dialog with four pages opens. 2 Press Attachments . A selection list of attachments linked to the calendar entry opens. 3 To view a selected attachment, press Open . To create a new attachment, press Ne w . To delete an attachment, press Delet e . 4 If you want to add a new attachment , select the type of attach ment and press Ins e r t n e w to create the n ew attac hment or Ins ert exi sti ng to browse for an exi sting att achme nt. Views Tip: You can press the Calendar application button repeatedly to cycle the view. The Calendar consist s of seven views. The purpose of each view is to h elp you organise your calendar so that you manage your time effectively on a daily, weekly, monthly, and yearly basis. Y ou can custom ise the display of each view. Linda1.book Page 118 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
119 Cale nd ar Commands in all view s Tip: In m o st of t he vi ew s you can go to today â s date by pressing the Space key on the keyboard. The following command buttons are av ailable in all of the views: Edit - O pens a selected ca lendar entry for editing. New entry - Enables you to create a new ca lendar entry if there are n o entries for that day. You can also create a new calendar entry by just starting to enter characters on the keyboard, see â To create new calendar entries â on page 112. Change view - O pens a selection list from which you can s witch to any of t he other calendar views. The options are Month / W eek / Day / T ask lists / Weekly time schedule / Yea r s ch edu le / Anniv ersari es. Go to date - Opens a search dial og from which you can, by typin g in the de sired date, switch to any date in the calendar. Enter the date and pr ess OK . Press Today to go to today â s date. Press Browse to browse through th e calendar. Month view Figure 43 Linda1.book Page 119 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
120 Cale nd ar Left frame Tip: To edit an event, the right frame must be active. If you are in the left fra me, go to the de sired date and press th e Enter key. The focus moves to the right frame . One row in the day table equals one week. Abbreviations for the days of the we ek are in the highest row. Today â s date is marked in gr een. Dates that have scheduled ev ents are marked in bo ld and blue. The currently selected date is highlighted. Right frame Tip: To see a list of icons that are displa yed in all views, see page 12 5. The events of the currently selected date are shown in the day details frame on the right. Week view Tip: To change the starting day of the week, press Extras, open the Control panel, and select Regional sett ings . Choose Date page and then First day of the week . Figure 44 Linda1.book Page 120 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
121 Cale nd ar Tip: To move the position of the title box from lef t to right, press the Menu key and select View > View settings ⦠. See T itle loc ation in â View settingsâ on page 129. The week view shows the events for the selected week in se ven day boxes. The coloured indicator ar e a next to a d ay box shows the date and name of the day. Today â s indicator area is framed green. Day view Figure 45 The day view shows the eve nts for the selected d ay. Tip: To change the time period covered in one time slot, press the Menu key and select View > View settings ⦠. See Time slot alloc ation in â View settingsâ on page 129. Events are grouped into one time slot according to their starting time. To view the day view of the previous day, press < on the Arrows key. T o view the next day, press >. Linda1.book Page 121 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
122 Cale nd ar Tip: In day and w eek vi ew s, you can qu ic kl y mo ve to a different date by pressing the Tab key, selecting the desired date with the Arrows key, and pressing E nter. Task lists Figure 46 Tip: To see how to-do task lists are created, see page 126. You can c reate one or s everal business or personal t ask lists which m ay contain tasks with or without deadlines. You can also set an alarm or a repeat for a task. The page number in the upper right corner of the Task list view indicates the position of the task list a mong the other task lists . For example, in Figure 46 , â 1/6â means that there are altogether six task lists and â Urgent ta sk s â is the first list. Tip: To see a list of all task lists, press the Tab key. To view the previous task list, press < on the Arrows key. To view the next task list, press >. Due dates are shown to the right of a task, in brackets. Linda1.book Page 122 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
123 Cale nd ar Weekly time schedule Tip: You c an sel e ct different bar colou rs for different types of entries. See â Status page â on page 115. Figure 47 The weekly time schedule show s the re served hours for the selecte d week. T his means that only timed entries are shown The currently selected time box is framed. Entries ar e m arke d with bars. Example: Use a green bar for hobbies and a red bar for business trips to get a quick overview of your activities during a week. See â View settings â on page 1 29. If a time box contains entries, the bar across the bottom of the weekly time schedule shows the details of th e entry. The numbers to the right of the entry description indicate the number of entries contained in that time box. For example, 1/2 in Figure 47 m eans that you are seeing the details of the first of two entries. If a time box contains more than one entry, you can view a list of the entries by pressing the T ab key. Linda1.book Page 123 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
124 Cale nd ar Year sched ule Figure 48 The year schedule shows th e timetable for the selected year. Only entri es with colours are shown in the year schedule. If there are several colours connected to the day, only one can b e shown. Abbreviations for the days of the we ek are in the highest r ow and the m onths of the year in t he far left column. Time boxes have the same functions as in the Weekly tim e schedule. Anniversaries Figure 49 Linda1.book Page 124 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
125 Cale nd ar Tip: To ch an ge t he number of months shown in the an niversary view, pr ess the Menu key and select View > View settings ⦠. See Months in view in â View settings â on page 1 29. The an niv er sar y view show s the an niv e rsa ries fo r four mo nt h s at a t i me . You ca n add here all the birthdays and other anniversaries that you w ant to be reminded of. Note: Only anniversary entries are shown in th e anniversary view. Icons You can see the f ollowing symbols in Cal endar: - Alarm - Annive rs ar y - Attachment - Even t - Repeating e ntry - Ten t at i v e ent ry - Task - Task, with high importance - Task, with low importance - Untimed entry Linda1.book Page 125 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
126 Cale nd ar Task li sts To create a new task list 1 Press the Menu key and select File > New task list ⦠. A dialog with two pages opens. 2 De fine the task list on the two pages of the dialog. See â Details pageâ and â Visibility pageâ below. 3 When you are ready, press Close . The new task list is added in Task lists. Details page Tip: If you choose to sort a task list man ually, all tasks on the list appear n umbered. You ca n e nt e r a new ta sk entry randomly by f ocusing on a location in the list. You can also change the order of the tasks by cutting and pasting (Ctrl X and Ctr l V). List name : The name of the task list. Posit ion : The position of the task list among the other task lists. Sortin g : How the tasks are sorted h ierarchically in the task list. The options are Manual / Priority th en date / D ate then priority . Visibilit y page Show task s : The view s in which the tasks on the list will be shown. The options are All views / Tas k list view . Task po sition : The position of the tasks in an event list if the tas ks are all shown in All views . To edit a task list 1 O pen the task l ist. 2 Press th e Menu key and select View > Task list s ettings ⦠. A dialog with two pages, Details and Visibility , opens, as explained above. Linda1.book Page 126 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
127 Cale nd ar To delete a task list 1 Open the task list. 2 Press the Menu ke y and select File > Del ete task li st . To search for Calendar entries You can search through the entries for part icular pieces of texts. 1 Press the Menu ke y and select Tools > Find entry ⦠. A search f ield opens. 2 Enter a key word for the entry you want to search f or, or press Options to restrict the search by defining a set of qualifications. A dialog with two pages ope ns. Define the f ollowing: Detail s p a ge Refine search : Defines the s earch. The option s are No / Entries wit h an alar m / Entr ies with rep etition / Cross ed out entries . Time per io d : The time s cope of the sear ch. The options are Whole calend ar / Until today / From today / User defined . From : The starting point of the search. Unt il : The ending point of th e search. Ent ry ty pes pag e Choose the type of entries you want to find. The options a re: Appointments / Event s / Annive rsaries / Tasks . Tip: You ca n st o p a search by pressing Stop . 3 To start s earch ing, press Find . A ch ronological list of th e fin d r esults is shown. See Figure 50. Linda1.book Page 127 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
128 Cale nd ar Figure 50 4 Select an entry and press: ⢠Edit to open the entry details dialog for editing, ⢠Go t o to go to the date or view where the entry is located or, ⢠New find to star t a new search. 5 Press Clos e to return to the currently active view. Sett ings Gene ra l se tt ing s 1 Press the Menu key and select Tools > General set tings ⦠. A dialog opens. 2 De fine the following: Default view : The default view w hen opening either another or a ne w calendar file. Display unt imed entries : The location of untimed appointmen t, event, and anniversary entries in the entry list of all the timed views. 3 Press Done to return to the currently active view. Linda1.book Page 128 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
129 Cale nd ar View settin gs You can defin e the a ppearance of the view a nd default en try types for each view by following these steps: 1 Go to the view you want to define. 2 Press the Menu ke y and select View > View s ettings ⦠. A dialog with two pa ges opens. 3 Define the view settings on the two pages of the dialog. See â Details pageâ and â Entry typesâ below. 4 Press Do ne to return to the currently active view . Note: The contents of the dialog vary in different views. The following is a list of all the possibilities. Details page Default ent ry type : The entry type which is inserted in the view by defau lt when you create a new entry. T he options are Appointment / Event / Anni versary / Tas k . Wrap text : Specif ies whether or not the information in the entry is wrapped when viewed in any of the views. Title l ocat ion : Specifies whether th e title of the we ek is on the lef t or righ t of the display in t he weekly view. Time slo t allocation : The tim e period covered in one tim e slot of the da ily views and weekly time schedules. The options a re 2 hours / 1 hour/ 30 m inutes/ 15 minutes . Day st arts : The time when a day starts in the Daily view. Day ends : The time when a day ends in the Daily view. Linda1.book Page 129 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
130 Cale nd ar Show colour markings : Specifies whether all entry symbols or only sy mbols with t he letter specified in Default colou r are shown in the year view. Default colour : The symbols and background colours of the different entry types in the particular view. Months in view : T he number of month boxes in the anniversary view. Entry types On the Entry types page you can ch oose th e en try types you wan t to appear in th e view you are defining: Appointments / Eve nts / Anniversaries / Tasks . Linda1.book Page 130 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
131 Internet 8. Internet This chapter describes how to get access to the Internet and how to use the Internet applications. When you take your communicator into use, it has the following browser applications: WWW - A World Wide Web (WWW) browser supporting frames, JavaScript, and SSL protocol. Tip: To access WAP services, you need both an Internet access point and a WAP access point. See page 152. WAP - A browser for accessing various types of information, entertainment, and other services in Wireless Application Protocol (WAP) format. WAP is suited to mobile devices with small screen displays and limited amounts of memory. WAP uses mainly text but does support pictures. To connect to the Internet, ⢠the wireless ne twork you use must support data calls, ⢠the data service m ust be activated for your SIM card, ⢠you must have obtained an Internet access point from an Inter net Service Provider (ISP), and ⢠you must have entered the proper Internet settings. Note: The Mail application, described in the Messagin g chapter, also uses an Inte rn et c on nec t io n . Se e â Mailâ on page 170. Your ISP can give you instructions on how to configure the I nternet settings. Follow the instructions carefully. Linda1.book Page 131 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
132 Internet Note: You must have your phone turned on, within network coverage and free of any other voice or data c all to con nect to the Internet. To set up yo ur Intern et acces s point Note: To be able to use the Internet services, you need to configure an Internet connection. Some Internet service providers may offer you the possibility to conf igure your Inter net se tting s by send i n g yo u a sma rt me ss age via SMS. This might redu ce the number of settings you need to enter yourself, or e liminate the need altogeth er. Please contact your Internet Service Provider (ISP) for details. Internet connections To set up and change the Internet settings, go to the Control panel in the Extras application group and open Internet access. For more i nformation, see page 216. Figure 51 The first two lin es contain a summary of the details of th e preferred connection. Define the following: Linda1.book Page 132 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
133 Internet Tip: Yo u may ha ve to set up several I nte rn et connections, dep ending on the sites you want to acc ess. For example, browsing the WWW may require one setup; browsing your company â s intran et may require another connection. Preferred co nnection : The default connection w hich will be used to connect to the Intern et. If idle, stay onlin e : The connection to the Internet will automatically close after the inactivity period defined h ere. The options are For 2 minut es / For 5 minute s/ For 10 minutes /For 60 minut es . IMPO RTA NT : Some Internet conn ections may appear inactive, but th ey may still be sending and receiving data in the background. These connections may delay the start of the inactivity period specified here, and theref ore postpone the closing of the connection. Ask befo re co nnec ting : T he options are Yes / No . If you choose Ye s , a connection dialog appears every time you connect to th e Internet, asking you to either confir m, change, or cancel the connection, or chan ge the Internet access point. If you choose No , the communicator will choose t he default Internet access point. To create a new connection or ed it an existing connection 1 In the Internet connections dialog, press New to create a new conne ction or Edit to edit an existin g connection. Linda1.book Page 133 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
134 Internet Figure 52 2 If you already have connections defined, you can use an exi sting connection as a basis for the new connection. After you have pressed New , press Use existing . Choose the connection you want from the list which appears, and pre ss OK . 3 A dialog on connection details opens. See Figure 53. Note: The exact values for the settin gs are provided by your ISP. Figure 53 4 De fine the following: Tip: All your con nections should have different names. Connection name : Give a descriptive name for the connection. Phone num ber : The mode m telephone number of th e IAP. Linda1.book Page 134 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
135 Internet Tip: Oft en t he mi n imu m requir eme nt for a n In te rnet connection is: Phone number , Use rna me , a nd Passwor d . Password prompt : If you must type in a new password every time you log on to a server, or if you do not wan t to sa ve your pass word, choose Yes . The options are Yes / No . Username : T ype in a user name if r equired by th e Internet Ser vice Provider (ISP ). The us er name may be n eeded to con nect to the Internet, and is usually provided by the ISP. The user name is often case-sensitive. Pass word : Type in a pa ssword if required by the ISP. The password may be needed to connect to the In ternet, and is usually provided by the ISP. The password is often case-sen sitive. Confirm password : C onfirm your password by retypin g it in this field. Press Advan c e d se t ti n gs to define the Advanced settings of the conne ction. A dialog with four pages opens. See Figure 54. Figure 54 Proxies pag e You may want to use a proxy to quicken a ccess to the Internet. Note also that some ISPs require th e use of Web pr oxies. Contact your ISP to determine proxy details. Linda1.book Page 135 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
136 Internet When you have made an Internet connection for your company â s intranet, and you are unable to r etrieve Web pages from the gen eral WWW, you may need to setup a proxy server to r etrieve Web pages outside your company â s int r an e t . Tip: If y ou s et U se proxy serve r to No , Port nu mber , Proxy serv er , and No proxy for are dimmed. Use proxy server : To use the pr oxy server, sele ct Yes . The options a re Yes / No . Use of a proxy ser ver is dependent on the protocol. Port number : The number of the proxy port. The port n umber is related to the protocol. Common values are 8000 and 8080, but vary with proxy server. Example : Example domain na mes ar e: c ompa ny. com and organisation.org. In a list, separate domain names with semicolons. Proxy ser ver : The IP address of the proxy server, or the domain name. No pr oxy for : Define here the domains for w hich the HTTP proxy is n ot needed. Data call page Figure 55 Tip: To divert and bar data calls, go to the Internet application main view, then press Tools > Control panel > Data call b arring . Connect ion type : The options are Normal / High sp eed . Note: To be able to use H igh speed , the network service provider has to support this feature, and if necessary, to activate it for your SIM card. Linda1.book Page 136 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
137 Internet Remote modem type : The options are An alog / V.110 ISDN / V.120 ISDN . This setting can depend on both your GSM network operator and ISP, because some GSM networks do not support cer tain types of ISDN connections. For details, contact your Internet service provider. If ISDN connections are available, they establish connections more quickly than analog methods. Tip: A very bas ic GSM data connection is: Connection type : Normal , Remote modem typ e : Ana log , and Max. connect ion speed : Auto matic . Max. connection speed : The op tions ar e Autom atic / 9600 /14400 /19200 /28800 /38400 / 43200 , de pending on what you h ave chosen in Connection t ype and Remote modem ty pe . This option allows you to limit the maximu m connection speed when H igh speed is used. Higher data rates may cost more, depending on the network s ervice provider. Note: The speeds above are the maximum spe ed at which your connection will operate. During the connection, the operating speed may be less, depending on n etwork conditions. Modem initi alisatio n : Controls your communicator using modem AT commands . If required, enter ch aracters specified by your GSM network service pr ovider or ISP. Callback page Use callb ack : This option allows a ser ver to call you back once you have made the initial call, so you have a connection without paying for the call. Contact your Internet service provider to su bscribe to this service. The options a re Yes / No . Note: Charges may a pply for certain t ypes of r eceived calls, such as roa ming and high speed data calls. Contact your GSM network operator for more information. Linda1.book Page 137 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
138 Internet Callbac k type : The options are Use server number / Us e server number (IET F) / Use number below . Ask your Internet serv ice provider for the correct setting to use. The setting depends on the ser vice provider â s configuration. Callbac k number : Type in your com municator â s data phone number which the dial back server uses. Usually, this number is the data call phone number of your communicator. Other page Figure 56 Allow plain text login : If you select Yes , the password at connection may be sent in clear. The options a re Yes / No . For optimum security, u se option No . Some Internet service provider s require that this setting is Yes . Use PPP com pression : If you select Yes , this option speeds up the dat a transfer, if it is supported by the remote PPP serv e r. The options are Yes / No . If you hav e problems with establishing a connection, try settin g this to No . Contac t your Internet service provider for guidance. Linda1.book Page 138 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
139 Internet Script op tions If you need to define scr ipt options for you r Internet connection, press Scr ipt opt ions on the Other page. A script can automate the con nection between the communicator and the server. See Figure 57. Tip: Your Inte rnet service provider may be able to provide you with a s cript. Note: Scripts are not u sually required when you establish a connection. T o find out wheth er you need a script, contact you r Internet service pr ovider. Figure 57 Tip: Advanced users will find scripting an advantage, where use of scripting is allowed. You can obtain instructions from Forum No ki a at UR L www.forum.n okia.com Press Edit script to edit the s cript. In the Edit script dia log you can press Import script to import a script. On importing, it replaces the curr ent contents of the script file. Define the f ollowing: Use login s cript : The options are Yes / No . Displa y terminal windo w : The options are Yes / No . If you choose Yes , once a connection is established you see the execution of the s cript. Use this window when r esolving connection problems r elated to scripting, with your Internet service provider. Linda1.book Page 139 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
140 Internet Address op tions Tip: There is a glossary con t ai ning In ter net term s and abbreviations a t the back of this user â s guide. Press Address opti ons on the Other page, to define the IP and DNS addresses. See Figure 58. Define the following: Figure 58 Auto retr ieve IP address : If you select Yes , the IP a ddress is obtained automatically from the server. The option s are Yes / No . T his setting is als o called â dynamic IP address â . IP address : The IP address of the communicator. I f the IP address is obtained automatically, then you are not required to en ter details here. Auto retr ieve DNS addres s : If you select Yes , the DNS (Domain Name Server) address is obtained automatica lly from the server. The options are Yes / No . Primary D NS address : The IP address of the primary DNS server . Secondar y DNS addres s : The IP address of the secondary DNS server. Note: If you need to enter the IP address , Primary DNS addr ess , or Secondary DNS address , contact your Internet service provider to obtain these addresses. Linda1.book Page 140 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
141 Internet Tip: When you ar e browsing the WWW, some Web pages may prompt you to save (download) a file to your local disk (your communicator). See the IMPORTANT n ote in this section warning about viruses. To connect to the World Wide Web To connect to t he World Wide Web, ⢠the GSM data s ervice must be activated for your SIM card, and ⢠you must configure an Inte rnet access point. See page 132. Note: Only install software from sources that offer adequate protection against vir uses and othe r ha rmfu l so ftwa re. For information on softwar e installation and security certificat es, see â Certificate manager â on page 222. Tip: To ch an ge t he internet access point press the Menu key in the Internet application group view and select Tool s > Internet access ⦠or go to the Contr ol panel in the Extr as application group an d open Internet access. For more information, see page 133. Figure 59 To open the WWW browser, 1 Press the Interne t application button on the com municator keyboard. 2 Select the W WW application and press Open . ⢠Unless you have already redefined the default homepage, a Nokia 9210i link page opens. This page is located in the m emory of your communicator and does not require an in ternet connection. ⢠If you have redef ined a homepage, a dialog with the Connection name and Phone number of the Internet access point you are using i s displayed. See Figure 60. You can also choose not to see the connection dia log when the Linda1.book Page 141 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
142 Internet connection is made; see â Internet connectionsâ on page 132. To chan ge the Internet access point, press Change conn ecti on . Pr ess OK to establish a connection. Figure 60 Note: In order to free up additional memory for large Web pa ges, all other applications a re closed automatically when the WWW browser is opened. 3 For in formation on opening Web pages and navigating in the We b, see â To open a Web page â on page 142. For information on adding a page to you r bookmark list, see â Bookmarksâ on page 149 4 To close an application, press Close . Tip: An alternative way to disconnect from the Internet is to close the cover and press the key. 5 To disconnect f rom the Intern et, in any of the Internet applications, press the Internet button on the keyboard, th en press Discon ne ct . Disconnection is immediate. Note: Depending on th e network configuration and load, establishing an Internet connection may take a minute or more. To open a Web page There are several ways to ope n a page in the World Wide Web. Linda1.book Page 142 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
143 Internet Example: An example of a URL address is www.nokia.co m 1 If you know the a ddress of the Web page that you want to visit, press Open URL , type the address into the address field, and press OK . Alternatively, select a li nk on your default home page and press Go to Figure 61 Tip: If you have a bookmark of th e page you want to visit, press the Menu key an d select T ools > Bookmarks . Select a bookmark in the Bookmarks list and press Go to . 2 A dialog with th e Connection name and Phon e number of the In ternet access point you are using is displayed. See Figure 60. You can also choose not to see the connection dial og when the connection is ma de; see â Inter net connections â on page 132. To ch ange the Internet access point, press Change connection . Press OK to establish a connection. Note: If the page and its components are encrypted by a security protocol, the security icon appears on the title bar. Note: Some servers have access restrictions that require a valid user nam e and password. In this case, you will be pr ompted for your u ser name and password before the Web page can be retrieved. Linda1.book Page 143 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
144 Internet Tip: To save pa ge elements in your communicator, press the Menu key, select Fil e > Save , and select the appropriate submenu command. To browse the WWW After the Web page has been retrieved, the following commands become available, depending on what is selected on th e page: Open URL - Press to open a dialog where you can define a we b page to open. Go to - When a link is s elected, press Go t o to view the target of the link. Bac k - Allows you to r etrieve the previous page that you have ju st browsed. Bookm ar ks - Open s the Bookmar ks view. Clos e - Closes th e WWW browser application. Linda1.book Page 144 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
145 Internet Tip: To go t o y our ho me page, press the Menu key and select Na vigation > Go to home page . To browse with the keyboard The best way to browse a page and the WWW is to use both the keyboard shortcuts and the pointer. You can use the Tab key and some othe r keys to select elements on a page or the pointer as a mouse to select elements directly. The following table lists useful keyboard s hortcuts of the W WW application. Y ou can f ind more shortcuts in the application next to me nu commands. Key Function Enter Tab Shift Tab A Q S W D E Ctrl Tab Clicks with the poin ter Selects the n ext box, button or othe r form element. Selects the previous form element on a page Selects the next link on a page Selects the previous link on a page Selects the next heading on a page Selects the previous heading on a page Selects the next element on a page Selects the previous element on a page Selects the next frame, if available. Chr up/ d own ar row (on Arr o ws key) Ctrl left/right arrow (on A rrows key) Ctrl up/ d o wn arro w (o n Ar row s ke y) Scrolls the pa ge screen by screen Scrolls to th e start or to the end of the page Scrolls the page line by line X Z Moves to the next page, if already visited Moves to the previous page, if already visited Shift Enter G Displays Save as comman d, if an image is selected or Show URL command, if a link is sele cted. Toggles the loading of im ages on or off. Linda1.book Page 145 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
146 Internet To browse with the pointer You can see the pointer on the screen when you open a web page. The functionality of the pointer is similar to a mouse, but you move it with the Arrows key and click it by pressing the Enter key. To select an area, keep Enter pressed down and move the pointer over the area with the Arrows key. To scroll a page, you have several options: ⢠Move the pointer onto the scr oll bar, pr ess Enter and keep it pressed down as long as necessary. Tip: Press Ctrl Tab to change the active frame. ⢠Move the pointer onto the scroll bar and press the space key to turn on continuous scrolling. The page scrolls and the scroll box m oves to the direction of the pointer whenever the pointer is in the scrolling area. Press the space key again to turn off continuous scroll ing. ⢠Move the pointer over the edge of the window to th e dire ction where you want to scroll the page to scroll the page automatically. Tip: Useful shortcu ts are: Ct rl R for Reload , an d Ctrl Z for Sto p loading . Loading option s Depending on the number and siz e of images and oth er elements some web pages may be slow to load. T o control loading you have the follo wing options: ⢠Re load the page or stop l oading altogether; press the Menu key and select Navigati on > Reload > Reloa d or Sto p . ⢠Turn off the auto-loading of images. The images are then replaced by placeholders. Press the Menu key and s elect Tools > Settings ⦠, go to the General page and in the Show images field select No . ⢠Toggle the loading of images on and off by pressing the G ke y. Linda1.book Page 146 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
147 Internet To change frame sizes Tip: To change th e active frame when a W eb page conta ins fr am es , pre ss Ctr l T ab. Where a Web page contains frames, you can change the frame sizes of the page, to get a better view of the con tents of the selected frame. 1 Move the pointer cu rsor over a fr ame border. 2 Press and hold down the Enter key. Arrows are displayed around the selected frame b or d e r 3 Use th e Arrows key to resize the f rame. 4 To cancel the previous move, press Esc. To open a frame as a new page To open the currently active frame as a new page an d discard the other frames, press the Menu key and select File > Open > Frame as new pag e To view pa ges offline To view local downloaded pages on your communicator with out accessing the WWW, press the Menu key and select File > Br ows e Of fl in e WWW settings To change the WWW settings, press the Menu key and select Tools > Settings ⦠. A dialog with two pages opens . See Figure 62. Linda1.book Page 147 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
148 Internet Figure 62 General p age Show images : The options are Yes / No . If yo u sel ect Yes the WWW browser loads all the pictures on a Web page w hen it displays the W eb page. Frames opti ons : T he options are Show all frames / Show fram es one by one / D o not use frames . Some Web pages are split in to several frames, which makes reading difficult, so choose an option wh ich suits you. Advanced p age Use cook ies : Some Web pages store data on your com municator in files called â cookiesâ . Use this setting to dete rmine whether to accept cookies, and if you accept them, whether you wish to be prompted each time a cookie is stored. The optio ns are Always / Never / Ask . Tip: To empty the cache immediately, press the Menu key and select To ols > Clear cache . Empty cache on exit : If you select Yes , the cache memory is emptied when you exit the WWW browser. T he options are Yes / No . Linda1.book Page 148 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
149 Internet Note The information or services you have accessed ar e stored in th e cach e of your phone. A cache is a buffer memory, which is used to store data temporarily. If you have tried to access or have accessed confidential information requiring passwords (f or example, your bank account), empty the cache of your phone after each use. Empty his tory list on exit : If y ou sel e ct Yes , the history lis t is em ptied when y ou exit the WWW browser. The options a re Yes / No . Cache, History, and Pl ug-ins view These views display a list of information on cache mem ory, browser history and installed plug-ins. To view information a bout the cache m emory used for temporary storage of th e pages you visit, press the Menu key and select Info rmatio n > Cache . To view information about the sites you have visited, press the Menu key and select Information > Hi story lis t . To view what add-on software for the WW W browser has been installed, press the Menu key and select Inform ation > Plug -i ns . Plu g-ins can display documents that the WWW browser itself cannot show, such as multimedia clips. You c an download plug-ins from the W WW. Bookmarks The Bookmarks view can be accessed by pressing Bookmarks in the main view of the WWW application. See Figure 61. Linda1.book Page 149 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
150 Internet The Bookmarks view lists lin ks to WWW pages in related folders. You c an organise, edit, and view these bookmarks. You can also search for them and then connect to the URL addresses dire ctly. See Figure 63 . Figure 63 Tip: To creat e a nd rename folders, press the Menu key and s elect Bookmarks > Insert new folder or Rename folder . To retrieve the cu rrently highlighted Web pa ge, press Go to . To open and close folders, press Op en fold er and Clos e fold er . To edit the na me or address of a bookmark, press Edit . To add a n ew bookmark, press New book m ar k . To retur n to the main view, press Close view . To add a new bookmark wh ile browsing t he WWW You can add a Web page, or a frame or link on a Web page, as a bookmark to your Bookmarks list. 1 On an open Web page, press the Menu key and select Tools > Add book mark . 2 Edit the n ame and address of the bookmark, if necessary. 3 Press OK . Linda1.book Page 150 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
151 Internet To export the Bookmark s list In the Bookmarks view, press the Menu key and select Bookmarks > Expor t as HTM L. to export the current B ookmarks list as a HTML document. Note: When you export bookm arks as HTML, t he folder structure is lost. WAP The WAP application can be u sed to access Internet services which are based on the Wireless Application Protocol (WAP). These services can contain news, weather reports, flight times, dictionaries, and so on. Note: The content of each service depends on the content provider of that service. To use such a service, follow the instruction s provided by the content provider. To obt ain access to WAP services ⢠you must be within t he coverage of a n etwork which su pports data ca lls, ⢠a data service must be activated for your SIM card, ⢠you must have obtained a WAP access point from a WAP service p rovider, and ⢠you must have en tered the proper WAP settings. Differences between th e WWW and WAP servic es applicatio ns The WAP application is similar to the WWW application, but there are two differences: Linda1.book Page 151 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
152 Internet ⢠To access WAP services you need to define WAP access points in your communicator. WAP access points are additional to the In ternet settings. You can receive WAP access points dir ectly via a short message from your WAP service provider, or define them manually. This chapter contains instruction s for manu al se tup. ⢠Certain bookmarks can be accessed th rough a specific ac cess point, for example, banking services may have to be accessed through the bank â s o w n access point. T he easiest way to use these kin ds of services is to define an altogether new bookm ark which uses the cor rect WAP and I nternet access point. To set up WAP co nn ect ions Note: Before you can u se the WAP services, you need to configure your WAP settings. Your WAP ser vice provider will pr ovide you with th e exact values for the WAP settings. Follow the instructions carefully. Y ou can use this information to define and edi t the settings manually. Furthermore, your service provider may be able to send some, or all, of the required settings to you via a special short mess age, an Over T he Air (OTA) message . Afte r you have re cei ved the set tings , you can st art usi ng the WAP application or edit the setti ngs as described below. To defin e and edit WAP co nnec tions 1 Press the Menu key and select Tools > WAP access . A dialog opens. 2 Press New to create a new connection , and Edit to edit an existing con n ection. A dialog opens. See Figure 64. Linda1.book Page 152 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
153 Internet Figure 64 3 Press Cl ose wh en you ar e re ady . Tip: The shortcut to define and edit WAP access points is Ctrl Shift X. Name : Name of the connection. All you r connections should have different name s. You can de f i ne ea c h na me fr ee ly. Secure co nnection : Whether the security protocol T LS is used for the connection. The options are Yes / No . Follow the instructions given to you by your WAP service provider. See also Glossary term â Transport Layer Security â on page 272. Note: Some secure connections u se authentication procedures. If authentication fails, you may need to download some certif ication keys. Contact your WAP s ervice provider for det ails. Internet access : Choose from a selection list the IAP you wish to use for thi s connection. If you h ave no IAPs, you create a new one by pressing New Interne t access . See page 133. Gateway IP add ress : The IP address that the required WAP gateway uses. To change WAP access poin ts 1 To change WAP access points, press the Menu key and select Tools > W AP access . A dialog opens. Linda1.book Page 153 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
154 Internet 2 Press Change to change the connection. A list opens. 3 Choose th e connection from th e list and press OK . Bookmarks The Bookmarks view is the m ain view of th e WAP application. You can organise, edit, and view th ese bookmarks in the same w ay as WWW bookmarks, see page 149. Tip: The shortcut to add a bookmark is Ctrl B. To add a bookmark, press the Menu key, then select Bookmarks > A dd boo kmark . A dialog opens. See Figu re 65. Figure 65 Note: A bookmark always us es the same connection defined in the WAP ac cess field. To set up a WAP access point, see page 152. To open a WAP page defined in a bookmark, select the bookmark, then press Go to . To edit bookmark settings, select the bookmark, the n press Ed it . To import or export bookmarks, press the Men u key, then select Bookmarks > Import bookmar ks or E xport bookm arks , respectively. Linda1.book Page 154 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
155 Internet To na vi gat e WAP s e r vic e s There a re thre e ways to open a WA P page, eith er: ⢠Choose a WAP bookmark from the list of bookm arks and press Go to . The page is retrieved; or Tip: The shortcut to go to the home page is Ctrl H . ⢠Go to the WAP application home page. Pr ess the Menu key, then select Go t o > Home pag e . For more information on de fining the WAP h ome page, see â WAP settings â on page 1 55; or Tip: The shortcut to open a URL is Ctrl O. ⢠Open a URL; pres s the Menu key, then select File > Open page . A dialog open s. Enter the ad dress of the URL, for example : mobile.club .nokia.com . Once the WAP page is open ed, use the ⧠an d ⨠arrows on th e Arrows key to scroll the view and to choose hyperlinks and hotspots. Note: Some servers have access restrictions that require a valid user nam e and password. In this case, you will be asked to type in the u ser name and password before a connection to th e service can be e stablished. WAP settings To define WAP ser vice settings, press the Menu key and select To ols > Settings . A dialog with two pages opens. Linda1.book Page 155 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
156 Internet Figure 66 Here you can change settings such as your WAP home page. NOTE: You can use a file on the communicator as your home page. Java The Java in the N okia 9210i Communicator is a Per sonal Java application environment designed especially for the communicator. Java en ables you to use Java applications down loaded from the Inter net. Java Software Development Kit (SDK) is available in Forum Nokia . Internet.doc Page 156 Tuesday, April 16, 2002 6:38 PM
157 Messaging 9. Messaging Messaging contains the following applications: Fax, Mail and SMS (Short Message Service). To start Messaging, press the M essaging application button on the communicator keyboard. The overall requirements f or using fax, mail and SMS, applications are as follows: ⢠The ph one must be tu rned on. ⢠The network you are using m ust support fax calls, data calls, and the Short Message Service. ⢠The fax, data and Short Message Service must be activated for your SI M card. Tip: To set Internet settings, see page 132. To set Mail settings, see page 170. ⢠You must have obtained an Internet Access Point (IAP) f rom an Internet service provider. ⢠You must have entered the proper Internet an d Mail settings ⢠The short message centre n umber must be stored in the settings of the SMS application. Contact your home se rvice provider for details. When you connect your communicator to a PC, you can synchronise your e-mails with Microsoft Windows programs. You can also reply to and read remotely Microsoft Windows and Lotus e-mail. For in formation on synchronisation, see â Mail synchronisation with your PC â on page 182 and th e PC Suite Guide. Linda1.book Page 157 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
158 Messaging Messaging cen tre Figure 67 Tip: You can move between the two frames with the Arrows or Tab k ey. The main view of Messaging h as two frames: on the le ft is a list of the folders in the Messaging centre, and on the right are the m essages con nected to the currently selected folder. Folders in the Messaging m ain view are: Inbox - Received faxes and short messages. Received mail appear s in the Rem ote mailbox folder. Outbox - Messages wh ich are wai ting to be sent f rom the communicator. Drafts - Saved message drafts. Sent - Mess a g es whi c h ha v e be en se nt fr om t he c o mm uni cat o r . Any remote mailboxes that you set up appear at the bottom of the folder list. To open folders and messages To open a folder, select the left frame in the main view of Messaging, go t o the folder and press Open fold er . Linda1.book Page 158 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
159 Messaging Tip: You can al so press Enter to open mess ages and folders. To open a message, in the m essage list of t he main view, go to the message and press Open . The message opens in th e appropriate viewer, for example, a mail messag e opens in the m ail viewe r. To manage folders You can create your own folders in Drafts , in your own folders and in the root of the folder list. Y ou cannot create new f olders in Inbox , Outbox or Sent . Tip: You can cr ea t e folders to I MAP4 remote mailboxes w hen online. 1 Select the left frame in the main v iew of the Messaging. 2 Press the Menu ke y and select File > Fo lder > Create new folder ⦠. 3 Type a name for the new folder. 4 Select wher e you want to create the folder. 5 Press Cr eate . The new folder appears on the folder list. To move faxes, mail and short m essages from one folder to another, select the file, press the Menu key and select Edi t > Mov e . To search faxes, mail and short m essages for names, dates, time, or any other pieces of text press the Menu key and select Tool s > Fin d ⦠. For fu rt her d etai ls , see â To sea rch for textâ on page 29. To sort messages and faxes You can also sort faxes, mail and short messages by various cr iteria, such as da te and size, which affects the w ay they appear in the dif ferent views of Messaging. Linda1.book Page 159 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
160 Messaging Tip: To choose the sorti ng order, press the Men u key and select Vie w > Sorting order . Choose betwee n Ascendin g and Desc en din g . 1 O pen the fol der where you want to sort the messages and faxes . 2 Press the Menu key and select Vie w > Sort by . 3 Choose f rom the followin g options: Mess age type / Sender/Recipient/ Subjec t/ Date/ Size / Prior ity . Inbox Figure 68 Tip: To reply to a message in the Inbox , press the Menu key and select Write > Reply . Unread messa ges appear in bold. The icons in f ront of messages indicate message type, priority a nd possible attachments. Here are some of the icons that you may see: new mail in remote m ailbox new f ax new short message (SMS) new voice mail messa ge new message from your network service provider new bu siness card new calendar invitation Linda1.book Page 160 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
161 Messaging new ringing tone new remote configuration data unread ma il unread mail received f rom PC by synchronisation priority high priority low message contain s an attachm ent Out box Tip: You can se nd faxes , mail and s hort messages immediately, at a predefined time or upon request, depending on a de livery setting. Se e Sending opti ons in the corresponding editors. Figure 69 Status es Faxes, mail and short me ssages waiting to be sent from the communicator can have the following statuses in Outbox: Sending - The fax or short message is curr ently being sent. Upon requ est - The m ail, fax, or sh ort message will be sent only if you specif ically press Send now in the Outbox view. Linda1.book Page 161 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
162 Messaging Waiting - The fax or short message is queuing to be sent and will be sent as soon as possible, for example, when the phone is switched on, sign al strength becomes adequate, or the previous phone call ends. In the case of mai l messages, Waiting shows that the me ssage will be sent the next time you conn ect to your remote mailbox. Calling ⦠- Outbox is calling t he recipient of the fax message. Preparing... - Outbox is rendering a T.4 format fax image; this means that colour is converted to black and white. Failed - One or more pages of a f ax or short message f ailed to be sent. Tip: If the s tatus of a fax, mail or short message is Suspended , Resend or Scheduled , you can open and delete it, or resume sending. Suspended -You have suspended the sending of the message or fax. You can resu me the sending of a message by pr essing Send now in the Outbox view. Resend - The fax or short message failed to be sent but th e communicator will retry to send it. Schedu led - The fax or short message is scheduled to be sent at a specif ic time. To cancel the sending of a fax, mail or s hort message, select it and press Can cel sen din g . When a message or f ax has been succ essfully sent, it is a utomatically moved to t he Sent folder. To wri te and send faxe s, mail and short messages There a re two wa ys you can start creating faxes, mail an d short mes sages in th e Messaging application: Linda1.book Page 162 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
163 Messaging Tip: If you are already writing a message or fax an d want to start on a new message, press the Menu key and select File > New short m essage or New fax . ⢠Press any of th e following commands in the main view of Messaging: Write fax , Write mail or Write short me ssage . ⢠Press the Menu key in the main view of Messaging a nd select Write > Ne w mes sa ge ⦠. Th en select the appropriate message type. You can als o send faxes, mail and short m e ssages in all the applications where you can find the option File > Send af ter pressing the M enu key. Tip: When y o u st a rt writing a new fax, mail or short message, a temporary copy of it is automatically stored in the Dr afts folder. It is removed from Dr afts and placed in Outbox once you press Sen d . If you want to save, bu t not send a fax, mail or short message you have just written in the corresponding editor, press Close . The message is saved in the Drafts folder. The saved message replaces the previously saved version of the same message. To revert back to the previously saved version of the mail or fax, press the Menu key and select File > Discard c hanges . N ote that th is is not possible with sh ort messages. To sel ect reci pien ts There are two ways to sele ct recipients to your f ax, mail and short messages: Note: A fax can have only one recipient. 1 Press Re cipient in t he corresponding mess age editor. A dialog lis ting your contacts opens, see figure 70. Figure 70 Linda1.book Page 163 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
164 Messaging Tip: You can se lect more than one contac t at a tim e, see â To select several item s at once â on page 25. 2 Search for a contact or contacts in the left frame and press Select . The right frame shows the contacts you have already selected; to remove a contact, select it and press Remov e . 3 Press Done . You can also just type i n the first letter s or the wh ole name of the recipient into the header of the f ax, mail or short message an d check if the letter s or name match an entry in your contacts database: 1 Ty pe in the name of the recipient into the header of the message. 2 Press the Menu key and select Tools > Check names . Tip: In t he case of m ail, you need to select the contacts to the appr opriate fields in the d ialog by pressing To , Cc or Bcc . 3 If the name you have entered matches to m ore than one name, or if th e person has more than one GSM phone number, f ax number or mail address, a selection list appears. Select the corre ct name, phone number, or address from the li st and press Select . Checked recipients are mo ved to separa te lines in the head er of the me ssage. Note that a fax can have only one recipient. 4 To add another recipient to a mail or short message, press Enter after a checked recipient or in sert the se micolon â ;â as a separato r. To delete a ch ecked recipient, move th e cursor to the en d of the entry and press backspace. To avoid low mem ory You should regularly del ete messages from Inbox and Sent folders and delete retrieved mail from the com municator memory to free up m emory space. Linda1.book Page 164 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
165 Messaging WARNING! If you do not use this method to delete mail messages from your communicator, the messages you de lete from your communicator may also be permanentl y deleted from you r remote ma ilbox the next time when you go online. Tip: Use a PC mail client to move mail m essages from your remote inbox to other folders f or archiving. If you keep the n umber of message s in t he remote inbox to a min imu m, your communicator has more available memory and the mail connection is f aster. To delete dowloaded mail messa ges from the communicator: 1 Press the Menu key in the main view of Messaging a nd select Tool s > Mess age st or age ⦠. A dialog with two pages opens. 2 On th e Communicator page you can choose to delete all mail messages or messages older than a given time period. To delete selected messages, press Delet e now . Messages are deleted from your communicator â s memor y, but t hey are not del eted from your remote mailbox. On th e Memory page, you can delete or move messa ges from th e current store. To change the stor e in us e, press Change . To m ove the mes sage st orage fr om communicator â s memory to a memory card or vice ver s a, press Move . To delete all the messages in the selected m essage stor age, press Delet e . Tip: See â Mail attachments â on page 180 to delete attachments from received mail messages. WARNING: De le tin g the mess age s torag e de le tes p ermanent ly all messages and mailbox folders and restores all messaging settin gs to facto ry defaul ts. Note: If you create a new me ssage stor e to a mem ory card and rem ove the car d a new storage must then be created in the internal memory when new messages are received. This leads to a situation where you cannot move messages from one memory storage to another, since only one messa ge store at a time can be in use. Linda1.book Page 165 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
166 Messaging Fax Tip: For m ore advanced word processing, u se Word Processor instead of the f ax editor. You can write and send fa xes in th e fax edi tor. You can write documents in the Word Process or or Sheet applications and then send them as faxes. It is also possible to sen d faxes with e mbedded images. For details on images, s ee â Imagingâ on page 231. To write and send a new fax 1 Press Write fax in the main view of Messaging. T he fax editor ope ns, see f igure 71. Tip: You can zoom in the fax editor. Press the Menu key and select View > Zoom > Zoom in or Zo om out Figure 71 Tip: To select a recipient, see details on page 1 63. 2 W rite the fax. To form at the text, pres s the Menu key and s elect Format . 3 Press Recip ient to select the recipient. A fax can have only one recipient. Tip: To define a specific date and time w hen th e fa x will be sent, select S ch edu led in t he Send fax option. 4 If you wish to adjust the sending options of the fax, press Send ing op ti ons . For details, see Fax settings on page 169. 5 Press Send . Note: Voice calls are not possible when a fax is being sen t or received. Linda1.book Page 166 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
167 Messaging Fax cover page Tip: To define th e default format of the he ader in your faxes, and if you want a cover template to be attached to the faxes, see â Fax settingsâ on page 169. You can a ttach a cover page to the f ax you are currently creating or editing. 1 Press Send i ng optio ns an d then select Fax cove r page . 2 Choose one of the following options: None : The header of the fax wi ll have only the To: and Fax num ber: f ields. Header : The h eader of the fax will have information about the s ender and recipient of th e fax, and the date of the fax. Template 1 : The header field of the fax w ill have infor mation about the sender and recipient of the f ax and a separate Remarks: field. Full templat e : The header field of the fax will have more information about the sender and recipient of the fax, the date of the fax and a separate Remarks: field. You can save and use customised cover templates in the Templates folder using File manager; for more in formation see page 204. W hatever cover template you use, the ava ilable recipient information is f illed in automa tically. To receive and r ead faxes Tip: To forw ard a rece ived fax, pres s the Me nu key a nd select File > Fo rward . Faxes are received automatically, provided that this s ervice is available a nd that the phone is turned on and within network coverage. When a new fax is recei ved , you hear a tone - unless the syst em is set to a silent profile - and an infor mation note is shown on the display. Tip: You can zoom and rotate in the fax viewer. Each press of Rotat e rotates the fa x 90 degrees clockwise. Press Open to view the f ax. To open a fax r eceived earlier, go to the Inbox, select the fax and press Open . Note: If a f ax is not received completely due to some failure, it is named Incomplete fax . Linda1.book Page 167 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
168 Messaging To select and save all or part of a r eceived fax You can select all or part of a fax and save it in another format for further editing. To select an area of a fax page 1 Press the Menu key in t he fax viewer and select Tools > Selection f rame . A selection frame appears in th e fax viewer. 2 Use the arrows key to move the selection frame to the upper -left corner of the area y o u wa nt to se lec t. 3 To change the size of the selection frame, press an d hold the Ctrl key and press the arrows key. To cancel the selection, press the Menu key and select Tools > Selection fra me again, or just press Esc key. To save fax in another format 1 Press the Menu key in the fax viewer and select File > Expor t ⦠. Select the range to be e xported. The options are W hole docum ent / Current page / S elected / User defined . Press OK . A dialog opens. 2 Spe cify the name and location of the new document. To change the format of the new document, press Change format . 3 Press OK to save th e exported fax f ile. Fax polling You can re trieve faxes from a remote fax box by using Fax polling, if available in the network. It allows you to make a fax call to a f ax machine and then receive information by f ax. Linda1.book Page 168 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
169 Messaging To retrieve faxes from a re mote fax box 1 Press the Menu key in the main view of Messaging a nd select Rec eive > Fa x > Dial fax poll . 2 Type in the fax number for the re mote fax box, or choose the number by pressing Reci pient . 3 Press Call to call the number. Fax settings Any changes you make to fax settings affect the way in which your faxes are sent and received. 1 Press the Menu key in the main view of Messaging a nd select Tool s > Account settings ⦠. 2 Select Fax and press Edit . A dialog with two pages opens. Define the following: Settings pa ge Fax cover pa ge : Defines whether or not a cover page will be used. The options are None / Header / Template 1 / Full templ ate - In addition to th e options above, the option list may contain other cover templates saved in the Templates folder. Send fax : Defines when the fax will be sent. The options a re Immedia tely / Upon request . Advanced pag e Resolutio n : The resolution of the sent and received faxes. The options ar e High / Standar d . Linda1.book Page 169 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
170 Messaging ECM : Defines whether or not the Error Correction Mode is used when faxes are sent. If set to On , any pa ges contain ing errors ar e au tomatically r etur ned to sender, until the de fects are corrected. The option s are On /Off . Resend : Defines which pages will be sent again if the f ax sending has failed. The options are All pages / Mi ssed pages. Mail The Nokia 9210i Com municator mail system is compliant with Internet standards SMTP, IMAP4 (rev 1 ) and POP3. To be able to r eceive and send m ail, you need to have set up a remote mailbox service. This service m ay be offer ed by an Inter net service provider, a network service provider, or your com pany. Tip: If y ou pr ess Write mail in the m ain vi ew of Mes sagi ng an d you hav e not set up your mail account, you will be prompted to do so. Before you can sen d, receive, r etrieve, reply to, and for ward mail on your communicator, you must do the following: ⢠You must configure an Internet access point (IAP) correctly. See â To set up your Internet access point â on page 132 ⢠Y o u mu st de fi ne yo ur Mai l se tt i ng s cor re c tl y. See â Mail settingsâ on page 170. Note: Follow the in structions given by your remote mailbox and In ternet service providers. Mail sett ings Any changes you make to mail settings affect the way your mail is sent and received. Linda1.book Page 170 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
171 Messaging To connect to your remote mailbox, you need to define a mail account on your communicator: 1 Press the Menu key in the main view of the Messaging centre and select Tools > Account settings ⦠. 2 Press Cr eate new . A selection list of possible account types opens. 3 Select Mail and press OK . A dialog with four pages op ens. See figure 72 Figure 72 4 Define the f ollowing: Gener al page Mail accou nt name : The name of the remote mailbox. You can type here any name to describe the ma ilbox. My name : Type in your name. Username : T y pe in your user name. Pass word : Type in your password. If you leave this field blank, you will be prompted for a password when you try to read mail in your remote mailbox. My mail a ddress : Type in the mail address given to you by your service provider.The address mu st contai n the â @â charac ter. Replies to your message s are sent to this address. Linda1.book Page 171 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
172 Messaging Internet access : The IAP con nection used for the mailbox. Ch oose an IAP from th e list. T o create an IAP, see â To set up you r Internet access point â on page 132. Default ac count : Choose a mail account from the list. When you set up an accou nt for the first time, it w ill be the def ault until more accounts are created . Servers page Tip: Outgoing mail servers are typically called SMTP server s or hosts and incoming mailservers ar e called POP3 or I MAP4 servers . Mail acco unt type : Defines the mail protocol your remote mailbox service provider recommends. The options a re PO P3 and IMAP4 . Outgoin g mail server : The I P address or host name of the comp uter that se nds your Intern et m ail. Incoming ma il server : The IP address or host name of the computer that receives your In ternet mail. Retrieve Tip: If you prefer reading your mail messa ges and replying to them while connected to your re mote mailbox, select Mail header s (s tay on line ) . If you pr ef er to retrieve the messages and disconnect, select Mes sa ges . Retrieve : Specifies what will be retrieved from the remote mailbox when the connection is established. The option s are Mail hea ders (sta y online) / Messa ges / Mess ages and attach ments . The Me ssages option is avail able only if the mailbox type is IMAP4. Max. size of mail : The maximum size of a message which is retrieved. The minimum is 1 KB and maxi m um 1000 KB. Sync. mails in Inbox : Specifies the number of message headers to be retrieved from Inbox of th e remote m ailbox. The option s are All / None or you can de fine the appropriate number of messages to be retrieved. Linda1.book Page 172 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
173 Messaging Sync. mails in folders : Specifies the number of message headers to be r etrieved from the folders of the re mote mailbox excluding Inbox. The options are All / None or you can de fine the appropriate number of messages to be retrieved. Advanced pag e Default mai l type : The type of mail that you can wr ite and send f rom your communicator. The options are Plain text (no MIME ) / Plain text/ Fo rmatte d tex t (HT ML ) . Send mail : How mail is sent from you r communicator. The options are Immediat ely / During next connection / Upon request . Include signat ure : Specifies whether your signature is attached to sent mail. The options are No / Use my contact ca rd / Custom . If you choose Custom , you can press Edit signature to modify the signature file. Request read r eport : The options are Yes / No . If you choose Yes , you will r eceive a notification when th e recipient has opened your mail. Yo u can only receive a notification if the recipient â s e-mail application supports this feat ure . Allow repor t requests : The options are Yes / No . If you choose No the sender of a message you receive will not get a notification, wh en you open the mess age. Copy to my mai l address : The options are Ye s / No . Secure log in (APOP) : Used with POP3 protocol to encrypt the sending of passwords to a remote mail server. The options are Yes / No . Secure co nnection (TLS) : Used with P OP3, IMAP4 and SMTP protocols to secure the connection to a remote mailbox . The options are Yes / No . Linda1.book Page 173 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
174 Messaging IMAP4 fold er path : Define the location of the IMAP mail folder here, if no t defined automatically. This option is available only if the mailbox type is IMAP4. To edit an acc o unt 1 Press the Menu key in t he main view of M essaging a nd select Tools > A ccount settings ⦠. A list of accounts opens. 2 Se lect the account you want to edit an d press Edit . 3 De fine the settings on the Genera l , Se rve r s , Retrieve and Advanc ed pages explained above. 4 Press the Esc key to discard any changes. Press Done to accept the ch anges you have made. Note: You cannot edit mailbox settings when online. To write and send new mail Tip: If yo u ca nnot se nd mail from you r communicator, check first that your mail address is correct in Mail settings. See page 171. 1 Press Write mail in the main vie w of Messaging. The m ail editor opens, see figure 73. Figure 73 Tip: To see h ow to select recipients, see page 1 63. 2 Write the mail message. Linda1.book Page 174 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
175 Messaging 3 Press Re cipien t to select the recipient or recipients of the m essage, or type in the name or mail address into the To: , Cc: an d Bcc: fields. You can move from one insertion f ield to another by pressing the Tab key. 4 If you wish to adjust the sending options of th e mail message, pre ss Sending opti ons . A dialog with two pages opens, see page 176. 5 Press Send . Tip: You can zoom in the mail editor. Note: You cannot enter accented characters, such as é or ä , into mail addresses. Recipie nts There are thre e hierarchy levels of r ecipients in a mail message: Tip: To hide or show Cc: and Bcc: fields in the mail editor, press the Menu key and select View > Show Cc fiel d or Show Bcc f ield . To: - Message is sen t directly to the recipie nt. Cc: - A copy of the message is sent to the recipient, and the r ecipient â s na me is visible to other recipients of the message. Bcc: - A copy of th e message is s ent to the r ecipient, but the recipient â s name is not visible to othe r recipients of the m essage. Note: The addresses you have en tered are checked against your contacts database once you press Send . Nam e s whi ch do no t ma tc h w ith t he contacts database, or addresses which do not have â @â , should be removed from th e address fields. If a name you have entered in one of the address fields matches a group n ame, the name is replaced with the mail address es of the group members. Style o f sent mail You can format only HTML messages. Press the Menu ke y and select Format > Form atting . This opens the following options for formatting: Bold , Italic , Under line and Bullets . Linda1.book Page 175 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
176 Messaging Tip: To format the fo n t for a s elected text area, press the Menu key and select Form at > Font ⦠. To set a preferred f ont for plain text an d HTML mail, press the Menu key and select Tools > Preferences ⦠. To align a mail message, pres s the Menu key and select For mat > Alignment . This opens the following options: Left , Centre and Rig ht . Sending opti ons Tip: In the ca se of PC mail message (see page 182), Prior ity and Mail acco un t in use are the only options you can change. The options in the Sending optio ns dialog contain values set in m ail settings, as explained on page 170. Press Sending option s to open the dialog. Any changes you make in this dialog affect only the cu rrent mail message you are about to send. Note: Changing the options in the Se nding options dialog affects th e format of the message when it is opened by the recipient. For example, the format may affect th e legibility of the ch aracters. Message page Priorit y : The priority of a message. The options ar e High / Normal / Low . Message t ype : The type of the message. T he options are Plain text (no MIME ) / P lain text / Formatted text ( HTML) . Request read r eport : Specifies whether to add to the outgoing m ail, a request for you to receive notification , if the recipien t has opened your mail. Delivery pag e Mail acco unt in us e : The remote mail ser vice which is used for sending this messa ge. Note: Changing the mail account does not change the default options in other fields of this page. Linda1.book Page 176 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
177 Messaging Send mail : When the message will be s ent. The options ar e Immediately / Upon request / Dur ing next connection . To retrieve mail Tip: Delete mail regularly from your commu n icator to free u p mem ory spac e. For more information, see â To avoid low memo ry â on page 164. Mail addressed to you is not automatically received by you r communicator, but by your remote ma ilbox. To read your m ail, you must f irst connect to the remote mailbox and then select th e messages you wish to retrieve into your communicator. Connection to a r emote mailbox is established via a data call. WARNING! Messages that you mark as deleted when offline will also be del eted f rom the remot e mail box ser ver, wh en onl ine. To de lete local mail messages without dele ting remote mailbox file s, see â To avoid low memory â on page 164. To connect to a remote mailbox 1 Select the r emote mailbox in the left fr ame of the main view of Messaging. Tip: If you do n ot specify a password when initially connecting to the remote mailbox, a dialog opens. Type in the password and press OK . 2 Press Retrieve mail . 3 When the connection to the remote m ailbox has been established, press the Menu key and s elect Retrieve > New or Selected or All m ail. 4 When all the mail you have requested is r etrieved, press Go off line . Note: Pressing Go offlin e does not necessarily disconnect the phone, if there are other applications open that use th e connection. Press the Menu key and select File > Disc onnect to hang up. Linda1.book Page 177 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
178 Messaging To subscribe and un subscribe to remote mailbox fol ders If your remote mailbox is of IMAP4 standard, you can edit and synchronise remote inbox folders in your communicator. To do this, you need to subscribe to the folders and make them visible in your communicator. Tip: To create new folders in your remote mailbox, go online, press the Menu key and select File > Folder . You can no w c h oo s e w h et h er t o Create new folder ⦠or Rename folder ⦠. 1 Go online. 2 Press th e Menu key and select Receive > Folder subscr iption s ⦠. A list of folders in the remote m ailbox opens. 3 Se lect the folder. 4 Press Subscribe . If you have alr eady subscribed to the folder, press Unsubscri be to cancel the sub scription. 5 Press Go offl ine an d Go onli ne to include th e new subscribed folder s in the list. To read mail You can read, reply to and fo rward mail in the mail vie wer. To read received messages, select the message in the Inbox and press Op en . The mail viewer shows the message in a read-only state, which means that you cannot edit it or the attach ments linked to it. If there is a W eb link in the m essage, you can open it by going to that link and pressing Use . Tip: You can create new contacts from the o the r recipients of a received ma il; press the Menu key and select Tools > Add to contacts . If there is a f ax, mail or short mes sage link in the message, you can wr ite a fa x, mail or short message by selecting the link and pressing the corre sponding command button. This opens th e appropriate editor where the recipient field is completed using the fa x, mail address or GSM number in the link. To delete the message, pr ess Delet e . Linda1.book Page 178 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
179 Messaging WARNING! Messag es mar ked as del ete d whe n off line w ill al so be de leted from th e re mot e mailbox se rver , wh en on line. To delete local mail messages w ithout deleting rem ote mailbox files, see â To avoid low memory â on page 164. To reply to mail 1 Select the m ail message in Inbox and press Open . The mail viewer op ens. Tip: To forward m ail, press the Menu key and select File > Fo rward . 2 Press Re ply . The mail editor opens. If you wish to reply to all the recipients, not just the sender of the mail message, press the Menu ke y and select File > Repl y to > All rec ipients . Tip: To se arc h and replace text in a m ail, press the Menu key and select Edit > Find ⦠. 3 Edit the message in the m ail editor and press Send . Note: When replying to a mail me ssage, HTML mess ages are included as attachments. Style of rep lied to, and for warded mai l You can edit the style of replied to, and forwarded mail. 1 Press the Menu ke y and select Tools > Preferences ⦠. A dia log opens. 2 Define the f ollowing: Include message in reply : If you choose Yes , the or iginal message is in cluded in the reply to the message. The options are Yes / No . HTM L no rmal fon t : Defines the default font size and family used in HTML m essages. Note that HT ML m essages ma y contain ta gs that chan ge what you set in this option. HTML f ont si ze : Define s th e si z e of the fo n t us ed i n H T ML mes s ag es. Plain text f ont : Defines the font used in plain text messages. Plain text font size : Defines the s ize of the font used in plain text me ssages. Linda1.book Page 179 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
180 Messaging Mail att achmen ts You can send most documents and m essages you write in the other applications of your communicator as mail attachments. WARNING! Mail attachments may contain viruses or they can otherwise be harmful to your communicator or PC. Do not open any attachment, if y ou are not sure of the trustworthiness of the sender. For m ore inf ormat ion, see â Certificate manager â on page 222 To add mai l attachme nts Tip: To edit m ail attachmen ts, pre ss the Menu key and s elect Attach ments > Ed it . You cannot edit attachments in received mail messages. 1 Press the Menu key in the mail editor and select At tachme nts > Inse rt fi le ⦠. 2 Se arch and select the file you wish to attach to the m ail. To vi ew and save mai l attachme nt s Attachments always appear at the bottom of an open mail message. You can view the attachments using the appropriate viewe rs, if available. Tip: To open an attachment f or viewing, select it with t he Arrows key and then press Enter. 1 Open the mail message containing attach ments and press A ttachments . A dialog opens. 2 Press Ope n to open the attachment for viewing. Press Save to save t he attachment. Press Delete lo cally to delete the attachment from your communicator; the attachment is not deleted from your remote mailbox. Linda1.book Page 180 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
181 Messaging Working on line an d offlin e Working online means working with you r communicator c onnected to a remote mailbox via Internet connection. When you work offline which means that you r communicator is not connected to a remote mailbox, you can delete only messages, not folders. When online, you can delete, rename or create new folders in y our remote mailbox. Note: Any changes you make in the remote m ailbox folders while offline take effect in you r remote mailbox th e next time you go online and synchronise. For example, if you delete a mail message from your communicator when offline, the mess age will be deleted from the remote mailbox th e next time you connect to th e mailbox. If you want to dele te a message from your communicator to save memory, see â To avoid low memory â on page 164. Managing your m ail offline enables you to save in con nection costs and work in conditions that do not allow data connection, such as on aircraft. For information about using your communicator on an aircraft, see â Flight profile â on page 91. Remember also relevant warnings, see â IMPORTANT SAFETY INFO RMATION â on page 257. PC Mail Whereas you can send an d receive Internet mail over a data ca ll, you cannot send PC mail from th e communicator. PC mail is mail you can read, wr ite and edit on your communicator, but which you can send and receive only through a PC, the next time you synchronise your com municator with the PC. Linda1.book Page 181 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
182 Messaging Mail syn chron isati on with y our PC Synchronisation is the process of making the contents of your mail m essages and mail folders iden tical on both your commun icator and your PC. T his is done by copying and combining information betwe en the two m achines. For more information, see PC Suite Guide on the sales package CD-ROM. Mail synchronisation copies the messages between your com municator and your PC E-mail program to allow you use either machine for reading and replying to mess ages . You can convert In ternet mail to PC mail so that it is synchronised with a PC , or convert PC mail to Internet mail so that it can be sen t directly from th e communicator. All synchronisation settings are defined on the PC. The only setting you can do on your communicator is to delete the account you are using. To create new P C ma il Note: You need to have s et a mai l acc ount on y our r emot e PC to be abl e to create new PC mail. 1 Press the Menu key in t he main view of M essaging a nd select Write > New message ⦠. A selection list appears. 2 Se lect PC mail and press OK . If you have more than one PC a ccount, a dia log opens indicating which PC account will be used when sending the PC mail. Select the PC account and press OK . 3 Write the PC mail in the mail editor . Linda1.book Page 182 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
183 Messaging To convert to PC or Internet mail Tip: You can vi ew and edit PC mail just like Internet mail on your communicator. Note: HT ML messages cannot be converted since PC mail does not support the sending of HTML messages. You must change the message type to plain text or n on-MIME type in the Sending options dialog, before you can convert the message to PC ma il. See page 17 6 for more information. PC and Inter net mail appear togeth er in the f olders. 1 Select the mail message or m essages you wish to convert. Tip: PC m ail is distinguished from In ternet mail by a di fferent icon. 2 Press the Menu ke y and select Tools > Convert to internet mail or Convert t o PC mai l , depending on the ty pe of mail you wish to convert. 3 If there are multiple PC mail or SM TP services defined, a selection list of available services define d in the messaging server will be shown. Select the service and press Conve rt . Note: You can convert several mails at the same time, but make sure that the mails are of the sam e type, either Inter net or PC mail. Short Mes sage Service Tip: You r service provider ma y se nd y o u sm ar t messages in t he form of short messa ges; thes e message s may inc lude, for example, configuration settings. For details, contact your service provider. The Short Message Service (SMS) enables you to sen d and receive short mess ages over the digital wire less network. Short messages can be sent o r received even duri ng voice, data, and fax calls. Messages can be read in any mobile phone that has the capability. If the receiving phone is switched off at the time of sending, the short message centre continues to attempt to send the m essage until the validity period allowed by the network expires. Linda1.book Page 183 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
184 Messaging Note: If you want to send text you h ave written or edited in another application as a short message, all embedded objects or any rich formatting will be lost. You ca nnot send a ttachments as sh ort mess ages, either. To write and send a new short messag e Note: You ca nnot change the font, s tyle or format of short messages. Tip: When sending a short message that contains special or accented character s to an older mobile phone, the older phone may not be able to view the m essage. In this case, send the mes s age without special or accented character s. 1 Press Writ e sho rt mess age in the main view of Messaging. T he SMS editor opens, see f igure 74. Figure 74 Tip: You can zoom in the SMS editor. Press the Menu key and select View > Zoom > Zoom in or Zo om out 2 Press Recip ient to select the recipient, or type the numb er directly into the header of the mes sage . 3 Press the Arrows key to move dow n to the message field and write the short messag e. To view the length of the curren t message, press the Menu key and select View > Mes sage length . Linda1.book Page 184 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
185 Messaging Tip: To define a specific date and time w hen the short message will be sent, select Schedu led in t h e Send short m essage option. 4 If you wish to adjust the sending options of the short message, press Sen di ng opti ons . A dialog with two pages, Sendin g options and Advanc ed opens. For details, see SMS se ttings on page 186. 5 Press Send . To receive and r ead short messages Tip: Your Inbox shows the date of received short messages and the time of the short me ssages re ceived on the cu rrent da y. To view when it was sent, open the message in the SMS viewer. Short messages are received automatically, provided that this ser vice is available and that the phone is on and within ne twork coverage. When a new short message arrives, a tone will sound - unless the device is set to a silent pr ofile - and an information no te is shown on the display. The SMS viewer sh ows the m essage in a rea d-only sta te, which means th at you cannot ed it i t. Tip: To create a con tact card of the sender of a short message, press the Menu key and select Tools > Add to Contacts ⦠. Received short me ssages can also contain some special text strings such a s URLs. If a URL is h ighlighted when you move the cursor over it, you can open the corresponding link by pre ssing Use . To reply to short messages Tip: When replying to a message, you can choose whether you want the text of the receive d message to be in the reply. Select No in Include original in reply in SMS settings to minimise the length of the reply. Open the me ssa ge, press Re ply and write another s hort message. If the received message has a reply path, the note Rep ly via sam e centre is shown in th e h ea der of th e m e ssag e. Short messages on the SIM card To move and copy me ssages from the SIM card to the Inbox, pr ess the Menu key and select Receive > Short m essage > SIM mes sages . To move, copy or delete messages, press the corresponding command bu tton. Linda1.book Page 185 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
186 Messaging SMS settin gs Any changes you make to SMS settings affect the way in which your short messages ar e sent and receive d . 1 Press the Menu key in t he main view of M essaging a nd select Tools > A ccount settings ⦠. 2 Se lect Shor t message an d press Edit . A dialog with two pages opens. Define the following: Gener al page Press Service centr es , which opens a dia log where you can define new message centres, as well as edit and dele te existing ones. All message centres are listed by name and numbe r. Service cent re in use : Defines the service centre that is used for delivering the short messa ges. Tip: To ope n th e sys t em log, press the Menu key and select Tools > Log . Delivery report : If you choose Yes , you ca n view th e status of the s ent mes sage ( Pending , fail ed, Delivered ) in the system log. If you choose No , only the stat us sent is shown in the s ystem log. Send shor t message : Y ou can select when you want the me ssage to be sent. T he options are Immediately / Up on request / Scheduled . W he n Sche dule d is selected, you m ust defin e a Dat e . Validi ty period : If the recipient of a me ssage cannot be reached w ithin the specified validity period, the m essage is removed from the short message service centre. If Ma ximum is chosen, the validity per iod is set to the m aximum value allowed by the message centre. Note that the network must support this feature. The options are 1 hour / 6 hours / 1 day/ 1 week/ Maximum. Linda1.book Page 186 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
187 Messaging Advanced pag e Reply via same centre : This network service allows the recipient of you r short message to reply usin g your message centre. If you choose Yes an d th e recipient replies to your message, the return message is sen t using the same service centre number. T his requires that the recipient has subscribed to the S hort Message Service, is able to a reply to a message, and uses a device which supports this feature. Note also that the network must support this featu re. Include orig inal in reply : Specifies whether text in the received short message is quoted when you make a reply. If you choose Yes , the cont ents of the message body a re copied to a n ew short message. Co ncat en at ion : If set to No , mess ages longer tha n 160 ch ara cters ar e sent as sev e r al sh o r t me ssa ges . If se t to Yes , messages that are longer than 160 characters are sent as severa l messag es, but if the re cipient has a Nokia communicator, the messages a re received as one long message. Linda1.book Page 187 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
188 Messaging Linda1.book Page 188 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
189 Office 10. Office Office contains the Word Pr ocessor, Sheet, and Pr esentation viewer applications, which are all compatible with Microsoft Windows. Office also con tains a File manager application for file and folder manageme nt tasks like moving, copying, and renaming files and folders. Figure 75 Word Processor You can use Word Processor to write new and edit existing text documents. You can insert and view images and other files in the documen ts. You can also send and receive documents a s fax, SMS, mail, PC m ail, or via infrared. You can open, edit and s ave docum ents created with Microsoft Word f or Windows versions 95, 97 and 2000. Note that not all features and f or matting of the original documents will be supported. Documents made with other versions of Microsoft Word can only be viewed. For information on other file format conversions, see the PC Suite Gu ide on the sales package CD-ROM. Linda1.book Page 189 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
190 Office To create a new document Tip: You can use th e clipboard command shortcu ts Ctrl x, Ctrl c, and Ctrl v to cut, copy, an d paste text. When you open the Word Processor application, a new docu ment is opened. Y ou can start writing immediately. You can modify th e style of a document on a font and a pa ragraph level. You can use different fonts, font sizes, an d styles. You can apply diffe rent predefined or user-defined styles by eith er modifying particular pieces of text separately or by using a template on which the style of the text is ba sed (see page 1 92). To change fo nts 1 Press Font in the document you are creating or e diting. A dialog opens , see Figure 76. Figure 76 2 Press Change to change the valu e of a list item. To see the effe ct of the change s you have made, pres s Pr eview . 3 Press Done to save the changes you have made. To change text style 1 Se lect the text whose style you want to change. 2 Press Style . A list of choices in alphabetical order opens. Linda1.book Page 190 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
191 Office 3 Select a style option from the lis t and press Set : These are the de fault values of th e style options in the list: To create a new or modify an existing style option 1 Press Style . 2 To create a new style option, press New . Or, to modify a s tyle option, select the style and press Ed it . A dialog opens. 3 Give the style option a ne w name by typing over the old name. Note that you cannot edit the names of the def ault styles. Press Format to view a list of style values you can change. 4 Press Chang e to change the values of the followin g: Fo nt , Alignment , Indents , Tab s , Line spacing , Borders , Bu llets , and Out line level . 5 Press Do ne to confirm the changes. Style option Font Point size Bold Italics Under lined Justifica- tion Normal URW Sa ns 12 pt Off Off Off Lef t Head er URW Sa ns 10 pt Off Off Off Lef t Footer URW Sa ns 10 pt Off Off Off Lef t Heading 1 URW S an s 16 pt On Off Off Left Heading 2 URW S an s 14 pt On Off Off Left Heading 3 URW S an s 12 pt On Off Off Left Title URW San s 1 8 pt On Of f Off Centre d Linda1.book Page 191 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
192 Office Templ ates Example : You may have a company template which shows the company n ame and defines a par ticular lay o ut. You can use templates and save documents as templates when creating and editing documents. To select a template, press the Menu key and select File > Templates > Select temp late ⦠. A list of available templates opens. Se lect a template and press OK . To save a docu ment as a template, press the Menu key an d select File > T emplates > Save as temp late ⦠. To delete a template, go to File manager. See page 204. To insert an object Tip: To resi z e an im ag e after insertion, press the Menu key and s elect Ed it > Obj ec t > Object details ⦠. 1 Press In sert obj ect in the document you are creating or editing. A dialog opens. See Figure 77 . Figure 77 2 Se lect from the list the type of object you want to insert. 3 Press Insert new to open the corresponding ed itor. Press Inse rt exis ting to open a list of files. Only files which you can insert are listed. Linda1.book Page 192 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
193 Office Note: Objects in a document are n ot links but embedded attachments, which may increase the file siz e of the document dramatically. To hid e or make visi ble text markers To hide or m ake visible marker s that are used in editing wi thin the document, proceed as follows. 1 Press the Menu ke y and first select Tools > Preferences ⦠. A dialog with two pages opens. 2 Set the followin g options on or off: Basic opt ions page : Show t ab s , Show spac es , an d Show paragraph mark s , Advanced options pa ge : Show forced line break s , Show non- breaking spaces , and Show hard hyphens . To view the outline of a document Tip: To open a specif ic page in the document, press the Menu key and select Tools > Go to ⦠. 1 Press the Menu ke y and select View > O utline ⦠. A tree s tructure o f the document opens. 2 To show more details, press Expand . To show le ss details, press Co llapse . To open a selected point in the document, press Go to . 3 Press Cl ose to return to the document view . To paginate After creating a new document, you can divide it in to pages. Press the M enu key and select Tools > Mo re > Pagin ate . This command will als o update the pa ge numbering. Linda1.book Page 193 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
194 Office Shee t In Sheet you can work and store your data in a file that is c alled a workbook. Each workbook contains at leas t one worksheet. A workbook can also contain chartsh eets; a chartsheet is a spreadsh eet file containing a chart that is based on data from a wo rkshee t. You can open, edit and save documents created wi th Microsoft Excel for Windows versions 95, 97 and 2000. Note that not all features and formatting of the original files will be supported. Files made with other versions of Microsoft Excel may only be viewed. For information on other file format conversions, see the PC Suite guide on the CD-ROM. Workbooks Tip: To add a workbook to the Desk application, press the Menu key and select File > Add to Desk . To create a new workbook, press the Menu key and select File > New workbook . To open an existing workbook, pr ess the Menu key and select File > Open . To save a workbook, press the Menu key in the worksheet view and select File > Save . To send a work book as mail or via infrared, press the Men u key in t he worksheet view and select F ile > Send . Worksheets To create a new wo rksheet in a workbook, p ress the Menu key and select Insert > New worksheet . Linda1.book Page 194 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
195 Office To enter da ta To enter data, select a cell with the Arrows ke y and start typing the data in th e selected cell. To confirm what you have entered into a cell, press Enter, OK , or go to another cell with the Arrows key. To dismiss the action, press Esc or Cancel . You can also enter a formula to perform operations on w orksheet data. Sheet application provides some predef ined, or built-in, formulas, wh ich are known as funct ion s. To insert a function, press Insert func tion . A dialog opens. See Figure 7 8. The function categories you can choose from are as follows: All , Fi nancial , Date and time , Mathematic al , St at is tic al , Lo oku p , Text , Lo gical , an d Information . Each category has a set of functions, which you can see from the list next to Function name . Select the function you want and press Clos e . Figure 78 Linda1.book Page 195 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
196 Office Example: You might want to sum up figures in cells C2 to C4 in cell C5; select ce ll C5, pr es s Point re fe re nc e and select the cell range from C 2 to C4. Pr ess E nter or OK to confirm the action. The SUM will now appear in C5. In a formul a, you can e nter cons tant values or cell referenc es. A cell refe renc e tells Sheet where to look for th e values or data you want to use in the formula. To enter a reference to a cell or cells in a formula: 1 Go to th e cell you want to edit, and press Ed it. 2 Move the cursor to the place wher e you want to in sert a reference, and pr ess Poin t refer ence . 3 Se lect the cells that contain the values you want to use. See â To select cellsâ on page 135. The focus remains in the cell you are e diting. Press Enter or OK to confirm the action. Figure 79 To select ce lls There are two ways to select a cell or a range of cells in a worksheet: Example: To select column A, enter A:A . To select row 1, enter 1:1. To select columns B and C as well as rows 2 and 3, enter B2:C3 ⢠Press the Menu key and select Edit > Select . Then enter the selection ran ge or choose a range from the list. ⢠Press and hold the Shift key, and increase the selection frame with the Arrows key. To select entire r ows or columns, pr ess and hold the Sh ift key, and select th e desired row or colu mn headings with the Arrows key. Linda1.book Page 196 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
197 Office To select the entire w orksheet, use the shortcut Ctrl A. The selection is cleared when you press the Arrows key or Tab key. To insert cell s 1 Select a number of cell(s) that you want to in sert into the worksheet. 2 Press the Menu ke y and select Inse rt > Ce lls . A dialog opens. 3 Define whether you want the inserted cell or cells to appear above ( Shif t c el ls down ) or left ( S hift cells righ t ) of the sele cted range. To insert an en tire row(s) or column(s), select either Entire ro w or Entire colum n . 4 Press OK to accept t he insertion and Cancel to dis miss it. To sort cells You can rearrange th e order of cells from top to bottom and left to right. 1 Select the r ange. 2 Press the Menu ke y and select Tools > Sort . 3 Select either Top to bott om or Left to right . A dialog opens. 4 Define the sorting criteria. 5 Press Cl ose to do the sorting. To search for data 1 Press the Menu ke y and select Edit > Find . A dialog opens. 2 In th e Find: field, enter the st ring you wa nt to s earch f or. Linda1.book Page 197 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
198 Office Tip: Pressing Options opens up th e following options: Search in values , Search in fo rmulae , Match case , Find ent ire cells only , Directio n , an d Searc h by . 3 Press Find to search for th e str ing. Press Options to search th e worksheet a ccording to certain criteria . Press Re place to replace the string with something else. To cl ear cells 1 Choose th e cell or cells you want to cle ar. 2 Press Clear . A lists of choices appears . 3 To clear both the contents and formats of the cell or cells, select All . To clear only the contents of the cell or cells, select Contents . To clear only the formats of the ce ll or cells, select Formats . To adjust co lumn width or row he ight 1 Se lect the column(s), or row(s). 2 Press the Menu key and select Form at > Column width ⦠or Row height ⦠. 3 To in crease column width, press > on the Arrows key as many times as necessary. To diminish column width, press <. To increase row height, press ⨠on the A rrows key as many times as is necess ary. To diminish row h eight, press ⧠. To adjust the width or height by exact figures, pr ess Def ine wi dth . Figure 80 Linda1.book Page 198 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
199 Office To align ce ll cont en ts 1 Select the cel l or cells. 2 Press the Menu ke y and select Format > Al ignm ent . A dialog opens. 3 Define the f ollowing options: Horizontal , Vertic al , and Wrap text to cell . To change the appearance of cell bor ders 1 Select the cel l or cells. 2 Press the Menu ke y and select Format > Cell ap pearance > Bo rders . A dialog opens. 3 Define the f ollowing options: Outl in e , Top , Bottom , Lef t , Right , and Line co lour . To chang e n umber form at 1 Select the cel l or cells. 2 Press the Menu ke y and select Format > Numbers . A dialog opens. 3 Choose the required format from the list. Depending on the format you choose, you may def ine the place of the decim al. To change fo nts 1 Select the cel l or cells. 2 Press the Menu ke y and select Format > Fon t . A dialog opens. 3 Press Chang e to change the value of a list item. 4 To see the effect of the changes you have made, p ress Prev iew . 5 Press Do ne to save the changes you have made. To change background colour 1 Select the cel l or cells. Linda1.book Page 199 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
200 Office 2 Press the Menu key and select Format > Cell appearance > Backgr ound colour . A dialog opens. 3 Choose th e colour. To insert pag e breaks 1 Press the Menu key and select Insert > Page break . A dialog ope ns. 2 De fine the following option s: Break at colum n and Break at row . Note: Since th e break is placed above and on the lef t side of the sele cted cell, you cannot insert a page break when the cell A1 is selected. To n a me ce lls Tip: To change viewer prefer ences, pres s the Menu key and select Tools > Settings . Set the following options on or off: Show gridlines , Show row header s , Show column h eaders , Automat ic recal culation , Show zero values , and Show pagination lin es . 1 Se lect the cell or cells. 2 Press the Menu key and select Insert > Name > Add . If the cell or cells already have a name, you can edit the name by selecting Edit . A dialog opens. 3 Enter the name. To name worksh eets 1 Press the Menu key and select Edit > Rename worksheet . A dialog opens. 2 Choose th e worksheet from the list and name it. To delete cells, columns, rows, page breaks, and worksheets 1 Se lect a cell within the area you want to delete. 2 Press the Menu key and select Edit > Delete . A dialog opens. 3 Choose f rom the list what you want to de lete. Linda1.book Page 200 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
201 Office To go to any sh eet or chart w ithin the sam e workbook Tip: To view sheets in the Chartshe et view, pres s Sheets/ C harts . 1 Press the Menu key and select View > Worksheets or Sheets/Char ts . A list opens. 2 Choose a sheet or chart and press OK to open the sheet and Cancel to dismiss it. Note: You cannot change the order of the sheets. Chartsheets To crea te chartsheets There ca n be seve n diff erent kinds of charts: Line , Column , Sta cked column , Bar , Stacked bar , X/Y scatter , and Pie . 1 Select a range of cells on a worksheet. These will provide the data for your new chartsheet. 2 Press the Menu ke y and select Inse rt > New cha r t . A dialog opens. 3 Define the f ollowing: Chart name , Chart type, 3-D, Background c olour , and Ax is colour . 4 Press Cl ose to create a new chartsheet and Esc to dismiss it. To edit c hartsheets Tip: You can al so press the Tab key and Enter to select objects. Press Esc to cancel the selection. 1 Press Select ob ject . A dialog opens. 2 Choose an object from the following list for editing and press OK : Chart , Chart title , X-axis , Y-a xi s , X-axis titl e , Y- axis title , Legend , Major X-axis gridl ines , Minor X - axis gri dlines , Ma jor Y-axis gr idlines , Minor Y- axis gridlines , a n d Serie s . Th e setting dialog for th e selected object opens. See Figure 81 for an exam ple of X-axis settings being edite d. 3 To edit the object, press Cha ng e or press Enter. A dialog opens. Linda1.book Page 201 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
202 Office To delete th e object, press Delet e . 4 Define t he new value s. Figure 81 5 Press Clos e to confirm the ch anges or Esc to dismiss them. Note: You can select only one object at a time. To repl ace cha rtsheet data Tip: To define th e gener al appearance of a ch art, press Chart setti ngs . Define the page style and n ame in th e two pages of the dialog which opens. You can r eplace the data on which you r chartsheet is based. 1 Press Sheets / Char ts and select the worksheet your chart is based on. 2 Se lect a new data area for the cha rt fr om the wor ksh eet, pre ss the Menu key, and select View > Sheets/Charts to return to th e charts heet. 3 Press the Menu key, select Tools > Replace data , and press OK to confirm the changes or Cancel to dismiss them. Pres entati on v iewer You can use Presen tation viewer to view pr esentations. You can also send a nd receive these presentations as mail or via infrared. Linda1.book Page 202 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
203 Office You can view documents created with Microsoft PowerPoint for Windows versions 95,97 and 2000. N ote that not all features and formatting of th e original documents will be supported. To view a presentation Press Open in the Presentation main view to select and view a document. To close the application, press Close . Tip: You can zoom in and out to get a be tter view of the presen tation. When a document is open ed, the top of the first slide is shown. To view the next slide, press Next or Enter. To view the previous slide, pr ess Previo us . To scroll the current slide, use th e Arrows key. The ou tline view To get an overview of the whole presentation, press Ou tlin e view . This opens up a view where the text content of the pres entation is in a list f ormat. See Figur e 82. Figure 82 To view only title texts, press Titles o nly . To r eturn to the standard slide show, press Slide view . Linda1.book Page 203 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
204 Office To search for and view a slide 1 Press the Menu key and select Tools > Go to slide ⦠. A list of th e slides in th e presentation open s. 2 Go to th e slide you want by using the Arrows key. 3 Press Go to open the slide. To view the pre senter â s notes To view the presenter â s notes along with the slides, press the Menu key an d select View > Notes view . File manager Tip: Use File manager together with a m emory card to remove fi l e s and folders f rom the communicator memory and thus fre e me mor y. S e e â To back up and restore data to and from a memory card â on page 209. You can use File manager to manage the contents and properties of various folders. The main view has two frames: a f older tree on the left and a f ile list on the right. Figure 83 You can toggle between the fram es with the Tab key. Linda1.book Page 204 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
205 Office The folder view The folder tree can contain folders from two roots, the communicator and a memo ry c ard. Tip: Avoid saving files to the root of th e communicator; use folders instead. Under the communicator root there is C:\Documents\ fol der that co nt ains f our default folder s: \Documents\Downloa ded\ , \Documen ts\Photo galler y\ , \Documents\Tem plates\ , and \Documents\Tones\ . To show or h ide subfolders in th e folder list fram e, press < an d > on the Arrows key. The - an d signs in front of the folder icons indicate whether the su bfolders are shown or hidden. Folders without either sign have no su bfolders, an d you can use the Arrows key t o switch between the folder view and files view. Note: Multi-selection is not possible in the folder list frame. The files view Tip: To ch an ge t he sorting order or th e value by which the files are sorted (name, date and time, type, and size), pres s the Menu key and select Vi ew > Sort by or Sorting order . The file list on the right shows all the files in the source or folder currently selected in the left f rame. The title of the file list frame shows the path of the cu rrently selected file. The f ile list frame also shows the application-related icon , name, and the last m odification date of the file. The files are sorted in alphabetical order by default. Note: Hidden files are shown only if you press the Menu key a nd select View > Show all file s . To view the contents of a folder 1 Choose a folder in the left folder tree frame and pr ess Open . Linda1.book Page 205 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
206 Office A view of all the subfolders and files of the parent folder opens. S ee Figure 84. Figure 84 2 To view any possible subfolder , select it and press Open . 3 To view parent folders, pr ess Esc. 4 Press Clo se fo lder to r eturn t o the main view. The title of the folder content view shows the path name and the number of files and subfolders in the folder, together w ith the total size of all the files in the folder. This view shows th e name, last modification date and time, and th e size of a particular file. The icon in front of the name indicates the type of file or subfol der. To open a fi le 1 Select a f ile and press Open . The file will th en be opened in the cor responding application. 2 To return to th e main view, press Close fo ld er . Note: You can open only one file at a time. Linda1.book Page 206 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
207 Office To move files and folders Tip: For multi-selection, see â To select s everal items at once â on page 25. 1 Select folders or files that you want to move an d press Move in the main view of File m anager. A list of folders opens, as shown in Figure 85. Figure 85 2 Search for a target folder with the Arrows key. To hide or show the su bfolders of a folder, press Collaps e and Expand respectively. You can also navigate in the folder list with the Arrows key and / - keys. To create a new target folder, press New folder . 3 Press OK to confirm the move and Cancel to dismiss it. To create new folders 1 In the main view of File manager select th e folder in which you want create a new f old er 2 Select File > New folder . 3 Name the n ew folder. 4 To confirm the changes, pr ess OK . To dismiss the changes, press Can cel . Linda1.book Page 207 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
208 Office To renam e files a nd folders 1 Se lect the file o r folder in th e main view of File manager. 2 Press the Menu key and select File > Rename . The cu rsor now appears a t the beginning of the selected file or folder name. 3 Re name the file or folder. 4 To confirm the changes, press OK . To dismiss the changes, press Cancel . To view the pro perties of files, folders, and drives Tip: In th e Properties dialog, you can also change a file into hidden or read- only state or a folder into read-only state . 1 Se lect the file, folder, or drive in the main view of File manager. 2 Press the Menu key and select File > Properties ⦠. A dialog opens, as shown in Figure 86. Figure 86 To search for files and folders 1 Choose the folder or memory storage where you want the search to ta ke place. 2 Press the Menu key and select Tools > Fi nd ⦠. A dialog opens. 3 E nter in th e fiel d t he s tring for which you want to s earch . 4 Press Opti ons to define the search in more detail. Se e Figure 87. Linda1.book Page 208 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
209 Office Tip: You ca n se ar c h according to time per iod, start and en d time, an d the file type. Figure 87 Press Chang e to change the value of a list item. When ready, pre ss Cl ose . 5 Press Find to start the search. To interrupt the search, press Stop . 6 When the search is over, press Op en to open th e folder or f ile found. To start a new sear ch, pre ss New fi nd . 7 To return to the m ain view, press Close . To back up an d restore data t o and from a mem ory card It is advisable to take backups of your communicator data regularly. IMPO RTA NT ! Do NOT use this method to restore data you have backed up with Nokia 9210 Commun icator to Nok ia 921 0i Comm uni cator. Use PC Su ite instead. Note: The Backup and R estore commands will copy all data. You cannot back up or restore an individual folder. The Backup and Restore comman ds are recursive; that is, they copy folders and all th e contents within the Linda1.book Page 209 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
210 Office folders. For information about selective backups, selective restoring, and using a PC to back u p and restore, see th e PC Suite guide on the sales package CD-ROM. To be able to back u p to an d restore from a memory card, the ca rd should be i nse rted in t he co m m u nicato r. For detail s, see â T o i ns ert a m e m o ry car d â on page 2 5. 1 Press th e Menu key and select Memo ry ca rd > Backu p to memory card ⦠or Restore from memo ry ca rd ⦠, depen ding on what you wan t to do. A dialog opens. 2 If you are making a backup, look for a backup folder on the memory card by pressing Change or type in the name of a new folder in the Backup fold er field. If you are restori ng data to your communicator, select the f older in the communicator into which you want to restore your data. Normally you should select the root folder. 3 Press Backup to back up all the communicator data to the memory card. Press Re store to restore all the backed-up memory card data to the communicator. 4 Restart the communicator by removing the battery and replacing it again. To lock a memory card You can pr otect a me mory card with a password to prevent unauthorised access. Note: Not all memory cards support password protection. 1 Press the Menu key and select Memory c ard > Security > Ch ange pas sword ⦠. A dialog opens. 2 Type you r password in the New password field and type it again in the Confirm password field. 3 Press OK . The ne w p ass wor d is set . Linda1.book Page 210 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
211 Office To remove password protection, pr ess the Menu key and select Memory c ard > Security > Remove password ⦠. Type your pass word and press Remove . Note: Use a password that is ea sy f or you to r emember but difficult for others to guess. If you forg et your password, the only way to use your mem ory card aga in i s to fo rmat th e card. Formatting de le tes all d ata f rom th e car d! To for mat a mem ory car d press the Menu key, select Memory c ard > Format mem ory card ⦠, and press Format . Linda1.book Page 211 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
212 Office Linda1.book Page 212 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
213 Extras 11. Extras Extras contains the following applications: Calculator, Clock, C ontrol panel, Recorder, Imaging, C ell broadcast, Video player , and Fax modem. Most of the new applications that you install will b e added to the Extras application group. For more information o n applications availa ble on the sales package CD-ROM, see Software on CD-ROM Guide in th e Using Nokia 9 210i Communicator section of the C D-ROM. Figure 88 Tip: To install applications, see section â Install/Removeâ on page 224. Clock The Clock shows the time and date in your home city and country or region, as well as in several other cities an d countries in the world. The Clock also includes an alarm clock. To set the current date and time for your communicator, press the Menu key and select Tools > D at e an d ti me ⦠. Linda1.book Page 213 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
214 Extras Tip: To ch oose the clock type, press the Menu key and select Vie w > Clock type > Digital or A nalogue . To set an a larm 1 Press Alarm c lock in the m ain view. An alarm clock view opens. 2 The currently active alarms are listed next to the clock. 3 To create a new alarm , press Ne w alarm or to edit an alar m, press Edit alarm . 4 De fine the Time of the alarm and the frequency in Occurrence an d Day fields. Define also the Descripti on displayed when the ala rm goes off. Tip: T o turn of f a sounding alarm, press Stop or any key on the keypad of the phone cover . Press Snooze to silence the alarm for five min utes. 5 Press Done to accept the set alarm. To change yo ur home ci ty If your home city and time settings on your communicator are not set correctly, you must first set your home city an d then set the time, since your home location def i ne s th e ti me z o n e u se d . 1 Go to th e Worl d cloc k main view. Tip: The worl d map shows the currently selec ted city in cross hairs. 2 Press Change ci ty . A cities view opens. Se e figure 89. Figure 89 3 Type the city in the search f ield or scroll th e list and press Select when ready . 4 Press OK to accept the change of time zone or Cancel to dismiss it. Linda1.book Page 214 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
215 Extras Note: For more detailed information about Clock, see the Nokia 9210i Comm unica tor hel p. Calculator There are two mo des in Calculator: desk calculator for simple arithmetic operations and scientific calculator for more complicated mathematical calculations. There are two ways to perform calculations, either by typin g the characters in th e input field or selecting symbols from th e function map. A calculation is ex ecuted by pressing Enter or =. The calculation and its result can be see n on the output sheet on the le ft. You cannot write in the output sheet, but selection is poss ible. Figure 90 To move betwe en the input field, output sheet, and function map, press the Tab key. The input field is never empty in the desktop calculator: it contains either the result of the previous calculation or a zero (0) if you have pressed backspace. Linda1.book Page 215 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
216 Extras Note: For more de tailed information about Calculator, see the Nokia 9210i Communicator help. Cont rol panel In the Control panel you can view or m odify the following: Sec ur ity , Data call barring , Da ta call bar ring , Pr of ile s , Data c all ba rr in g , Certific ate manager , Date and ti me , Install/Remov e softwa re , Int ernet access , About produ ct , Memo ry , Regional settings , and Default fo lder Modifying these features affects the oper ation of your communicator across all the applications. Figure 91 To open a program for editing, select it with th e Arrows key and press Se lect . Security Here you can define th e phone security level of your communicator. Linda1.book Page 216 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
217 Extras IMPO RTA NT : The default lock code is 1234 5 . For security re asons, it is imperative that you change the lock code. Keep the code secret and in a safe place, separate from th e communicator. The codes are shown as ast e risks. If you are changing a code, you w ill be prompted for the current code and then th e new code twice. PIN code request : If you set the PIN code request On , the communicator requests that you enter the code every time you turn on th e phone. If you enter the PIN code incorrectly three times in succe ssion, you will need a PUK code to unblock the SIM card. When the SIM card is blocked, you cannot s end or receive any docu ments or calls except calls to preprogrammed emergency numbers. Oth erwise, the communicator can be used n ormally. You need the PIN c ode to change this setting. Note: This setting cannot be changed, if the phone is switched off or if there is no valid SIM card in serted. Note: Some SIM cards do not allow you to turn the PIN code r equest off. Autoloc k period : Deter mines the security time- out period, after which th e communicator will lock. The options are None / 2 minu tes / 5 minutes / 10 minutes . The last op tion allows you to def ine the number o f minutes yourself. When the communicator is locked, you can make emergency calls to predefined numbers using the cover phone. Yo u can also answer incoming calls and make emerge ncy calls using the Telephone application. All other actions are blocked. The tim er is reset by any input, data transfer, printing, and so on . You n eed the lock code to change this setting. Linda1.book Page 217 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
218 Extras Lock if SIM c ard is chan ged : If set On , every time the ph one is switched on th is security option checks whether the SIM car d in the communicator has been changed. If the SIM card has been changed and th e new SIM card has not been used with your communicator previou sly, the communicator locks itself until the lock code is correctly entered. T he communicator recognises five different SIM cards as the owner â s cards. You need the lock code to chan ge this setting. Tip: Changing the PIN code requires that PIN code requ es t is selected, the phone is on, an d that there is a valid SIM card inserted. PIN code : This setting allows you to change the PIN code. T he new PIN code must be from 4 to 8 digits long. PIN2 code : This setting allows you to change the PIN2 code . The PIN2 code is required to acce ss som e fu nc tions, suc h as th e call cost settings , which must be supported by your SIM card. If you enter an incorr ect PIN2 code three times in succession, you will need a PUK2 code to unblock the PI N2 code. The n ew PIN2 code must be f rom 4 to 8 di gits long. Lock code : This setting allows you to change the lock code. The default lock code is 1234 5 . The new lock code must be fr om 5 to 10 digits long. If you en ter an incorrect lock code five tim es in succession, the phone will be locked for five min utes after which you ca n try again. I f you try again within les s th a n f i ve mi n ut e s , y o u ha v e t o wa i t f iv e m in u te s mo r e b e fo r e a c od e c an be accepted. Tip: Changing the barring password requires that the phone is on and the Call barring service is activated for your SIM card. Barring p asswor d : This setting a llows you to ch ange the barring pas sword. If you enter an incorrect password three times in succession, the password is blocked and you must ask the n etwork service provider f or a new password. Note: Avoid using codes that are similar to emergency n umbers to prevent accidental dialling of th e emergency nu mber. Linda1.book Page 218 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
219 Extras Note: When the communicator is locked, calls may be possible to the emergency number programmed in to your phone (e.g. 112 or other official eme rge ncy numb er). Data call barring Tip: Use data call barring to limit the use of th e phone, if you lend it to someone temporarily. Here you can prevent or allow the foll owing data call types: Note: You need a barring password to modify these settings. Outgoi ng calls : When activated, prohibits making data calls. Incoming calls : When activated, prohibits r eceiving data c alls. International calls : When activated, prohibits making international calls. Tip: To check the current status of a barring option, select the option an d press Check status . Incoming calls when abroad : When activated, prohibits receiving calls wh en abroad. International except to home country : When activated, prohibits making international calls to all countries except to the cou ntry that has been defined as the h ome country. Note: Calls described here as international may in some cases be made between regions of the same nation. Accessories Here you can de fin e som e of t he s ettin gs when you us e th e Nok ia 92 10i Comm uni c at o r with Advanc ed HF C ar Kit CA RK 10 9 or He ad s et HDC -8L . For further in formation on access ories for the Nokia 9 210i Communicator, see th e accessories section of the Getting started guide. Define the accessories options as follows: 1 Double-click the Accessories icon in the Control Panel. A dialog opens Linda1.book Page 219 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
220 Extras 2 Se lect the accessory options that you want to modify. The options are Headset / Car kit . Press Edit . 3 De fine the following: Car kit settings Automati c answer : Allows you to define whether the automatic answering is on or off when your communicator is attached to the car kit. Default pr ofile : Allows you to ch oose the profile that will be automatically s elected, when you attach your communicator to the car kit. Headset settings Cover d isplay ligh ts : A llows you to define whether the cover display ligh ts are always on or not when the headset is attached to your communicator. Automati c answer : Allows you to define whether the automatic answering is on or off when the headset is attached to your communicator. Default pr ofile : Allows you to ch oose the profile that will be automatically s elected, when the headset is attached to your communicator. Profiles Here you can edit pr ofiles. Profiles define the tones and sound level of your communicator in diffe rent operating environmen ts. For details on pr ofiles, see â Profile settings â on page 78. Display Here you define th e appearance of the display. Linda1.book Page 220 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
221 Extras Contrast and bri ghtness page Figure 92 Press and - to adjust the bar you are editin g. Contrast level : Pressin g increa ses a nd - decreases the contrast of the display. Brightnes s : The brightness level of the display. Th ere are five levels to choose from. Brightnes s period : A time period after which, if there has not been any key pr esses within that time, the br ightness will go down to its lowest level. The le vel will rise to the level defined in Brightness as soon as any key is pressed again. The options are 15 se c / 30 sec/ 45 sec/ 1 min / 2 min . Tip: Selectin g a low brightness level and a short time period for the last two options saves th e battery and increases the operation time of the communicator. Screen saver : A time period after which the display will blank out if th e device remains inactive. The options are 2 min / 4 min/ 6 min/ 8 min / 10 min. Colour page Colour pa lette : The display colour sc heme. The options are Blue / Red / Green / Grey . Backgroun d pattern : The background image of the command button area. The options are Plain / Wheels / Sand / Wat er / Lea ve s . Linda1.book Page 221 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
222 Extras Certificate manager With Certificate manager you can manage digital certificates which you use w hen connecting to WWW site s, WAP services, mail ser vers, and when in stalling softwar e. You ne ed thes e certif icates whe n you: ⢠want to connect to an online bank or some other site or remote server for actions that involve transferring confidential information, ⢠want to m inimise the risk of viruses or other malicous software and be sure of the authenticity of software when downloading and installing it. Note however, that even if th e use of certificates makes the risks involved in remote connections and software installation considerably smaller, they m ust be used correctly in or der to benefit fro m increased security. T he existence of a certificate does not offer any protection by itself; Certificate manager must contain correct, authentic, and trusted certificates for increased security to be available. To open the main view of Certificate manager, press the Extras application bu tton, sel ect Control panel , and select Certificate ma nager . The main view lists the cu rrently available certificates and their validity information. Note: Certificates have a restricted life time. If a certif icate is marked Expired even if it should be Valid , check that the date and time in your communicator a re correct. To define the usage of the certificate 1 Se lect the certificate and press View d etails . A dialog with certificate details opens. Linda1.book Page 222 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
223 Extras 2 Press Trust se tti ngs . A dialog opens. 3 If you want this certificate to be a ble to certify W WW sites and mail ser vers, select Web brows er and Mai l , pre s s Change , and select Yes 4 If you want this certificate to be able to certify the origin of a ne w software, select Software ins tallation , press Change , and select Yes . Note: Before changing these settings, you must make sure that you really trust the owner of the certificate and that the certificate really belongs to the listed owner. To check that a certificate is authentic Certificates are u sed to verify the origin of WWW pages and in stalled software. However, they can only be trusted if the origin of the certificate is known to be authentic. If you ar e adding a n e w certificate, or want to ch e ck the authenticity o f an existing certificate, proceed as follows: 1 Select the cert ificate and press View details . A view of certificate details opens. 2 The Subjec t: field identifies the owner of this c ertificate. Make sure that th is is the name of the party to who m you think that this certificate belon gs. 3 Scroll the dialog until you see the Fingerpr int: fiel d. 4 The Fingerprint: field uniquely identifies the certificate. Contact the h elp desk or customer service of the owner of the certificate (see step 2 above) and ask for the MD5 fingerpr int of the certificate . Compare the fingerpr int with the one shown in the dialog. If they m atch, the certificate is authentic. Note: Use this authentication proce dure each time you add a new ce rtificate. To add or dele te certif icates To add a new certificate, press Add. A dialog opens in which you can search and select the new cer tificate. Linda1.book Page 223 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
224 Extras To delete a certificate, s elect it and press Delet e . Date and time Here you define the current time and date for your communicator. Time : The curr ent time . Date : The cu rrent date. Daylig ht-savin g : De termines how the time of your communicator is affected by changes in daylight sav ing time. The options are On /Off / Define summer . If Define summer is selected , you have to en ter the dates Summer starts and Sum mer en ds . Install/Remo ve With Install/Remove you can i nstall new software or r emove installed applications from your communicator. When you open the Install/Remove application, the Installed software page lists all of the software packages that have bee n installed, with their n ame, version number, type, an d size . Press Certif icate Info to display th e certificate details of an installed software package that has a digital signature and a certificate. To install software The types of a pplications which you can install are those that are specifically intended for the Nokia 9210/9210i Communicator or suitable f or the Symbian operating system on Crystal style devices, and Java applications. Linda1.book Page 224 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
225 Extras Note: If you install software that is not intended specifically for th e Nokia 9210/9210i Communicator, its usage can differ sign ificantly from the usual Nokia 9210/9210i Communicator applications. You can download or transfer a software package containing the files of the application into the communic ator. Then you can install the application. Software can also be installed from a memory card. A software package is usually one large compressed file containing many comp onent files. Tip: You ca n al s o st a rt the installation by browsing for the installation package in commu nicat or memo ry o r memor y card w ith Fi l e manager, selecting it, and pressing the E nter key. IMPO RTA NT : When downloading or transferring s oftware packages into th e communicator, use only pa ckages whose file names end â .sisâ . An example of a suitable file name is â MediaPlayer.sis â . To start th e installation, press Install new on the Installed s oftware page. Browse for the software package you want to in stall, and press OK . The installation process begins. Note: Only install software from sources that offer adequate protection against viruses and other harmful software. To help you, th e software installation system on the Nokia 9210i Communicator u ses digital signat ures and certificates on software pack ages. See page 222. If you are installing software w ithout a digital signature or a certificate, the communicator warns you of the risks of installing s oftware, as shown in figure 93. Linda1.book Page 225 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
226 Extras Tip: If you have installed PC Suite f or Nokia 9210i Communicator on your PC and the communicator is connected to your PC, you can also install software by double-clicking a file ending with .sis stored on your PC. Figure 93 If you see this warning message, only continue installation if you are absolutely sure of the origin and contents of the software package. The installation procedure also checks the integrity of the package to be installed. Once these checks are complete, the application is installed on your communicator. During the installation process, you are shown information about the checks being carried ou t on the package. You are also given options whether to continue with or cancel the installation. To remove software 1 To remove an installed software pa ckage from your commu nicator, select the software pa ckage you wa nt to remove from th e Installed software page and press Re move . 2 A dialog appears asking for your confirmation. Press OK to remove the software. Note: Some software packa ges update existing s oftware and cannot be remo ved. IMPO RTA NT: If you remove software, you can only re-install it by having th e original software package file, or by restoring a full back-up th at contains the r emoved software package. If you remove a softwar e Linda1.book Page 226 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
227 Extras package, you may no longer be able to open documents cr eated with that software. If an another software package depends on the software package that y ou removed, the other software package m ay stop working. R efer to the documentation of the installed software package for details. Installation log To view the list of s of tware installations an d removals that have taken place, pr e ss the Menu key and go to the Install log page. This list shows what software has be en installed and removed, and when that happened. If you encoun ter problems with the device after in stalling a software package, you can use this list to f ind out which software package may be th e cause of the problem. The in formation on this list may also help to pinpoint problems that a re caused by software packages that are incompatible with each other. Installation setting s On the Prefer ences page, you can select options related to software installation. You can define the f ollowing: Delete inst allation f ile after us e - If set to Yes , the software package installation file (that ends in .sis ) will be delete d from the device after installation. If you download software packages using the WWW browser, this may be helpful in reducing the amount of required storage space. Note: If you want to store the software package file for possible re-installation later on, either set this to No or make sure that you h ave a copy of the software package file stor ed on your PC or on a CD-ROM. Linda1.book Page 227 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
228 Extras Default installat ion languag e - You can set the defa ult installation language to the language that your Nokia 9210i Communicator h as. If the s oftware package contains several different language versions of the software, the language version specified here will be installed. Sort in stalled s oftware by - To sort the list of installed software packages, select one of the options Name , Type , or Size . In ter ne t a cc ess Here you are able to edit, create n ew, and delete existing Internet access points. For details on h ow this is don e, see the Internet section of the Settings ch ecklist delivered in your sales pa ckage. For details on IAPs, see â To se t up y o ur Int er net access point â on page 132. About this produ ct Here you can scroll to see copyright information on the Nokia 9 210i Communicato r. Memory Here you can view the amount of free memory for storing data and installing new software. You can scroll and view t he memory consumption of the f ollowing details: Documents , Spreadsheets , Sound s , Faxes , Mails , Short messa ges , Calendar data , Contacts , Images , Installed applicati ons , and Other fi le types . Linda1.book Page 228 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
229 Extras If a memory card is in serted in the communicator, press Me mory card to view the amount of available memory on th e card. Press Devi ce to return to view the communicator memory. If the memory is getting low, you s hould remove some documents. Before removing, you can print, fax, or mail them, or tr ansfer them to a PC or a memory card. Regional settings On these four pages you can define the local time, date, number ing, and currency expression s. Note: For more detailed in formation about Regional settings, see the Nokia 9210i Communicator help. Default folder With the Default folder , y ou can define th e folder which acts as a defa ult saving folder whenever you wish to save a document in you r communicator memory. For details on how to ma nage your files and folder s, see â File manage r â on page 204. Recorder Tip: When y o u ha v e recorded so unds and speech, you can set them as ringing tones. See page 99. The Recorder allows you to recor d telephone conversations and voice m emos. You can also listen to your recordings and other sound files. The maximum length of a recording depends on the available m emory. Linda1.book Page 229 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
230 Extras You can open files that have been stored in the following file formats: .WAV, .AU, and compressed GSM encoded file format. Compression is done implicitly during the recording process. Recorder contains all the controls like Pla y , Stop , Paus e , and Record that are typically found in recording equipment. Press Resume to continue after r ecording or playback has been pau sed. Figure 94 You can change the volume level of the Recorder application by pressing the ⧠and ⨠keys on the Arrows key. You can a lso edit soun d files by using the com mands in the Edit menu. Note: Obey all local laws governing recording of calls. Do not use this feature illegally. Note: For more detailed in formation about Voice recorder, see the Nokia 9210i Communicator help. Linda1.book Page 230 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
231 Extras Imaging The Imaging application acts as a file manager for images. Application folders created for storing images are called albums. Images appear as thumbnail images in albums. A thumbnail image is a small image representing the origin al full size image. Imaging supports a wide range of image form ats, among them JPEG, T IFF, GIF, BMP, MBM, and WB M P. Tip: Press the Menu key and select View > Zoom > Zoom ratio ⦠to zoom by exact figures . You can open all commonly used image files directly for viewing. Press Zo om i n to enlarge the imag e, Zo om ou t to reduce the image on the displa y, and Rot ate to rotate the image. To view image properties, pr ess the Menu key and select File > Properties ⦠You can use the Imaging application for viewing images and handling image albums. You can delete, ren ame, copy, and move im ages from one a lbum to another and create your own favourite albu ms. Tip: If y ou hav e ima ges o r albums in the \Documents\Ph oto gallery\ directory on an i nserted memory card, th ey also will appear in this view. Figure 95 Note: Albums can contain only im ages, not other albums. Linda1.book Page 231 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
232 Extras You can also receive images via IR. For details, see â To receive images via infrared â on page 234. To create a new album 1 Press the Menu key and select File > New album ⦠. A dialog opens. 2 De fine the following: Name : Name of the albu m. 3 To save th e album in the communicator, pr ess Creat e lo cally . To save the album in a m emory card, press Create in mem. card . To view album contents Tip: To open an image located outside the image albums, select File > Open from ⦠. 1 Se lect the album in the Imaging main view and press Open . A thumbnail view of the album con tents opens. 2 You can scroll the contents of the album with the Arrows ke y. To open an image for viewing, press Op en . 3 To vie w the next f rame in the image, if available, press the Men u key and select View > Next frame . To retu rn to the previous image, select Previous fr ame . 4 Press Clos e to re turn to the thumbnail view. To move images to and from album s 1 Se lect the image or images in th e thumbnail view with the A rrows key. Linda1.book Page 232 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
233 Extras Tip: You ca n se lec t several images with the Space key. You can also use the Edit menu co mm ands and the corresponding shortcuts (Ct rl c, Ctr l x, Ctrl v) to move or copy images. 2 Press the Menu ke y and first select Edit > Copy or Cut . 3 Open the target album. 4 Press the Menu ke y and select Edit > Paste . 5 If the target album a lready has an image or images with th e same name, a confirmation note appears asking you if you wish to replac e the existing image. Choose from the following options: Replace - The existing image is rep laced with the im age you are pasting. Replace all - All existing im ages are re placed with the same name. Skip - Skips th e image and con tinues the operation. Cancel - Ca ncels the whole paste operation. Tip: To rename albums or images, s elect File > Rename ⦠., define a name , and press OK. Th e file extension cannot be changed. To create new im ages from o riginals You can choose parts of an opened image, save them as separate images, and reuse them. 1 Open an image. Press the Menu key and select Edit > Selec t im ag e r an ge . The selection frame is now visible on the image. 2 To move the selection frame, us e the Ar r ows key. To change the size of th e selection frame, press down th e Ctrl key and use the Arrows key. 3 To save the fra me as an image, press the Menu key and select File > Save as ⦠. Select Selected range . 4 Select the f older you wish to save in , give a name f or the new image file, and press OK . To resize images 1 Press the Menu ke y and select Tools > Resize ⦠. A dialog opens. Linda1.book Page 233 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
234 Extras 2 Scroll with the Arrows key to select the new size and press Select or press Best fit to f it the image h orizontally to the screen. To receive images via infrared Tip: Large im ages transferred from a digital camera may take too much intern al memor y t o b e view ed . T o sc ale th e siz e o f the transferred im ages do wn to 64 0x48 0 pix els, press the Menu key and select Tools > Use VGA , if t he option is not already selected. Note that all cameras may not support this function. 1 O pen the album wh ere you want to save the received file. 2 Press Images via infrared . A dialog opens. 3 Se lect one of the f ollowing: Receive in album : To receive the image and save it. Receive and mail : To receive the image and send it as an e-mail message. Receive and fax : To receive th e image and send it as a f ax. 4 Press OK . Cell broadcast Tip: Check with your network service pr ovider to see whethe r CBS is available. Cell Broadcast is an application wh ich you use with th e Cell Broadcast Service (CBS) to view the messages and to subscribe to topics of in terest. In areas where CBS is provided, you can receive short messages on various topics such as taxis, weather, service provider service s, and directory enquiries. Linda1.book Page 234 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
235 Extras Figure 96 To start or s top r eceiving CBS messages, in th e m ain view of Cell broadcas t, press Rece pt ion on or Recept ion off . Tip: You ca n se ar c h fo r differ ent t opic s. En ter a name of a topic in the search field. Press Read to read messages and pre ss Next or use th e commands in th e View menu to browse for more messages. To subscribe, scroll to a topic and press Subscribe . A check mark is displayed in the box on the left-hand end of the topic. To u nsubscribe, press Unsubs cr ibe . To add, edit, or remove topics when the reception is off, pr ess the Menu key an d select > Topic > Add topic / Edit topic/ Delete topic(s). Tip: You can quickly mark a topic as a hot t opic by first selecting the topic and then pressing C trl M. If you want to be notified with a dialog displaying a message on a particular topic when a new topic messa ge is received, press the Menu key a nd select Topic > Mark as hot to pic . The hot topic is m arked with an ex clamation mark â !â . To create o r rename top ic lists To create a new list, press the Menu key and select Li st > New blank list ⦠or New list with select ed topics ⦠Linda1.book Page 235 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
236 Extras Tip: You c an so rt t he topics by pressing the Menu key and selecting a sorting command in the Vie w menu. To change the name of the list that is open , press the Menu key and sele ct List > Rename list ⦠Note that the reception must be turned off. To open to pic lists To open a different list, p ress the Menu key and select List > Select to pic list . In different topic lists, you can still subscribe and unsubscribe topics and set them as hot topics. To detect new to pics To add new topics automatically, pres s the Menu key and s elect Tools > Settings ⦠. Define the following: Tip: Create a n ew em pty topic list and s elect the Yes and All options in the settings to receive a complete list of topics available in that area. Add new to pics to list - The options ar e Yes / No . I f yo u se le ct Yes , all new topics are added automatically to your current list of topics. If you select No , you will receive only the me ssages concerning subscribed or hot topics that you already have in your topic list. Languag e - Select th e language of the topics you want to r eceive. Select All to receive topic messages in all languages. Note: You will receive only the messages that are in the language you h ave chosen. To make sure you receive all messages, select All . Linda1.book Page 236 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
237 Extras Fax modem You can use t he communicator as a fax modem with a compatible PC. Your communicator can be connected to a PC via serial cable or by using an infrared connection. Before your PC can r ecognise the communicator as a fax m odem, you need to install a new modem configur ation for your PC. Please r efer to your oper ating system manual for more information. During the installation you may be asked to enter the path to the modem information file. The path on the sa les package CD- ROM is: \ Software for PC \ Pr inter and Modem dr ivers. Advanced users can also find a list of supported AT commands from this path. N ormally there is no need to use these comm ands . Note: Using the communicator as a fax modem requires that data calls are supported by the network operator and that this service is active in your SIM card. To install fax mod em driver usin g cable connection 1 Start Windows. 2 Insert the Nokia 9 210i CD-ROM in to the CD-ROM drive of the computer and locate the modem information file (mdmn9210i.INF). Alternatively, you can find the fi l e on the ww w .foru m.n o ki a. com Web si te . 3 Double-click the Modems icon in th e Windows Control Panel. A dialog open s. If no modem drivers have been installed on the com puter before, continue from step 6. 4 Click the Add button. Linda1.book Page 237 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
238 Extras 5 I n the field What t ype of modem do y ou want to install? se lect Other . Click Next 6 Se lect the option Don â t detect my mo dem; I will sele ct it from a li st 7 Cl ick Have disk... 8 Cl ick Browse and locate the CD-ROM drive with the Nokia 9210i CD-ROM. 9 On the CD-ROM, locate a folder Sof tware for PC/Mod em drivers 10 In the Modem drivers folder, select Mdmn9210i.inf file an d click Op en or OK . Tip: To use H igh Speed connection, your GSM operator must activate High Speed Data Services on your SIM card. 11 In the Install from disk dialog, Click OK . 12 In the Install New Modem dialog, select No kia 921 0 Communi cator (Cable) . If you are using High Speed connection (HSCSD), select a speed higher than 9600 bps and cable connection. Cl ick Next . 13 Select the COM port wh ere the serial cable is connected. Cli ck Next . 14 Cl ick Finish . 15 Remove the CD-ROM f rom the drive. 16 In your communicator, press the Extras application bu tton, select Fax mo dem , and press Open . 17 In the Fax modem application, press Se ttings 18 On the Connection page of the Fax modem settings, define the following: Connectio n type : Cable Transfer rate : 19200 or higher. Make sure that this setting is the same both in your communicator and you r PC. Data bits : 8 Stop bits : 1 Flow contr ol : Software Press Done . Note: Transf er rate is the speed with which the data is transferred between your communicator and PC. Th e best transfer rate for n ormal GSM calls is 1 9200 or higher. For high speed calls, you s hould select 115200. Select the same rate in you r PC application as well. Linda1.book Page 238 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
239 Extras 19 Your communicator is now ready to be used as a f ax modem. Press Acti vat e to activate the Fax modem. Fax modem settings To open Fax modem , press the Extras application button, select Fax modem , and press Open Note that an active PC connection using the fax modem is disconnected af ter 20 minutes if no data is sent or received. However, an active call is not automa tically disconnected. Note: You cannot change fax modem settings if the fax modem is activa ted. To change these settings, m ake sure that fax modem is not active. Open Fax modem and press Settings . A dialog with two pages opens. Define the f ollowing: Conn ect ion page Connection type : Pr ess Change to change this option. Th e options are Infrared an d Cable . If you select Inf ra re d , the rest of the options are automatically set. If you select Cable , define also the followi ng: Transfer rate : The speed with which the dat a is transferred between your communicator and PC. The be st transfer rate for normal GSM calls is 19200. For high speed ca lls, you should s elect 115200. Select the same rate in your PC a pplication as well. Data bit s : Defines how man y bits are used to form a byte. T he default option, 8 , can typically be used. Linda1.book Page 239 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
240 Extras Parity : A parity error-checking procedure. The default option, None , can typically be used. Stop bi ts : Def ines number of stop bits used. The default option, 1 , can typically be used. Flow cont rol : It is recommended to select Sof twa re . This setting needs to be the same in you PC as w ell. Oper a ti n g sy s te m pa ge Windows 200 0 : I f yo u are not us in g Windo ws 20 00, se lect No and press Done . Th e rest of t he options on th e page are dimmed. If you are using Windows 2000, selec t Yes . Define also the f ollowing information about the connection. The information needed is provided by the host that you are about to call. If you do not have this information try to use the default options. Connect ion type : The options are Normal / H igh speed . Normal is the defa ult. Rem ot e mod em t ype : The options are Anal og / ISDN V.110 / ISDN V .120 . Analog is the default. Max. connection s peed : T he default in an analog connection is Auto mat ic . Note: This configuration n eeds to be rede fined if you use a different kind of modem. If th e connection settings are incorrect, the call is n ot created. To activate or disable the fax modem In the Fax modem main view, pr ess Activ ate or Disab le . Linda1.book Page 240 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
241 Troubleshooting 12. Troubleshooting If you have problems with your communicator, Club Nokia Careline answers questions and offers instructions over the phone. For mor e information on the Club Nokia Careline see the Accessories section of the Getting Started G uide and Nokia Careline Web page. You can a lso visit Forum Nokia at www.forum.nokia.com for information and support material related to the communicator. 1. Phone o r communicato r interface d oes not st art; both dis plays remain blank Make sure that the ba ttery is properly installed and char ged. Make sure that the contacts on the battery an d the desktop stand are clean. The battery charge may be too low for operation. Check the display and listen for the low battery warning tones. Charge th e battery as described on page 21 . If the NOT CHARGING message is displayed, the charging is suspended. Temperature extremes will affect the ability of your battery to charge: allow it to cool down or warm up first. Wait for a while, disconnect the charger, connect i t again and retry. If charging still f ails, contact your local Nokia dealer. 2. Commu nic ator i nterf ace does no t start; cov er phone d ispla y is flashing The communicator memory is corrupted. Contact your local Nokia dealer . 3. The bat tery is att ached, b ut the pho ne does not wo rk Try to switch on th e phone by pressing the key for several seconds. Linda1.book Page 241 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
242 Troubleshooting Check that the flight mode is not active. For more information see â Flight profile â on page 91. Restart the c ommunicator by removing t he battery, waiting thirty s econds, and replacing it again. Try charging the communicator . If you see the battery level indicator on the phone but the phone does not work, con tact your loca l Nokia dealer. Check the signal strength indicator: you might be outside the network service area. Make sure that the telephone service is ac tivated for your SIM car d. Check if there is an error mes sage on the display after switching on. If so, con tact your local dealer. Check that the SIM card is correctly installed, see the Getting Started Guide. 4. Comm unicato r interf ace is no t ac tivat ed or app li cations st op re spond ing Close the cover and open it again. If this does not help, close the cov e r and remove the battery. Replace the battery and open the cover again. Wait while the communicator performs a self-test and starts. Try charging the com municator. If the device does not respond even after severa l restarts (disconnect the charger, take battery out, wait for 30 seconds, and replace the battery), remove all temporary files a s follows: 1 Disconnect the charger and remove the battery to restart th e commu nicat or. 2 Insert the battery and open the cover. 3 When you see the Nokia 9210i Communicator Welcome screen, immediately press and hold down the Ctrl Shift I ke ys. The I key should be pressed last. Linda1.book Page 242 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
243 Troubleshooting 4 Temporary files are deleted. This empties the ca che, removes cookies, resets plug-in registrations and r esets the settings you have made in some of the applications including all Internet and profile settings, Desk shortcuts and display settings. All other applications and files stay intact. If the procedures described above do not help, as a last r esort before contacting your local dealer you can try formatting the internal memory of the communicator. Note th at formatt ing the m emo ry re move s all items exc ept th e standar d applic ation s that hav e been factor y pre-inst all ed in ROM memo ry! If you have made a full backup of the contents of you r communicator with PC Suite, you can use PC Suite to format the memory before rest oring the backed-up files to your communicator. For more inform ation, see PC Suite Guide on the sales package CD-ROM. If you have made a backu p to a memory card, see â To back up a nd restore data to and from a m emory ca rd â on pa ge 209. When you format the internal memory, all the settings, documents and other data in the internal memory th at you have cr eated or modified will be permanently destroyed. To format the internal memory, pr oceed as follows: Tip: If you have to give away your Com municator, it is a good idea to format the device and restore th e factory-installed software from the CD-R OM. Thi s way the next user will be able to start with a fresh device. 1 Disconnect the charger and remove the battery to restart the communicator. 2 Insert the batter y and open the cover. 3 When you see the Nokia 9210i C ommunicator Welcome screen, immediately press and hold down the Ctrl Shift F keys. The F key should be pressed la st. 4 Formatting sta rts. It tak es at least two m inutes to com plete. 5 With Windows Explorer, locate the All_ Nokia_9210_ data.sis installation package in the Pr einsta lled in device folder of th e sales package CD-ROM and install it. Linda1.book Page 243 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
244 Troubleshooting 5. Ca nnot make or receiv e call s Check to see if you have â Flightâ profile turned on. When this profile is a ctive you cannot make or receive calls. Make sure that the p hone is not off. Close the cover and switch on the phone. If you get the message I NVALID SIM CARD, your SI M card cannot be used in the communicator. Contact you dealer or network service pr ovider. Check the status of your call barrings and diverts, see â N etwork serv ices settings â on page 82. The phone may be busy: data or fax is being sent or received, or the communicator is being used as a fax modem. Wait f or the data/fax transmission to en d, or drop the call by pressing the key on the phone keypad. 6. Call qualit y is poor Your location may not allow better call quality. This problem may occur especially in a moving car or tr ain. Move to a location where the radio signal reception is better. See â GSM data transmis sion â on page 8. Reception is usually bette r above ground level, outdoors and wh ile stationary. Sometimes even moving the communicator slightly will improve reception. You can also try using the communicator i n the handsfree mode, see page 7 0. Remember to turn the antenna to an upright position. 7. C a nno t div ert or ba r vo ice , f a x or data c all s You may have not subscr ibed to the service in question, or it is n ot supported by the ne twork , or the messa ge c entre numb er and the numbe r t o whi ch y ou wan t to divert your calls may be m issing or incorrect. Linda1.book Page 244 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
245 Troubleshooting Fax diverts and barrings a re defined in Tools > Account settin gs ⦠in the Messaging application. Data barring is s et in the Data call barring in Control pan el. Data calls canno t be d ive rte d . 8. Cannot select a contact If you cannot select a contact in the Telephone, Fax, SMS or Mail directory, the contact car d does not h ave a telephone number, fax number, wireless phone number or an e- mail address. Add the missing in formation to the contact card in the Contacts application. 9. Cannot send or re ceiv e faxes, sho rt messag es or ma il Make sure that you have subscribed to these network services. The phone m ay be off, or th e communicator is low on memory. The number for mat you use may be in valid, or the called number has n ot answered within 10 tries, or you are calling to a wrong phone number. The phone may be busy: data or fax is being sent or received, the communicator is being used as a fax modem. Wait for the data/fax transmission to end, or drop the call by pressing the key on the ph one keypad. Fax/data barrings or fax diverts m ay be active. You can define th e Fax barrings/ diverts in T ools > Account set tings ⦠in Messagi ng . Fax reception: Your SIM card may not have a fax number. Mail reception: You have n ot subscribed to a remote mailbox serv ice, or the mail service you a re using uses an other mail protocol than what you have selected. (Check with your I nternet Service P rovider whether you should be using POP3 or IMAP4.) If you are using secure connections, your remote mailbox service also has to support secure connections. Th ere may also be a transient problem with the Linda1.book Page 245 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
246 Troubleshooting remote mailbox service, or the Internet servers between the com municator and the remote mailbox. Try again after a couple of minutes, and then contact your Internet Service Provider. Mail sending: Yo u have not subscribed to a remote mailbox service, or the m ail server delivering your mail does n ot comply with the SM TP protocol. If you are using secure connections, your r emote mailbox service also has to support secure connections. There may a lso be a transient problem with the remote mailbox service, or th e Internet servers be tween the commu nicator and the remote mailbox. Try again after a cou ple of minutes, an d then contact your Inter net Service Provider. I f you are using the Upon request sending option, mail must be sent in th e Document ou tbox, se e â Ou tboxâ on page 161. If you r eceive service provider error messages when conn ecting to you r remote mailbox, contact your remote ma ilbox service provider. Your remote mai lbox may contain corrupted m ail messages or the mail server settings may be in correct. If you have problems sending mail with attachments, select Cancel sending and try again . If this does not help, tr y the key combination Shift-Tab-right arrow. Some mail attachments can take up a significant amount of mem ory and therefore freeing some mem ory by deleting somethin g from your communicator me mory might also help. Short message sending: You have not subscribed to the Short Mess age Service or the message centre n umber is missing or incorrect. Contact your service pr ovider. The reason for failure m ay also depend on the network: the n etwork does not support SMS, fax, o r data/mail; the networ k is out of order or busy; the signal strength is not a dequate for sending. Linda1.book Page 246 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
247 Troubleshooting 10. Phon e d ispl a y shows â Me ssage to o long â wh en I try to op en a rece ived short mes sage. The received message is over 1377 characters long. Use the Messaging applica tion to read it. 11. Cannot est abl is h an Int er net con necti on If you are trying to connect to the I nternet (in order to use WWW or to receive or send mail), but the operation does not succeed, you can use the following checklist to find out whe re the problem might be located: 1 Is the data call active wh en you are trying to connect? L ook at the data call indicator on the phone side. If the data call is d ropped after a few seconds after starting to connect, check the ph one number in the Internet Access settings. See page 132 for details. If the phone number is correct, the reason may be in poor network conditions, or a congested GSM network. Als o check th e Data ca ll settings in the In ternet Access settings (connection type, data call type, and maximum connection speed). See page 136 for details. Contact your network serv ice provider if you have problems with data call establishment, and your Internet Ser vice Provider to find out the correct remote modem type. If you are roaming outside your home network, you might want to try the ba sic GSM data call s ettings described in a tip on page 137. 2 If the data call is active, but you cannot receive or send m ail, try to use th e WWW browser to connect to your I nternet Service Pr ovider â s W WW pages. If that works, the problem is most likely in the ma il settings or the remote mailbox service. For more information, see Ma il sending troubleshooting on page 2 45 and Mail settings on page 170. Linda1.book Page 247 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
248 Troubleshooting 3 If the data call is active, but you can not download WWW pages with the WWW browser, make note of the most recent status indication displayed to you in the title bar of the W WW browser. ⢠If t he s tatus indication reads Waiting for reply from host or L ooking up hos t address , it is likely that the WWW address (URL) has been mistyped, or there is a problem with proxy server settings in the Internet Access Point or the proxy server itself , or there is a tr ansient problem with the WWW server or Internet connections be tween the W WW serve r and you r Intern et Service Provider. Check the pr oxy server settings explained on page 135. Disconnect the call, wait for a couple of m inutes, and retry the connection. If the connection still does not su cceed, contact your Internet Ser vice Provider. ⢠If the status indication reads Logging in to network or Connected , the problem is most likely in your Internet Access Point settings (See page 132 for details) or your Internet Serv ice Provider â s dial-up system, or you might need a script in order to con nect to your Interne t Service Provider . Disconnect the data call, wait for a couple of minutes, and retry the connection. If the connection still does not succeed, contact your Internet Ser vice Provider. 4 If your data call is unexpectedly dropped, this may be a case of poor network conditions, congestion in the ph one network, or a too low inactivity period setting. If you are unable to connect to th e Internet after repeated attempts, and have successfully used your Inte rnet connection previously, or get error messages when starting the WWW browser, rem ove and replace the battery and try again. 12. Infrared problems The communicator may be connected to a PC, laptop, pr inter, digital camera, wireless phone or anothe r communicator via the infrared connection. Linda1.book Page 248 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
249 Troubleshooting If you are u sing the PC Suite fo r Nokia 9210i Commun icator program on you r PC, or if you wan t to receive data from another communicator or a digita l camera, you must activate the Infrared connection on your communicator before the connection is made. See PC Suite Guide in the sales package CD- ROM and â To activate the infrared connection â on page 35 of thi s guide. The PC to which you want to establish th e connection must have an IrDA compatible infrared port; installed and activ ated IrDA drivers; a nd Microsoft Windows 95/98/98SE/Me. For more inform ation on IrDA driver s and their use in Windows, contact M icrosoft. If you have an IBM Thinkpad laptop with Win dows 98 SE installed, you may encounter problems w ith infrared connections. If problems occur, proceed as follows: 1 Click the Windows Start button and sele ct Settings > Control Panel . 2 In the Windows 98 Control Panel, ope n System . 3 In th e Sy stem properties dialog, sel ect the Device Manager tab. 4 Under Network A dapters , sel e ct IBM Thinkpad Fast Infrared Por t and c lick the Proper ties button. IBM Thinkpad Fast Infr ared Port Prop erties dialog opens. 5 Click the Driver tab and then click the Update Driver... button. Update Device Driver Wizard starts . 6 Click Next . 7 Select the Install one of the other dr ivers option and click the View List... button. 8 Infrared PnP Se rial Port has been f ound. Click OK . 9 Click Next . 10 Infrared PnP Serial Port is ready to be installed. C lick Next . 11 The new driver has been installed. Click Finish . 12 The computer must be restarted before the new driver can be taken to us e. Click Yes to restart the computer. Linda1.book Page 249 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
250 Troubleshooting 13. P rintin g pr oble ms If you are usin g the infrared connection, the infrared port of the printer must be compatible to the IrDA standard. See â To print â on page 31. If you fail to establish an infrared connection, transfer th e file to a PC and use the PC to print the docu ment. Alternatively, you can fax the document to th e nearest fax machin e. See â To write and send a new fax â on page 166. 14. PC conne ctivity prob lems Make sure that PC Su ite for Nokia 9210i C ommunicator is installed and running on your PC. See th e PC Suite Guide for m ore information. If you use a cable connection, ch eck that the cable is pr operly attached at both ends. If you use an i nfrared connection, ch eck that the IR ports are facing ea ch other and the route betwee n the ports is unobstructed. Check that you are using the correct serial port (COM) on your PC. For all other PC Suite problem s, see the PC Suite Guide and the PC Suite on line help â Troubleshootingâ section. 15. Fax modem problems When you use the communicat or as a fax modem , ma ke sure tha t the communicator and the PC use the same baud rate. If you use the infra r ed connection, the baud rate is set automatically. If you u se the cable connection, set the baud rate in the Fax modem settings. For the PC, the baud rate is set in the connectivity software of the PC. Linda1.book Page 250 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
251 Troubleshooting If you use the cable connection, ful ly compatible operation wi th all PC fax and terminal software cannot be guaranteed. Consult your dealer. If you have p roblems with your PC fax s oftware, use the infrar ed connection. If you have problem s establishing a data connection with the remote modem , try fixing the data transmission rate by using an AT command. Common A T commands based on the ETSI 07.07 standard and supported by the Nokia 9210i Communicator are listed in a file on the CD-ROM supplied with the communicator. You can find this file by clicking â AT comma nds â in â PC software section â on the CD-ROM. For information on how to use the AT commands and fax modem drivers, consult the documentation of the telecommunication or fax application that you use on your PC. 16. Acc ess co de pr oble ms The default lock code for Nokia 92 10i Communicator is 12345 . If you forget o r lose the lock code contact your commun icator dealer. If you forge t or lose a PIN o r PUK code, or if you have not recei ved such a code, contact your network service provider. For information about Internet passwords, contact your Internet service provider. 17. Low on memo ry Your communicator can r un out of memory just like a PC. There may be several reas ons f or that: ⢠You have too many applications running. Press the Menu key and check the lef t most menu for tasklist of open applications. Choose the application that doe s not have to be open and close it. Linda1.book Page 251 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
252 Troubleshooting ⢠You have received a lot of mail or you have saved large images or other items that use a lot of memory. T o free u p communicator memory, r emove unnecessary dat a, move large items to a memory ca rd or transfer them to your PC, if possible. See â T o avoid low memory â on page 164 and PC Suite Guide for details. ⢠You have tried to download a large WWW page. See item 1 9 on this troubleshooting list. You can check the memory usage in the Memory application of Control pane l. See â Memory â on page 2 28. 18. Cannot c onnect to the Inter n et when ro aming You are able to connect to the In ternet when in your h ome country or region. Y ou are now roaming and your Internet con nection does not wo rk. Try using the settings of a basic GSM data connection. Also check that the phone number of your Internet Access Point is in international format. See â Data call page â on page 136. 19. â Memory â error note seen when downloading very large WWW pages Some WWW pages are extremely large because they contain many large images or tables. These types of pages consume memory in the communicator very quickly. If, when dow nloading WWW pages, you see an error note abou t memory, the f irst action is to close any other applications that you ma y have opened after starting the WW W browser. To do that, pres s the M enu key a nd check the le ftmost menu for tasklist of open applications. Sel ect and close each item. If you still experience p roblems, turn off the setting wh ich allows loading images automatically. One last action is to exit the WWW browser application, start it again, and try to download the page o nce more without images. Linda1.book Page 252 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
253 Troubleshooting Note: Removing data files or installing applications does not have effect on the memory available to the WWW browser. Linda1.book Page 253 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
254 Troubleshooting Linda1.book Page 254 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
255 CARE AND MAINTENANCE 13. CARE AND MAINTENANCE Your Nokia 9210i Communicator i s a product of supe rior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The suggestions below will help you to fulfil any warranty obligations and to enjoy this product for m any years. ⢠Keep the co mmunicat or and all its parts and accessories out of the reach of small children. ⢠Keep the co mmunicator dry. Precipitation, h umidity and all types of liqu ids or moisture can contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. ⢠Do not use or store the communica tor in dusty, dirty areas. Its moving parts can be damaged. ⢠Do not store the commun icator in hot area s. High temperatures can shorten the life of electronic devices, dama ge batteries, and war p or melt certain plastics. ⢠Do not store the commu nicator in cold areas. When it warms up (to its normal temperature), moisture can f orm inside, which may damage electronic circuit boards. ⢠Do not attempt to open the communicator . Non-expert handling may damage it. Linda1.book Page 255 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
256 CARE AND MAINTENANCE ⢠Do not drop, knock or shake the communicator . Rough handling can break internal circu it boards . Dropping the prod uct may break the co lour display, whic h is frag il e. ⢠Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong detergents to clean the communicator . ⢠Do not paint the communicator . Paint can clog the moving parts and prevent proper opera tion. ⢠Use on ly the supplied or an approved r eplacement antenna. Unauthorised antennas, modifications or attachm ents could damage the communicator and may violate regulations gover ning radio devices. All of the above su ggestion s apply equally to y our communicator , battery, charger or any accessory. If any of th em is not work ing properly, take it to your nearest qualified service facility. T he personnel there will assist you and, if necessary, arra nge fo r se rvic e. Linda1.book Page 256 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
257 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION 14. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION Traffic Safety Do not use a communicator while driving a vehicle. Always secure the phone in its holder; do not place the phone on the passenger seat or where it can br eak loose in a collision or sudden stop. Rememb er road s afety alw ays com es f irst! Operating environment Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area and always switch off the phone of your communicator whenever it is forbidden to use it, or when it may cause interf er ence or da nger . Use the phon e only in its norm al operating positions. To mainta in compliance w ith radio frequency expo sure guid elines, always use Nokia approved accessories. Place the communicator in an appro ved carrying case or belt cl ip when carrying the communicator while the phone is on. Parts of the ph one are magnetic. Metallic materials may be attracted to the phone, and persons with a hearing aid sh ould not hold the ph one to the ear with the hearing aid. Always secure the phone in its h olde r, because metallic materials m ay be attracted by the earpiece . Do not place credit cards or other magnetic storage media near the ph one, because information stored on th em may be erase d. Linda1.book Page 257 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
258 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION Electronic devices Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from r adio frequency (RF) signals. However, certain e lectronic equipment m ay not be shielded against the RF signals from y o ur co mmunicat or . Pace make rs. Pacemaker manufacturers recommend that a min imum separation of 20 cm (6 inch es) be maintained between a hand-held wireless phone and a pacemaker to avoid potential inter ference with the pacem aker. These recommendations are consistent with the i ndependent research by and recommendations of W ireless Technology Research. Pers ons with pacemakers: ⢠Should always keep the phone more than 20 cm (6 inches) from their pacemaker when th e phone is switched on ; ⢠Should not carry the phone in a br east pocket; ⢠Should use the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimise the potential for interferen ce. ⢠If you have any reason to suspect that interference is taking place, switch off your commun icator immediately. Hear in g a ids . Some digital wireless phones may interfere with some h earing aids. In the event of s uch inter ference, you may wa nt to consu lt your serv ice provider. Other medical devices. Operation of any radio transmitting equipment, including communicators , may int erfere with the functionality of inadequ ately protected medical devices. Consult a ph ysician or the manufacturer of the medical device to determine if they a re adequately shielded from external RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch off the phone of your communicator in health care Linda1.book Page 258 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
259 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION facilities when any regulations pos ted in these ar eas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy. Vehicles. RF signals may affect improperly installed or in adequately shielded electronic systems in motor veh icles (e.g. electronic f uel injection systems, electronic anti-skid (an ti-lock) br akin g systems, electronic s peed control systems, air bag systems). Check with the manufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle. You should a lso consult th e manu facturer of any equipment th at has be en added to your vehicle. Posted faci litie s. Switch off the phone of your communica tor i n any facility where posted notices so require. Potentially explosive atmospheres Switch off the phone of your communicator when in any a rea with a potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Users are advised to switch off the phone when at a r efuelling point (service station). Users are reminded of the ne ed to observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots (fuel storage and distribution areas), chemical plants or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often but not always clearly marked. They include below deck on boats; chemical transfer or storage f acilities; vehicles using liquifi ed petroleum gas (such as propane or butane); areas where the air contains chemica ls or par ticles, su ch as grain, dust or m etal powders; and an y other area where you would nor mally be advised to turn of f your vehicle e ngine. Linda1.book Page 259 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
260 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION Vehicles Only qualified personnel s hould service the communicator , or install the communicato r in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dange rous and may invalidate any warranty which may apply to the unit. Check regularly that all wireless phone equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases or explosive materials in the same compartment as the communicato r , its parts or accessories. For vehicles equipped with an air ba g, remember that an air bag inflates with great force. Do not place objects, including both installed or portable wireless equipment in the area over th e air bag or in th e air bag deployment area. If in-vehicle w ireless equipment is improperly installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury cou ld resu lt . Using the phone of your communicator while in th e air is prohibited. Sw itch off the phone of your co mmunicator before boarding an aircraft. The use of wir eless telephones in an aircraft may be da ngerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the wireless telephone n etwork and may be illegal. FCC regulations prohibit using your phone whil e in the air. Switch off your phone before boarding an aircraft. T he use of wir eless telephones in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraf t, disrupt the wireless telephone network and may be i llegal. Failure to observe these instructions may lead to suspen sion or denial of telephone services to the of fender, or l egal action or both. Linda1.book Page 260 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
261 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION Emergency calls Impor tant: The Nok i a 9210i Communicato r, like any wireless phone, op erates using radio signals, wireless and landline networks as well as user-programmed functions. Because of this, connections in all conditions can no t b e guar ant ee d. Therefore you should never rely solely upon any wirele ss phone for essential communications (e.g. medical emergen cies). Emergency calls may n ot be possible on al l wireless phone ne tworks or when certain network services and/or phone featu res are in use. Check with local service providers. To make a n emer ge nc y call : . 1 I f the de vice cove r is open, close it. 2 If the phone is not on, switch it on. Check for adequate signal strength. Some networks may require that a vali d SIM card is properly in serted in the communicator . 3 Press as many times as nee ded (e.g. to ex it a call, to exit a menu, etc.) to clear the display and ready the phone for calls. 4 Key in the e mergency number for your pr esent location (e.g. 91 1, 112 or other official emerge ncy number). Emergency numbers vary by location. 5 Press th e key . If cer tain fe atu res are in use , you may f irst need to turn th ose fea tures off befo re you can make a n emergency call. Consult this guide and your local cellu lar service provider. When making an emergency call, remember to give all the necessary information as accurately as possible. Remember that your communicator may be the on ly means of communicat i on at the scene of an accident - do not cut off the call until given permission to do so. Linda1.book Page 261 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
262 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION Important power supply information WARNING: Th is appar a tus is in te nde d fo r use w hen suppl i ed with po wer from a Lithiu m-io n bat ter y and c h arger s ACP-1 2, AC P-9 E , ACP-9X and ACP-9A. Other usage will invalidate a ny approval given to thi s appar atus and may be dan gerou s . Use only batter ies, cha rg ers a nd acc es sor ies a ppr oved by the communicator manufacturer for use with this part icul ar communicator model. The use of any other types will invalidate any app roval or warranty a pplying to the comm unicat or, a nd may be dan gerou s. For avai labi lity of approved accessories, please check with y our dealer.When you disconnect the power cord of any accessory, grasp and pull the plug , not th e c ord. Certification information (SAR) THIS MODEL PHONE MEETS REQ UIREMENTS FOR EXPOSURE TO RA DIO WAVES Your mobile phone is a radio transm itter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the limits for exposure t o radio frequency (RF) recommended by international guidelin es (ICNIRP). These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines and establish permitted leve ls of RF energy f or the general population. Th e guidelines we re developed by independent scientific Linda1.book Page 262 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
263 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION organisations through periodic a nd thorough evaluation of sc ientific studies. The guidelines include a substantial saf ety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and h ealth. The exposure standard for mobile phones employs a u nit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit stated in the international guidelines is 2. 0 W/kg*. Tests for SAR are con ducted using standard op erating positions with the phone transmitting at its hig hest certified power level in all tested frequency ban ds. Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR of the phone while ope rating can be wel l below the maximum value. This is because the phone is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the networ k. In general, the closer you are to a base station, the lower the pow er output of the phone. The highest SAR value for the phone o f Nokia 9210i Communicator when tes ted for use at th e ear is 0.34 W/kg. While th ere may be differe nces be tween the SA R levels of various phones and at various positions, they all meet the r elevant international guidelines for RF exposure. * The SAR limit for mobile phones used by the public is 2. 0 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over ten gr ams of body tissue. The guidelines incorporate a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for th e public and to acc ount for any variations in m easurements. SAR values may vary de pending on national r eporting requirements and the network band. For SA R information in othe r regions please look under product in formation at www.nokia.com. Linda1.book Page 263 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
264 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION Linda1.book Page 264 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
265 Glossary AT C ommands Operations of a fax modem can be controlled by AT commands. These commands give the advanced user an opportunity to control all the features of the modem. A list of common AT commands based on the ETSI 07.07 standard and supported by the Nokia 9 210i Communicator is available on the CD-ROM included in the sales pa ckage of your com municator. Barri ng pa ssword The barring password is a 4 -digit code needed to chan ge fax an d voice ca ll barrings, see â To restrict voice calls â on page 84. The password is not located in your communicator or SIM card, but in the network. Y ou obtain the password from your network service pr ovider when you subscribe to the call barring service. Cook ies Cookies are little pieces of information, given by the server to you, to store information about your visits to a Web site. When you accept cookie s, the server is able to evaluate your use of the Web site; what you are in terested in, what you wan t to r ead, and so on . DNS Domain Name Service. An Internet service that translates domain names like www.n okia. com int o IP addre sses l ike 1 92.10 0.124 .195 . Domai n name s ar e easier to remembe r but this tr anslation is n eeded beca use the I nternet is based on IP addresses. Linda1.book Page 265 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
266 Domain name and Host name The te rm s â doma i n na me â and â host name â are som etimes, slightly inaccurately, used as synonyms. In a full domain name, e.g. www.forum.nokia.c om, the first par t of the name is th e name of the host, and the following par ts are names of domains to which the h ost belongs. Each host name corresponds to a cer tain IP address. Host names are used because th ey are e asier to rem ember tha n IP addresses. DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Fre que ncy) Tones The system used by touch-tone tel ephones. DTMF assigns a specific frequency, or tone, to eac h key so th at it ca n easily be identified by a microprocessor. DTMF tones allow you to com municate with voice mailboxes, computerised tele phony systems, etc. Gateway IP ad dr ess The address of a WAP gateway. (s ee: WAP gateway). Hotsp ot A World Wide Web (WWW) page may contain hotspots, such as selection lists, text entry fields, and reset/submit buttons, which enable you to input information into the WWW. HSCSD High-Speed Circuit-Switched Data is circuit-switched wireless data transmission for mobile users at data rates up to 43.2 Kbps which is four times faster th an the s tandard data rates of t he Global System for Mobile (GSM) communication standard in 1999. HSCSD is comparable to the speed of many computer modems that communicate with today's fixed telephone network s. Linda1.book Page 266 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
267 HTML (Hyp er text Mark-u p Languag e) A language used to define the appearance an d content of WWW documents. HTTP ( Hype rtext T ransf er Pr otoc ol) A document transfer protocol use d in the WWW. HTTPS HTTP over a secure connection. See Secure Socket Laye r (SSL) Hyperli nk A link on a WWW page that leads to another World Wide Web page or site, or another place on the same page. Hyperlinks are usua lly underlined or shown in a different colour from the surrounding text. Hyper links can also be pictures. IAP (Inte rnet Acc ess Point) The point where your communicator connects to the Internet by way of a data call. An Internet access poin t can be pr ovided, for example, by a commercial Internet ser vice provider (I SP) or by your own company. Images, inline, external Images within a retrieved W WW page are inline im ages. Larger images are often placed as external im ages and h ave to be viewed s eparately. IMAP4 (Int erne t Mai l Acc ess Pr otoc ol, ve rsio n 4) A protocol used for accessing your Remote mailbox. Linda1.book Page 267 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
268 IETF (Interne t Engineer ing Task Fo rce) IETF are responsible f or most of the Internet standardisation. Nokia 9210i Communicator is usin g many IETF spec ifications. In the callback settings, one of the settin gs is s pecified by IETF whereas the other methods are specified by Microsoft. ISDN connections ISDN connections are a way to establish a data call between the Communicator and your I nternet Access Point. ISDN connections ar e digital from end to end and as such offer quicker set-up times and faster data rates than Analog connections. In order to u se ISDN, both you r Internet ser vice provider and network pr ovider have to support them. Java An object-oriented, gen eral purpose progr amming language de veloped by Sun Microsystems and originally designed for handheld devices. Java is language similar to C , bu t simplified to eliminate language features that cause common progr amming errors. Compiled Java code can run on most com puters because Java interpreters and runtime environments exist for m ost oper ating sys tems Lock c ode The lock code is a five- digit code needed to lock and unlock the communicator. The defa ult lock code for Nokia 9 210i Communicator is 1234 5 . The lock code is also required when you change certain settings. Keep it secret and in a safe place, separate f rom the communicator. Linda1.book Page 268 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
269 MCN (Mic r o- C el lu lar N etwo rk) te chn olog y Microcells are used for increasing the capac ity of wireless networks in urban areas. MIME (Multipu rpose Inter net Mail Extens ions) A standard Internet format which permits, f or instance, multiple mail objects in a single message. The mail objects can be, f or example, formatted multifont text messages and non-textual elements, su ch as images and audio frag ments. PIN (Person al I denti ty Number) The PIN code protects your phone from unauthorised use. The PIN code is supplied with the SI M card. If the PIN code r equest is selected, the code is required each tim e the phone is switch ed on. The PIN code must be 4 to 8 digits long. PIN2 Co de The PIN2 code is supplied with some SIM cards . The PIN2 code is required to access certain functions supported by the SIM card. T he length of the PIN2 code is 4 t o 8 digits. Plug- in A plug-in is a dd-on sof tware that can be downloaded from the W WW. The communicator uses plug-ins t o display a document that the WWW application itself cannot show POP3 ( Pos t Off ice P roto col, ve rsio n 3) A common mail protocol that can be u sed for accessing the Remote mailbox . Linda1.book Page 269 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
270 Point -to-p oint p roto col (PP P) A common ne tworking software protocol which enables any computer with a modem and a phone line to connect dire ctly to the Internet. Prot ocol A formal set of rules that govern how data is transferred between two devices. Proxy In some networks, the connection between the WWW and the site you want to connect to is blocked by a firewall. The f irewall protects the network f rom unauthorised external access. A proxy is an intermediary program that enables access through the firewall. A proxy can also serve as a network cache to speed up th e retrieving process. PUK (P IN Unbl ocki ng Key) co de The PUK is an 8-digit code supplied with the SIM card. The code is required when you want to change a disabled PI N code. If you enter an inco rrect PUK code ten times in succession , the SIM card is rejected and you cannot make or receive any calls, except emergency calls. When the SIM is rejected, you will need a new SIM card. You cannot change the PUK code. If you lose the code, contact your network ser vice provider. PUK2 Code The PUK2 code is supplied with some SIM car ds. T he code is required when you want to change a disabled PIN2 c ode. If you enter an incorrect PUK2 code ten times in succession, you will not be able to access the functions Linda1.book Page 270 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
271 which require the PI N2 code. To u se these functions again, you w ill need to obtain a new SIM card f rom your network service provider .You cannot change the PUK2 code. Roaming agreemen t An agreement between two or more networ k service providers to en able the users of one ser vice provider to use the services of oth er service providers. Secure Socket Layer (SSL) A security protocol that prevents eavesdropping, tampering, or message forgery over the Internet. Documents using SSL are identified with the prefix HTTPS. SIM (Subsc ribe r Ide n ti ty Mod ule) ca rd The SIM card contains all the in formation the cellular network needs to identify the netw ork user . The SIM card al so contains security- rel ated information. Simpl e Ma i l Tra ns po rt Pr ot oco l (SMT P) An Internet protocol governin g the transfer of electr onic mail. TCP p ort Identifies the data por t of the destin ation computer. TCP/ IP (T r ans m i ssio n Con tro l Proto col /Int e rne t Pro toco l) A protocol that governs data communication in the Internet and in the TCP/ IP networks . Linda1.book Page 271 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
272 Tem pla te In word processing a template or a style sh eet is a file or form that defines the layout of a docume nt. A template may dete rmine parameters like th e page size , margin s, and fonts. You can use the same s tyle sheet f or man y documents. For e xample, you can de fine one style sheet for pe rsonal letters, another for official letters, and a third for reports. Tra n sp or t Lay er Sec ur ity A security protocol similar to SSL off ering end-to-end encrypted and authenticated connections. The server to which th e connection is established is authenticated by the use of certificates. Data transfers are secured with encryption algorithms. The Nokia 9210i Communicator supports TLS version 1. See also Secure Socket Layer (SSL) URL (Unifo rm Reso urce Lo cator ) Link information required by the WWW to con nect to a given WWW host computer. The URL usually s tarts with http: //. For exampl e, the Nokia Wireless Data Forum home page can be found at h ttp:// www.forum.nokia. com. URLs are ofte n referred to with phrases like â Home page location, â âÂÂSite location, â â can be found at... â Voice Mailbox A voice mailbox is a n etwork service or a personal answering machine where people can leave you v oice messages. WAP Wireless Application Protocol. The transport protocol f or WAP services, used by the WAP browser. Linda1.book Page 272 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
273 WAP access po int An extension to an Internet access point (see: IAP), which pr ovides additional information that the WAP browser needs in order to be ab le to connect to a W AP service. Linda1.book Page 273 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM
274 Linda1.book Page 274 Friday, April 12, 2002 8:31 PM